Professional Documents
Culture Documents
MAHAVAMSA
OR
THE
GREAT
CHRONICLE
OF
CEYLON
i 3Te.tt
THE
THE
MAHAVAMSA
"
OR
GREAT OF
CHRONICLE
CEYLON
TRANSLATED
INTO
ENGLISH
BY
WILHELM
PROFESSOR AT OF ERLANGEN
GEIGER,
INDOGERMANIC UNIVERSITY PHILOLOGY
PH:D.,
ASSISTED
BY
MABEL
LECTURER UNIVERSITY
HAYNES
ON PALI AT LONDON
BODE,
Pn.D.
COLLEGE,
UNDER
THE
PATRONAGE
OF
THE
GOVERNMENT
OF
CEYLON
OLonfcon
PUBLISHED FOR THE
BY
PALI
TEXT
SOCIETY
FROWDE
PRESS,
1912
AMEN
CORNER,
E.C.
M3
:
.
.
OXFORD
..
I'*:
'..'PRINTED
BY
HORACE
HART
A*
" "
THE
UNIVERSITY
PRESS
EDITOR'S
PREFACE
A
came
PEW
words be
are
necessary
;
to
or
explain
two
how
the
present work
be
tioned men-
to
written
and aims of of
one
points should
to achieve.
the regarding1908
it is
hoped
were
Early
a
in
the
Government
Ceylon
and
contemplating
of C. the
new
and
vamsa,
revised
edition
Tumour's
translation L.
Maha-
published in
with
1837
reprintedin
and Branch
a were
Wijesinha's
Asiatic
Mahavamsa the
published in 1889,
the
in of
correspondenceon
the
subject
Ceylon
Royal
and for
Society.
Committee,
The and
Society appointed
recommended
of
me
numerous
as
influential
myself
18,
1908,
Editor the
Europe.1
of the
By
their
letter
July
to
Government
I took
Ceylon requested
opportunity
in of
at the
undertake
that
post.
held
on
Congress again
in best
at
of Orientalists the
at
Copenhagen
the
August,
and
Congress
at
History
my
Religions held
on
September plan
that for
Oxford,
out
to
consult
the
colleagues
revision.
lead
to
the
carrying
method
a
proposed likely
time
was
They
a
agreed
work
to
the within
most
to
to
reasonable
entrust
competent
of the
critical scholar
who
could, if
but work. who
necessary, should I be
consult
members
Ceylon Committee,
all the details of the
mended recom-
himself
to
for responsible
reported
Prof.
Government
who had
to
accordingly, and
just completed
undertake
and asked the
me
that of the
Geiger,
be
text, should
asked
task.
to
approved
arrangements.
the
plan,
Those
make
arrangements
have
resulted
publication of Geiger
the
present volume.
made
a
Professor
own
has
translation
into the
German Text
of his
revised
critical edition
published by
Pali
Society
Society,
See
the
Journal
of
the
Royal
Asiatic
vol.
xxi, no.
61,
pp.
40-42,
70, 86.
4631^,;
vi
Editors
Preface
introduction,appendices,
the revised German the into
in and
1908
and
added
Mrs.
the Bode
necessary has
notes.
;
translated
has then
English
The
as
and
Professor
Geiger
English
translation.
plan
has
been
to
produce
correct
literal
translation, as nearly
of the
statements
an possible
absolutely
the
reproduction
is true and
recorded
in
Chronicle.
It
there
that
is considerable
literarymerit
in the
a
originalpoem,
the
it may
be
possible
"hereafter to attempt
verse,
of
the
literary spirit of
literal
sion ver-
still be
historical
retain Buddhist
some
purposes.
For
it has
in the
translation In
more
a
technical
terms at
the
Order.
word
translation
or
aiming
in
literarymerit
might
involve
has would
English
less
analogous
such
a
meaning
be
used, regardless of
found
'
the in
'
fact the
or
'
that
word
implications not
been
such
original.
monk*.
Thus
a
often
no
rendered
priest
as
But
claims
priestly powers
yield
to
no
are
implied by
as
the
term, and
the other
;
would and
obedience similarities
is and
implied
treatise.
It
discuss
ideas
differences
between There
are
these other
to
three
requirea
the such
same
small kind.
are
technical
terms
is sufficient
here
explain
that
when
terms
left,in the
accurate
are,
present translation,untranslated,
is not
an
translation
considered
possible.
those
like
use
to bhikkhit,already intelligible
likely to
in
this
;
version.
a
But
they
are
shortly
further
explained
The
as
foot-notes be
and
at
list of end
them,
with
will interpretation,
found
the
of the
volume.
expense of the of
Ceylon
of the
Government
has
defrayed
the
this,
it did
previouslypublished translations
Maha-
vamsa.
T.
W.
RHYS
DAVIDS.
TABLE
OF
CONTENTS
CHAPTER
PAGE
INTRODUCTION
ix Ixiv
Abbreviations
I. II. III. IV. V. VI. VII. VIII. The The Visit Race of the of
Tathagata
1
....
Mahasammata
. .
.10
14
The
The The The The The
First Second
Third
Council Council
Council of
19
26 .51
. . .
Coming
Vijaya
of
Consecrating-
Vijaya
.55
.
Consecrating Consecrating
Consecrating
of Panduvasudeva
.
62
.
IX.
X.
The
The The The The
of of
Abhaya
65
...
Pandukabhaya Devanampiyatissa
Countries
68
. .
XI. XII.
XIII. XIV. XV. XVI. XVII. XVIII. XIX. XX. XXI. XXII. XXIII. XXIV. XXV. XXVI. XXVII.
Consecrating
Converting
of
of
77
.
Different
....
82
.
Coming Entry
of into
Mahinda the
88 91
....
The
The The The The
Capital
Acceptance Acceptance
Arrival
of the of the
Mahavihara
. .
97 114
Cetiyapabbata-vihara.
.116
.
of the
Relics
. .
Receiving Coming
Nibbana Five
Birth
of the
Great
Bodhi-tree
. . .
122 .128
136
The
The The The The The
of the of the
Bodhi-tree
Thera
....
Kings
.142
....
of Prince
of the Two
Gamani
. .
.146
Levying
War
Warriors
. .
.155 .164
. .
of the
Brothers
The
The
Victory
of
Dutthagamani
of the of the
.170
.
.
Consecrating Consecrating
Maricavatti-vihara
.
179 182
The
Lohapasada
viii
Table
of
Contents
CHAPTER
PAGB
XXVIII.
The
Obtaining
the
Great
of
the
Wherewithal
to
build
187
Thupa
of the the Great
The
The The The
Beginning Making
of
Thupa
191
. .
Relic-Chamber
. .
198
Enshrining
Entrance
Ten
of the the
Relics
. .
.209
220
.
XXXII. XXXIII.
XXXIV. XXXV. XXXVI. XXXVII.
into
Tusita-Heaven
Kings
Kings
Kings Kings
King
Mahasena
APPENDICES
of Mahasaramata
. . .
A.
B. C.
The
Dynasty
Buddhist of
The
Sects
Campaigns
List
of
Pandukabhaya occurring
Dutthagamani
the
288
.
D.
Pali
Terms
Translation
.
292
INDEXES
A. B.
List List
of
Geographical
and
Topographical
in the
Names
. .
298 299
. .
of Terms
explained
Notes
ADDENDA
300
MAPS
Ancient
Ceylon
To
.....
face
"
page 137
Anuradhapura
INTRODUCTION
"
1.
Literary
questions
concerning
Dipavamsa
and
Mahavamsa.
THE and
LITERARY
QUESTIONS
with
the
Mahavamsa
in
the been
development
of
tradition
Ceylon
and
have
thoroughly
I
two
discussed
that
book there
are
Dipavamsa
demonstrated upon
Mahdvamsa.1
that the
believe
Ceylonese
for
Chronicles should
based
our
older
as
materials
sources
and of
this
reason
claim
attention
history.
R. O. FRANKE He has
Now,
however,
my
taken the
decided
stand
against
older
inferences.2
work appears
as
disputes
of
existence Mah.
of
an
historical former
foundation
to
Dip.
a
and
The of Pali
him the of
to
be
only
botched
and other
compilation
canonical the
quotations
But
from
Jatakas Mah.
works.
the
same
author
the
has
merely copied
and
I his
Dip.
and
the
appliesto
the
in
3
Buddhaghosa
the doubts
historical
introduction
I
to
Samanta-Pasadika.
have
and
however,
hope, by
be The
succeeded FRANKE.
of
combating
objections
raised
defects
the
Dip.,
which the
naturally
form,
neither the
can
nor
should
disputed, concern
Mah. und die
outer
not
contents.
Dip.
und
geschichtliche
Vberlieferung
M. in here the
in
Ceylon,
Leipzig,
Dip.
follow
BERG'S
and
1905.
Translated
English
by E.
COOMARASWAMY,
Mah.,
Colombo,
edition.
Quotations
also
p.
following
pages
the
English
refer
expressly
as
to OLDEN-
remarks,
for
my und
own.
Dtp.,
ed.
Introd.,
1 foil.
(1879),
the
starting-
point
2
Dip.
pp. Noch
Mah.
in
the
Wiener
Zeitschr.
f.
d.
Kunde
des
Morgenl.
21,
3
203
foil.
; 317
foil.
und
einmal
Dip.
that
Mah.
Zeitschr. in the
d. D.
morgenl.
Gesettsch.
63,
p. 540
foil.
I note agrees
OLDENBERG
my
Archivf. Religionswissensch.
FRANKE.
13. p.
614,
with
inferences
against
Introduction
that the author
a
But
of the
contents
to thingimpossible
task This
to
trace
the
sources
which
he
his material.
is made
for possible
by
our
the Mahachronicle
native
commentary
on
which, under
an
the title
was Vamsatthappakasini,
composed by
of my
unknown
author.
results sum briefly up the principal for confirmation in detail, to my labours, referring, I will then here works.
1. In
earlier
Ceylon
there
existed
at
the
close of
the
the
fourth
century A.D., that is, at the time was composed, an older work, a
of history
in which
sort
of
onwards. beginnings legendary The work constituted part of the Atthakatha,i.e. the old the canonical writings of the on commentary-literature minating Buddhists which Buddhaghosa took as a basis for his illuIt was, like the Atthakatha, composed in works. in the Pali Old-Sinhalese prose, probablymingled with verse language.
its 2. This
Atthakathd-Mahdvamsa
as existed,
different monasteries
another.
from one divergedonly slightly for the further development particular importance
which
of the tradition
was
of the of
in
Anuradhapura, upon
for his material.
author
Tika drew
chronicle must
come
down
was
only
it
continued
indeed,to
to the reign of down all appearance, with which of the fourth century A. D.), (beginning
as
well
as
the Mahavamsa
comes
to
an
end.
Of
the DIPAVAMSA
verses.1
same
the presents
MAHAVAMSA
first
clumsy
a
redaction
treatment
1
The
is then
new
of
as
the
the
Dip.
been have language is concerned, the author's sources lies the herein indicated, for numerous by FRANKE verses, ; and merit of his work, although I cannot to his conclusions. consent
So
far
Introduction
*i
employment of the Pali language, by of the liberal use and by a more artistic composition more ship While the authorwork. material contained in the original
by greater skill
in the of the known
5.
as
Dip. is not
on
known
the author
of the Mahavamsa
is
It
Dip.
to
that
BUDDHAGHOSA
bases but
his
historical introduction
the
Samantapasadika; 2
with
statements
he
completesand
could
adds been
to
its information
which
onlyhave
and It
A. D.
drawn
6. The
MAHAVAMSA-TiKA
Mah.
was
Dip.
work.
1250
the original from taken additions, and 1000 not composed till between certainly further
But
there
can
be
no
doubt
that
the Atthakathait to be
reason
Mahavamsa known
laybefore
as
the and
to his readers to
this
his statements
and
its
not
in any
way
altered if I
am
now as
relation between
first work. used
Mah.
That
and
the
Dip.
closer
one
than knew
in my
author
of
the former
it I have
never naturally
disputed.But
to
go much
further and
conscious
sort
and
com-
intentional
rearrangement
of
the
Dip.,as
now
'
of
mentary
of the
our
'
to
that
Mahavamsa refers
in the I have in my
Mah.
indicated the
the
FLEET 4 then translates the well-known passage p. 17. later Culavamsa sahassam dlpetum (38.59) datva vamsamsamadisi in very
fashion: illuminating
fhe
(king
gave
DAVIDS,
H. indicated
Journ.
Roy.
The
As. Soc.
1905, p.
391.
by
OLDENBERG,
in
Z.D.M.G.
Vinaya Pitakam, iii, p. 283 foil. in the 63, p. 549 foil., passages
Mah.
4
T. which
undoubtedly bear
1909, p. 5, n.
1.
this out.
J.R.A.S.
xii
The
to
a
Introduction
hitherto given : interpretation
that this is an
allusion
public recitation of the Dip. must then be abandoned. But this dipika, which was composed by order of Dhatusena, is identified by FLEET with our Mahavamsa. Thus, at the fixed. same time, the date of its origin is more precisely Dhatusena reigned, accordingto calculations which are to be
confirmed further
on, at
the
beginningof
after Christ.
About
composed.
"
2.
The
Trustworthiness
of
the
Ceylon
Chronicles.
After these
should
as now
observations the Ceylonese Chronicles preliminary be judged particularly with respect to their value
SOURCES, and
HISTORICAL
drawn
from
them
should be
broughttogether.
sources
the
appreciated. differently
the furthest in
scepticism. If he
1 that the author of beginningat least admit the POSSIBILITY other before him, he has lately the Dip.had some document or said most positively in the absence of any sources, the last: named the Dipavamsa) must work be considered e. as (i. 2 its own And feet/ fore thereon standingunsupported tottering be conceded historical value can to him to no according FRANKE'S to the Smp. to the Mah. the Dip. nor nor finally of in discussing to which I shall return the history scepticism,
*
the the
ceases councils,
to
be
well founded
as
soon are
as
we
accept
on
thesis that
the
CeyloneseChronicles
based
the
Atthakatha.
and
With
centuries,
that it contains historical recollections is probability and that thesis must, as I have reinforced, correspondingly above,be considered as confirmed. explained
the
KERNS
too
expresses of
himself
with
great caution
He
'
...
on
the
in
historical value
his Manual
indeed
the
says
chronicles
Literarisches Journal
1275, 1. 2.
283.
2
8
of the
1908, p. 1.
Buddhismus,
German
translation
by Jacobi,ii, p.
Introduction
xiii
Dipavamsa, Mahavamsa,
notice
on
and
Sasanavamsa
so
deserve
special
the
account
of their
being
can
for highlyimportant
ecclesiastical history of
admitted
periodfrom
of
is also to
to
taken
as
consideration,
sources.
hardly inclined
trenchant
on
'
accept them
authentic
Chronicles. He says in the plainest Ceylonese in this work in the Asoka) the Ceylonese fashion : e. (i. is absolutely 160 and completely prior to B.C. chronology but as being not merely of doubtful authority rejected, l false in its principal positively propositions/ has since modified his judgement. Perhaps V. A. SMITH
For he says has
at
now:
2
f
verdict is
pronounced by
V. A. SMITH
in
the
These
been least
sometimes
as
demand overestimated,
as
much
do
other records
sounds the
of
popular and
siastical eccle-
tradition.' This
to
less
handle
which critically,
with
necessary
regard to
the
It applies to all historical documents, and I have justified. intention at all of disputing of it. the justice no The judgement pronouncedby RHYS DAVIDS 3 on Dip. and He says : favourable. Mah. sounds much The Ceylon more with the best of the Chronicles would not suffer in comparison later in date,written even Chronicles, though so considerably in England or in France.' also lays stress on He the fact those Chronicles contain no pure history. as is self-evident, that,
'
they represent the traditions of their time and permit us to draw retrospective conclusions as to earlier periods. has defended the Ceylonese Lately H. C. NORMAN* it seems with completejustice to me, against as Chronicles,
But
1
Emperor of India, p. 57. Early History of India (2nd ed.,1908), p. 9. Buddhist India, 1903, p. 274.
Asoka, the Buddhist
A
Defense of
1 foil.
the Chronicles
of
the
Southern
Buddhists, J.R.A.S.
1908, p.
xiv
Introduction
distrust and
undeserved
attention
many
exaggerated scepticism. I
essay
draw
this with
because
it
has naturally
my
own
researches.
as a
If any
we
chronicles
whole, without
it is not easy to understand whence this prepossessions, doubt of their trustworthiness. The presentation widespread taken subject,
as a
of the
whole, may
and and
simple, indeed
marvellous
which
such
can
dry. True, there is no tales. But they appear as be easily omitted. we Besides,
decoration
with
a
always meet
events
with
defined category, namely, when it is a clearly the splendour and majestyof the Buddhist Order. celebrating Mahinda arrives in Ceylon in marvellous fashion, flying the through the air; miraculous phenomena accompany 'Establishment the
can
quite questionof
of
of the
the
Doctrine',the
so
arrival of the
relics,
of this
of planting appear
and Bodhi-tree,
us.
forth.
None
strange to
out
The
ornament
with which
tradition
of the Order and the true faith victory ordinarily enfolds a deepermeaning. The facts in themselves are extrasimple ; but to the pioussentiment of the believer with the them they seemed great; and fantasy glorifies of miracle and legend. lights many-coloured I do not conceal from myself that this judgement of the method that our situation lays itself open to the reproach the tradition all the miraculous is simplyto eliminate from
here decks
the
stories and
But the I think
consider WINDISCH
what
2
over
authentic
Buddhist
around tradition,
relative small
nucleus
all
kinds
of additions have
collected in withdrawn
time, by which
the
events,
into gradually
region
content
V. A.
SMITH, Asoka,
the miracles Such
pp.
45-46
to
'
Most the
been
to
lop off
and
a
accept
of
of the
story
as
not a legend does interpreting of historical criticism.1 to be consistent with sound principles seem 2 Cl. der K. Sachs. Gesellsch. und Buddha Mara (Abhandl.d. phil.-hist. Buddha's Geburt d. Wiss., xv, 4, 1895), (ib., xxvi, 2, 1907),Die Komdes Mahavastu xxvii,14, 1909). (ib., position
authentic
history.
method
Introduction
of the
*v
marvellous.
'But
we
must
not
therefore
pour
away is
the bath.
Here,
of Science
lay bare the grain of truth; not only this,but she must of of the mythicalcrown seek the meaning and significance For the mythical round the nucleus. rays that has gathered
coveringof deep thoughts/ l to begin by removing the We of course, be obliged shall, need take the by no means mythicaladditions. But we
is often the residue
as
current
coin. Here
we
are as
concerned
to examine
how
how
far
pause first at internal evidence then the Ceylonese in that they win approval at once Chronicles will assuredly
at
least
WISHED
to
write
the
truth.
could not
go
of
past time in
is clear from
of
one-sided
tradition. But
or
intend
to deceive hearers
readers.
the
even
the
mortal
foes
of
the
they judge That Aryan race. certainly is true not only of dominating
Elara
which
Guttika
it is
rajjam
as
dhammena
to
karayum.
make
out
systematic
chronologyis
Indeed, whole
such
to
sections
of
the
ecclesiasticaltradition with
India with that of
the
of history
"
The
3.
External
support
of the
Chronicles.
above
certainly are,
of
too
in the
first I
which
estimate
highly.
from
Meanwhile
has
that the
a
Ceylonesetradition
considerable extent
1
external
Buddha
s
testimony.
Geburt,p.
4.
WINDISCH,
xvi
Introduction
as
1. First
to the LIST
OF
INDIAN
KINGS and
BEFORE
ASOKA/
the statements
concerningBimbisara
agree
of the Buddha
and,
in
respectof
the
names,
with
tradition. The
not
names
this,however, does
can
affect the
:
actual agreement.
Nandas
as
There
be
no
doubt of
that
nine
well
as
the two
forerunners
Asoka
Candaguttaand Bindusara,were
Here in the number also, agrees
not
historical altogether
personages.
of years of
Candagutta's
the
with completely
A.
historical.
counsellor
Besides
brahman
the Canakka
In
of
(Skt.Canakya)
is known
Chronicles.
statements
differ from
in
tradition
Ceylonese
is,
The
CEYLON
tradition of the
of
work
of
Mahinda,
SMITH
son
Asoka, and
his
Samghamitta.
mentions
V. A.
'a
to relating
in the
Chronicles
tissue of he
himself
Ceylon, as
twice explains,
Rock-Edict XIII, among : in the Inscriptions and in he despatched to which missionaries, he those in which provides for among Since these Edicts belongto the medicines.4
the countries
Rock-Edict distribution
II,
of
thirteenth year
to
" 9.
pp. 115-118. also Cf. also Asoka, p. 95. tion considers the tradi-
a
3
p. 45.
OLDENBERG
(ibid., p. 46)
pure the
invention. translations
in V. A. SMITH'S
=
Cf.
The expression cikisaka( pp. 115-116. SENART which translates remedes, is rendered
Z.D.M.G.
by
BUHLER
(see
Introduction
Tinnevelli district at the southern the river
of India,where extremity
Tamraparm
But,
to
at the
same
time, if Tambapanni
the of authenticity
mean
Ceylon
in the
Dip.
and
Mah.
is not
affected
ESSENTIAL
points.
us
Let
are
look at the
contents positive
of the
as
tradition. the
We
certain of:
(1)
the
name
Mahinda
apostleof
Here the Ceylon. Nor is that disputed by V. A. SMITH. narrative finds gratifying ese Ceylon support from Hiuenthe man as by name thsang2 who mentions Mahendra expressly the true doctrine was spread abroad in the kingdom by whom of Simhala. It is certain : (2)that this Mahendra was a near call him the relative of king Asoka. The Chinese pilgrims brother 3 of this latter, the CeylonChronicles call him younger
his
be
son.
Here
we
have
it would Chinese
But
at what
result do the
we
arrive if mention of
we
Inscriptions? Simply and evident, namely,that before Mahinda relations continental India and Ceylon and efforts were the Buddhist doctrine to Ceylon.
But We
can
with
Mahinda
understand
to a successful end. this process comes therefore that all the interest became concentrated
in
in
1
wrought together fashion dramatic that which was a tinuous thing of slow condevelopment. I consider that this would alwaysand all circumstances have been the critical judgment on the
Imp.
Gazetteer
that
tradition
J.R.A.S.
8
of India, 1310, n. 4.
sur
s.v.
Cf.
on
this
subject HULTSZCH,
HiouenWestern
les
contrees
occidentales,par
Records the
ihsang, ii, p.
T. WATTERS,
a
BEAL,
Yuan
World, transl.
Besides
Record of
of Hiuen-thsang,ii,pp. by
Fa-hian
246-247
Chwang,
Hiuen-thsang we
of Buddhistic Asoka, who
allusion
have
mention
(see LEGGE,
brother
liisname
or
to the
Ceylon.
Introduction
*ix
Chronicles as to the conversion of Ceylon. reportsof our in essential respects, holds good,but it is a question The fact, of puttingit in the right light. mission was hint that Mahinda's a Besides, precededby in Dip.and Mah., similar missions to Ceylon is to be found even when they relate that Asoka, sending to Devanampiyatissa, with presents for his second
him
to adhere to the doctrine
consecration
as
king, exhorted
be immediately of
of the Buddha.1
cannot
on Certainly
connected with
to
Ceylon
be found the
not
in the
even that,
from
was
time.
3. The
HISTORY
OF
THE
MISSIONS
as
Dip. and
was
Mah.2
receives most
confirmation striking
inscriptions
found
:
discovered. On
in
inscription of the pious man (relics) jhima'. MajOn the outer lid is Sapurisa(sa)Kasapagotasa of the piousman Hemavatacariyasa' (relics) Kassapagotta of the Kassapa clan), the teacher of the Himalaya'.3 e. (i. in the Mah. as the teacher in fact, named Now Majjhima is, the Himalaya region and converted who Kassapagotto
'
there is this
thero
appears as his companion in the Dip.4 of a relic-casket from Again in the superscription
2 of the Sonari
Tope
no.
On of
another
urn
Majjhima is mentioned.
Tope we again find the name the epithetKotiputta and
againwith
In
a
third
Teacher of the whole Himalaya'. designation e. Kotiputta Gotiputta urn-inscription (i. Kassapa11. 34-35 12. 1-54. The Bhilsa
1 2
3
Mah.
Smp.
3235-8.
; Mah.
Cf. also
Smp. 31417-31825.
287.
CUNNINGHAM,
12.
Topes,p.
Cf. RHYS
DAVIDS,
Buddhist
4
6, 41 ; Dip. 8. 10. Cf. Smp. 31719 ; Mahabodhivamsa (ed. also where is STRONG) 1155, Kassapagotta mentioned together with
Mah.
Majjhima.
Tika, 222r. b2
xx
Introduction
appears in
gotta)
vamsa
connexion
with
of the
Dadabhisara.
This Mahabodhi-
is
the
Himalaya
of the thera
the
third council
Asoka's
a
rule, is also
doubt that
to be authentic
no.
by
an
in inscription
relic-casket from
no
Tope
the
2 of the Sanchi
group.2 There
meant
is
by
the
Moggaliputta
a
branch
Ceylon finds
to
ing interest-
GRUNWEDEL,
ingenious and,
Gate Since
c.
me,
vincing con-
that the
lower
and
middle
of representations
Sanchi
belongto
from
150 years.
the second
the event
centuryB.
the
" 4.
Errors
in the
Chronology
Period.
of the
Earliest
Historical
confirmation objective
:
of the Chronicles
are
that
their statements
at least
infallible and
events
the the
of the
and
they are
much As
the
more
tissa we
CUNNINGHAM, 1. 1., pp. 316-317. CUNNINGHAM, I. Z., p. 289. GRUNWEDEL, Buddhist. Kunst in Indien,pp. DAVIDS, Buddhist India, p. 302.
8
3
72-73.
Introduction
from chronology is dated
a on
xxi
the very fact that the day of the Buddha's there Besides,
death.1
are
This
seems
to be
biassed
account.
the round
numbers
for
the
length of
of
the
a
have in themselves
a
the
appearance
set scheme
involve, moreover,
last two
in respectof impossibility
kingsof
that
positive period,
PANDUKABHAYA
and
MUTASIVA.
born Chronicles2 According to our Pandukabhaya was before the death of Panduvasudeva. Then followed shortly the reign of Abhaya, twenty years, and an interregnumof Then seventeen Pandukabhaya ascends the throne at years. He the age of thirty-seven reigns seventy years. years. That would
bring his
age to 107
years !
enough. Pandukabhaya'ssuccessor Mutasiva. He is born of Suvannapaliwhom is his son Pandukabhaya had alreadymarried before the beginningof his reign. Mutasiva must then have been past the prime of of manhood In spite when he succeeded to the throne.
this
It
a
This,however,
is not
reign of sixtyyears
seems
to
me
that
be
and
events
in
the
tradition may
were
indeed
last
reigns
lengthenedin contemporaries.
That in
order to
make
Vijaya and
the Buddha
by no without value for that first period of Ceylonese means history, of Pandukabhaya's is shown, for instance, by the account of trustworthiness. campaigns,3 which decidedly gives an impression
Also after A
tradition
is
doubt.4
Devanampiyatissa's reign we find matter for reign of fortyyears is attributed to the king
In the
at
Mali.
6. 47. that
Dip. 9.
time
21-22
it is
in stated, of the
somewhat
more
generalway,
banasamaye, Ceylon.
2
the
not
same
The
day
of the
Buddha
Dip.
Mah.
11. 1, 4; Mah.
9. li.
28;
10. 106.
See
Mdhciwanso,
3
Introd., p.
on
10. 26 foil.
Cf. also
this
See below,
340.
xxii
Introduction
is said to have
no
mentioned,who
he although
But and
to him
was
been when
Mutasiva's he ascended
second
son,
longeryoung
the throne.
three younger brothers, Mahasiva Uttiya,1 each of whom reigned ten (= thirty) Suratissa, years. succeeded after the
Nay,
and
interveningrule
lasted and of also
of the
two
a
Guttika, which
twelve
years,
reignsten
then
Mutasiva, who
would
himself
cover
a
sixtyyears,
occupied periodof
ninety-two years ! between DevanampiyaWe that also in the period see clearly stillgaps in the tradition tissa and Dutthagamani there were
which
of
were
filledin with
fictitious construction.
have
For
we Devanampiyatissa
again
the remarkable
numbers
In
40 + 10 + 10 + 10 + 10.
such difficulties and encounter we no periods The chronology is credible, the numbers impossibilities. appear and more less artificial trustworthy. in But that first historical period fact stands out even one and distinctly from the wavering traditions concerning clearly the times immediatelybefore and after. That is the reign and the arrival of Mahinda in Ceylon. of Devanampiyatissa from which the general And with this we approach standpoint have to judge the historical tradition as to the earliestand we earlier times in
our
the later
Chronicles.
"
5.
The
Year
of the
Buddha's
Death.
fWe
have
to do with
monkish
tradition.
The
starting-
is the year statements of the chronological For this tradition naturally Buddha's death. not every event is important to an iior equal degree, every historical personage in so far as of for the but chiefly importance they were of the Buddhist community. There are isolated development in early and personalities connected, even occurrences times,
point of
its
Uttiyaand his consort is confirmed by an inscription in Periya-Puliyankulam (NorthernProvince). See Archaeological Annual Report, 1905 (xx.1909),p. 45. rey of Ceylon,
1
The
name
of
Introduction
with since
a
announced
As
death.1
for the
passed interveningperiod
it were far less well established and concerning from the chronological point of view. precise, especially fictions were Here made, building up and completingthe with those fixed pointsas tradition from which subsequently, the traditions
framework, the chronological developed that we system was find in the Dip. and Mah., as also in the Introduction to the
and again in the later historical literature of Ceylon. Snip., accessible to us, this system, In the Dip., the oldest source not a creation certainly appears alreadycomplete. It is most of the author of the Chronicle but
only taken
over,
in all
of the fixed
established at
the
specially
of
which
forms evidently
corner-stone
218 for the consecration system, is the number The Dip. 6. 1, says: (abhiseka) of Asoka.
whole
"
dve
satani
ca
vassani
attharasa abhisitto
had
vassani
ca
I II
sambuddhe
*
parinibbute
Piyadassano passedinto
218
years
Nirvana
consecrated/
And
the Mah.
5. 21:"
Jinanibbanato
Sattharasam
paccha
pura
tassabhisekato
evam
vassasatadvayam
Nirvana
vijaniyam.
and
'After
the
of
there
the
were
Conqueror
218 years;
before
his
(Asoka' s) consecration
known/
this should
be
In the
same
way,
to date
the
Mahavira
tradition the
number between
155 his
is
death
decisive as being sum evidently years and the beginning of Candragupta'sreign. See
total of the
Hemacandra's
we
;
we
Pref., p.
have
as
6.
If
accept
B. c. as
for
result
476
the year
this is in contradiction Certainly the Buddhist reckoning in so far as, accordingto Majjh. the Mahavira) must the foil., Nigantha Nataputta (i.e. of Mahavira's
'
'
BEFORE
the
Buddha.
OLDENBERG,
Z.D.M.G.
34, p. 749.
Introduction
THAT
SOMETIME CONSECRATION is IN TO
SAY,
THE OF
THAT
AFTER
LAPSE THE
OF
218
YEARS, DEATH,
i.e.
THE
YEAR
219
TOOK
AFTER
BUDDHA^S
ASOKA
PLACE.1
years
Since Asoka
had
before he performed
falls 214
years
ceremony2
his accession
Accordingto the
by that of Bindusara, lasting preceded and that of Candagutta lasting twenty-four twenty-eight, Candagutta would years (Mah. 5. 18; Dip. 5. 100). Thus i.e. 162 years have ascended the throne 214 (28 + 24 years), reign of
was
"
Asoka
Now
this event
we
can
is
one
which history
falls in
date with
321
B.C.
approach
within
two
It certainty.
the
year
error.
or
THERE DEATH
THE
=
PROBABLE
YEAS,
OF
THE
(321 + 162)
the year
483
B.C.
As
he
died at the be
eighty years
must
of his birth
should
put
at
state that this calculation too is emphatically that we are hypothetical, only able to give an approximate shall see not result. Moreover, we exact and a perfectly there is below that,in the Ceylon Chronicles themselves, contradiction which we can hardlypass by. a
But
First
of all the
whole
as calculation, on
OLDENBERG5
the
has date
rests quitejustlyinsisted,
the
that supposition
in
which different in the Smp., p. 29920, Slightly puts the abhiseka the year 218 (dvinnam vassasatanam upari attharasarae
vasse).
see
2
On
the
tradition
on
Asoka's
age
of the
Northern
Buddhists
"
11. cf.
Dip. 6. 21-22;
statement. says 218 With p.
Smp.
1.1.
Moreover, 1908,
Mah. p.
5. 22
contains
the when
same
NORMAN,
the abhiseka cf.
J.R.A.S. the
10, is mistaken
he year
3
that,according to
A.B.
be put at the
and
FLEET,
J.R.A.S. 28 foil. 7.
;
1906,pp.
See
984-986
and
1909,
SINGHE,
4
particularly p.
also WICKREMA-
V.
pp. 38-39.
6
Archiv
xxvi
Introduction
It is times. early probablydoes not rather
go
a
from which
back
of sixtyyears came the error into the century A.D.1 How stillneeds explanation. era certainly Again, the date 477 B.C. as the year of the Buddha's death, and CUNNINGHAM, must MULLER which was acceptedby MAX be given up. It rests on the erroneous premise that the year of
was or
315
B.C.2
B.C.
as
486
Nirvana, GOPALA
Asoka's it would which marks
a was
starts from
B.C.
the coronation,
486
Both
portance, im-
seem,
Record',5
A.
continued
in Canton
489
D.
and
onwards, with
to
dot.
D.
the number
of dots amounted
B.C.
as
bringus
the
starting-
point.
I would this
course
'
not
dotted
for my part attach too much importance to that in the Record '. It is singularly improbable
"
of time
a
it is
or
not
error single
is that the difference between the to my essential, thinking, various reckoningsis already reduced by now to three or four But if V. A. SMITH, from his own arrives standpoint, years.
at
that to which the corrected closely approaching brings us, he might well have been led to a Ceylon-Tradition milder judgment as to their trustworthiness and somewhat
a
result
so
their value.
down to this : whether, the whole difference comes Finally, agreeingwith the Puranas, we allow Bindusara a reign of twenty-five years, or, in agreement with the Mahavamsa, allow In the former case him to the we come twenty-eight years.
1 2
3
As
it
now
appears
(seebelow)
in the eleventh
century.
S.B.E., x, 2nd
4
3
Early History of India, pp. 41-43. 'The Date of Buddha,' Ind. Ant. xxxvii,1908, p.
See TAKAKUSU,
J.R.A.S.
1896, p.
436 foil. ;
ib.,1909, p. 9.
Introduction
year
483
as case
486
B.C.
as
the
we
year then
of the take
to
If
the
the year
of Asoka's
abhiseka,
268/67 B.C.,
It would be of
in the latter
265/64 B.C.
us
great importanceto
'
if
we
might
refer the I
'
date 256
Minor
Rock-Edict
to
the years
Edict.
from elapsed
the Nirvana
This
opinionwas
and
by
But
to
a was
BUHLEII
FLEET.2
was
cleared up
3
certain extent.
the first to
a
The
merit that
He and
vivas
number absent
in connexion with the appear ' to be 256, should be derived from vi-vas in the sense
from
home,
far away
'.
Then
article he has
does not Sahasram.
demonstrated that the number ingeniously and days. In denote years but nights, i.e. nights
text he firstdiscovered
=
the
the word
lati
ratri in duve
satpancasaratrisate. These discoveries were acknowledged both by FLEET and HuLTZSCH.4 But now takes opinions diverge.F. W. THOMAS the Edict when on a religious it to mean that Asoka published would refer to the 256 changes of journey. The number of this tour of inspection. in the course camp and vivasa in another way. vivutha But FLEET interprets
sapamnalatisata According
household takes it to
to him
Skt.
dve
of the
to the life,
mean
house
of reign
to
and
had renounced
his life in
the world
His
retreat. religious
was dwelling
the mountain
The
Edict
is to be
found
in
Rupnath, Sahasram,
p.
in
Brahmagiri
last Edict
and
2
elsewhere.
V. A. SMITH,
Asoka,
foil.
138, n.
3.
'The
of Asoka,' J.R.A.S.
3
1908, p.
811 pp.
Ind.
Ant.
xxxvii, 1908,
22-23,
and
'Les especially
vivasah
d'Asoka
4
',Journal
'The 'A
FLEET,
May-June, 1910, p. 507 foil. Asiatique, Last Words of Asoka,1 J.R.A.S. 1910, p.
Note
on
1302
foil. ;
HULTZSCH,
Third
the
Rupnath Edict,'16., p.
1308 foil.
Introduction
Suvarnagirinear
passage which is
Hence
in
the
as
Suvarnagiriis named, and not where the Edict, the 'last the place
Moreover, the
the Edict
the
word
of
Asoka',
was
published.
number
was
256
not
It special significance.
on
Asoka
retreat.
came
lished pubAt
to
an
time
the would
Asoka
year
elapsed
death,one
day
in
religious contemplation
it would be hazardous
on
brahmacarl.
is
a
very
idea. ingenious
to
But
present time
base
further
conclusions
this bold
seductive
combination.
"
6.
Traces
of
an
era
in
Ceylon
reckoned
from
483
B.C.
date 483
seems
to have found
an
further
important observation of WiCKREMASiNGHE,2 which completes the proof adduced by FLEET and discussed above, of the late originof
must
the
are
Ceylonese era,
to be found
the year
544.
Indications down
to the
indeed
the eleventh
was
century,an
from 483
era
even persisted
as
in
B.C.,
death.
took
middle
of the
eleventh
century
from
the
we question
predecessorsof
king
Parakramabahu
I, beginning
from
with
Udaya
As
III
(1507A.B.).3
I,we
'
to Parakramabahu
have information
inscrip-
Cf.
also
on
this, FLEET,
The
Conversion
of
Asoka,' J.R.A.S.
1908, p. 486/otf. Epigraphia Zeylanica,i,p. 155 foil. The The names are given in WIJESINHA, translated, pp. xxii-xxiii.
See
3
Mahavansa,
Part
II,
Introduction
confirmed tions,
which he
was
and
crowned
when
1696
years had
since elapsed
the
Buddha's
later,1705
In
second
coronation
the fourth year afterwards,when since the Nirvana, that is,in 1709
1708
A.
gone
by
B., he
Synod.1 According
1153, 1161,
1165
an
to
D.
the But
Ceyloneseera
those
A.
supportedby
Indian
kama.
century the
existence of the
544, is established
the foil.)
six
(56. 16
Pandu predecessorsof Parakramabahu, from Parakrama onwards,reigned 107 years. Thus the accession of the lastnamed princefalls at 1590 A. B. or, accordingto the Ceylonese 1046 A.D. Moreover, this date is confirmed by the era,
South-Indian the
same
is dated
in
According
and is true
two
the
Parakrama latter,
Pandu
was
conquered
the
Culavamsa
we
years, but
must
take and
accession
same
same
and
death
A. B.
of the
=
king
A. D.
as
fallingin
Thus it is
1046
proved,at
the
century.
a
South-Indian
among throws
eras.
also fix
date
for
a
Udaya
III
the
a
date
which
of reckoning
See
the
Galvihara-Insc.
of
Polonnaruwa,
11. 1-4
(ED. MULLER,
ed. WICK-
Ancient
Inscr. of
pp.
REMASINGHE,
2
Ceylon, pp. 87, 120) ; Nikaya-sangraha, Cf. Epigr. Zeyl. i,p. 123. 226. 2026,
the later continuation of the
designate
thus
Mahavamsa
from
37. 51 onwards.
3
HULTZSCH,
South
Indian
28,
p. 53 ;
Epigr.
Introduction
to the Culavamsa,1 the time between Since, according
the
accession of
to
Pandu
saw
amounts
latter ascended
B.,
we
have
the
Coladeva, must
The
2 expedition inscription givesan account of a military to Ceylon. This invasion by Cola corresponds to its details as with 53. 40 foil., one which, accordingto the Culavamsa occurred under Udaya III at the beginning of his reign.
KIELHORN between
as
the
the
sixth year
These
A. B.
of
1018. 1498
years
must
with
"
Of
the 1497
fall within
DIED
pre-Christian
B.C.
times.
In other words
THE
BUDDHA
483
So, with
matter
WICKREMASINGHE The
must
state the
thus.
author
the
part
of III
the
to
Culavamsa
Parakramafrom well-
which
kings from
when He
Udaya
bahu
544
time
use.
the
was
present era,
reckoned three
B.
c., was
in
with acquainted
established of But
dates,1497, 1590, and 1692 A. B., for the accession I. Pandu, and Parakramabahu Udaya III, Parakrama
he
on
did not
know
that
the
first of the
three
483
dates
B.C.
was
based
quitea
from
The
Pandu amounted, Udaya III and Parakrama in reality in his view, to ninety-three only years, but was thirty-one years (1015-1046A. D.). the detail in which the events of the considering Certainly, Pandu described by are periodfrom Udaya III to Parakrama the Culavamsa, it is difficultto say at what pointwe should The of sixty-two undertake to strike out the surplus years. interval between
1 2
See WIJESINHA,
HULTZSCH,
South
Inscr.
Epigraphia Indica,vii, p.
Introduction
principal partmust
and the and twelve years
are
the
reignof
Mahinda
which
But
that the
the
established is
which
at prevailed
that
time.
" 7.
The
dates
of
Devanampiyatissa
gamani.
and
Duttha-
The
according to
after the of Buddhism
which
Asoka
was
consecrated
king
The and
BETWEEN
Nirvana
CHRONOLOGICAL
REIGN OF
ASOKA
AND
PIYATISSA, DEVANAM-
under That
we
whom
Buddhism
made Asoka
its
were
really contemporaries
the
is
one
reason
to
doubt.
On
hand
the
missions the
a
supported by
we an
Bhilsa-topes.On
as
matter
his time.
secrated con-
was According to the Dlpavamsa DEVANAMPIYATISSA i.e. king 236 years after the Buddha's death,1
in the
Accordingto the Mah. 11. 40 the consecrating of Devanampiyatissa took placeon the first day of the bright half of the ninth month, Maggasira (October-November). Now to Dip. 11. 14, the consecration of since, according Tissa was later by a certain number of years I shall discuss
year.
"
237th
the
passage
further
on
"
AND
six
MONTHS
later have
"
than
the
abhisekaof
1
must
taken
place
Dip. 17.
dve sambuddhe
satani
vassani
chattimsa abhisitto
same
as
ca
samvacchare
parinibbute
formula used See
Observe
that the
is the
in 6. 1 for
abhiseka.
Dip.
Mah.
as
the
sum
total of the
reignsof
kings from
Vijaya
Devanampiyatissa.
Introduction
in the third month Jettha
in
as fact,
we
know, in the 219th year after the Nirvana. According1 to the tradition prevailingin Ceylon 2 the died on the full-moon Buddha day of the second month of the year Vesakha accordingto our reckoning: (March-April),
of the year 483 218
A.B.
B. c.
Thus
come
on
the
an
same
day
A
265
B. c.
the year
would
have
to
end.
month
later, roughly
Vesakha,
In the autumn
would
236 the
be consecrated.
A.B.
came
the year
same
to
an
the
year
first coronation
took in
But
certain
statements
a
which passage
this
reckoning. In
came
not
said
that
Mahinda And
Nirvana.
on
it is said
years
after
the
arrival took
place
the full-moon
a new
But Thus
Jettha the
(April-May).5
year A.B., 236
precedingmonth.
then
Mahinda's
years had
the Nirvana.
contradiction
to
discovered
by
the
FLEET
who
made
an
attempt ingenious
The death full-moon is open
to
explainit.
of Vesakha This the
day
doubt. life. On
in the Buddha's
day of the Buddha's day recurs onlytoo frequently other hand FLEET pointsout
as
On
the
names
of the months
in the Indian
calendar
see
our
transl.,
note
8
to 1. 12. Mah. 3. 2 ;
Buddhaghosa
same
in Sum.
I. 610 and
Smp.
2833,
*. Cf.
Dip.
results.
11.42.
Dip.
11.
39;
71
:
Mah.
Dip. 15.
dve Mahindo
vassasata
nama
honti
namena
chattimsa
ca
vassa sasanam.
tafcha
jotayissati
after tato the
masam
17. 88
days (thirty
40 read
second
consecration
!);
See
Mah.
Dip. 11.
on
atikkamma.
OLDENBERG,
"
note
died.1
J.E.A.S.
1909,
p.
foil.;
Introduction
But
B c.
as now
even
if
we
set
out
from
April 25,
of 247.
264
(not 265)
year Tissa's
the
date
of Asoka's
on
abhiseka,
same
is
alreadyended
the any
the dates
day
and
coronation, as
without falls,
218
doubt, in the
in
236
have
Mah.
20.
the
isolated
in
example.
Anura-
Bodhi-tree
dhapurais transferred
too, does
can
eighteenth year
reckoning
event
of Asoka. elsewhere.
This,
There
not
agree
with
the
be
no
doubt
that
that
falls in
the
nineteenth
year
of Asoka.1
togetherwith Naturally,
it and
that
chronological
the Maha-
given by
20. 2 foil,are
shifted also.
these
It suffices to
to show
point out
is
an
that caution
is after
are
merely
date connected with the interesting time of VATTAGA.MANI, We to Mah. have, namely,according and 10 days 33. 80-81, an interval of 217 years 10 months between the founding of the Mahavihara by Devanampiyatissa and that of the Abhayagiri-vihara by Vattagamani.2 2.
Further,there
The
date
of the
consecration the
of
the
Mahavihara
can
be
according to
FLEET'S
16
on day later,
May
17, Mahinda
words
to
the
tamhi
ca
anagate
come
can
only
understand seventeenth
six
still to
can seems
to
use
complete the
the passage correct
We it
But
Dip.
12. 42-43
chronology.
year of
arrival in
reckoning,the Ceylon.
from the Mah.
nineteenth
The Nik.
same
Mah.,
p. 115
is to
be
found 5.
in
the
Samgr., p. II16.
the date of the number
Tika,
(on
Mah. of the
11-13),
faith in
gives as Ceylon.
s
schism of 217
of the years
Dhammarucika
Abhaya-
girithe round
J.R.A.S.
after the
founding of the
Mah.
1909,
p.
28.
For
the
followingcf.
14. 42 ;
15.
11, 24.
Introduction
spent the
night
in the
Mahameghavana.
This
the
king
the and his companionsas an arilma to Mahinda on presented This then is the day of followingday, May 18, 246 B.C. the founding of the Mahavihara. We are broughtthen to the end of March 28 B. c. for the founding of the Abhayagirivihara. I
now
believe that
those
we
ought
which
to
attach
special importance
interval
to precisely
dates
state
the generally
The date number 218 in important events. also known in later times. connexion with Vattagamani was of Vattagamani in the 454 It is implied in the number of Polonnaruwa.1 For this has evidently Galvihara-Inscription between
two
arisen from
to 218. tissa)
the addition
of
236
(thedate
as
of
Devanampiyain
Moreover, there
Mah.
33. 78
can
be
no
doubt
to
the statement
Abhayagiri-vihara took place in the second half of the reignof Vattagamani. Therefore of this I do not hesitate to placethe beginning
second half of
foil,that the
of founding
the
Vattaga manias
reign
at
the
end
of
the
of the year 28 B.C. year 29 or the beginning this leads us into certain difficultieswhen Of course
we
add
of the individual reigns between Devanampiyaup the figures in tissa and Vattagamani according to the readings accepted my
edition.
From
these
it figures
Vattagamani
have
then
in round difference,
we
read2 Mah.
21.
11, with
the
(duve) dvavisavassani, not with the dvadasa Burmese duve vassani, to givethus to the Damilas Sena and Guttika reign. twenty-two and not twelve years' To be sure the Dip. (18. 47) has dvadasa vassani, which be taken into account. the other hand must On certainly the later Ceylonese literature (Thupavamsa, RajaPujavaliya,
1
ED.
MULLER,
edition I
Ancient
supaenaes
2
In my
'
in the
hawuruddak). however originally accepted the former reading, Corrections to dvadasa. (p.368)I have giventhe preference
'
XXXVI
Introduction
In any 22. at the case valiya1)only gives the number time the Thup. was according to it,the date stood composed,
so
in the Mah.
to Naturally,
in the MSS.
'
also read Mah. must 27. 6 we consequent, prophecyconcerningDutthagamani, with the Sinhalese be cha cattalisa the
to satam
'146'
or
cattalisa
satam
140
'. From
pointof
me
seems reading
to
more
round
number
from
where, MSS. readingof the Burmese They contain elsewithout must doubt, the better text. Perhaps we conclude that,in regardto Sena and Guttika, the Burmese recension adopted the reading of the Dip. and that, in with in this,'
Mah.
27.
was
chattimsasatavassani
do
away
with
the
total.
B.
Taking
draw
up
a
c.
we
can
provisionally
Mah.2
list of the
"
8.
List
of
the
Ancient
Kings
of
Ceylon.
For
the
passages
see
p. 120. 350. The aim particular the reader of this Introduction of the translation to
See FLEET'S
J.E.A.S. list,
take
side,to draw
table to enable
Introduction
XXXVll
1 2
According to
See the
same
the
Burmese
MSS.
samgr.
only 12
1014.
years.
See p.
xxxv.
Nik. figure
XXXV11L
Introduction
No.
40 41 42 43 44 45
48
49 50 51
52
53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60
Of
course an
the
dates
set
down
can
only
the
be
regardedas
off in whole
844
having
approximate
value.
For
Chronicles, mostly,
give the
years. years, time
up
1
king
rounded
9 up
the
to Mahasena's
the time
years.2
before in
as
Dip. placesAbhayanaga
cause
Voharikatissa.
This
same
appears
to be
of the
mistake
the
figures.The
his
to his
who predecessor,
length of is really
ascended
samgr.
129 Voharikatissa
the throne
ed. B. Rajavali,
GUNASEKARA,
23SO ;
Nik.
S.,ed. WICKHEMASINGHE,
p. 14l".
Introduction
From
to Devanampiyatissa
Mahasena's But be
death this
609
years
only proves
236
A.B.
of the former
should
dated
(609 +
be deduced itself.
names
2
from
in
datingthe
my
Nirvana the
:
"
supplement
successors
list with
and
dates
of the immediate
62. 63. 64. 65. 66. 6775.
of Mahasena
27 years 9
"
Siri-Meghavanna
Jetthatissa Buddhadasa
352-379 379-388
A.
"
D.
28
"
388-416
"
Upatissa
Mahanama (Sotthisena Dhatusena to
42
"
416-458
"
22
,,
458-480
"
,
jPithiya
Kassapa
oq W
"
r,n
^ AQ
76.
77.
18
"
509-527
,,
17
"
527-544
"
have now we period which appears Ceylonese synchronism 483 having as point of departure
SYLVAIN LEVIS
account
For
this later
an
to confirm
B.C.
has
communicated Chinese
the
following passage
Wang Hiuen ts'e. The e. Ceylon), king of Cheu-tzeu (i. Chi-mi-kia-po-mo by name e. (i. Sri-Meghavarman*),sent two bhiksus to India to the the sacred tree of the near monastery erected by Asoka Buddha in Bodh Gay a. They found no lodginghere and told their king. He sent an subsequently embassy to the over e. Samuking then ruling India,San-meou-to-lo-kiu-to (i. and sought permission the sacred spot to build on dragupta), Thus the synchronism a monastery for Ceylonese pilgrims. of king Siri-Meghavanna, of Mahasena, with the successor The latter,according to Samudragupta is confirmed.
1
from
the
of the
See
143. 247
Cf. Culav.
(accordingto
37.
the
Colombo
Mah.
the
to numbers
So twenty-eighth(or twenty-ninth or eighteenth) year. that the dates have again been made later by one year.
3
possible
Journ. The
a
As.
form
given by
and
the
Chinese
narrator, results
from
confusion
varna
varman.
xl
Introduction
V.
SMITH,1 reignedfrom
our
326
to
(about)375,
483
as
the
former,
of the
according to
Nirvana
from reckoning1,
A.D. sources
2
the year
352-379
from embassy came Ceylon to China, sent by king Kia-che,i.e. Kasyapa,in the this is a reference to Kassapa I whose Evidently year 527 A. D.
According
to Chinese
another
my
527.
Indian
on
Kings the
next
from
Bimbisara
to
Asoka.
the
table
page
have
brought together
kings from Bimbisara,the contemporary of the the Buddha, to Asoka, accordingto the Ceylonese, and the Jaina tradition. On this I will Burmese, the Nepalese,
names
of the
observations. following 3 is The BURMESE TRADITION dependent on the undoubtedly CEYLONESE, as represented by Dip. and Mah. Buddhaghosa also with the is in completeagreement He certainly Mah. ascribes a reign of eighteen instead of eightyears to Anuruddha and Munda, but the sum total of the reigns of all the kings reckoned up by him at the conclusion is only correct if we alter that eighteen to eight. list of the Asoka vadana5 The NEPALESE comes perhaps and the Jaina tradition. It midway between the Ceylonese is specially that in this too appears the name of remarkable
first make the
4
1
See
2
Ind. Early History of India, p. 266 foil. (of. also FLEET, J.R.A.S. 1909, p, 343. SYLVAIN
Ant.
1902, p. 257).
E. R.
LE.VI, I I.,p.
on
a
42:3 foil.
new
Cf.
now
also
AYRTON,
of the
J.R.A.S.
1911, p. 1142,
from
speaks
hand
a
in favour
reckoning
itself with China there
483
to
B.C.
On
respect
in
the
A.D.
embassy
not
Mo4io-nan pp.
in the year
428
(SYLV. LEVI,
Mahanama ascend did not The
412,421).
but
time
reigned
on
Ceylon
former
his
elder
brother
A.D.
UpatissaII.
3
The this
the throne
or
till 458
See
BIGAFDET,
Cf. also
are
Life
15322
Legend of
374-375.
Gaudama
the
Buddha
4
Smp.
Cf.
Sum.
where foil.,
the
kings
from
Bimbisara
6
Nagadasa
It is
enumerated.
a
BURNOUF,
Introduction
Vhistoire the
du
Bouddhisme of
Indien,
is
pp.
358-359,
noteworthy
that
name
Candragupta
missing.
xlii
Munda in the
in this
Introduction
whom the Jainas do not know but who is mentioned is
The
list is based
on
the
of Parisistaparvan
3
Hema-
candra.2
Srenika
sattu
and
to correspond
the Bimbisara
Ajatafrom
of the Pali
On
the
Anuruddha-Munda
But
among
downwards
names
the
missing-.
are
these
Kalasoka
see
well established
The
PURANIC
=
by
other
list has
the in
series
common
Udayin (
But
Udayabhadda)
insert
Ceylonese.
king before the lastyet named, and the Ceylonese Chronicles placethose three kings of the whole at the head the list; the Puranas range four kings in the second half of the list. corresponding
Puranas
the
another
Moreover, I
with much
cannot
say
that
The
the
Purana
as
list
to
me inspires
confidence.
tradition
individual The
same
names
is very
case
unstable in the
the
different Puranas.
the
is the
with
dates
of
individual
totals agree
well.4 fairly The questionthen arises : which list merits the Jaina,or that of the the Ceylonese, confidence, to give the preference JACOBI 5 is disposed to the
He
Puranas Jaina
list.
adheres
to
the
view
that
Kalasoka, 'the
black
Asoka/
are one firmed con-
and
and
Kakavarnin the
same
'the crow-coloured/ (Kakavarna), is certainly and That correct person. in the Pali
sources
is
by
1
is named
34
already,Z.D.M.G.
231 foil.,
(1880),
1
p.
752, stated
2
this fact.
Ed.
JACOBI
(Bibl Ind.},I. 22
14 foil.
foil.; VI. 22
foil. ; VIII.
297 foil.,
8
JACOBI, Morgenl.
Bimbisara See
The
des
=
(Abhandl.fur
The combination
die Kunde
Srenika
67.
Life of Buddha
also Z. D. M. foil.; and G.
(1907), p.
34, pp.
MABEL
DUFF,
Z. D. M. G.
to p. 322. 185-186.
Z. D. M.
Kalpasutra,
foil.
Cf.
G.
OLDENBERG,
35,
p. 667
34,p. 750
further, JACOBI,
Introduction
as as
xliii
the the
successor successor
of
Kakavarna Here
at
least the
and
the Northern
moreover
in
agreement.
=
JACOBI
believes
Kakavarnin
Kalasoka
to
be
the
Udayin
of the Jaina
of the
Southern
Buddhist
sources.
ground
to
for
Udayin
from
Kalasoka
that Patalimade
they
two
removed
the
royalresidence
that the
one
putra. He
believes
out
has
new
kings
100
of
person,
has
kings
gap had
between of
them years
thus
between elapsed
of
and
the Second
Council.
:
"
The list
is this
Nanda I confess
dynasty.
that,in agreement with OLDENBERG,3 I do not feel convinced by JACOBI'S grounds for identifying Kalasoka
Udayin. The removal of the residence from Rajagrha to Pataliputra is attributed to Udayin by the Jainas,4 and by the Brahmans in the Burmese to Kalasoka (inthe Puranas), tradition 5 which, beyond a doubt, comes from Ceylon. Hiuenthsang attributes it to king Asoka whose lifetime he places
a
with
hundred
years
He
Wu-yau, or,
rendered
once
But
to all appearance
with Kakavarna
he combined
taken
pletely com-
The
identification of Kalasoka
into
account
by
the
V.
A. SMITH
(J.R.A.S.1901, p. Udayibhadda,
who foil.),
denies
2
existence
of Kalasoka. Mah.
4.
The
name
is written The
same
1,
in
the
Sinhalese
3
MSS.
in D. I. 5025 foil.
Z.D.M.
".34,
p. 751
DAVIDS,
Buddhist
Suttas
(S.B.
E.
Introd.,p. xi),
xiii.
BEAL,
foil.
Buddhist
p. 414
Introduction
two
different
foundingof
in with
person.
an
For
if he
attributes the
fit possibly
Asoka, this
of the
cannot
third
century
B.C.
For
we
Candra-
Hiuen-thsang
of city putra Patali-
that 'O-shu-kia
or
Wu-yau
founded
he
the Asoka
must
century but
to this
have
lived before
once
Candragupta.
subject.
Here I will
I shall return
more
only
the the that
to
observe that
removal Jainas of and
in any case with respectto Hiuen-thsang, the royal is againstthe tradition of residence,
nearer
to
the
Burmese.
We Jainas
can
the removal
is attributed Buddhists
by
the
and
Udayin, by the
Is
were
to Kalasoka. to conclude ?
names
and
the
same more
person
May
be
conjectured
here
with
a
equal or yet
that probability
have
simply
on
difference in the tradition among the Jainas and Brahmans hand Besides and the Buddhists the one the other? on
in the Brahmanic tradition Kakavarna
=
even
Kalasoka then
and the
Southern difficult
tradition.
It becomes
therefore the
seems
more
to preferable greatly
list is defective.
to be
In
seems
Asokavadana
If that
the mention
the choice lies between the list of the finally which of the Ceylonese seems Chronicles,
hesitate
and
more
be
give
2
the
the latter.
the
Puranas, Nandivardhana
in
and
Mahanandin
Both
names
must
thus
The
former
BEAL,
p.
90, the
latter p. 85.
same
are
with the in connexion indifferently that we ought not to conclude, with that the two names Introd., n. 1), p. xxxiii, used of two
2
event.
This
proves Pit.
OLDENBERG
(Vin.
i,
represent a remembrance
ten
sons
different Asokas.
seems
It
that
Nandivardhana
is to
represent the
of Kala-
Introduction
fillup these
no
xlv
some
gap
or
other in the
two
togetherare
whatever
are
put down
recorded.1
deeds
Again,in
an error.
was
the Puranas
yet another king,called Darsaka, "c., and Udayin. That is certainly Ajatasatru
canon
Pali
son
bhadda
successor.
the
of the
Otherwise
over
reign of
the
father and
son
would
extend
Moreover
Mahapadma
is a statement
The
sources
eight sons,
the
the Puranas
placetaken by Kalasoka his father. at the head of the In the former they are placed in the latter they are whole ranged after Bimbisara dynasty,
lies in the
and
successors.
Thus, before
we
traditions
can
decide to
for
our
whether
any
be
adduced
that
the
tradition
of
Ceylon
in
its details
Its greater fullness of always finds support from without. detail, speaking, as againstthe Jaina list finds generally in the Puranas.3 In this respect the Southern a parallel Buddhist In and Brahmanic the
"
traditions
as
supporteach
the
other.
all forms
tradition
to
"
Asoka. The Candragupta Bindusara succession Bimbisara Ajatasattu Udayabhadda is confirmed Munda, entirely by the Jaina list and the Asokavadana.
nineNandas
"
"
absent
from
the Jaina
list and
the
Puranas, is named
in the
soka.
At
least this
the
(ed. STRONG,
Mahanandin looks
p.
98)
a
includes
prince of
1
name
like
duplicate
that
of Nandivardhana. Even V. A.
mere
'
p.
36,has
to admit
they are
2
umbrae
'.
same
In
the
to the
3
ing accord91.
(1907), p.
Also
in Tibetan
See note
to the Table.
xlvi
Introduction
canon
and
in the Asokavadana.
And
AFTER
in the
same
Asokavadana the
puts Kakavarnin
Udayin
and
Ceylon Chronicles place their Kalasoka, not them as the Puranas placetheir Kakavarna. BEFORE to be in favour of placing Thus the greaterprobability seems his father Sisunaga in and with him Kakavarna naturally
the second half of the series of
kings,not
in the first.
respectalso
and
as
the
is
more
valuable
is
The I
last-named
am
to
compelled
had
once
that when
name
received the
and
then 6aisunaga,
ness greatthe in
a
the eponymos antiquity, including Bimbisara and his head of the whole
successors,
placedat
would
series of
kings.
This
end
second
half.
the
It is importanceof research in Northern Buddhism.1 of the development of most important for the understanding Still I believe that if we wish to learn the origins Buddhism. the historyof those origins, we of Buddhism, and especially the shall have The
to draw
chiefly upon
are
the Pali
sources.
Buddhist
Southern
7.
j Nagadasaka Susunaga
sons
Candagutta
(a) before
and
Cf.
LA
e.
g.
WALLESER,
POUSSIN'S the
Z.D.M.
G.
1910,
p.
238,
in
discussion
of
DE
*
VALLEE
to
As
chronologicalrelation
Introduction "
In
are
10.
The
Acariyaparampara
and
Indian-Ceylonese
chronological system
the Mahinda
on
which
the
Dip.
This
a
and
Mah.
from
Upali
down
plays an
importantpart.
between the the
acariyacontinuous
parampara
is of interest because
in it there is
connexion synchronological
and that of India. Here
system
not most
appears
in
detail and Of
course
completed.1
the
dates
must
be
considered
altogether
the the in
authentic.
most
uncertain
accession
how
Ceylon the
It
seems
several
and
events
of tradition
fitted
of the few
too
well-established
the theras
dates. leading
the
that
mentioned,with
taken
to
mean
exception of Upali
and
were Moggaliputtatissa,
Vinayaone
pamokkha
Sonaka took
if indeed
this
should
be
take The
placein
his time.
leading personages
Sanavasi and Yasa. that
in this
Evidently
of
the
back
'
Succession
to
Teachers'
traced
Upali,
the
list is
more
as
follows
"
statements furnished by Dip. 3. 56 foil, and are precise 2. 28 foil. According to these the two met for the first time when Bimbisara Buddha and was thirty years of age, i.e. thirty-five This was the year 15 of Bimbisara's bisara B.C. reign. After that Bim491 B. c.). He was ceeded suc(till reignedyet another thirty-seven years died. by Ajatasattu. Eight years after his accession the Buddha
See
NORMAN,
to
J.E.A.S. Northern
1908, pp.
tradition who
;
or
5-6. is
The
list of the
patriarchs
In this the
according
succession
the
quite different.
is :
;
(1) Kasyapa,
(2) Ananda
Second
concerned Buddhist
(3) Sanakavasa
;
Council in
(5)Daitika
conversion
the First Council : presided over (4) Upagupta, the president of the Dhitika was principally ; (6) Kala, who
the
of
Ceylon.
See
BEAL,
'Succession
of
Patriarchs1
(Ind.Ant.
ix,1880, p. 148
foil..).
xlviii
Introduction
Buddha's from his death
(483B. c.)
Buddha's the
upasampada.
B.C.
should
have
date 527
coming
Vijaya
16th
to
Ceylon and
with
the
of
Ajatasattu.
Vijayadies
the is crowned
in the 14th year of Udayabhadda,i.e.446 B.C., in king,i.e. 444 B.C., Panduvasudeva year of the same
king
in
Ceylon.2
death becomes
Chief
sum
of the
and
remains reckoned
so
for
years,
from
total of
to
amounts
as seventy-four. He dies therefore 453 B.C. after, Dip. 4. 38 says, Udaya had reignedsix years. when the latter 2. DASAKA.3 (a)He is ordained by Upali, sixteen years has completed sixtyyears of his priesthood, or
B.C.
This
agrees
with
the
that it happened in the year 24 of Ajatasattuand in then 16 of Vijaya. According to Mah. 5. 106 he was thus old, the year of his birth
was
years
479
B.
c.
(after Upali)for fifty years Chief of the to the Dip.,in the Vinaya, i.e. he dies 403 B. c., or according 8 of Susunaga. In (Dip. 11. 10) Ceylon meanwhile year (3) Dasaka
is
Panduvasudeva
414
B.
has
died
in the
year
21
of
Nagadasaka, i.e.
king. 3. SoNAKA.4 is ordained a by Dasaka when priest his upasamthe latter has completed forty-five pada, years from to therefore 422 Thus B.C. Dip. 4. 41. according had only been forty But accordingto Dip. 5. 78 Dasaka years This when Sonaka ordained him. to us was a brings priest by Abhaya (a)He
has been 427
B. c.
c., and
crowned
Here
therefore
10
It also
pointsto
as
of
Nagadasa
of Sonaka's
424
B.C.
Dip. Dip.
as
76, 95,
number
of
to 445
of his death. 8.
5, as
one
5. 91,
Dip. 4.
41 ; 5.
Introduction
of
Candagutta
319
and
58
of
Pakundaka
e. Pandukabhaya), (i.
therefore
B.C.
(b)He
is Chief dies
of the
Vinaya
after
264
for
sixty-eight years
after
Siggava and
after Asoka's
accord with the
eighty years
(
=
abhiseka 239
B.C.,
the last of
ordination, twenty-six years first The two statements B.C.). with 238 B.C. However, if we
as
place
which death
consecration
Asoka
earlyas
the
year
265,
results
on
the
(seeabove,p. xxxii)from dating the Buddha's full-moon according day of Vesakha, then even
should
to this
death reckoningMoggaliputta's
be
placedat
in the
year 48
239
6.
B.C.
MAHINDA.1
(a) Mo^galiputta ordains Mahinda from the abhiseka) or the Asoka, (reckoned
This
bringsus,
s
in both cases, if we
take the
spring
the
that of Asoka'
259
abhiseka,
Mahinda
springof
279
B.
and
he
was
258.
born2
204
A.B.
i.e.
c., thus
comes
ordained
at the age
of
twenty.
after his
as we
Mahinda
to
Ceylon twelve
and
half years
s
eighteenyears
after Asoka'
abhiseka,3
246 B.C. already seen, in the spring He dies in the year 8 of Uttiya's reign and on (I) half of the month day of the bright Assayuja.4 The
his death
is therefore I.
199
B.C.
ACAEIYAPARAMPARA.
Dip. 5.
that
82.
The
time
between stated
the
ordination
of
Moggaliputta
It would
and
of Mahinda
is here
to be has 5. 209.
be correct
2
3
Dip. 12.42; Mah. 13.1,5. Dip. 17. 93, 95 ; Mah. 20. 32-33.
Introduction
\\
II.
CEYLONESE
AND
INDIAN
SYNCHRONISMS
" Accordingto
as
11. The
Buddhist
Councils.
the Southern
Buddhist
tradition three
Councils,
the firstimmediately after the death of known, took place, the Buddha, the second a hundred years later under Kalasoka,the is third 236 years after the Nirvana There has
to
times, as
of history of this
the
or authenticity
of non-authenticity
the
the
Councils.1
go
am
not
able,within
resume
the
limits
to introduction,
I will rather is of
of that which
to the
Councils.
By
way
comparisonI
to extract
importantstatements
of the Northern
in the
I would
refer
to MINAYEFF, chiefly
'
Recherches
sur
le Bouddhisme,
p. 13 foil. ;
OLDENBERG,
Manual 842
Buddhistische
Studied
p. 101
Z.D.M.G.
52, p. 613
of Indian foil.; L.
Buddhism,
DE LA
foil. ; V. A. SMITH
1901, p.
Buddhist
Conciles
(cf.
R.
'
The
POUSSIN, 'Les premiers foil, 213 Muston, N.S. 6. 1905, p. 81 foil.) Ant. 1908, pp. 1 foil., ;
VALLEE
at
0.
FRANKE,
Chinese
'The
Buddhist
Councils
Rajaeaha
have
and
VesalT,'
ii.76,
brought
The firstBuddhist
Council/in
theMonist,xiv. 2,
d2
lii
Introduction
can
it appears where to me to be only incidentally, with regard to views absolutely necessary, take up a position of other inquirers, and must avoid many which explanations in order not to overstep the space allotted suggest themselves,
to me.
BUDDHIST
SOURCES in age
for and
are importance,
Khandhaka which
Cullavaggain
and Second
the
l Vinaya-Pilaka
deal with
First
Council.
Then Councils follow the
2
Dip. and
Mah.
with
accounts
of the
to
three
and
also the
historical
Introduction
Buddha-
ghosa'sSamantapasadika.3 Moreover, Buddhaghosa treats of the First Council, frequently with the same wording, in the Introduction to his Sumahgalavilasinl.4As secondary sources
we
may
mention the
the
Mahabodhivamsa
fi
and
Sasanavamsa,6
and
also in
Sinhalese
Samgraha.7
The NORTHERN BUDDHIST
ACCOUNTS
will be mentioned
in
of treating
The
First
Council.
The
account
in C.V.
is this
his
to
are
Subhadda
the
they can
an
do what control.
they will,and
they are
freed from
irksome
of
Thereupon Mahakassapa proposes to undertake a samglti thus and the Vinaya, that the doctrine may the Dhamma
OLDENBERG,
Vin.
Pit. Mah.
ii, p.
284
foil.
Cf.S.B.E.
xx,
p. 370
foil. double
GEIGEB,
account
Dtp.
and
p. 108
foil. In the
Dip. there
is
of each
Council.
Vin. Pit.
See OLDENBERG,
Ed. Ed. Ed.
7
in, p.
283 foil. i.
RHYS STRONG M.
DAVIDS
and
CARPENTER,
85 foil.
(P.T.S. 1886),p.
2 foil.
(P.T.S.1891), p.
Ed.
Introduction
be
l"i
kept
yet
The
an
pure.
To
500
monks
are
chosen,
among
he is
Arahant.
Council takes
described
place in Rajagaha
from
and
manner
in the Mah.
to be added
Some
pointsare
the C.V.
namely :
had, in his presence, declared the community of monks empowered after his death if they wished. to do away with the less importantprecepts,1 is to be Since they are not able to agree in deciding what
(1) Ananda
relates that
the
Buddha
understood any
not
to do away
with
precept.
cast
(2) Certain
from
upon
Ananda,
Although
fault he
He is called upon Rajagaha. of the Assembly. He renders due to take part in the work but prefersto hold by that acknowledgment to this work which he himself has heard from the Master's lips. the Buddha, before his further relates how (4) Ananda
(3) The
death,had
brahmadanda
also
pronouncedthe
penance. Channa
to
monk
Channa
liable to the
The is
to Ananda.
of this duty is entrusted fulfilling deeplytroubled. With zealous which the penance
endeavour
he
attains
arahantship, upon
is remitted.2
As
regardsthe
24
;
time
at which
was
the held,
Dip. 1.
death.
5. 4 mentions
was
the fourth
This
the
second
of the
year.3
on
reckoningis based
died
on
accordingto
which
the Buddha
day
agree
Vesakha.
Buddhaghosa
The
1
and
Mah.
latter
mentions certainly
the
brighthalf
sikkhapadani.
C.V. XL
Vin.
SeeMahaparinib-
banasutta,
2
I omit
episodeof Udena,
III. 2. 2
13-14. Pit.
See M.V.
(OLDENBERG,
610
i,p. 137).
Smp.
814 20,
15;'Mah. 3. 14-16.
liv
Introduction
month that of the year
l as
fourth
the
was
beginning
of the
Council,
did not begintillthe month Savana. proceeding later addition which we find in the Sum., It is an obviously in all their that not only the Vinaya and the Dhamma, but also the Abhidhamma details,
are
Council.
The
same
is found the
Among
the
NORTHERN
dealing with
Here,
is in
as
First
Council
I mention
agreement with
the
the Southern
tradition
Kasyapa
the
given
number and
of the
bhiksus
in the
second
Vinaya
took
of the Sarvastivadin
place, accordingto this source, in the following order : (1)Dharma, by Ananda ; (2)Vinaya, by Upali;(3)Matrka (i.e. Abhidharma)by Mahakasyapa himself.
worthy of remark that the Dulva puts the accusations Ananda in the time of before the beginning brought against thus before his attainment of arahantship. the proceedings, and Hiuen-thsang4also mention Fa-hian the First Council.
It is The
as
former
gives the
number
of the bhiksus in
a
as
speaks
books', the
tion collec-
also the
Second
According to
100 years
C.V.
XII.
the
Second
Council
is
takes
place
after the
a
Buddha's of the
of
death, and
by
1
the das
The
vatthuni5
moon
Vajjimonks
the year 483
full
of Asalha
JACOBI'S
2
reckoning (seeFLEET,
SEN ART,
J.R.A.S.
1909, p. 20) on
Ed. See
i,p. 69 foil. (1907),p. 148 foil. Life of the Buddha Records, i, pp. Ix-lxi ; ii, pp. 162-164 Kingdoms,
p. 85.
;
LEGGE,
in
Records
5
points,according to
the
see Pali-tradition,
below
Introduction
lv
of monastic In the further a signified relaxing discipline. of its narrative, course too,the C.V. agrees with the Mah. and the rest
comes
of the
SOUTHERN
BUDDHIST the
SOURCES.
The
contrast
out
in living
of stricttendencies.
presence
of the Yesalian
upasakas is given
of Revata, whom the Vajjimonks disciple It bring over to their side (Mah. 4. 30) is called Uttara. is also characteristic that the orthodox monks before they
in full extent.
undertake
the
refutation of
of the
heresies
first
assure
selves themat
consent
Sabbakami, the
Samghathera
is
taking part
in the Council
given
383-
as unanimously
Council in the eleventh year of the reignof Kalasoka 382 B.C.), later documents The put it in the tenth year.3
is considered generally the
we
locality
to be the Valikarama.4
Kutagarasalaof
need attach any
the Mahavana
do not
think which
importanceto
some
probablytakes importancethat
its rise in
standing. misunder-
Still it is of
to
the
Dip.
5. 30
foil, states,
that the heretical monks held a completethe narrative, called Mahasamglti, and that they here separateCouncil,
the
Translation,note POUSSIN,
XII. XII. 2. 4-6 2. 9 Le
to
4. 9.
See
for further
observations
L.
DE
LA
VALLEE 37
1
Museon,
N.S. vi
(1905), p. 276
(1908), p. 88 foil.
C.V. C.V.
=
(=
307s5); Dip.
4. 52 ;
Mah.
4. 62 ; took
Smp.
2947.
But
when
the
Dip. 5.
the Mah.
20
part in
in
the Council
it does
not
contradict
By
took
this
naturally
the the
this
Dip. means
4. 60 and
part
for
Smp.
give
number.
;
Mah.
4. 8. Cf. Mahabodhiv.
966 ; Sasanav.
71
Nik.
Mah.
4. 64.
50,63
Smp.
9415 ; Mahabodhiv.
9620 ; Sasanav.
613 ; Nik.
Samgr.
Ivi
Introduction
out
a
made With
different redaction be
of the
Canonical
Scriptures.
5.
this may
compared
in Mah.
3-4,
the
to according
which
of the Second
Council,
under
the
name
In
the
NORTHERN in the
TRADITION
we
have
accounts
of
the
Dulva,1 from the Tibetan historian Taranatha 2,from Fa-hian and Hiuen-thsang.3 As accordingto the Southern sources so accordingto these form the startingthe ten pointsof the Vajjimonks accounts
second
Council
point of
As
with and
respectto the
mentioned
between of the
Of Pataliputra.4 in
theras
Council
the Yasa
vasi,
we scriptures
=
followingin
=
the
=
Northern
Sarvakama
=
Sabbakami,
Sana-
Yasa,
Revata=
=
Salha
Salha, Sambhuta
Sambhuta
=
Revata,
Kuyyasobhita(?) Khujjasobhita
and
Ajita Ajita.
The
Third
Council.
respect to the Third Council we must, in BUDDHIST since SOURCES depend on SOUTHERN place, that the Northern to this time been accepted Buddhist
With
account
the
first
it has up took
source
no
of this
Assembly of
44-59
the Church.
comes
Our
oldest 30627
is
the Mah.
Dip. 7. 34-43,
5. 228
; then
Smp.
then foil.,
we
refer to
the
folk
may
essential
differences exist.
The of president the Council
was
Tissa
*
the Moggaliputta,
the is
date, the
1
year
236
A.
B.
247
B.
c.
37, 44/"
See ROCKHILL,
Tdran'tthas
pp.
171-180.
in
Geschichte foil.
;
Buddhismus
Indien, iibersetzt
von
SCHIEFNER,
3
p. 41 I.
Cf.
WASSILJEW,
74-75
see
Der
Buddhismus,
I. /., p. 75.
p. 61 foil.
BEAL,
On
ii, pp.
3
LEGGE,
these
wavering traditions
81.
;
below.
When
Cf. Sasanav.
Nik.
Samgr. 9".
Dip. 1. 24, 25
says
Iviii
Introduction
itself adds Dhamma
new
the of
tradition
details.
Speaking
later
at
Vinaya
In my
and
it
then, in
attach
form, makes
Abhidhamma
special importance to
the
of a It gives the impression episodeof Purana (seep. liii). the more since it is justof so genuine historical reminiscence,
such
nature
as
to diminish
was
First Council.
this
There
a
the
of the invent
ing mean-
story. As
statement
of
no
proposalto
not Certainly
than
this
can
be The
provedto
narrator
be in
(D. Sutta
FRANKE.2
as
XVI
D.
II, p.
72
demonstrated
by
OLDENBERG
and
in
greater detail by
importance,
of episode
does L.
VALLEE
to PoussiN,3precisely
the
the
punishment of
Channa.
account
even
They
been
in incorporated
the
only
certain
that be this
because
theyexist in
it
was
It is not of
whether
just
the
words
Subhadda
broughtabout
fact
a
here too it may holdingof the Council, has only followed the Sutta in making
In that
OLDENBERG's5
historicalcharacter
1
3
xxvi i,p.
foil.
18. very
J.P.T.S.
1908, p.
8 foil.
FRANKS,
and
the
precept of
avuso,has
as
dependence,
Because But he when
aptlythat in C.V. XI and XII of 2 (= D. II, p. 154) concerning the use retained. been Here, again, the strictly is the Mahaparinibbana-sutta to form, on
the
found
precept
then
were
in the sutta,he
so
retains it in
that the
his account.
accounts
FRANKE in C.V.
goes
far
as
to argue
of the
Council
only invented
*
to illustrate that
in less readings of etiquette, that they were therefore or more question in all events and circumstances for bhikkhus ',there are good form few who will follow him. I am quite unable to do so. assuredly General L. 1. Cf. also RHYS xi), DAVIDS, Buddhist Suttas (S.B.E.
" " 6
Introduction
of the First Council He disappears.
are
lix
is of the
Subhadda's
words
must
mentioned, in
been
some
sutta, there
also have
brought about by
or
According to
the Council"
whatever
Kajagaha may
If the
not
assume
be called
"
introduction of the
assemblyof monks in is the established fact (seeabove). should narrative in the C.Y. really
D.
XVI, which
the that the
I will
only
fact of the
Council
itself is not
a
put aside.
or
In
case
narrator,
which did
lookingfor
found
not
motive
means
of
introducingthe Council,
connexion
of the
Sutta,a
must
to correspond
reality.1
COUNCIL
The
SECOND
and THIRD
be discussed
that and the that
together.
dasa
It is in the
proceeded from
this
Vesall
vatthuniof
doubtful and and
Vajji-monksbrought
Council
it about.
it is
when
where separationresulted,
it took
whether
at what
yet
third took
place, place
saw,
time.
to
According
the Second
the Southern
was
Buddhist
as tradition,
we
Council
held
B.
in Vesall
itself under
king
Kalasoka
in
in the year
383/2
year
Pataliputtain
led to the
the
c., the third under Dhammasoka first led to the The 247 B.C. from
the Theravada.
The
the community of certain from expulsion elements wrongfully intruded there. is that this distinction between two My opinion now
separate Councils
have the
is
in
fact
correct.
The into
Northern
one
as
dhists Bud-
the
two
and
Dhammasoka
are
one
with
another.
But
righttradition
still preserved
Introduction,p.
inclined
1
xi foil. JACOBI,
Z.D.M.G.
not
to
RHYS
as
give such great weight to the argumentum DAVIDS, Dialogues,ii. 76,77,has discussed
to the First
the value
evidence
Council, and
arrived
at
somewhat
conclusion.
Ix
Introduction
in the
waveringuncertain
to
statements
as
of place
the Council.
According
first schism when
same
the
Tibetan
160 years
tradition
in
the
Dulva1
the
occurred
of the
Buddha,
king
source
which under In
took
But the reigned in Kusumapura. (ROCKHILL, p. 186) also records an assembly 137 placein Pataliputra years after the Nirvana,
Dharmas'oka
Mahapadma
Chinese that
sources
and
2
Nanda.
we
find the
same
uncertainty. The
placed now
death.
Council
is in these
100,
As
now
116, now
the
place of
Vaisali.
arose
the
But
Council
Hiuen-thsang 3
mention
the schism
in
to the Dulva according (1L,p. 182) Taranatha Kusumapura (i.e. Pataliputra). ten
pointstaught by
occasion for
sources a
gave
that
took
The
Chinese
Pataliputra.
has Asokas the
as Evidently,
been
was
said,the failure
the
cause
to
distinguish
confusion.
the two
of the whole
plainfrom
find the
same
fact that
with
contradictions
in the Northern
Hiuen-thsang king of
years
knows the
only one
third
Asoka, Dharmasoka,
But he
the
torical his100
centuryB.C.
puts him
the
after the
Nirvana, that
For
period of
now,
hardly any
century B.C.;
moreover,
names (seeabove, p. xliv), of Pataliputra, know the founder as although we that Pataliputra the capital of the country was beyond dispute before his time. He has thus transferred to Dharmasoka, the we son
Hiuen-thsang,as
also Dharmasoka
of
a Candragupta,
tradition
which
related
to
an
earlier
king.
1
According
ST. B.
to
Bhavya, in ROCKHILL,
As.,V.
3.
JULIEN,
Journ.
p. 182. Cf.
below,
Appendix
3
so
See
n. above, p. Ivi,
express
himself
Introduction
In
years
l*i
the
Tibetan
sources
Asoka But
is
100-160
an
after the
Nirvana.
there the
sion allu-
Southern
tradition, places
Taranatha
110
A.B.
that
in
the but
Tibetan that in
Vinaya
the other
the
date
is
are
sources
the
dates
and
220.
Lastly,in
TAKAKUSU,
and
218
A.B.
the
Chinese
Tripitaka there
:
are,
according to
A.B., 130 A.B.,
four dates
for Asoka
116
A.B., 118
The
last-mentioned
apparently only in
which
But
are
the Chinese of
Sudarsana-vibhasa
Vinaya,
is
translation is
there
very
familiar and
points raised by
them. with
4
monks
of
Vaisali
schism
produced by
associated Bhadra.
they
names
also know
of the five
division
monks
and
also In he
These
latter set
up
dogmas
led to is
were
which
schism.
the
fusion conmore
complete when
years after schism which of the
relates that
under
somewhat
than
100
Nirvana,
then
king
Here
Asoka
in from
of the
are
Mahasamghikas
described.
are
resulted
dogmas, dogmas
the
then, finally,
with the ten
Mahadeva
confounded
points of
It is division
in
this is
a
of
Mahadeva about
there
reminiscence
the Third
Council.
an
But
conjecture is
of L.
DE LA
now
also
confirmed
POUSSIN.
by
He
acute
observation
VALLEE
See
ROCKHILL,
Record p.
/. L, p. 233. 42.
Transl.
A
by Schiefner,p.
Buddhist 217.
p.
of the 14,n. 1, p.
Der
KUSU, TAKA-
See
esp.
Taranatha,
Bhavya
1.
in
ROCKHILL,
L,
p.
186
WASSILJEW,
5
Buddhismus,
L
i,pp.
62-63.
See
ROCKHILL,
?., p. 187, n.
Ixii
establishes the fact
to
l
Introduction
that the five combated
dogmas
of Mahadeva
belong
But
those
which
was on
are
in the
Kathavatthu.
5.
the
Kathavatthu
composed (seeMah.
found
putta Tissa
Thus Southern
to
a new
the occasion
link has been
Council.2
adhere,therefore,
took
the
assumption
and
a
that
second
Council
placeunder
taken
as
Kalasoka The
a
third under
course
of events
as
at the
may,
sources
whole,
'10
be
the
Southern
and
relate.
The
points'are
names
and historical,
must
also
regardas
historicalthe
Moreover, the
into two
division
in
schools
our
is,as
believe,a fact.
must
not
exaggerate
With
sects
notion
of the harshness
of this
separation.
the
have
relations with
attributed
by
Vasumitra
to the
Buddha
the concerning
Buddhist
notes.
The
five 413
Points
of Mahadeva
and
the
vatthu, Katha-
J.R.A.S.
2
1910, p.
J.R.A.S. there
are
foil.
827 and foil,
V. A. SMITH, thus
:
1901,p.
two Southern
particularly p.
concerning
invented
one
839
foil.,
As
different
traditions
the time
a
Second
Council
the
tradition
one, my
has out of
second has
in addition two.
to the be
historical that
were
and
Council
the
It will
as
seen
argument
Asokas the took
follows Northern in
exactly
tradition
time.
oppositecourse:
has
there
two
two
confounded
the
Councils
which
of not
place
their
SMITH'S
argument
has
the defect
explaininghow
the different
tradition
3
regardingthe Second Council arose. That an extraordinarily great age is attributed of certain theras need as testimony against the general hardly be brought forward of the account trustworthiness (KERN, Manual, p. 105). These are the it intended of the to exalt the authority which embellishments was by
theras. Patriarch J.P.T.S.
was
In like of
manner
an
age
of 150 in
years
is attributed
to the
first
the
Dhyana
the Yasa
Sect
China, Bodhidharma.
of the
(SUZUKI,
Council
porary contem-
Second
as a
not certainly
I. 7 foil,appears
He
is
from distinguished
this latter
by
the
epithetKakandakattajo.
Introduction
twelve future schools
of the
'
These
repositories
diversified fruits of my
"
inferiority just as
same so
"
the taste
sons
or
as
the twelve
of my
all honest
and
true,
these
will be the
l
of exposition
doctrine advocated
by
that the Second conjecture completion of the Vinaya and may XII
as
Council contributed
the
to
Dhamma,
may the
though
have been
does not
a
matter
concluding
the is first,
time
Council the
canonical literature
have it in the Pali is
Vinaya,as we now was recension, evidentlycompleted in of the canon proved by mention of portions
of Bairat. Here Asoka
Dhamma
essentials.
in the
This
inscription
ticular par-
recommends
seven
more
six can study. Of these scriptures in the Pali canon.2 less certainty or
now,
with
And
which is proceeding We
see
leads to the
from the
Abhidhamma.
this
allusion, alreadymentioned
which
above, in Mah.
5.
278,
accordingto
MoggaliputtaTissa in order to refute the which errors composed his brought about the Third Council, to the Abhidhamma. Kathavatthuppakarana. But this work belongs
The
of the from the standpoint of the Councils, importance orthodox, lay in the elimination of tendencies which could no longer be regarded as consistent with the faith. But of in Pataliputra to the resolve formed was higher importance bear With Buddhism
beyond
the
borders
on
of its
narrower
home.
this Buddhism
entered
through
the Eastern
World.
1
2
OLDENBERG,
Vin.
Pit.
i,p.
xl ; Z.D.M.G.
52, p.
634
;
foil., against
DAVIDS,
MINAYEFP,
Recherches
surle
RHYS
Dialogues,i,p. xiii.
LIST
OF
ABBEEVIATIONS
A.
Anguttara-Nikaya
Soc.
(ed.
Vol.
MORRIS Indexes
and
HARDY,
Miss
vols.,
1910.
Pali
Text
1885-1900). (ed.
Worterbuch
1855-1875.
vi,
by P.T.S.,
HUNT,
Asl. B.R.
Atthasalim Sanskrit-
E.
MULLER,
von
1897).
und
BOHTLINGK
ROTH,
vols.,
St.
Petersburg,
C.V.
D.
= =
Cullavagga DTgha-Nikaya
(the
Vinaya
RHYS
Pitaka,
DAVIDS
ed.
OLDENBERG,
and
vol.
ii, 1880).
3
(ed.
CARPENTER,
vols.,
P.T.S.
1890-191.1).
(ed.
andtransl.
Dip.
LA. J.As. Jat.
=
Dipavamsa
Indian Journal Jataka
OLDENBERG,
1879).
Antiquary.
Asiatique. (ed. FAUSBOLL,
Journal Journal of of the the Pali 7
vols., 1877-1897).
J. P.T.S.
Text
Society. Society.
(s. HARDY,
J.P.T.S.
J.R.A.S.
Kamb.
Royal
Asiatic
Mah. 61
Kambodja
Mahavamsa
1902-3,
p.
foil.).
(ed.
TRENCKNER and
M.
Majjhima-Nikaya 1888-1899).
CHALMERS,
vols., P.T.S.
ed.
Mahavamsa
(ed.
W.
GEIGER,
1908).
1901).
Mahabodhivamsa
=
(ed. STRONG,
Mahavagga
Dictionary
=
(The
of the
Vinaya
Pali
Pitaka,
OLDENBERG, CHILDERS,
5
vol.
1875.
i, 1879).
Language,
ed.
by
Pit.
The
Vinaya Nikaya
Pitaka,
OLDENBERG,
5
vols.,
1884-1898
1879-1883. vol. 6
Samyutta
Indexes
(ed. FEER,
RHYS of of
vols., P.T.S.
by
Sacred
DAVIDS,
the Buddhists.
1904).
S.B.B.
S.B.E.
Sacred
the
East.
to
Smp.
Sum.
Samanta-Pasadika
(Introd.
S.
in
Vin. and
Pit.
ii,
p.
283
foil.).
vol.
Sumangala-Vilasim
1886).
=
(ed.
RHYS
DAVIDS
CARPENTER,
i,
P.T.S.
Z.D.M.G.
Zeitschrift
der
Deutschen
Morgenlandischen
Gesellschaft.
Map of ANCIENT
CEYLON
SCALE
0
OF
ENGLISH
30
MlftS
40 SO
10
20
Ancient Names
thus
PanjaK
Jaffna
"fc"
Modern Names
thus.-
(gama) Village
"
Mountain pHpabbata)v?'(vapi)-Tank
THE
MAHAVAMSA
CHAPTER
THE
VISIT
OF
THE
TATHAGATA
HAVING of and
a
made
race,
obeisance
I will recite That
to
the
Sambuddha
the pure,
of varied which
was
sprung
content
pure
the
Mahavamsa,
lacking nothing.
the ancient
(Mahavamsa)
here
too
compiled
and there ye
by
too
now
was (sages)
long
drawn
out
knit closely
to
and
contained that
many is free
repetitions. Attend
from such
serene
this
(Mahavamsa)
and handed ye down call awaken Sambuddha
to up
faults,easy joy
and
to
l
to
understand and
remember,
arousing
emotion
it) while
at passages
that that
serene
joy
joy
and
and
emotion
(in you)
times,
serene
emotion. in that
On
seeing
the
Dipamkara,
a
olden
he
our
Conqueror resolved
the
world from and
to
become
Buddha,
had
might release
to
evil.
When
to
he
offered
homage
to
that sage
to to
Sambuddha
likewise
to
Kondanna Kevata
and and
the
Mangala,
the Paduma
Sumana,
the
to
Buddha the
likewise
great sage
and
to
Sobhita,
the
to to
Sambuddha
to
Anomadassi,
the and
Conqueror Narada,
the the to Master
Sambuddha
to to
Padumuttara
to
and and
Tathagata Sumedha,
Tissa and
the
Sujata,
Dham-
Piyadassi
and
Atthadassi,
madassi
to
Siddhattha,
and the the
Conqueror
and the the
Phussa,
buddha Sam-
Vipassi
Sambuddha
Sikhi,
one, to
Vessabhu,
1
mighty
the
Sambuddha
Read
janayanta,
The
occur
referring
terms in the
participle to
*
the
subject implied
and samvega of
in
sunotha.
pasada
serene
joy'
the
'emotion'
also
postscripts
of
of
single chapters
and the
the
Mah. in
blissfulness,joy
vega
Buddha,
its
sam
feeling of
23. 62
and
recoil
world
misery.
B
See
also
with
Mahdvamsa
and
"
1. 10
10
Konagamana, as also to the blessed Kassapa, havingoffered homage to these twenty-four and having received from them of Sambuddhas the prophecy
Kakusandha,
his
likewise to
11
buddhahood (future)
the
filled he, the great hero, when he had ful1 and all perfections reached the highestenlightenment, Buddha sublime Gotama, delivered the world from
suffering.
12
At at
in the Magadha country, the great sage, sitting Uruvela,2 the foot of the Bodhi-tree, reached the supreme enlightenon
13
ment
the
full-moon
day
of the month
Vesakha.3
Seven that he
weeks
he
senses/ while
let
set
himself knew
14
high
(others)
behold
the wheel
of the
rain-months, he
15
rolling law ; and while he dwelt there through the to arahantship.6 brought sixty (hearers)
forth these bhikkhus converted
Cf. Jat.
and
When and
1
he had
when he
sent
had
the
The in
;
ten parami.
i,p.
See
20 foil. RHYS
not
found
p. 177
2
3
the
four
Nikayas.
DAVIDS,
India,
KERN,
second
Manual
or
Buddh
Gaya
of
The
month Buddha
ordinaryIndian
of March
are as
answering
The
in the
names
time
of the
part
months
and follows
part
:"
April.
Indian
lunar
=
(1) Citta (2) Vesakha (3) Jettha (4) A sa] ha (5) S a van a (6) Potthapada (7) Assayuja (8) Kattika (9) Maggasira (10) Phussa (11)Magha (12) Phagguna
See FLEET, J.R.A.S.
4
February : March or March : April. March: April or April:May. April: May or May: June.
May:
June
: :
June
or or
June:
July.
July
July : August.
August or August : September. August: September or September: October. September: October or October: November.
July
October: November: December: November December
or or or
November:
or
December.
December:
:
January February
January. February.
March.
Vasi. With
play on
arahatam
and
vasi
the whole
ed.,p.
Satthim
Arahatam made
gen.
plural is
dependent on
the numeral.
: he Literally
sixtyarahants.
I. 24
The
of Bhadda
3
at
company the
then
Master of
dwell
Uruvela
16
winter
through, for
Now
at
since
was
near
17
hand, and since he saw that away,3 he, the victorious over
among
fain have
to
him
enemies,went
4
seek
eaten
alms
his
18
the
Northern
Kurus
near
and
when
he
had
meal at
evening time
month
the lake
Anotatta,5the Conqueror, 19
at the
in the ninth
of his
buddhahood,
known
full
moon
of
Phussa,6 himself
for the faith.7
Lanka,
to
to win
Lanka
20
For
Lanka
was
the
Conqueror as
that)from
also that the
be driven (first)
And river
he knew
in the midst
Lanka,
on
the fair
21
three yojanas delightful Mahanaga garden, for 22 long and a yojana wide, the (customary)meeting-place the the a yakkhas, there was great gathering of (all) of 23 yakkhas dwellingin the island. To this great gathering
bank, in
that that
yakkhas went
the Blessed
the midst
of
24
assembly, hoveringin the air over their heads, at the he struck terror place of the (future) Mahiyangana-thupa,9
1
For
the
conversion
of
the Timsa
Bhaddavaggiya long
and matted.
see
M.V.
1.14.
2
til a,
ascetics
wearing
known
are
the
hair
See
M.V.
I. 15 ff.
3
not
come.
Kuru
the north
5
One The
great lakes,situated
of the cleanse lunar year.
Himalaya
on
mountains.
month
See note
1. 12.
=
Lit. to From
to purify,
(visodhetum).
Si.
Ceylon.
another nata
the must
nata
(N.
F.)
in
the
(N. PL
Fut.
M.)
be
understood
with
yakkha
nibbasiya
line of the
(Part.
verse,
to
complete the sentence. 9 According to tradition the Bintenne-dagaba (TENNENT, Ceylon, the right bank of the Mahawseliganga,which is on ii, pp. 420-421), called m ah a gang a or simply gang a in the Mah.
B2
Mahavamsa
their hearts forth.1
1. 25
25
The
release them
from
and terrors,
the
Vanquisher,
'
26
of fear,2 spoke thus to the terrified yakkhas destroyer banish this your with
one
I will
27
to
me
sit down/ We
us
The
yakkhas giveyou
28
our
thus
even
Blessed
our
of
he
island.
Give
fear/
Then,
and
29
that
theybestowed
to
on
destroyedtheir terror, cold spread his rug of skin 3 on the ground made there, him, the Conqueror, sitting
had flame
surrounded
it.
by
on
burningheat
Then
near
around
the border.
terrified, they stood Saviour cause the pleasant they had settled place. Then did the
when
31
here
to to
them, and
the
it return
rug
its former
Saviour
32
fold his
of
skin;
devas
assembled, and
in
them the doctrine. The preached and conversion of many kotis of living beings took place,5 the (three) countless were unto those who came refugesand of duty.6 the precepts
their
assemblythe
Master
means
of terror, consisting of
rain,storm,
the
darkness
2
Lit. who
a
confers and
fearlessness
(orfreedom
See 37. 30.
from
a play on peril),
words
3
Lit.
hay a pieceof
be
bhaya.
mistake
to
hide.
a
It would
look
The
underlying
driven
notion to
here the
yakkhas
of the
were
back
They are still to be The meaning of dip a was formerlya wider one ; a later tradition has 'island' in our Cf. also Nagadipa as sense. brought it to mean of a part of Ceylon itself (1. 47 with note). name 8 The term P. Z"., s. v.) dhammabhisamaya (see CHILDEKS, the attainment unconverted of of the four means man one by an is an indefinite great number, according Koti paths (ofsanctification).
' '
island.
ment. geographical statethe is that simply expressed highlands (giri) in the interior found in Ceylon in later times. for
a
clear
to the
6
Indian
ca
system equal
silesu take thita
to ten
millions.
for expression the adherence
Saranesu
the
is .the
of
laity. They
his
refuge (sarana) in the Buddha, his to keep certain binding community, and undertake
their See notes
to 1. 62.
I. 44
The
Visit
of the Tathagata
of the Sumanakuta-
The
33
mountain,1 who
the
attained
to
the
fruit of
entering into
craved of him who should be worshipped, path of salvation,2 something to worship. The Conqueror,the (giver of)good to 34 his he who had pure and blue-black locks, beings, passing living him a handful of hairs. hand over his (own) head,bestowed on he had 35 And this in a splendidgolden urn, when he, receiving laid the hairs upon
heap of many-colouredgems, seven cubits round,piledup at the placewhere the Master had sat,covered and worshipped them. with a thupa of sapphire them over had died,the thera named When the Sambuddha Sarabhu,
a
36
37
of disciple
even
the thera
Sariputta, by his
miraculous
power
received,
38
the funeral pyre, the collar-bone of the Conqueror and Lanka), and, with the bhikkhus all around brought it hither (to from covered cetiya, the worker (thenhe),
same 4
it
over
with
39
of
miracles,
40 41
from again thupa twelve cubits high,departed named of king Devanampiyatissa's The son thence. brother, covered and (again) Uddhaculabhaya, saw the wondrous cetiya cubits high. The king Dutthagait over it thirty and made
having made
the
mani, dwellingthere
built the
our a
while
mantle
over cetiya
Mahiyangana-thupa completed.
island
as a
When
he had
thus made
43
fit
valiant
are
the mighty ruler, for men, dwelling-place for Uruvela. great heroes,departed
Here ends
the Visit to
Mahiyahgana.
the
Now
the
most
compassionateTeacher,
Conqueror, 44
in rejoicing
the
world,when
dwelling
Sumanakuta
Peak.
of the and
a
Sotapatti
',who
man.
stage
to
stream
has As
attained to the
'
who
has
entered
the
of
a converted sanctification,
second
grade
see
the notes
to 15. 18
and
3
13. 17. On
medavannapasana,
Mah.
note to 15. 167.
stones
of the 355.
of fat,fat-coloured, see
*
ed.,p.
See
6
at Jetavana
war, 46
l
Mahavamsa
in the fifth year of his
1. 45
45
buddhahood, saw
like to
come
that
to
caused
by
gem-set throne,was
Mahodara
;
pass
between
and
the nagas
and
and
he,the
and
uncle and nephew, Culodara, Sambuddha, on the uposathain the early Citta, morning,
47
day of
took
soughtthe Nagadlpa.2
naga
That
same
Mahodara in
a
was
miraculous
49
power,
a
naga-kingdom
that
covered half
thousand
sister had
been
50
was
a
His of
mothers
givento
51
his mother
had
died and
therefore this
of
threatening ; and
with
52 53
of the mountains
armed
miraculous
power.
rajayatana-tree fair habitation, it in Jetavana, his own and, holding standing the Conqueror, like a parasol he,with the Teacher's leave, over
a
The
deva
named
Samiddhisumana
took
54
attended him
very On
to that
deva had
the
dwelt.3 That spotwhere he had formerly in Nagadlpa. a man been, in his latest birth, thereafter the
spot where
55
saw
56
reborn in that
tree
pleasant
57
stood afterwards outside at (thetree) the side of the gate-rampart.4 The God of all gods saw (in an this) advantage for that deva, and, for the sake of the for our land, he brought good which should spring(therefrom) it
him with his tree. (toLanka) together Hovering there in mid-air above the battlefieldthe Master,
A
and Jetavana-garden,
hither
58
park
and
VOGEL,
J.R.A.S.
Savatthi in the Kosala monastery near country (see 1908, p. 971 foil.), presentedto the Master by Anatha-
foil.
north-western
part
of
Ceylon.
I. e. to
Nagadlpa.
'
Kotthaka
battlemented
'. p.
See
M.V. 1.
VIII.
11, n.
Mahavamsa
pass
i. 70
70
had
world, returned
Here
Nagadipa.
71
the naga-king Maniakkhika year after this, and invited him, togetherwith the sought out the Sambuddha In the
third
72
73
eighthyear after he had attained to in Jetavana, buddhahood, when the Vanquisherwas dwelling the Master, set forth surrounded by five hundred bhikkhus,on the second day of the beautiful month of Vesakha, at the fullmoon,
brotherhood.
In
the
and
when
the
hour the
of the
meal
was
announced
the
74
of Vanquisher,prince and
wise, forthwith
went to the
putting on
canopy
taking his
of
alms-bowl
Kalyanl country,
a
75
habitation
gems,
Maniakkhika.
the
Under
decked
with
76
the Kalyam(afterwards) with the brotherhe took his place, was built, cetiya together hood of bhikkhus,upon a precious throne-seat. And, greatly the naga-king with his following served celestial rejoicing, queror, food, both hard and soft, to the king of truth, the Conwith his followers.
raised upon
spot where
77
78
to the whole world, had Teacher,compassionate the doctrine there, he rose, the Master, and left the preached Sumanakuta. And after to sight traces of his footsteps on plain
When
the
he
had
as
it
him pleased
at
Dlghavapi.1
at
And the
the brotherhood
80
up to
meditation,to
from that
the
spot. Then
Sage
81
fit and knowing well which places were place, of the (later) unfit he went to the place Mahameghaat After he had seated himself with his disciples
is
The
Dlghavapi
about in 30 the
in the Eastern
Province,
Baid to be
miles
large dagaba
is
neighbourhood
was
a
of the
tank.
PARKER,
Ancient
The
Mahameghavana
park
south
of the
Anuradhacapital
I. 84
The
Visit
of the Tathdgata
Bodhi-tree
to
the
the
place,
Master the
where
gave
the
sacred
up
came
afterwards
;
to
be,
himself
meditation
and
likewise and
2
Great
Thupa1
the
stood in
(in
the
later
days)
there
(afterwards)
he
rose
thupa
Thuparama
he
went to
stood.
up
from
the
the
place
Leader
to
of the
assembly
of
(of
83
bhikkhus)
he,
the
had
uttered
assembly
all
devas,
of
lightenment, en-
Enlightened,
returned
trodden
Jetavana.
the
paths
the of
boundless
to
come,
wisdom,
and of
asuras
looking
in nagas
to
the
time
so
84
time the
knowing
and
that and
highest
in
good
Lanka,
this
island
three
"
times,
"
he, the
this
compassionate
radiant with
Enlightener
the
world;
came
therefore
isle,
light
of
truth,
to
high
honour
among
faithful
believers.
Here
ends
the
Visit
to
Kalyani.
Here
ends
first
chapter,
called
'
The for
Visit
of
the
Tathagata
and emotion
\ in
of
Mabavamsa,
compiled
the
serene
joy
pious.
pura
and the
was
presented
to
the
priesthood
See
of
p.
as
an
arama
or
monastery
11. 2.
by
1
king
Devanampiyatissa.
15.
foil,
and
note
to
The
Ruwanwseli-dagaba
Anurddhapura,
Anuradhapura.
23
SMITHER,
Ancient
tural Architec-
Remains,
p.
2
foil.; PARKER,
Ceylon,
279 A p. 1. 55
e.
foil.
monastery
263
'
in
Anuradhapura.
note
now
SMITHER,
30. in
1. c., p.
1 foil. ;
PARKER,
1. c.,
3
foil.
Cf.
to
17.
Stone-cetiya,'
Selacaitya
297 foil.
Anuradhapura.
SMITHER,
I. c.,
p.
PARKER,
I c., p.
CHAPTER
II
THE
RACE
OF
MAHASAMMATA
SPRUNG
of For in
the the
race
of
king
of
was
the world
Sage.
2
was a
beginning
of
the
king
named the
Mahasammata,
two
Vararoja, and
3
Kalyanakas,1 Uposatha
Upacara,
and
and he
the who he
two, Caraka
bore who and
two
2
and
name
Cetiya
Mucalinda
and
the bore
Mahamucala,
the
name
Sagara
and
and
Sagaradeva;
Suruci, Patapa
Sudassana
sons
Anglrasa
5 6
Ruci
and
also
Mahapatapa Neru,
two
and and
the
two
Panadas also
likewise,
His
Accima.
and
was
grandsons,
Then
these
lifetime
and
immeasurably (long),
followed
dwelt
a
in
Kusavatl,
Rajagaha,
and
Mithila.3
hundred
kings,4
and
(then) fifty-six,and
Dip.
3. 6. and
(then) sixty,
I.
e.
Kalyana
and
Varakalyana.
Panada
Mahapanada,
Sudassana
Mahasudassana,
Neru
and
8
Mahaneru.
Kusavatl is the
was
later
Kusinara.
of
See
note and
on
3. 2.
Rajagaha,
situated
in
now
Rajgir, Bengal
The in
4
the
capital
Tirhut,
Accima
Magadha,
of Videha. to
Mithila,
the
district
that
dynasties Dip.
of
from
Kalarajanaka
number of The each
are
dealt
with sprung
in
3. 14-37.
Besides
(i)the
cities
of the
princes
and and
dynasty,
each
the line
(ii)capital
are
period,
the (iii)
names are
king
:
mentioned.
numbers
100 56
at
,
Pakula
(?)
the
,
last
being
"
Arimdana.
Ayujjha
Baranasi
Duppasaha. Ajitajana.
Brahmadatta.
60
84,COO
36 32 28 22
Kapilanagara Hatthipura
Ekacakkhu
Kambalavasabha.
Purindadadeva.
Vajira
Madhura
Sadhina.
" " " ,,
Dhammagutta.
II. 15
TJie Eace
of Mahasammata
11
8 thirty-two, thousand,and then further thirty-six, eighty-four then further twenty-eight, seventeen, eighteen, twenty-eight,
fourteen fifteen,
five ; and
nine, seven, twelve, then further twentytwelve and (again) twelve,and twenty-five, (again)
;
with Makhadeva thousand eighty-four thousand coming at the head, and (oncemore) eighty-four unto with Kalarajanakaat the head ; and sixteen even these descendants (of Mahasammata) reignedin Okkaka; and in their due
10
11
groups The
order, each
was
Candima,
his and
and
in his
12
13
Sihavahana
and
Sihassara:
these
were
14 thousand in number were grandsons. Eighty-two and grandsonsof king Sihassara; Jayasena the royal sons the Sakya kings 15 the last of them. as was They are known of Kapilavatthu.1 The great king Slhahanu was Jayasena's
dynasty of Makhadeva The last princewas Nemiya, father of followed by Samamkura, then by Asoka ; this was followed by a dynasty of 84,000 princesreigningin Baranasl. The last was followed Dhammasena, by Vijitasena, Vijaya. He was Nagasena, Samatha, Disampati, Renu, Kusa, Mahakusa, Navaratha, Dasaratha, Rama, Bilaratha, Cittadassi, Atthadassi, Sujata, Okkaka, Sagaradeva was (84,000) reigned in Mithila. Kalarajanaka. These were
son
The
of
Makhadeva
the
and
so
on.
v.
The
same
in
Atthakatha, Mah.
the Tika.
T. 81n-8333.
The
Kanib.
Mah.,
1
729-789, follows
site of Buddha's
The
Gotama
the capitalof the Sakya tribe and Kapilavatthu, is probably the present Tilaura Kot in birthplace,
Nepal.
See RHYS
DAVIDS,
Buddhist
India, p.
18
n.
12
16
1 7
Mahavamsa
and
11. 16
son,
daughter Jayasena's
there
were was a
was
named
Yasodhara.
In
Devadaha and
princenamed
children.
Devadahasakka, Anjana
Kaccana
was
Kaccana of
his two
the
first
18
consort
Yasodhara.
19 20
Slhahanu, but the Sakka Anjana's queen was Anjana had two daughters,Maya and Pajapatl,
two
sons,
and
also
Dandapani
had five
and
sons
the and
Sakiya Suppatwo
buddha.
But
Slhahanu
daughters:
Amitodana,
and
two
and
Pamita
these
were
the
five
sons
21 22
of the
:
Sakka
Suppabuddha was
and Devadatta. and queens,
Amita;
children
Bhaddakaccana
Maya
of the
Pajapatl were
Suddhodana's
the
son
23
and of Maya was our Conqueror. great king Suddhodana of Mahasammata, thus succeeding, Of this race was born, the Great in unbroken line, Sage,he who stands at the head of all
men
24
of
lordlybirth.
The
consort
of
;
the
prince
son was
Bhaddakaccana
her
Rahula.
25 26
Bimbisara friends
was
and
the
were
prince Siddhattha
the fathers of
were
likewise
both.
The
older than
he
27
was
left
and
he
had
striven
28
six years
wisdom, he,
The virtuous
fifteen years
old when
he
was
anointed
king
29
by
his Two
his
own
coming
and
sixteen years had gone by since to the throne, the Master preachedhis doctrine.
30
fifty years he reigned; fifteen years of his reign passedbefore the meeting with the Conqueror,and yet thirtyseven years (of his reign)followed in the lifetime of the
Tathagata.
Bimbisara's years after
son,
31 32
the foolish
he,
of
the
Ajatasattuthe Sage entered into nibbana and thereafter did he,Ajatasattu, reignyet twenty-four years. eighth year
1
I. e. Sakkodana
and
Sukkodana.
II.
33
TJie
Eace
of
Mahasammata
13
The
Tathagata,
himself
He who
up,
who
has
reached
summit
of of
all
virtue,
33
yielded
nence.
albeit
free,
power
imperma-
shall shall
contemplate
attain
unto
(same)
of
dread-begetting
impermanence
the
end
suffering.
Here
ends
the the
second
chapter,
called
The
Race
of
sammata Maha-
', in
emotion of the
Mahavamsa,
compiled
for
the
serene
joy
and
pious.
CHAPTER
III
THE
FIRST
COUNCIL
WHEN
Conqueror
lived
the
incomparable,
and
at
he
who
has
the
five
2
eyes/
in
eighty-four years
in all
two
was
had
duties
world,
ways,
then
holy place
of
between
the
sala-trees,3 on
the
day
tinguished. ex-
the
month
Vesakha,
light
world
Beyond
there
and
all
reckoning
and
in
numbers,
did
vessas
bhikkhus and
assemble
khattiyas
Seven
brahmans,
hundred thera
suddas,
and
gods
were
likewise.
among
thousand
leading
was
bhikkhus
them,
the
Mahakassapa
at
that
time
the
5
samghatthera.
When
he had and
performed
the
all rites
due
to
the
(dead) body
of
the
6
Master
that
the after
doctrine
the Lord
of the of
might
seven
days
the
World,
gifted
him
powers,4 had
of the
passed
7
into
nibbana, bethinking
5
evil words
he
aged
1
Subhadda
and
also
bethinking
by
the eye
(the Master)
bodily
he
sees
The
five
eyes
possessed
the to eye
Buddha
ara
the
(mamsacakkhu),
that
comes
heavenly
in the
(dibba0)
by
which of
pass of
universe, the
and truth. in the
eye
understanding Buddha-eye by
(knowledge),
means
2
the
omniscience,
the the
finally the
of which A town of
he the
beholds clan of
saving
Mallas,
territory of
the
present
Nepal.
3
Shorea On
Robusta.
the
see
dasa
balani,
Manual
ten
kinds Indian
of
knowledge,
p. 62
;
peculiar
CHILDERS,
to
Buddha,
s.v.
KERN,
of
Buddhism,
P./).,
0
balam.
=
Vuddha he
was
vuddhapabbajita
'. On I the
'who of
had
not
see
become
monk
=
till PH.
old
speech
pp.
Subhadda,
C.V.
XL
1. 1
Vin.
ii. 284.
KERN,
I,
101-102.
16
16
Mahavamsa
I IT. 16
there, they
with this to
during the
first of the
rain-months
announced
they had
was
When
the
f
of repair
we
king
'
Now
will hold
'
council/
'
To
the
question,
vided) pro'
What
theyanswered
When the had place
be place (should
asked
:
meetings/
king had
been
built
Where
were (these
to
be)? by
the
'
and the
a
pointedout by them,
19
he with
all
speed had
to
by
the
side of the
Vebhara
20
Rock
the entrance
it
was) like
of assembly-hall he
adorned
2 1
in every
way
caused
mats precious
be
spread
22
23
24
25
of the bhikkhus. to the number Placed on the south according side and facingthe north a lofty and noble seat was prepared of the hall a high seat was for the thera, and in the middle the east and worthy of the prepared for the preacher,2 facing blessed (Buddha)himself. So the king bade them tell the theras : cMy work is finished,' and the theras addressed the thera Ananda, the joy-bringer : hoves To-morrow, Ananda, the assembly(comes together) ; it bethee not to take part in it since thou art stillpreparing thee (for therefore strive thou, unwearied the higheststate),3 in good/ Thus spurredon, the thera put forth due effort
t
is the term for assembly of the church, Dhammasamgiti council. The original meaning is generalrecitation of the canonical texts which, indeed, takes assembly of the church place in an thera recites the texts in the following manner eminent and an : sentence by sentence and the assembly repeats them after him in with dhammais connected chorus. In this way dhammasamgiti understand a settlingor redaction of the samgaha, by which we also can canonical only be carried out in the manner texts, which stated. Comp. J.P.T.S. 1909, pp. 31, 32. 2 directs the is the Thera seat for the president,who sana monk the who for the the same recites, assembly; dhammasana is to be taken word uttama literally. 3 Still i.e. not a sekha, an arahant, who has reached the highest is ; he who grades of preparation degree. This is preceded by seven
1
still at
one
of these
is sekha
'a learner'.
See
J.P.T.S.
1909, p.
217.
in.
36
17
and
arahant
without
being confined
26
a
to any
of the four
postures.1
27
On
the second
met
the bhikkhus
day of the second month of the rainyseason hall. Leaving in that splendid together
arahants The thera
vacant for Ananda, the fitting place to their rank. on chairs, according
seated themselves
Ananda,
an
to make
28
known
went
to not
them
that he had
reached But
the state of
some
arahant,
:
thither.
?
when the
seat
asked
Where
prepared for him, 29 out of the ground or passing through the air.2 rising Together the theras chose the thera Upali to speak for3 the 30 vinaya,for the rest of the dhamma4 they chose Ananda. laid on himself (thetask)of 3 1 The great thera (Mahakassapa) asking questions touchingthe vinaya and the thera Upali it. to explain (was ready)
is the thera he took
in the thera's chair, the former asked the latter the 32 Sitting questionstouching the vinaya Upali,seated in the ; and chair,expounded(thematter). And as this best 33 preacher's in turn all (the of the vinayaexpoundedeach (clause) master the vinayaafter him. knowing the custom, repeated bhikkhus) 34 Then the thera (Mahakassapa) taking(thetask) upon himself the dhamma, him 5 the chief of those questioned concerning
who
had
most
often
heard
the
treasure35
keeper6 of the Great Seer (the Buddha); and the thera Ananda, taking (thetask) upon himself,taking his seat in And the preacher's chair,expounded the whole dhamma.
1
36
the
iriyapatha;
They
Ananda
are
the four
postures of
as:
an
ascetic
are
here.
described
an
standing,sitting,
at the moment
walking,lying down.
when
2
became
arahant
he Lit.
was
'
on
the
pointof
of the
lyingdown.
that he
can use
the
path
powers
the miraculous
3
bearer
s.v.
dhuram-
dhara
4
The
dhamma
5
monastic
the discipline,
I. e. Ananda. Tika
=
dhammabhanda-
true doctrine.
1 8
Mahavam
sa
I II.
3 7
all
the
(theras) repeated
knowing
the dhamma
all
that in
was
contained
after
in
the
trine doc-
'turn
the
sage
of
the
Videha Thus
to
country.
in the
seven
37
months
was
that
compiling
by
those thera
to at
of
the
dhamma bent
save
whole world's
world
completed
'The
message
(theras) Mahakassapa
on
38
the
whole the
has
made
39
blessed
endure
end six in of times
five the
hundred
years/
the earth
rejoicing
encircled
thought,
ocean
the
council,
and
many
40
by
were
the
shown
trembled the
world the had
wondrous
signs
the
canon
in
ways.
Now the
since
4
was
compiled
The theras
by
who
theras
called
First Council
tradition.1
held
to
(thereby)
allotted
theras
brought
span
great
of
blessing
world,
nibbana. the of the
having
life, entered,
overcome
all, into
with
Also
who
have
darkness
in the
light
world's
of
insight,
darkness,
death.
great
been
shining
lights
conquest
the dread the
have
extinguished
will the wise
man
by
tempest
of
Therefore
renounce
joy
of
life.
ends
the
third
chapter,
for
called the
serene
The
First
Council
emotion
', in
of
Mahavamsa, pious.
compiled
joy
and
The
oldest
of Pit.
the
First 284
Council
is
contained
in
the iii
C.V.
XI
(OLDENBERG,
ii,
p.
foil.)
Vinaya
Texts,
(S.B.E.
xx),
p.
370
foil.
CHAPTEE
IV
THE
SECOND
COUNCIL
WHEN the
Ajatasattu's son
slew
Udayabhaddaka
years.
had
slain him
he,
son
1
2
Udayabhaddaka's
Anuruddha's
these fools,
son
Anuruddhaka Munda
over
(hisfather)and
Traitors in the and of
named
3
did the
likewise.
(sons)reigned
kingdom;
reign
slew
these
two
(kings)eight
then did
the
4
years
elapsed.
son
Hun-la's
Nagadasaka
the citizens when
his
father
and
evildoer Then
of
reign twenty-four
were
years.
wroth, saying :
'
This the
is
dynasty by
the
him
parricides/and they
met
they
had
banished
togetherand
was
the (since)
to
minister
name
Susunaga
His the the
proved good
be
king, mindful
years.
son
of the
of all. He
7 8
Kalasoka year
reigned twenty-eight
of Kalasoka's of the
many
the gone
end
of since
tenth
reign
century
of the
by
did
parinibbana
time in Vesall
Sambuddha. bhikkhus
the Ten
2 Vajji-clan
At
that
shamelessly teach
'
that
'
Points
were
lawful,
namely
1
Salt
in the
horn',
MSS. 1. 5025
Two
In
the
Sinhalese
Cf. D.
this
name
in
the
form
Udayi-
bhaddaka1.
J.P.T.S.
2
Udayibh0
the
Udayabh0
RHYS
1888,
the
pp.
p.
14). The
Dip.
of
On
confederacy
25-26. On
Vajjis
ibid.,p.
n.
see
DAVIDS,
India,
Vesali,
p.
40.
According
1902,
E. p.
27,
1 ; J.R.A.S. 58'
267
modern
Basar
(N.
north
lat. 25"
20",
long. 85"
11'
30")
in
District
The
Muzaffarpur,
the iii
of Patna. Council
pp.
history of
Texts,
Second
is also
given
Here
in the C.V.
C.V.
XII.
XII. 1. 9 ;
Cf.
Vinaya
(S.B.E. xx\
386
foil.
2. 8) the
explained:
the custom of
(i) Sihgilonakappa,
in order
to
season
putting
received. of
salt in
horn
vessel,
foods, when
the
custom
c
Dvangulakappa, (ii)
taking
the
midday
meal,
20 the
1 1 milk
" '
Malidvamsa
IV.
11
Consent
Gold When
and
so
forth '.
came
this
to the
ears
of the
thera
Yasa, the
son
of
12
the
brahman
Kakandaka,
was
gifted with
about in
powers,1who
betook
13
wandering
In
the six
settle the
a placed
the
vessel made
: lay-folk
of metal
'
filled with
water
and
had
3
said to the
14
Bestow
kahapanas
'This is
and
so
on.'
;
The
thera forbade
'
with
the words
unlawful
even
give nothing!
Then
as
they threaten
the sun's
shadow
the thera
had not
time, prescribed
long
custom
passed
meridian
by
there
more
than the
breadth. two-fingers'
of
(iii) Gamantarakappa,
after the
going
into
the
village,
meal,
and
eatingagain,if invited.
(iv)Avasakappa, the custom of holding the nposatha-feast ately separdistrict. in the bhikkhus same dwelling by complete inthe carrying out of official acts by an (v) Anumatikappa, chapter, on the suppositionthat the consent of absent
bhikkhus
was
obtained
afterwards.
(vi)Acinnakappa, the custom of doing something because of practice. preceptor's after milk, even taking unchurned (vii) Amathitakappa,
mealtime.
the
the
palm-wine. Jalogikappa, drinking unfermented (viii) of mats the use which to sit on nisidanam, (ix)Adas.akam if they were without not of the prescribed were fringe. size, acceptinggold and silver. (x) Jataruparajatam, 1 abhinna six The Chalabhinna. are (i)the power of iddhi, of hearing, (iii) the the heavenly ear, i. e. supranormal power (ii) the knowledge of former to read the thoughts of others,(iv) power of seeing, existences, (v) the heavenly eye. i.e. supranormal power The last of these abhinna of the asavas. (vi)the abandonment
is
the
one
of the signs of
i.
an
arahant.
See
RHYS
Buddha,
foil. The
2
62; AUNG,
Compendium
is mentioned
DAVIDS,
224
Mahavana-monastery
Records
BEAL,
Buddhist
3
of the
Western
1464
karsapana)
grams. See
square
copper
coin,weighing
; RHYS
RAPSON,
Indian
Coins, p. 2
DAVIDS,
Buddhist
India, p. 100.
iv. 25
The
with the penance He asked for
Second
Council
21
Yasa
called the
one
folk.1
with
to
bear
him
into the
to cityproclaiming1
was teaching
accordingto
to thrust
the dhamma.
When
the bhikkhus
heard what
him
out
to
16
surrounded
the
thera's
17
thera left
it,risingup and
he forthwith and
passingthrough the
sent
messengers
went
to
18
Avanti;
he
himself
to the
Ahogahga-mountain and
Sanavasi.3
Sambhuta
eightyfrom Avanti, all 19 free from the asavas,4came togetheron the Ahogahga. The bhikkhus here from this and that region who met 20 together in all ninetythousand. When were they had all conferred together they,knowing that the deeplylearned thera Revata 21 Sixtygreat theras
from Pava and of
Soreyya5
them When
who
was
free from
the
asavas,
was
the
out.
chief
among
at that
time, went
to
thence
to seek him
set
out
wishing
travel
Vesall.
whence
met
him
he 22 (by his divine ear) the way to easily,6 upon the evening at the spot 23 the morning (thetheras) Sambhuta
had
There
Yasa,
as
the
thera
24
charged him to do, at the end of the recital of the sacred himself to the great thera Revata, quesword, addressing tioned him on the Ten Points. The thera rejected them, and
1 2
25
Patisaraniyakamina,
Kosambi
on
see
KERN, Manual,
was
p.
87, note
8.
capital of the Vatsas or Vamsas. Pava the region of Ujjeni; that of the Mallas ; Avanti was RHYS DAVIDS, Buddhist India, pp. 36, 26, 28. Instead of Paveyyaka of the Sinhalese MSS. read some Patheyyaka. But also at M.V. VII. Ftn. 1 Pit. 1. i. 2535)the Burmese MSS. have Paveyyaka. ( See Fin. Texts, iii (S.B.E. xx),p. 394, note 2.
the Yamuna
the
Anasava,
Not
see
p.
15,n.
far from
Takkasila
(Fm.
Pit.
iii, p. 11) ; KERN, Manual, p. 36. Cf. for the detailed description, C.V. (S.B.E. xx),p. 396.
6
XII. 1. 9
Fm.
Texts, iii
22 when
he had
MaMvamsa
heard the matter, he said
:
'
IV.
26
Let
us
make
an
end
(ofthis dispute)/
26
27
bhikkhus,too,in order to win support, sought the thera Revata. Preparing in abundance the thingsneedful for ascetics/ they took ship with all speed and went to Sahawhen the mealtime came.2 bestowing food sumptuously jati,
The The thera
heretical
28
asavas,
who
lived at
'
Sahajati,
of Pavii drew
having thought
29
the
: matter, perceived
Those
hold
near
the
true
doctrine/
said
(
And Stand
the thou
to him
and
and doctrine/
he
30
31 32
33
that he would ever stand firm in the doctrine. replied They3 took those needful things(thatthey had brought as and sought the thera Revata,but the thera did not take gifts) their part and dismissed (the pupil)who took their part.4 shameless They went thence to Vesali, they went from there and told king Kalasoka to Pupphapura,5 Guarding our : Master's perfumedchamber dwell in the Mahavana-vihara we in the Vajjiterritory; but bhikkhus in the country dwelling will take are coming, great king, with the thought : We
(
Forbid
misled
them
!'
to (back) ninetythou-
When
they had
Here in
thus
the
Vesali.
35 36
and eleven hundred Sahajati sand bhikkhus under the thera Revata, were come together to bringthe dispute end. to a peaceful And the thera would not end the dispute in the presence of those with whom save
Samanaka
is allowed
parikkhara
s.v.
that
which
monk
parikkharo. underlying meaning is that they indulged in riotous living of something rich their journey. Vissagga has the implied sense on with The Tika luxuriant. and paraphrases bhattavissaggam bhattaparivesanam, bhattaparibhogam. I. e. the Vajjianmonks.
Cf.
CHILDERS,
The
On
this
passage
see
Mah.
However,
now
refers since the passage evidently preferthe reading pakkhagahim, Uttara to Revata's (C.V.XII. 2. 3),who allowed himself to be disciple over won by the Vajjianmonks. of Pataliputta the City of Flowers, a name (now Pupphapura, of at that time of the kingdom Magadha. Patna),capital
5
24
Mahavamsa
son
IV.
49
49
of
Kakandaka,
who
Sumana, these
to decide
on
were
Pava.
were
50
Now
those
free from
5 1
quietand solitary for them by Valikarama. There,in the beautiful spotprepared the greattheras took up their abode, theywho the young Ajita,1
the
asavas
betook
the
52
knew
the
thoughts of
the Greatest
of
Sages.
And
the
great
54
the thera questioning, questioned Questioned Sabbakami each one of those points. on successively by him the great thera Sabbakami thus gave judgment : All And when, to tradition/ these points are unlawful, according in due order, they they had ended (theirtask)in this place, in the and answer, in like manner, did all again, with question
'
55
presence
And
great theras
heretical bhikkhus
maintained
was
Points. the
samghattheraon
did he number
the
earth,one
twenty
and
years
pada.
57
son
Sabbakami
Yasa, the Salha, Revata, Khujjasobhita, the six theras, of Kakandaka, and Sambhuta Sanavasika,
of pupils
58 59
were
the thera
Ananda;
had
but
Vasabhagamika
the
and
Sumana, the
These
two
were theras,
of pupils
eight fortunate
and together,
was
theras
beheld
Tathagata
bhikkhus thera
in
60
hundred
and
twelve thousand
the
had
Revata
then
61
the chief.
At that
hold
seven
council,
hundred
62
out
troop
with
arahants
meanings and
(thosechosen were) the four special standing sciences,underso forth,2 knowing the tipitaka.
is confirmed by C.V. XII. reading daharenajitenettha kho 2. 7: atha samgho pi Ajitam sammanni ayasinantam bhikkhunam theranam asanapannapakam (Vin.Pit. ii. 30534). 8 Pabhinnatthadinananam Tika the is explained in as atthadippaatthapatisambhidadipabhedagatanananam; ti bhedagatehi patisambhidananehi samannagatanam
1
The
TV.
66
TJie Second
these
Council
the Valikarama the thera
25
All
(theras met)
the
in
protected by
Revata,
the
63
Kalasoka, compiled
under the
leadershipof
Since time in
(and)
64
dhamma.1
in
they accepted
and months. had
dhamma
past
proclaimed afterward,
held
the
work of
eight
renown
theras
high
Second
in
65
in them
attained perished,
of time
we
unto
nibbana.
us
When
bethink
of
were
the
death
of
the
sons
of
the
66
Universal
had
on
Teacher, who
all that
giftedwith
had of forms
attained
is to
attain,who
blessings
may
3
three
then existence,2
comes
we
lay to heart
the entire
into
being
and
Here in the
ends
the fourth
called chapter,
for the
'
The
Second
Council emotion
',
Mahavamsa,
compiled
serene
joy and
of the
pious.
adiggahanenettha gahitani.
the
attho;
nani possess the four
dhammapatisambhidadini
means
na-
The
compound
By
'who literally,
specializedknowledge grasping
Law the
of the
forth,1 that
'a transcendent
;
is,
patisambhida.
in the of all
this term of
a
is understood
text
or
faculty
meaning
subject (attha)
Buddha and
in
;
grasping
in
things
as
taught by
in
the
(dhamma)
discussion
exegesis (nirutti);
'.
readiness
expounding
1. 88. note
(patibhana)
1
See
Patisambhida-magga
See
are
Akarum
dhammasamgaham.
three forms 'sensual P.D. of
to 3. 17.
The
existence
kamabhava,
in the
rupabhava,
formless three ence1 existworlds the
arupabhava
(CHILDERS,
so
is,existences part
this of the the worlds. is the
a
named,
which
together
of
the
universe
called
sattaloka,
the eleven
beings.'
the
In
kamaloka sixteen
includes
worlds,
four
rupaloka
samkhata
sense
higher, and
of
the
arupaloka
3
highest, celestial
:
Samkhatasarakattam
and
means
synonym and
sam-
khara,
world.
in
the
s. v.
widest
material
transitory
See
CHILDERS,
samkharo.
CHAPTER
THE
THIRD
COUNCIL
THAT the
redaction
of the the
true
dhamma,
which
was
arranged
and the
at
beginning by
that of in
great theras
theras.
first of One hundred
Mahakassapa
and
others,
school
is called of
the
united
years.
was
the
theras
other
the
But
afterwards
arose
schools the
theras
The the
heretical
Second
bhikkhus,
subdued
4
by
Council,2 in
the
name
all
ten
thousand,
founded
school
which
bears
Mahasamghika.3
From
5
arose
the
arose
Gokulika
the
sect.
and Pannatti
Ekavyoharika
sect
(schools).
Bahulika,
From from
Gokulika the
and
the
are
Cetiya
and
(Thus)
two
more
there
six,
the the
Mahasamghika,
followers of
yet
(groups) parted
:
the
Thera-doctrine
the
Mahimsasaka
the
Vajjiputtaka
the
bhikkhus.
And
and the
there
parted
from
likewise the
8
Dhammuttariya
the SammitI
Bhadrayanika bhikkhus,
bhikkhus. Vaj jiputtiya
two
Chandagarika,
the who
and
the
From
Mahimsasaka held
bhikkhus
bhikkhus
9
by the Sabbattha-school
From the Sabbattha
guttika
last the
bhikkhus.
these Sutta
arose
piya, from
10
the These
Samkantika
are
bhikkhus,
sect.
twelve
are
together
added
(those
schools
of)
named
11 12
the
Thera-doctrine;
and in these the
thereto
the
together are
second
eighteen.
arose
Thus
century
afterwards.
seventeen
schools,
and
and the
other
schools
arose
The
Hemavata
Aoariyavada
the true and
stands
in
contrast
to
theravada.
the
course
This other
latter
is
orthodox
various sects
community,
arose
expresses
collectivelythe
2
in the
of time.
Tehi
samgitikarehi council-holding
the
'
dutiyehi,
lit.
'by
those
the
second
8
theras
I. e.
Great
Community
v.
21
Hie
Third
Council
first
27
and Rajagiriya
likewise the
Siddhatthaka, the
Seliya
six 13 and
and the Vajiriya: these bhikkhus, the other Seliya, in Jambudipa,the DhammarucI separated (fromthe rest)
the
Story of
were
the
Acariya-schools.
The
did
sons
of Kalasoka
ten
14
they reign. Afterwards, the nine Nandas 2 were kings in 15 succession ; they too reignedtwenty-two years. did the brahman Then Canakka anoint a glorious youth, 1 G known by the name Candagutta, as king over all Jambudipa, 1 7 born of a noble clan, the Moriyas, when, filledwith bitter hate, he had slain the ninth (Nanda) Dhanananda. and his son Bindusara Twenty-four years he reigned, reigned18 sara; had Binduand one sons twenty-eight. A hundred glorious 4 Asoka5 stood high above them all in valour,splendour, 19 He, when he had slain his 20 might, and wondrous powers. the brothers born of different mothers, won ninety-nine undivided it known, 21 all Jambudlpa. Be over sovereignty that two hundred and eighteenyears had passedfrom the
3
nibbana
1
of the Master
unto
Asoka's
consecration.
pp.
The
Nikaya-samgraha
us
(ed. WICKREMASINGHE,
branched
II32 and
Thera-
139jinforms
vTiclins 454
that
A.
the
DhammarucI the
off from
the
Sagaliya from the former 795 years The former A. B. event took place under Vala-gam-ba (Vattagamani and the latter under Gothabhaya (see Abhaya, see Mah. 33. 95 ff.), Mah. 36. 110 if.). of the Nanda The Mah. Tika, pp. 117-119, givesa detailed account dynasty; also Kamb. Mah. V. 953-994. On and the Moriya dynasty and Canakka on Candagutta see Mah. V. 995-1090. Kamb. Mah. Tfka, pp. 119-123; Candragupta's to play an minister, Canakya, is also known important part in the
years B., and
2 3
Mudraraksasa.
A
See
SYLVAIN to
work
on
226
ff.
exists. also
HILLEBRANDT,
LA.
4
Kautiliyasastraund
Cp.
ff.
on
see
Mah.
125;
5
V. 1092-1128.
On
Asoka's Mah.
birth and
Mah.
Tika,
125-128
Kamb.
V. 1129-1198.
28
Four
MaJiavamsa
years
V.
22
22
had (Asoka)
won
for himself
23
24
25
26
he consecrated himself as king in sovereignty the cityPataliputta. after his consecration his Straightway command spread so far as a yojana (upward)into the air and into the (depths of the)earth.1 downward Day by day did the devas bringeightmen's loads of water of (thelake) Anotatta ; the king dealt it out to his people. the Himalaya did the devas From bring for cleansingthe teeth twigs of naga-creeper, thousands, enough for many healthful fruits, myrobalan and terminalia and mangofruits from the same in place,perfect colour,smell, and
the undivided
27
taste.
The
of the spirits
air2
brought garments
of
of
five
and colours,
28
yellowstuff
for
also celestialdrink
29
30
3 1
32 33
naga-kingdom the and coloured like the jasmine-blossom stuff, nagas (brought) without a seam, and celestial lotus-flowers and colly rium and unguents; parrots brought dailyfrom the Chaddanta-lake ninetythousand waggon-loadsof rice.4 Mice converted this rice,unbroken, into grains without husk or powder, and for the royal therewith was meal provided family. Perpetually did honey-bees prepare honey for him, and in the forgesbears and sweet the hammers. Karavika-birds, graceful swung and made of voice, music for the king. And came delightful being consecrated king, Asoka raised his youngest brother of his own son mother, to the office of vice-regent. Tissa,
the
Here ends the
from
the
Chaddanta-lake.3
Consecration
of the
piousAsoka.
34
Asoka' s) father (
1
had
shown
not
to sixtythousand hospitality
understood rightly
men
The
is
sense
of this passage,
:
present
also
time,
2
3
not
only
upon and
the
the
of spirits
obeyed
to the
command.
The
Hera
marii
(Skt.marut)
two
in contrast
verses,
deva in
in 24.
follow
spurious
'To
die(?)
boars,birds into the kitchens and gazelles, used to take the herds to pasture Leopards were their stalls, used to watch and boars were gazelles
came
lead
them
to
fields, plots,
foil.;
and
4
ponds
On
and
so
forth.' Jdt.
V. 46
Hie
Tliird Council
manner
29
himself nourished
their want
them
for three
years.
But
when
he 35
commanded
to according-
saying:
The
'
I (Hereafter)
will
give
shrewd
(king) bade
them
to
(them)36
sent
bringthe
tested them them
As
followers of the
in
an
different schools
gave
eat,and
thence
when
entertained
them.
he once,
samanera
the
kindly toward
Sumana,
When
ment
to
37 ascetic, standingat the window, saw a peaceful Nigrodha, passing along the street,he felt of prince 38 him. The the son youth was
of all the
sons
39
of
Ujjeni conferred
him
by
his
father,and
himself
master
he had and when Pupphapura,1 the city, after his father's death, he
to
made caused
the
of 40
be
slain
and
took
on
himself
in sovereignty
splendid city.
The
consort
of
princeSumana,
a
who
bore the
same
name
41
child,fled straightwayby the east candala village, and there the guardian 42
her
god
and
of
2 called nigrodha-tree
by
son
name,
built she
hut
a
gave
it
to
her. she
And
to
as, that
day,
name
bore
43
beautiful
boy,
gave
her the
Nigrodha,
the 44 her
45
of the candalas
saw
his
own
seven
Then,
the thcra
boy bore
the
signsof
ordained
46
his
the destiny,3
even
him, and
1
the
him4
he
the
See
note
to 4. 31.
Gwalior
State,Central
Buddhist
=
Ujjain in
Avanti.
RHYS
DAVIDS,
2 3
India,
Ficus
p. 3 foil.
Nigrodha Upanissaya
an
Indica, banyan-tree.
all those that
includes
qualities, aptitudesand
he is
marks
ara-
of
individual,which
show
qualified to
attain
the hair is
one
of the
ceremonies
at the
reception
of
novice
30 attained to the
47
Mahavamsa
state of arahant.
v.
47
Going
thence
to
visit his
48
cityby the south gate, royalmother, he entered the splendid he passed the road that led to that village, and following Well pleased the king by court. was (on his way) the king's in him also by his grave but kindlyfeeling arose bearing, of a former life lived together. reason
Now in
once,
49
in time
past,there
were
three
traders brothers,
50
51
52
honey ; one was used to sell the honey, two to get the honey. A certain paccekabuddhawas sick of a wound; and another paccekabuddha, who, for his sake, wished for honey, alms. his usual way for seeking then to the city on came even A maiden, who saw was going for water to the river-bank, him. she knew, from questioning When him, that he wished for honey, she pointed with hand outstretched and said
:
'
Yonder The
53
came
sir, honey-store, go thither.1 with believing heart, trader, gave to the buddha
is
a a
who
54
55
honey,so that it ran over the edge. As he saw the honey filling (the bowl) and flowing over the edge, and streaming down to the ground,he, full of faith, wished: reignty come by the undivided sove'May I, for this gift,
there
bowlful of
of
a
Jambudipa,
and
may
my
command
reach
forth
56
into the air and (downward)under the earth. yojana (upward) of such To a man To his brothers as they came, he said: and such a kind have I given honey ; agree thereto since the
'
57
honey
(
is yours
also/
The
said
ever
: grudgingly
It
was
58
selves
clothe
them-
second !
'
said:
when
'Away
with
his
thy paccekabuddha
promise to
let them
59
the
But
they heard
of the reward, they gave their participate sanction. Then the (maid who) had pointedout the store the royal wished that she might become spouse of the (first), outline.1 form with limbs of perfect and (desired) a lovely Asoka mitta
'
60
was was
he
who
gave
the
honey, the
he who him
queen uttered
Asamdhithe
the
maid, Nigrodha
he who had
'
word
wished
away
over
the sea.2
61
He
1 2
candfila' lived
'
(in expiation
Adissamanasamdhi
Paravadi,
had
32
70
Mahdvamsa
were again eight (supplies)
v.
70
When
bestowed
on
him
he allotted
71
bestowed were yet eight more he gave them to the community of bhikkhus. when And bestowed, he, full of understanding, yet again eight were consented to accept them. bhikTogether with thirty-two
when
72
khus, he
served
went
on
the
following day,and
his
own
when
he
had
been
by
the
king with
with
many
of
his
Here
ends
the
Visit of the
samanera
Nigrodha.
73
74
glad faith,doubled day by day till they were (receiving (thenumber)of bhikkhus bounty), thousand. sixty Puttingaside the sixtythousand teachers of thousand false doctrine,2 he bestowed alms perpetually on sixty
Thereon the
king, with
bhikkhus
75
in his house.
76
and the
costlyfoods, hard and soft,to be thousand bhikorder to feast the sixty to be gaily decked, he having caused the town
brotherhood
and bade them
to
to
his house
and
after he had
77
78
had bestowed hospitality brought them thither, and largely them on providedthem with the things needful How them for ascetics,3 he questioned thus: great is (the And the content taught by the Master ? of) the dhamma this matter. answered him thera Moggaliputta-Tissa upon sections of When he heard : There are eighty-four (thousand) of them will I honour the king said : Each one the dhamma/
' '
*
'
with
79 80
vihara.'
Then
in
over
eighty-four
the earth
thousand
the
kings all
See note
(accordingto
monks.
v.
34) had
certain Verses
did in fact
with entertain,
gradually substituted
the Tlka note to 4. 26.
74
a
are
since suspicious,
see
comment
on
them.
Sam
naka,
v. 92
The
Tliird Council
and he
33
himself
began
to
build the
81
sick,he
a
hundred
(support of)the faith for each of money) each day. With (pieces
the
of the 82
3
treasure
of many
in many viharas. With the treasure continually dhamma the peoplecontinually prepared the for the Of the
use
thingsneedful
doctrine.
of bhikkhus
water
who
were
learned
from
the
loads of
four
on
borne
the
84
Anotatta-lake
he bestowed who
the
brotherhood,one
one
day
the
to
sixtytheras
to
knew
the the
tipitaka ; but
use.
every he had
85
commanded
be
given to
and
to
king himself
gave
Asamdhimitta, while
To
women
the
thousand
bhikkhus
he palace),
lata.4
day by day
When,
Mahakala who
to
one
of lived
naga-king87
Buddhas,
for him chain of
88
had
of the
world,he
sent
his presence) fettered with a brought (into gold; and when he had brought him and made him the throne
to
be
sit upon
under
the white
canopy,
when
he had
done
homage
89
and had bidden the (gifts of) various flowers, sixteen thousand to surround women him, he (ofthe palace) form of the (theking) spoke thus : Let us behold the (bodily)
*
him
with
90
omniscient
who The
Great hath
Sage, of
set
Him
who
hath
boundless
true
ledge, know-
the rolling
wheel of the
doctrine.'
naga-kingcreated a beauteous figureof the Buddha, 91 endowed with the thirty-two greater signs and brilliant with the eighty lesser signs (ofa Buddha), surrounded by the 92
Pataliputta. monastery in the capital 2 The three are Ratanattayam. Buddha, dhamma, samgha: gems Buddha, his doctrine and community, see note on 1. 32. 5 The tope (thupa) is never Thupapuja. missingfrom a Buddhist
The Asoka
1
monastery.
mentioned
*
Festivals of which
tope
is the
centre
are
frequently
The
See 5. 25.
D
34
Mahavamsa
of
v. 93
fathom-long rays
flames.1
At
93
glory and
the
adorned
with
the
crown
of
the and
sightthereof
f
king was
filledwith
joy and
amaze-
94
thought Even such is the image created by this form of the (Mahakala),nay then, what (must) the (real) And and more he was more Tathagata have been ! uplifted with joy,and for seven dayswithout ceasingdid he,the great king of wondrous power, keep the great festival called the
ment
:
' '
Here
(ofAsoka) into
the doctrine.
95
Now had
mighty and believing king and in former times been seen already by
the time of the Second
the Council,
the
96
At
97
the downfall of the faith saw future, king. Looking around in the whole world be able to
the
of that should
who
Brahma
Tissa4
98
99
100
101
long to live (inthe Brahma heaven). To him they went and prayed him, the mighty in wisdom, to bring this downfall to nought by beingreborn himself among men. that the doctrine should And he granted their prayer, desiring shine forth in brightness. But to the youthful Siggava and hundred and a Candavajjithe sages spoke thus: 'When will passed the downfall of the religion eighteen years are begin. We shall not live to see that (time). You, bhikkhus,
not
1
who
had
On
the
signsof
Buddha,
see
the
Lakkhana
Kunst
Suttanta
in
in D.
Ill,
Vin.
GRUNWEDEL,
It
Buddhistische
our
2Akkhipuja.
iii.300.
3
corresponds to
who here have the
'consecration'.
Vaslhi
'
=
by
those
senses
under
an
Kamb.
Mahav.
follows Asoka He
(vv.1276-1338)
his consort to the
Asamdhiinitta.
of merit
one
puts
acquired.
and
day
another, robes
who
60,000 monks.
kindness she foil.),
help of
the the
the
god Kubera,
remembers 51
the
by her to accomplisheswhat
Tissa,
dweller
in the
Brahma
heaven.
V.
112
35
merit
have had
and
part in this
matter
therefore you
ment, punish-
may
your punishment shall be this: that the doctrine 102 shine forth in brightness, the Brahma Tissa,mighty in be reborn in the house
on one
wisdom, will
As
of the brahman
Moggali.
into the 103 of the
time passes
of you
boy
another order,
shall
instruct carefully
in the word
Sambuddha.
There Sonaka
were
was was a
thera
Dasaka"
of the disciple
thera those
Upali.104
theras
his
both
In named
learned brahman
105
he 106 disciples dwelt with his teacher, and at the end of twelve years having the vedas,he, going about to the end of (studying) come with the (other) the thera Upali,dwelling met disciples, at the Valika-monastery, after he had established the sacred 107 word (in council), and sitting him he questioned down near him concerning hard passages in the vedas, and the other A doctrine is come after all the expounded them to him. O doctrines, brahman, yet all doctrines end in the one doctrine;which is that one?'
'
Dasaka.
108
the name spoke the thera concerning (ofthe true but the young it not. knew brahman He asked : doctrine), What is this ? and when the answer manta was given: The
1
'
Thus
109
'
manta
other
our
of the
to
one
me,'and
who
the 110
wears
robe.'
And
he
on
(Dasaka)asked
behalf of
mother
that
When
hundred
young
brahmans
brahman in
had time
pabbajjathe
Then
to
a
upasampada.
the
112 asavas,3
thousand
who (disciples)
Imam
adhikaranam,
he is, asked if he
that
is, in
be
the
work
of
the
Second
Council.
2
That
might
112
permittedto
on
learn it under
the
condition
3
mentioned. in in
v.
By khinasava
(seenote
D
3.
9)
are
understood
the
arahants; by ariya
v.
hearers
(Vibhanga
36 whom
Mahdvamsa
was
v. 1 1 3
among
113
the thera
tipitaka.Past reckoningis the number of the and of those who yet stood outside (thereligion), other Ariyas, learned from the thera. were by whom the pitakas
the whole In the land of the Kasi named Sonaka. With
*
114
lived the
son
of
caravan-guide,
he had
come
his father
and
mother
as
115
went,
3
youth
him.
there
he was,
fifteen
When
around
saw
the
came
thera
to
with
his him
disciples
for the
him, faith
he asked
f
ordination. pabbajja117
his
the from
order,came
the
again,
Dasaka
118
and the
then, when
received
thera
119
and the upasanipada, with those other pabbajja together he learned the three pitakas. Amid the company of youths, of the thera, had who the thousand the overcome disciples the ascetic Sonaka versed in the pitakas, were asavas, who
was
the foremost.
In the
120
lived
121
years
seasons
that bears the name flower4 there of the patali city of a minister. the wise Siggava, son He, when eighteen old and dwellingin three palaces fitted for the three of the
year,
went, in
son, and
company
with
his
friend
122
minister's a Candavajji,
surrounded
by
123
to the Kukkutarama,5 and visited the thera followers, And that (thethera) sat sunk in when he perceived
trance
the remaining 372), by puthujjana outside the way leadingto perfection. 1 of the The Kasis (Skr. kasi) are one
multitude
who
still stand
sixteen
tribes
India,settled
name
2
in the
district
round
Benares. Buddhist
Kasi
is also
RHYS
DAVIDS,
India, p. 24.
'Mountain
foot
of capital
Magadha,
on
Skr.
girivraja
of
a
was
situated
was
the
top
RHYS
hill,at the
afterwards
8
I. e. I.e.
built.
DAVIDS,
31.
I c., p. 37.
note
to
4.
Patali
Bignonia
suave-
olens.
6
monastery
V. Pataliputta.
A.
SMITH, Asoka,
pp.
183,193, 194.
v.
135
The Third
senses
Council
answer
37 his he greeting,
'
restrained
and
did not
the brotherhood
are
about
this matter.
They said :
the bhikkhus
Those
f
124
trance
How said
:
from
? (thetrance)
or a
And
At
the master,
is
call from
at
when
ended, or
the
125
they come
As
they
to
126
these
were (youths)
destined for
went
to
hood holiness,2 they caused the call from the brotherawoke from the trance and be given ; and (thethera) didst thou not The youth asked : 'Wherefore them.
?
'
127
The
us
is for
Let
us
also
enjoy this.'
He
answered:
us.'
'Those
128
only can
cause
Then, with
Siggava and
129
and their five hundred followers likewise received Candavajji from the pabbajja and (afterwards) the upasampada-ordination the two eagerly the thera Sonaka. With him as their master 130 studied the three pitakas and attained to the six supernormal
powers.3
Thereafter into this
house him for when
Siggava knew
And
'
that that
Tissa
had
been
born
131
years.
not
for
on
seven
'
Go
further
to him). (said
t
in
the
eighthyear
As
did he he went
hear
those words
Go
further
',in
was
that house.
even
Moggali,who
him
'
133
then
coming in,saw
and
asked
Hast
'
thou
And he answered Yes.' : aught in our house ? When (Moggali)went into his house he heard (what had the and when to the house again,on the thera came befallen) second day afterwards, him with the lie. And he reproached
received
134
135
Samapattisamapannam.
or
'There which
are
eight samapattis,
states induced See SPENCE 61.
attainments
eightsuccessive
P.D.
s.v.
HARDY,
Manual
a
of Buddhism,
to 5. 45.
p. 170, and
J.P.T.S.,1909, p.
to 4. 12.
See note
On
see
note
38 when
136
Mahdvamsa
he had
him
v.
136
heard
the
the
own
brahman,
full of
faith, gave
little did
brahman him
a
continual his
food,and little by
all of
household
become
137
So age
time
passedthe
years and
young-
Tissa the
came gradually
to the
of sixteen
reached The
further
shore he
of
the
138
ocean
might
in his
have
139
speechwith
to
him
in this way,
house
come
vanish,save
the
brahman.
Being
from
Brahma-world
and
therefore
care
were
they used
the
better
140
thereof.1
Then
the
peoplein
no house,finding
other seat,full of
seat
turned re-
had
to
stand,prepared the
the young brahman
saw
When and
to
The
manta
thera ?
'
said to And
him:
spoke 'Young
him
man,
the young
brahman
143
144
145
I know it/ he again. Since the thera replied : question The thera asked him concerning hard passages in the vedas. he expounded them to him; for,when leadingthe lay life, How studied the vedas even should to the end. had already he not be able to expound them since he had mastered the sciences ? 2 four special For him whose thought arises and does not perish, thought and not arise (again) shall perish thought ; but for him whose and not and not arise, shall perish thought shall arise (again) perish/3
same
'
it. makes comment no on suspicious ; the Tika note to 4. 62. see Pabhinnapatisambhida, 3 A and nirujjhati. meaning of cittam play on the double Whosoever thinks aright and whose thought does not go astray,
1
2
This
verse
is
i. e. whosoever
never
knows
the
comes
unto does
to return
again.
not will not
But
the
other
hand, he
who
aright and
existence
does
and
follow reach
the
true
doctrine
will
enter
into
deliverance.
40 the wild.
who
156
MaMvamsa
Wherefore
are
V.
156
not
the bhikkhus
joyousand
?
'
gay,
have
in comfort dwelling1
Returned
him the
he told the
over
king
him
his the
thought.
To
teach of the
king
handed
to
government
157
for one week, : 'Enjoy, prince, kingdom for one week, saying said the state ; then will I put thee to death.' Thus royal my
ruler.
158
And
when
was
gone
'
by
he asked
'
Wherefore
'
art
And
when
answered (Tissa)
By
was
of the
fear of
him
159
and said:
gone
can
'Thinking that
thou
wast
no
die when
by,
ascetics be death ?
'
then
ever
upon 160
161
162
spokethus,was turned toward faith in the doctrine (ofthe Buddha). And afterwards when the thera Mahadhamhe saw forth hunting, went he once at the foot of a tree, marakkhita, the self-controlled, sitting and fanned by a cobra with a branch of a sala-tree. And that shall I, like this thera,be wise (prince) thought: 'When of the Conqueror, and live in the ordained in the religion
And
when (Tissa)
forest-wilderness ? '
163
164
thither flying to convert him, had come thera, standingon the water of the pond in the through the air, Asokarama, he, leavinghis goodly garments behind him in the
When the
165
water
and
bathed
his limbs.
And
when
166
and faith, joyful this wise resolve: 'This very day will made the wise man He went to the king and I receive the pabbajja-ordination.' besought him to let him receive the pabbajja. respectfully he took Since the king could not turn him from (his resolve) this marvel
he
was
filledwith
167
him There
with
him
and
went
with
great retinue
to
the vihara.
the thera
(theprince)received
and
the
pabbajja from
four hundred afterwards monarch
were
168
Mahadhammarakkhita
persons, but the number
with him
thousand
of those who
of the
ordained
169
is not
name
known.
nephew
was
170
the consort
son
of the
two
the
of
these
V. 182
The
He
Third
Council
craved the leave king's
41
and
Sumana.1
was
also (Aggibrahma)
togetherwith the prince. to many The whence flowed blessing ordination, prince's in the fourth year of (the was folk, reignof)king Asoka. In
the
same
ordained
171 172
and upasampada-ordination, ing, strivholiness2 the prince,zealously since his destiny was became an arahant, gifted with the six supernormal year
he
received the
powers.
All those
beautiful viharas
three
173 174
by
the miraculous
over
of the
arama
thera
Indagutta,who
after Asoka
was
watched
likewise
the work,
the
to
named On
brought quickly
175
completion.
the
Conqueror himself
and there.
had On
on
here cetiyas
the
news
thousand eighty-four
(
cities came
letters 176
day with
the
the
The
viharas
are
completed.'
power
177
When
and
valour,received
beat of drum
'
hold
high
178
aramas
On
the
aramas
be
kept, in
every
way,
in all the
great largess179
180
and the streets shall be villages In all the viharas let lavish giftsof every kind be adorned. bestowed upon the brotherhood, to the time and the according of lamps and adornments,such as garlands means (of givers),
given ; the
aramas
in the
181
and
meet
music
take hear
of the
to
of every kind, in manifold ways. the duties of the themselves upon and discourse, religious
text the So
182
and uposatha-day
1
of offerings
deleted
to after
In
my
edition and
stop
should in
v.
be
170
samiko
put
after
namato.
pi
refers
brahma. Aggi-
Cf. note to 5. 45. sampannaupanissayo. The Tika this word thus: sabbe Upahara. explains gandhabba abhandam tattha tattha sakasakaturiy gahetva all the viharesu karontu 'Let ti attho va gandhabbam minstrels of music instrument taking each his own play in the He
was
3
viharas
everywhere'.
42
183
Mahavamsa
kinds must
V.
183
many
they make
held
on
the
same
day.'
And
every
all the
people everywhere
184
the world of as glorious and (did) yet more. On that day the great king wearing with the
women
kind,
commanded
of his
with household,
his ministers
185
186
went to his own by the multitude of his troops, arama, if cleaving the earth. In the midst of the brotherhood he as brotherhood. In the to the venerable stood, bowing down these assembly were eighty kotis of bhikkhus, and among
were asavas.
a
rounded
187
hundred Moreover
ascetics who
had
one
overcome
the thou-
ninety times
these
a
hundred
had
188
sand the
bhikkhums,
asavas.
'
among
thousand
overcome
called the
189
Dhammasoka
(monks and nuns) wrought the miracle to the end that the king unveilingof the world Candasoka might be converted. (the wicked
These
'
"
Asoka)
deeds
190
;
was
he
was
called in earlier
known of his
as
times, by
He the
reason
of his evil
he
Dhammasoka
"
wards
because
pious deeds.
bounded
the
Jambudipa (whole)
191
by
saw
and
over
all the
"
viharas adorned
and
with
the manifold
with
while
of the Blessed
One
was
ever
sirs?'
192
'
The
thera
Moggaliputta answered
One
the
there
: king'squestion was
Even
no
generous
giverlike
193
When
the
king heard
is there
a
this he kinsman
and asked
'Nay then,
unto
194
me
Buddha's
like religion2
'
But
the thera
Tika
perceivedthe destinyof
the
word
the
king's
son
The
understands
devalokamanorama
thus,
viya devagana devanagare nakkhattaghutthe ti attho 'As manussa manorama patiyadesum mahapuja where festival has been of gods in the celestial city, the multitudes proclaimed,so did men splendidofferings'. arrange 2 Sasanadayada: evidentlythe term is a title of honour.
and adds:
V. 206
The
and of his
Third
Council
foresaw
43 the
195
Mahinda1
progress of the
doctrine
to
arise from
and (them),
to
he, on
the
whom
'
of the
like to thee is not 1 96 giver of gifts of the religion;giver of wealth2 is he called, O 197 a kinsman ruler of men. lets son But he who or daughter enter the of the religion and withal a giver order is a kinsman religious
king
lavish
of
gifts/
Since the monarch
would and the
fain become
kinsman stood
of the 198
near:
he religion
'
asked wish
Mahinda
to
who Samghami"ta,
Do
you
receive
The pabbajja, dear ones? Then, when they heard great (good).' said to him
:
'
199
This
very
day
we
200
fain enter
as
the
it ; for
pabbajja/ For already since the time of the prince's (Tissa's) pabbajja201 had he resolved to enter the order, tion) and she since (theordinaof Aggibrahma.3 Although the monarch wished to confer 202 the dignity Mahinda of prince-regent, on yet did he consent to his ordination with the thought: This (last) is the greater dignity/ So he permitted his dear son Mahinda, distin- 203 all others) and strength, guished (above by intelligence, beauty and his daughter Samghamitta, to be ordained with all solemnity.4
'
for
At
that time
old,and
years
Mahinda,
the
was was
205 day did he receive the pabbajjaand also the upasampada-ordination, and for her the pabbajjathe ordination and the placing under a teacher took place on same day. The prince's master6 the thera named after Moggali;7 206 was
5
old. On
See note
to 5. 45. On paccaya
see
Paccayadayaka.
Cf. 5.
note
to 3. 14.
167, 170.
The
by sapujasakkaram. explainssamaham This was as Samghamitta was not of the prescribed age. necessary Upajjhaya, see note to 5. 69. That is, Tissa,the son of Moggali.1 Moggaliputtatissa,
Tlka
'
44 the
207
Mahavamsa
V. 207
208
conferred on him by the thera was pabbajja-ordination Mahadeva, but Majjhantika pronouncedthe ceremonial words,1 he (received) where in the very place and even the upasamthis great man reached the state of an arahant pada-ordination with the special kinds of knowledge.2 together DhammaThe directress of Samghamitta was the renowned and her teacher was free pala, Ayu,pala ; in time she became
from who lights of the doctrine, to the island of Lanka, received the brought great blessing The great in the sixth year of king Dhammasoka. pabbajja Mahinda, the converter of the island (ofLanka),learned the the
asavas.
209
Those
two
210
three
211
even
his master
moon,
in three years. This bhikkhum, and the bhikkhu Mahinda, like the doctrine of the Sambuddha. who forest,
a
sun, illumined
212
Once
in the
went
forth named
wood-nymph
Kunti. elder
was
Owing
both
to the union
sons, the
Tissa and
214
wards
AfterSumitta. named the younger was the thera from received the pabbajja-ordination and
Mahavaruna
of the six
215
attained to
arahantshipand
the
possession
the
supernormal powers.
elder suffered
and insect,
(Once)the
of
a venomous
pains in
when
poison
asked
his younger
brother
216
217
the he told him that a handful of ghee was (what he needed) out to remedy. But the thera set himself againstpointing and against the king what thingsneedful in sickness,3 going If on thy in search of the ghee after the midday meal.4 thou receivest ghee,bring it to me/ said the begging-round,
'
,
218
thera
Sumitta.
When
he went
Kammavacam Mahinda
i.e. he
was
presidentof
'is the
the
name some
chapter
of the
when
ordained.
mm a
Kammavaca
at proceedings
ka
or
question
is decided
2
3
by
vote'.
CHILDERS,
is
'
See note
to 5. 144.
a
Gilanapaccaye
'
locative of aim
Skr.
',which
concurs
with
the
'
final dative
(SPEYER,
Ved. and
Syntax, para.
81
b), and
refers
tonivedanam
4
announcement'. 'informing, The begging-round of the mendicants must forenoon, accordingto the rules of the order.
be carried out
in the
v. 228
TJie Third
on
Council
not
come one
45 handful
a
forth
his
ghee, and
that And and
even
of
to such
pass
ghee could
not
have
cured
it.
because
when
he had
to death, 219 near malady the thera was he exhorted (the other)to strive unceasingly
that
formed
the resolve to pass into nibbana. Lifted up in the air as he sat, and winning
mastery of his
his
own
220
own
body by
his
the
fire-meditation,1 accordingto
Flantes that the flesh and
not
consume.
free
broke
forth
221
body consumed
bones
the monarch
to his
own
they did
heard
arama on
that
the
thera had
died
in this 222
surrounded
an
by
due
the multitude
troops. Mounted
the bones,3and when
he had
be
he questionedthe brotherhood as to (the paid to the relics, illness. Hearing about it he was moved, 224 thera's) greatly and had tanks made at the city gates and filled them with remedies for the sick,and day by day he had remedies be- 225 of the bhikkhus, thinking stowed on the congregation : might the bhikkhus
never
to obtain.
226
passedinto nibbana even when he was and by this in the cahkama-hall,4 walking (inmeditation) also was of people converted to the doctrine a great multitude (ofthe Buddha). Both these theras,the sons of Kunti, who had wrought a great good in the world, passedinto nibbana
The
thera in the From
1
Sumitta
227
eighth year
that time
of the
brotherhood
all ten
s.v.
228
his
kasinani
divisions
note
of
meditating ascetic concentrates is one of the 'fire' (tejo) which kammatthana (see CHILDERS,
the effect is that
a
kasino,
and
to 5.
148) ;
his
body
2
'
which
consumes
Nimmamsaccharikam
the whole
were
sakalam
kayam,
skinless one.'
literally,
burned
3
body
Which A
cankama cleared
belongs to
and levelled
each
vihara.
It is 'a of
ground
upon
meditation
'.
See S.B.E.
xx,
103, n.
1.
46
Mahavartisa
V. 229
were
since those
who
were
converted
229
to
heretics increase,
who
had
(thereby)
the
and
honour and
own
took
likewise the
for yellowrobe,
230
sake
of revenue,
dwelt
togetherwith thebhikkhus.
as even practices as
They
doctrines
own
they wished.
232
Moggaliputta, great in firmness of the coming-outof this exceedingly evil plague-boil saw soul, the doctrine, deliberated upon the righttime on he, far-seeing,
to do away
And
thera
with
it.
And
to
when
he
had
committed
his
great
company
233
(the direction of)the thera Mahinda, he took up his abode,all alone,further up the Ganges on the
of bhikkhus
Ahogahga-mountain,
to
234
and
for
seven
years
he gave
himself
up
retreat. solitary
By
reason
of the
great number
could not
in
of the
heretics and
their
;
restrain them
seven
by
the law
Jambudlpa for
ceremony of
the
pavarana
the
236
When of
the
Dhammasoka,
matter
was
aware
he this, him
sent
minister to the
'
237
on
this command:
let the
bhikkhus he had
the
in
my
arama.'
This
fool went
of bhikkhus
out
and thither,
when
called the
community
'
he announced together
239
240
241
242
uposatha-festival/ with the the uposatha-festival 'We hold not heretics,'' to that misguidedminister. replied community of bhikkhus The minister struck off the head of several theras, one by one, with his sword, saying, I will force you to hold the uposathathat crime he the king's festival/ When saw brother, Tissa, the seat nearest to the minister. and sat on came speedily the thera he went When to the king and told the minister saw
king'scommand
:
Carry
the
'
him
243
(thewhole matter).
the monarch
asked
:
'
When
heard the
it he
was
with
all
speed and
disturbed in mind
has been done ?
'
Mahavamsa
v. 257
from
compassion
Rati-
him, and
came
down
The
king led
the thera
he had
washed
had
spoke thus,to
*
260
And to the ques: Sir,I would fain see a miracle/ faculty tion he answered : An earthquake/ he desired) which (miracle wouldst thou see, And again the other said to him: 'Which of the whole (earth region?' Then shaken)or onlyof a single when he had
'
asked
The
'
Which
is the
a
more
: (thereply)
shaking of
cult/ diffi-
Then thera
within
the
boundary of
a place
262
water
at
vessel full of
this
king
Then
the monarch
asked
the
or
not
self he him-
shared the
264
guiltof
thera
bhikkhus
by
the
minister.
The
265 266
taught the king : There is no resulting evil intent/and he recited the Tittira-jataka.4 week there in the pleasantroyal park he inof religion lovely
the words d
a
the Sambuddha.
'
In
k k h i-
Here
there is a 'venerable*.
play on
k k h in
right
sense
'
and
neyya
2
The
are expressions
difficult to render
but
the in
is clear.
On
were
the boundaries
of
space W.
measuring
a
a a
mile
diameter, there
man,
waggon,
so
horse,a
and
vessel full
The
earthquake was
other
limited strictly
that
the
were objects
affected by the
half remained the
sum
quaking only as
unmoved. kamma and is
side,the
sense
In
paticcakamma
as
or a
term
employed
that if not
in
the of
technical
the
of all
as
good
evil deeds
bring
balanced
*
punishment
new
existence
after death.
Paticca
means
lowing fol-
something,conditioned by something '. The formation of the in paticcasamuppada, paccayakara. as compound is the same
4
FAUSBOLL,
a
Jdtaka
III. 64 foil.
The
Kamboclian
Mah.
inserts
here
metrical
V. 278
Tlie Third
same
Council
sent out
on
49
this
week
the
monarch
two
yakkhas
On and
assembled
seventh
togetherall
the bhikkhus
the earth.
arama day he went to his own splendid assemblyof the community of bhikkhus in
an arranged
Then
on
one
side behind
the bhikkhus
*
Sir, what
And
One
269
Sassata-doctrine
forth.1
271
the
What
(
the the
Blessed One
And
they answered
the
He
2 Vibhajja-doctrine/
the
monarch
asked the
thera:
'
Sir,does
'
the The
was
Samthera
272
teach (really)
'
? Vibhajja-doctrine the
Yes/
said
:
And
c
when
at heart and
Since the
knew
this he
therefore should the brotherhood hold the uposathasir, fied, and he made the thera guardian of the order and 274 festival/ returned to his fair capital ; the brotherhood held thenceforth the uposatha-festival in concord. Out of the
great number
a
of the brotherhood
of bhikkhus
275
bhikkhus,endowed with the six supernormalpowers, knowing the three pitakasand versed in the special of the to make a compilation sciences,3
thousand learned
true doctrine.
276
Togetherwith
them
did
make
of compilation
the thera
so
277
Mahakassapaand
thera Tissa.
council
did the
In the midst
The in
different ditthiyo
are all,
or
as
sixty-
in the canonical mentioned books, thus in frequently of the 13 Brahmajalasuttanta Dighanikaya (D. 1, foil.). CHILDERS renders the D. s. v. sense (P. vibhajati) appropriately with of Logic or Reason'. is identical 'religion Vibhajjavada
two
the
with
3
KERN,
Manual,
4. 12.
p. 110.
to 4. 62 and
saddhammasamgaham.
E
See note
to 3. 17.
50
MaMvamsa
v.
279
Kathavatthuppakarana,1
was
refuting
under bhikkhus the in
the
other of
doc-
279
this the
council
protection
nine months. the wise with
to
king
by
thousand of
280
seventeenth
year years
the
king's
closed the shout earth
reign
council
(thera)
a
was
seventy-two
old,
as
great
re-
281
pavarana-ceremony.2
establishment of
the council. of
And, doctrine,
if
to
applause
shook
at
the
the
great
the
close
282
Nay, coming
world duties duties
abandoning
down for
high,
sake had of
the the
glorious
doctrine
his else
Brahma-heaven
to
the
of
men,
he,
the
fulfilled
Who
own
duty, verily
toward
doctrine.
may
neglect
toward
the
doctrine?
ends
the
fifth
chapter,
for
called the
'
The
Third
Council
and
',
in
Mahavamsa,
compiled
serene
joy
emotion
pious.
work
of P.T.S. to
the
Abhidhamma. 1897.
2.
Kathavatthu,
ed.
by
A.
C.
TAYLOR,
vol.
8
i, ii,
See
1894,
12.
note
CHAPTEE
VI
THE
COMING
OF
VIJAYA
IN
Vangas
in the The
Vanga By
she and
capitalthere
the
lived
of
king
of
was
the that
Vangas.
daughter of
his
king
the union
3 2
the
Kalingas
a
king's consort.
Very
fair
spouse
king
with and
had the
daughter,
of beasts. the
the
soothsayersprophesied her
was
king
very
amorous
king
forth
and
queen
could not
suffer her.
from
the
she
joy of
independent
to the
unrecognized
In
travelling
lion attacked
5
Magadha
country.
the
the other
Lala
country
the but
caravan
in the
the forest,
way taken
and
that,
she fled
the
along
from
by
which
come.
When he he
lion had
his prey
beheld
came
her
afar, love
her with
(for her)
waving
laid
towards
him she
tail and
laid
back. soothhim
7
Seeing
sayers
which
bethought her of that prophecy she had heard, and without fear she
to
of
the
caressed
strokinghis
The
upon
limbs.
lion,roused
his he the back
was
fiercest
her
passionby
all and
her
touch, took
to
her
and with
and
bore
with
speed
from
his
cave,
there him
united
with time
her,
bore
this
union
son
9
a
princess in
and
a twin-children,
and
daughter.
The fore
son's hands
him
feet
were
formed
the
like
lion's and
there-
10
she named
Sihabahu, but
he
was
When
on
sixteen
years
questioned
'
1 1
the
our
doubt
and
fore Where'
She
1 2
told
him
'
Then she
he
:
'
Why
that
do
we
not
go forth
(from
cave
here) ?
up
answered Then he
Thy
father
has
closed the
the
with
rock/
took
barrier before
great
13
I.e.
E
52
his shoulder
Mahavamsa
and
went
VI.
14
cave
upon
14
going and coming in one day. when the lion had Then (once), took his mother on (Slhabahu)
young sister
on
right shoulder
away with
so
and
his
15
his
and left,
went
speed. They
came
clothed themselves
border16
with
branches
of trees,and
to
and there, of the at that time,was a son even village in the army of the Vaiiga king, a commander uncle, princess's to whom was given the rule over the border-country ; and he under a banyan-tree the work was justthen sitting overseeing
was
that
17
done. he
saw
When
them
he asked
'
them
18
bade (his they said: 'We are forest-folk ; the commander give them clothing;and this turned into splendid people) (garments).He had food offered to them on leaves and by
reason
of their merit
these
were
turned
into dishes of
'
gold.
' you ?
19 20
asked them, Then, amazed, the commander told him her familyand clan. The princess took his uncle's of capital
Who Then
are
the
mander com-
daughterwith
him
and
went
to the
21
22
Vangas and married her. the lion, returningin haste to his cave, missed When he was and grieving those three (persons), after his sorrowful, he neither ate nor drank. son Seeking for his children he went to the border-village, and every village where he came deserted by the dwellers therein. was
And
f
the
23
the border-folk
came
to the
king
off
and
told him
this:
'
lion ravages
thy country;
none
ward
24
Since he found
had
an
a
who
could ward
(thisdanger) he
the
thousand
of money) (pieces
led about
city on
25
'Let him back and this proclamationmade: elephant's And in like manner the who brings the lion receive these ! monarch Twice two thousand and three thousand. (offered)
'
26
did Slhabahu's1
mother
restrain him.
The took
askinghis
27
mother's
Slhabahu leave,
his own for slaying father. gold-pieces (asreward) They presentedthe youth to the king,and the king spoke
1
Sihabhuja
in the
text
(metricausa!)which
means
the
same
as
Slhabahu
'Lion-arm'.
VI.
43
TJie
to him
:
'
Coming of Vijaya
shalt take And
saw
53
thus
at
If thou
the
lion I will
to
give thee
of the 28
came
once
the and
as
kingdom.'
soon
as
opening
lion who
an arrow
cave,
he
afar he
forward,
for
love
toward
to
slayhim.
The
arrow
struck
the
but
of
on
his 29 the
30
tenderness earth at
did the him
three the
then times,
sent at
king
wrathful
arrow
struck him
and 31 took the head of the lion with the mane (Slhabahu) returned to his city. And just seven days had passed then Since the king 32 since the death of the king of the Vangas. had
no
son
the
who ministers,
was
rejoicedover
on
his
deed
on
hearing that he
his
the
33 recognizing
mother, met
'
all Be
togetherand
thou
accord to the
Slhabahu prince
And he
acceptedthe
husband
it
over
then to
34
his mother's
and
with
SlhasTvall to
35
There
he built
hundred yojanas a stretching around he founded villages. In the kingdom of Lala, in that 36 he had made did Slhabahu,ruler of men, hold sway when city
Slhaslvall his queen.
sons
Slhapura,and
in the
forest
As
time
passedon
was
his consort
3 7 38
sixteen
;
named
Vijaya, the
In time the there were sons. thirty-two together king consecrated Vijayaas prince-regent. 39 Vijayawas of evil conduct and his followers were even (like done by and many intolerable deeds of violence were himself), them. Angered by this the people told the matter to the 40 to them, severely king; the king, speaking persuasively Sumitta blamed and his
son.
But
again as
the before,
second
to
41
and
the
angeredpeoplesaid
his
the
king :
Then hundred
1
Kill
thy
son.'
did the
men,
king
the
cause
Vijaya and
over
seven followers,
42!
43
to be
shaven
hair
'
and
In
put
them
The
shavingof
midi
(=
Skr. mundita
shaven
Sinhalese
slave '.
54
Mahavamsa
VI.
44
on
ship
children
and
sent
them
The
forth
upon
women,
the
sea,
and
their
wives
44
and forth
men,
and
children
sent
separately
and landed
separately,
even
each The
l
(company)
island the
an
45
island,
children
they
was
there.
the where
at
called
Naggadipa
But
and
46
the haven of
women
Mahiladlpaka.2
but followers
Vijaya
in
landed
the
Supparaka,3
of named his
being
he the
there embarked
danger again.
by
reason
the
The
47
prince
VIJAYA,
valiant,
the
landed that
in the
to
Lanka,
in
the
region
down
called between
Tambapanni
the
two
on
day
Tathagata
pass
lay
twinlike
sala-trees
into
nibbana.
Here
in the the
ends
the
sixth
chapter, compiled
called for
the
The
Coming
of
and
Vijaya
emotion
Mahavamsa,
serene
joy
of
pious.
That That
is,
is,
'
Island Island
of
children,1
women.'
from
'
nagga
naked
'.
'
of
Skt.
$urparaka,
District,
situated north of
on
the
west
coast
of
India,
now
Sopara
s.v.
in
the
Thana
Bombay.
See
Imp.
Gazetteer
of India,
56
One
Mahavamsa
vii.
10
10
11
12
men) went after her, althoughhe was (ofVijaya's forbidden by the prince (forhe thought), Only where there Her mistress, is a village are a yakkhim dogs to be found.' named Kuvanna, sat there l at the foot of a tree spinning, as a woman-hermit might. the the pond and the woman-hermit When man saw sitting
f
he there,
bathed
water
there and
drank
and
1 3 lotuses and
in lotus-leaves he
f
Stay !
thou
art my
Then
the
man
stood the
was
there
as
if fast bound.
she could the the
a
But
not
of
magic thread
entreated
devour
him,
by
Then
15
the who
thread.
would yakkhim, the man yakkhim seized him, and chasm. And
one
there in like
one
she
hurled
16
And armed
the seven hundred (all) when they all did not with the five weapons where
2
by
after him.
came on
return
fear
Vijaya;
he beheld
any
man
he set
saw
out, and
no
when
17
the
beautiful
he
of footstep
that woman-hermit
there,he thought:
this woman/
my
men
18
Surelymy
thou
men
'
have
been
seized
not
by
seen
And ?
' '
he
said to
dost
'
her, Lady,
want
hast
thou
What
with
she
answered.
Drink
19
20
2 1
22
a surely yakkhim, she his name, he came knows my rank/ and swiftly, at uttering her drawing his bow. He caught the yakkhim in the noose about the neck, and seizing her hair with his left hand he lifted his sword in the rightand cried : Slave ! give me back my I slaythee ! with fear or Then, tormented men, the yakkhim prayed him for her life. Spare my life, sir, I will give thee a kingdom and do thee a woman's service and
'
Then
it clear to him
This
is
'
'
other service
23
as
thou
wilt.'
not
soon
And
swear
'
that he
an
might
so
be
oath,and
my
Bring hither
1
2
men
with
he made the yakkhim betrayed laid on the charge was as her, all speed,' she broughtthem to
followed the bitch. to
There,
that is where
man Vijaya's
The five weapons Naddhapancayudho. are, according CLOUGH, sword, bow, battle-axe, spear, and shield.
VII.
35
The
of Vijaya Consecrating
he
57
place. When
them been had
said,'These
other those
men
are
hungry,'she
every she kind had whom
24
rice and
in the
ships of
devoured.
men (Vijaya's) when they had
preparedthe
first set them
rice and
the
and condiments,
ate
25
before the
princethey all
of them.
1
When
the
first
was
portions(of the
26
well
27
with
a
At
she
made
adorned
around
with
tent,and
the
time
to
come,
29
his spouse
men
on
and
on lay (withher)blissfully
all his
encamped
he heard
around
night went
asked
the
sounds
was
and
30
him : lying near And What this noise?' the yakkhim thought: 'I 31 means will bestow kingship be on my lord and all the yakkhas must for (else) the yakkhas will slay slain, through me, for it was 2 that have taken up their dwelling men me (inLanka).' And she said to the prince: Here there is a yakkha-city 32 called Sirisavatthu ; the daughter of the chief of the yakkhas 3 33 who of Lanka has been dwells in the city brought hither, and her mother And for the wedding there is 34 too is come.4 high festival, lastingseven days ; therefore there is this for a greatmultitude is gathered noise, together. Even to-day35 the
1 '
and singing,
yakkhim, who
Instead
of
verses
26-84
the
later
of
divergent
p. 326
2
reading,the
A.
text
has my
what some-
edition,
foil.
Appendix
of
Cf.
To
manussavasakarana
settlement
men', the
Tika
Lit. The
'
of the eldest
calls the
yakkha.'
bride's The
Tika
bride
Polaoccur
mitta,the mother
also in the Kamb.
Gonda.
Mah.
Kalasena
and
Polamitta
58
do thou be
Mahavamsa
the yakkhas, for destroy afterwards it will
no
vil.
36
longer
possible.' He : replied
' '
'
How
can
36
visible ?
slay the yakkhas who are inthey may be/ she said, I will utter
'
and cries, my
37
where
by
magic power
thy
weapon
fall upon
even
did he
yakkhas, and
put
he
on
when
had
38
himself
the
and
some
another
of his followers.
at
When
39
had
spent
days
the
that the
spot he
went
to
Tambapanni.
and
There
Vijayafounded
dwelt
his ministers.
40
When
commanded
by Vijayalanded
hands
upon
from the
their
41
ship, theysat
"
down
ground
and
reddened
by touchingthe
island
were
that But
regionand
the
also the
king Sihabahu, since he had slain the lion (was called) Sihala and, by reason of the ties between him and them, all those (followers of Vijaya)were
also
(named)Tambapanni.2
Sihala. (called)
and
43
Here
there
was
did
Vijaya'sministers
by
a man
found
name
villages.
near
Anuradhagama
44
built
of that
the
Kadamba
on
river ; 3 the
of the
the bank
45
radhagama.
Three
Gambhira
the
cityof Vijita.5
of latent which
The
soil of
Ceylon
is
composed
crumbles
into
red dust.
2 8
4
red hand. play on the word tambapani, Malwatte-oya which flows by the ruins of Anuradhapura. This is probablyto be sought on one of the right-banktributaries of the lower Malwatte-oya.According to Mah. 28. 7 the Gambhira-nadi flows 1 yojana (i. e. 7-8 miles) north of Anuradhapura. According to tradition the remains of the cityof Vijitaexist as those ruins which about lie not far from the Kalu-waewa (Kalavapi) 24 miles south of Anuradhapura in the jungle. TENNENT, Ceylon, 602 think foil. I the tradition is right,although PARKER, ii,p. Now
B
vii.
58
The
of Vijaya Consecrating
59
46
When all
came
theyhad
consecrated
to be
47
the
princerefused
were
the
maiden
of
noble
house But
consecrated
time).
48
of consecrating
were
lord, and
had difficult,
the matter, 49
sent
and
woo
Madhura
to (India),
50
daughter
devoted lord,
(sentto woo)
and
retainers.
theylaid
counsel his
the
with
52
minded
daughter (to Lanka) he, having first received also daughters 53 of others for the ministers (ofVijaya), with beat of drum : nigh upon a hundred maidens, proclaimed Those men here who are willing to let a daughter depart for Lanka shall provide their daughterswith a double store of 54 and place them at the doors of their houses. clothing By this signshall we (know that we may) take them to ourselves/ When he had thus obtained and had given 55 maidens many he sent his daughter, bedecked compensationto their families,
to
send
'
with
all her
ornaments, and
all the maidens
was
needful
for the
56
and journey,2
he had and
fitted out,accordwaggons,
ing
to their
rank,elephantswithal
a a worthy the eighteen guilds,entrusted with a letter to the disembarked Vijaya. All this multitude of men
of
king,and
craftsmen
and
families of
queror con-
57
at
58
Ancient
Ceylon,
p.
237
suburb
of
Polannaruwa of Uruvela
1
mentioned
see
century
A.
D.
As
to the site
28. 36 and
Now The
Madura,
Tika
in the south
Madras
Cf.
60 Mahatittha
as
Mahavamsa
; for that
VII. 59
very
reason
is that
known landing-place
Mahatittha.1
59
Vijaya had
when he
now
one
son
and
one
heard
'
60
the
yakkhim
when
Go
now,
ever
children behind
61
; men
in fear of she
was
But the
she
heard
this
seized
of
62
to the yakkhim : (again) Delay 2 thee an not ! I will bestow on offering by (spending) of she had again and thousand a (pieces money)/ When againbesoughthim (in vain)she took her two children and that evil should come departedfor Lankapura, though fearing
yakkhas ;
then he said
of it.
63
She
that
set the
children
down
outside and
in the
64
the
yakkhas
them but
terror
they took
;
one
spy
and
there
violent killed
the
65
yakkhim
her
with
blow single
of his fist.
a side, yakkha,went
But
on uncle,
the mother's
forth them
were
:
from
66
(
the
cityand
children
he said
when
are
'
he
saw
the and
your
children he asked
Whose
you?'
Here has
hearing
mother
you:
that
they
Kuvanna/s
been
and slain,
67
they will slay you also if they see ! swiftly from with speed they went Fleeing
'
flee (therefore)
kuta.3
68
The
two, when
he
grew
up
took
his
sons
wife, and
with
there in
1
daughters, they dwelt, with the Malaya.4 From these are sprung the Pulinda.5
the
multiplying king'sleave,
I. c.
'
greatlanding-place ;
is
a
'
now
Mantota
the opposite
island
Manaar.
2
Since
or
bali
3
must
I. e. Adam's
The
Pulinda,
name
countiy inland
now
between
Colombo,
from
Kalutara, Galle
Skt.
the mountains
a
is
s*abara;
p. savara,
synonym
of
Sabaragamuwa pulinda.
called
vii.
74
The
Consecrating
of
Vijaya
61
The
of
the
Pandu the
king
delivered
with the
up
to
the
prince
at
69
Vijaya
their honours their
custom
gifts
When the
and
(maidens)
had
king's
daughter
and
Vijaya
envoys his he
offered
hospitality
the
bestowed
to
70
on
bestowed
and
maidens,
according According
rank,
the
upon
ministers
in full
retainers.
to
71
ministers
assembly
consecrated
Vijaya
king
and
appointed
Then
great
festival.
consecrated his he the
king
with
Vijaya
daughter
he
to
of bestowed wife's
the
Pandu
72
king
on
solemn
as
queen; sent
wealth father
of
73
his
ministers,
worth he of had
his
shell-pearl
When the lord
thousand
former all in Lanka the evil
(pieces
way in of
money).
74
forsaken
life, Vijaya,
and
men,
ruling
as
over
peace
eousness right-
reigned, thirty-eight
years.
is
known,
city
of
Tambapanni,
Here
ends in
the the of
seventh
chapter,
called
'
The
Consecrating
the
serene
of
Vijaya',
and emotion
Mahavamsa,
the
compiled
for
joy
pious.
CHAPTEE
VIII
THE
CONSECRATING
OF
PANDUVASUDEVA
THE
bethought
2
am
old with
;
and
there
lives
no
of
mine.
come
The
to
kingdom naught
Sumitta
peopled
my
after
death
my
brother
3
brought
here When
(that
he
give) the
counsel
a
ment
had
ministers
after
letter to
sent
him, and
letter
he
within
short
Vijaya
world.
he
was
had
the
passed
away
the
celestial
4 5
dead
the
ministers
the and
while
death
oar
they
of
awaited
coming
before
the
a
prince.
of the
After
of
king Vijaya
Lanka after
;
coming
prince
his
island
kingless for
the had death three of
sons
year.
son
6 7
In Sumitta
Slhapura,
was
king Slhabahu, by
heard
am
king
he
the
to
daughter Slhapura
of the handed
Madda1
8
king.
thus
must
The
messengers When
sons
coming
he had
'
king.
his
king
;
one
spoke
9
to
three
old, dear
favoured
and
of
you
depart for
to
the
greatly
and fair
beauteous his
Lanka
assume
belonging
my
brother,
there, after
death,
10
The
youngest
thither/
son,
the And
when
thought
1 1
of the took
success
journey
and
empowered
of ministers
by
his
father, he
embarked
landed
with
thirty-two
sons
and
1 2
(with them)
1
in the
disguiseof
now
ca
mendicant
monks.
They
Madda Natva
Skt.
Madra, gatimhi
Madras.
sotthim
(by asking
the
soothsayers).
from the word
Tika: of the
nemittikavacaneneva
janitva
'knowing
soothsayers '.
64
Maliavamsa
VIII.
23
come
to
pass,
nay,
one
with
the
result
upon
of
a
he
23
placed
his
daughter
speedily
and
can,
thirty-two
Ganges,
And
women-friends,
'
launched
ship
my
upon
saying:
could
Whosoever
overtake
let him
the
daughter/
they
not
her, but
ship
fared
swiftly
thence.
24 25
on
the
J
day
they
the
at
they
landed
reached
robed
the like
haven
nuns.
called
and
When
inquired
arrived
gradually by
the
approaching
devatas.2
26
(the city),
protected
One
of
the
saw
ministers the
them of
women
who
had
come,
heard
and them
the
saying
into
of the
soothsayer,
27
inquiring
to
matter
recognized
full
and
brought
the
king.
as
So their
his
ministers,
pious understanding,
whose every wish
consecrated
was
king
28
PANDUVASUDEVA,
he
own
fulfilled.
of noble
When
as
had
consecrated and
to
Subhaddakaccana,
had
stature,
who had
his
queen, her
given
who
those had
(maidens)
come
arrived monarch
with
the
followers
with
him,
the
lived
happily.
Here
ends
the
eighth
in of the the
chapter,
called
'
The
Consecrating
for the
serene
of
Panduvasudeva',
Mahavamsa,
compiled
joy
and
emotion
pious.
At The
the
mouth
of
the
Mahakandara-nadi. like In
v.
Cf.
8.
to
v.
12.
wording
in
is
exactly
13,
the
in
same
order way
lay
26
stress is
on
the
on
parallel
vv.
the
16.
proceedings.
based
14
and
CHAPTER
IX
THE
CONSECRATING
OF
ABHAYA
THE all
was
queen
bore
ten
sons
and
one
daughter
the
eldest of I
was
named
Citta.
Abhaya,
When
'
the
youngest
named her
the For
saw
they
foretold
of
sovereigntywill
resolved
(
her kill
son
slayhis
young In
one
uncles/
When
brothers
them. in
let
us
our
sister/ Abhaya
due time
restrained her
they lodged
the
and
chamber
made
having through
a
but the
4
and pillar,
entry thereto
within
they
without.
king'ssleeping-chamber;
woman,
they placed
But her
servingsince she
5
and
soldiers
drove (Citta)
name
men
by
the
mere
sight of
an
beauty, the
f
given
\l When
to
lengthened by
of the
epithet
Umma-
dacitta
they
to
heard
coming
of
the
princessBhaddaone,
kaccana their
Lanka
her
brothers
also,2 except
urged by
of
When
arriving they
and
had
visited sister
the
too
ruler
and had
Lanka,
their youngest
lamented
by
the
king
and and
having
took
up
king's leave,went
abode wheresoever where
the island
of Lanka
their The
pleasedthem.4
settled
is called
place
of and
Ramagona,
and
the their
settlements
names,
are
Uruvela
Anuradha of
by (are called)
Rohana.5
mad
'.
the
settlements
Vijita,Dighayu,
and
Rohana Anuradha
10 11
named
1
Vrjitagama, Dighayu,
is to ummadeti
'
'
The Putt
allusion
a,
makes
: literally
the
sons,' that
of Ummadacitta.
is, of the
Sakya
Pandu.
Probably
Carimsu Of.
over
the
belongs
carikam
names
and
nivasam
both. and
7. 43 foil, where
Anuradha,
with
a
Uruvela,
Vijita also
as
appear.
Evidently
of the
we
to do
different
tradition
to the
foundation
same
cities.
F
66 built
12
Mahavamsa
tank and
up
IX.
12
when
he had
built
palaceto
son
the
south
of
this,he took
Panduvasudeva
there.
Afterwards
the
great king
as
his eldest
Abhaya
vice-
regent.
13
When
the
son
of
heard
of
14
Ummadacitta
gama,
UpatissaAnd this
and
sought out
land.
togetherwith
Gamani in the
to vice-regent,
15
placewhere
he stood
16
17
oppositeher window, and, her heart on fire with love,she asked her serving-woman : Who is that ?' she heard : When of thy uncle/ she trusted the matter He is the son to her with her,fastened a hookattendant and he, being in league
' '
in the
climbed night,1
up, broke
the
and he had
so
came
in.
with her and did
not
So
intercourse And
go
forth
till
19
20
2 1
he was nor constantly, for there was no discovered, entry (tothe chamber). And she became with child by him, and when the fruit of told her mother, and her womb was ripe the serving-woman told the king. her daughter, the mother, having questioned and said : He too 2 must The king took counsel with his sons let us give her (in marriage) to him/ be received among us; And saying: If it is a son we will slayhim ; they gave
break of
day.
he returned
there
'
'
her to him.
was come delivery And to the lying-in-chamber. went thinking: These did to from fear, in the matter/ the princes, accomplices
But
she, when
the
time
of her
near,
were
22
'
death
on were
23
the
herdsman since
Citta and
the
Gamani,
1
'
they
would
promise.3They
Gavakkhamhi
a
dasapetva
to bite on
see
rattim
to the
making
2
crab-machine Mah.
of this passage
So
8Patinnamadente,
design of
the world.
boy
who
ed.,Introd., p. xvi.
ix.
29
67
the child in the
24
reborn
yakkhas and
womb.
And
near
a was
both
mother's
woman
who
woman
And delivery.
but
this of
bore
daughter.
over
Citta caused
thousand
25 (pieces
with her (theother) together own son, and the latter's daughter to be then brought to her and laid beside her. When heard fa daughter 26 the king'ssons is born ', they were and well pleased ; but the two, mother of the grandfather and the 27 grandmother,joiningthe names
money) to
be handed
to
eldest uncle gave the boy the name Pandukabhaya. The ruler of Lanka, Panduvasudeva,reigned thirty years.
When
28
Pandukabhaya
the ruler
was
was
When
all assembled
of their
29
consecration
called The Consecrating of chapter, Abhaya ', in the Mahavamsa, compiledfor the serene joy and emotion of the pious.
'
and play on the word abhaya 'the fearless', abhayada from freedom ' or bestowingfearlessness, danger, security.
CHAPTER
THE
CONSECRATING
OF
PANDUKABHAYA
(As) commanded
the
by
in
a
Ummadacitta basket
and
the serving-woman
went
took
boy,
laid
him
with
him
to
Dvara-
mandalaka.1
2
When
the
saw
who princes,
the
had
gone
a-hunting
asked
She
in the
'
Tumbara
art
forest
3
serving-woman
What
;
they
?
'
her
:
:
'
Where
am
thou
to
going
answered
cake for
going
Dvaramandaiaka
is
'
sweet
my
daughter.'
Citta and
a
The
princes
who
to
said
had
to
come
Take
to
it
out.'
Then
Kalavela
5
forth
at
great boar
him
;
appear took
that
moment. and
went
princes pursued
and gave
a
but
a
she
(the boy)
(with
the
boy
6
man
and who
thousand entrusted
a
(pieces of money)
the
secretly to
On that
'
certain very
was
matter).
day
borne
bore
son,
and
he, declaring :
his
My
wife
has
sons/ reared
that
own).
old when his
The
out
(boy) was
the
to
already seven
arid
years
uncles
to
found
(where he was)
followers
of theirs Now
tree
kill
(with
was
him)
used the
boys playing
and
certain
a
pond.
hollow the when
same
the
boy
hide, by diving, in
certain
of and
standing
hidden
in
water
having
the
mouth
hollow
he
way,
under
hollow,
forth
had and
in the much
the
boys, however
with
the dived When
would
10
mislead the
them
evasive
words.
On
his
day
on
(princes')people
into those the
men
boy
hidden clothes
with
in and
clothes hollow
water
stayed
the
1 1
the
tree.
had
counted
According
to
Mah.
23. east
23 of
the
village
is situated
near
the
Cetiya-
mountain
8
(Mihintale),
Mah.
Anuradhapura.
See
x.
25
The
69
away
and declared
gone
When
theywere
that
The
his foster-father'sl
house,and
comforted
by
was
him
he lived
there to the age of twelve years. his uncles again heard that the When
boy
alive
they 1 3
on
to kill charged (their followers) that day the herdsmen had taken
Just
14
deer and
sent
the
boy into
15
the
He I
am
went
home, but
sent
father's son
herdsmen
take footsore,
some
thou
thou words
of the roast
eat/
16
Hearing
herdsmen
those
he
and
at 17
those
to (men) despatched
it surrounded
the
killed them
and all,
when
they had
killed them
uncles. they (went and) told (theboy's) his uncles discovered Then, when he was sixteen years old,
him of money) and (pieces to bring him to (a placeof)safety.2 His fostera command father told him all his mother's message, and giving him a dula. slave and the thousand of money) he sent him to Pan(pieces
;
18
his mother
sent
him
thousand
19
The in the
brahman
named
Pandula, a
rich
man
and
learned
20
Pandulagamaka.
brahman thou
Pandula.
princewent
dear?'
When
Art
22
Pandukabhaya,my
honour full
Yes', he
paidhim
and and
was
said
Thou
wilt be
king,
'
seventyyears wilt thou rule ; learn the art,3 my dear ! he instructed him, and by his son Canda 4 also that art
in
a a
23
mastered
He gave
him
enrol
him
24
soldiers and
: (hesaid)
'
when
The
five hundred
enrolled
by
to
(woman) at
the
whose
leaves turn
gold 25
Ayuttaorayuttaka*
Tassa rakkham
man
entrusted
cadis
i,lit.'and
case
'the
art'
is the
knowledge
the
Candena
cassa
puttena
belongs,according to
Tika,
to
sippam
samapitam.
70
make he had thence
27
Mahavamsa
thou
x. 26
26
thychaplain/When my son Canda he sent him forth from thus said and given him money his soldiers. with he, the Proclaiming his name thy queen,
fared prince,
l
and
virtuous
the Rasa-mountain
28
when
in the
Pana
near
hundred
followers and
one
thence, followed by
mountain
thousand
hundred
men
to
the
called Giri-
kanda.
29
An
revenues
uncle of
from
Pandukabhaya,named
this district that This
his
Panduvasudeva
then
on
handed
30
over
to him.
the
karlsas ;
31
the
beautiful
had retinue,
32
Pall. And named princess she, with and came her splendid mounted waggon, father and
great
bringprince's
ing
men,
food who
for her
saw
for the
reapers.
The
33
princessthere,told the prince(about her her); the princecoming thither in haste and dividing followed followers into two bands, drove his own waggon,
the
by
34
his men,
near
her
and
asked
'
Where
art
thou
going?
heart
was
'
And
when
she had
told him
for
a
all the
whose prince,
fired with
35
asked love,
36
37
38
from the waggon down and, at the foot of a stepped she offered the princefood in a golden bowl. banyan-tree, Then she took banyan-leaves to entertain the rest of the people (with food)and in an instant the leaves were changed into this and remembered the saw goldenvessels. When the prince I have found the brahman's words he was : glad (thinking) maiden who is worthy to be made queen/ So she entertained She
*
them
39
one
food became
not
less; it seemed
that but
40
had been taken away. Thus from that portion who was time onward that youthful rich in virtues so princess and merit was called by the name Suvannapall. and mounted And the prince took the maiden his waggon and fared onward, fearless and surrounded by a mighty army.
man's
Probably
mountain
near
the
modern 18
Kahagalagama
miles SE. from
'village of Anuradhapura,
also 25.
Kaha
', about
from C
on
Appendix
50,
72
rakkha-mountain used to wander
54
T
MaMvanisa
near
X.
54
the
about certain
in the form
man saw
mare.
And
once
(mare) with
'
her
white
whose
55
saw
body and
appearance
prince:
Here
is
mare
is thus and
noose
so
"
The
and
came
to
capture her.
When
she
behind
majestic
he
56
aspect. She
fled without
herself rendering
Seven times the
she fled.
57
Mahaganga
times
more
she fled
seven
around she
the Dhumarakkha-mountain
and
circled round
59
near
the
pond and plunged yet againin the Ganga, but there he seized her by the mane Kacchaka-ford,2
was
the
and
60
down floating
a
the stream He
by
great sword.
: sword,crying
I will conquer
'
Then the
slaythee.' And the kingdom and giveit to he seized her by the neck
his sword he secured he would.
I will
pointof
rope;
62
63
64 65
had gone to the Dhumarakkhamighty (hero) he dwelt there on the Dhumathe mare, mountain,bestriding four years. And rakkha-mountain having marched thence 3 he to the Arittha-mountain with his force and come sojourned there seven a fit time to make war. years awaiting two drew near to the behind,4 leaving Eight of his uncles, in battle array, and when Arittha-mountain they had laid out small city and had placeda commander near a a fortifiedcamp the Arittha-mountain at the head they surrounded on every When the
side.
1
to
far from
(seenote
Dhumathe Colombo
rakkhapabbata
edition
2
is also
the
Mahagantota, a ford below the place where Ambanganga and Mahawseliganga join. See note to 35. 58. Now North-Central north of Habarana. Province, Ritigala, Namely, Abhaya and Girikandasiva.
Cf. 23. 17 and
25. 12.
x.
79
The
of Pandukabhaya Consecrating
73
66
After
her
to according speech with the yakkhim, the prince, of his soldiers sent in advance a company cunning counsel,
takingwith
the message:
But him
went
as
them
weapons
as
and presents
'Take
peace
'
with
you/
("7
they were
he
lulled to
if prisoner
68
forth
to
battle at
great host.
The
69
yakkhinl neighed full loudlyand his army, inside and outside 70 men (the camp) l raised a mighty battle-cry.The prince's killed all the soldiers of the enemy's army and the eight uncles with them, and they raised a pyramid of skulls. The 71 commander and fled (for safety) to a thicket ; that escaped
is (samethicket) the therefore
called
of
:
Senapatigumbaka. When
the skulls of his
a
72
princesaw
the
pyramid
where skulls,
(
uncles and
Labugamaka.2 (theplace) When thus left victor in battle, he was Pandukabhaya went to the of his thence Anuradha. great-uncle dwelling-place The his palaceto him and built great-unclehanded over himself a dwellingelsewhere; but he dwelt in his house. When he had inquired versed in the of a soothsayer who was he founded the capital, sites, even near knowledgeof (fitting) that village. to two Anuradhas, Since it had served as dwelling it was called Anuradhapura, founded and also because it was
under
said
'Tis like
heap
of
gourds
'
73
74
7o
76
When
he
had
caused
the
77
be
here,3PANDUKABHAYA
of that
same
kept
it for
with
the water
consecration queen. On
pond he solemnized 78 his spouse, he consecrated Suvannapali, ; and he had agreed, the young 79 as Canda, even
in advance into the
sent
enemy's
camp
and
the army
2
approaching now with him. find on the map, to the Even we now 'Villageof Gourds/ north-west of the Ritigala, a place called Labunoruwa p. labunaand Archaeological Remains garaka. Cf. Return of Architectural
I. e.
=
. . .
existing in
Ceylon, 1890, p.
76 ; Census
p. 464.
3
I dh a, i.e. in
Anuradhapura, the
residence
74
Mahdvamsa
x.
80
80
Because
his mother
not
by
him,
81
he
did
over
slaythe
king
uncle,but
that
handed
the
government
to him
night-time: he
became the
82
of (Guardian 'Nagaraguttika'
City).From slaybut
He
time onward
there
were
to
this
uncle
the
Girikanda.
therefrom, when
victorious
(for his
84
85
86
87
88
89
they called it Jayavapi.2 consecration), He the east side of the settled the yakkha Kalavela on the yakkha Cittaraja at the lower end of the Abhayacity, had helpedhim slave- woman who in time past The tank.3 and was re-born of a yakkhim, the thankful settled at (king) he the royalprecincts the south gate of the City. Within Year by year he housed the yakkhinlin the form of a mare. had sacrificial made to them and to other (yakkhas); offerings he sat with Cittarajabeside him but on festival-days a on and havinggods and men to dance before seat of equal height, in joyous and merry wise. him, the king took his pleasure, He laid out also four suburbs as well as the Abhaya-tank, and the chapel the common cemetery, the place of execution,
of the Queens of the of Vessavana West, the banyan-tree the Demon and the house of
4
and
90
the
Palmyra-palmof
near
of the Great
the west
gate.6
in v. 77. Since the Anuradhapura, mentioned old name has been the JayavSpi. to identify changed, it is impossible 2 I. of victory. e. the tank 8 laid out by the king See v. 88. The Abhaya-vapi which was is the tank Basawak-kulam. called now Pandukabhaya himself,
I. e. the
pond
in
PARKER,
4
Ancient of
I.
e.
360
foil.
is here
8
considered
Or the God
of the
(Skt. Vaisravana), who perhaps chthonian god. Huntsmen, according to the readingvyadhafoundations mentioned
in 89 and
wealth
devassa.
6
On
the various
and buildings
90,
x.
104
The
of Pandukabhaya Consecrating
candalas
two to
He
of
to
91
hundred
hundred
candalas fifty
92
and
as
many
candalas to be watchers
a
cemetery.
cemetery and
For
these he
built
north-west village
out
93
of the
as
their
duty
the 94 folk.
95
it
was
appointed.
the north-east of the he made candala-village Cemetery, for the candala
Toward
between cemetery,
for
line of
huts
from
the
huntsmen far
as
Northward
as thence,
the
Gamani-tank,1 a
of that
96 97
mitage was
In
made
cemetery the
that
same
ascetics;eastward
house the for the
region
dwelt
ascetics of various heretical sects. And there the lord 99 many of the land built also a chapelfor the nigantha Kumbhanda ;
it
was
named
after him.
street
Toward of the On
the west
from
thence
and
100
eastward
of the
huntsmen the
lived
five hundred
further
side of
he
and
on
likewise built
and
a
monks,
ajivakasand a residence for the brahmans, and this placeand that he built a lying-in shelter and a hall 3 those recovering from sickness.
Ten ruler
years
for the
after
his
consecration
of
Lanka
establish the
did
the the
103
With
Cittaraja, 104
in
see
ed., Introd., p.
liv.
Since
the Tika
leaves
us
the lurch
anything further.
is
The
Gamanivapi
more
perhaps
north the
the
Karambawa-tank
the
which
lies
somewhat
than
mile
from
Bulan-kulam.
Ancient
PARKER, Ceylon,
however,
p. 364.
2
identifies it with
Peramiyan-kulam.
went
Name
of
sect
of ascetics Tika
we
(theJaina) who
have
ca.
about
naked.
as
According to
ca
the
to take The
sivikasotthisalam
former word is
sivikasalam
sotthisalam
by vijayanaghara
'hall for the sick'.
'house
of
the delivery',
latter by
explained gilanasala
76
Mahdvamsa
x.
105
who
105
were
(in
had
bodily
yakkhas
form)
and
the
prince
J
enjoyed
for
his
good
tween Be-
fortune,
bhutas and
friends.
seventeen
king
a
Pandukabhaya
king.
of
Abhaya
were
years
106
without the
When
ruler
the
earth, oLd,
Pandukabhaya,
had assumed in
the the
fair rule and
intelligent,
over
being kingdom,
thirty-seven
he
years full
the
2
reigned
seventy
years
wealthy
Anuradhapura.
Here
ends
the in
chapter,
Mahavamsa,
called
'
The
Consecrating
for
the
serene
of
Pandukabhaya'
joy
and emotion
compiled
of
pious.
That
*
is, ghosts
he who for had friends
but those
the
that
expression
had become
is
ambiguous.
yakkhas
It
could Kalavela
also
mean
(namely
and
2
Citta)
Tika:
'.
samiddhe
ti,
or
sampattiya
'.
purite
addhe
va
'filled
with
prosperity
wealthy
CHAPTEE
XI
THE
CONSECRATING
OF
DEVANAMPIYATISSA
AFTEE
his death of
was
his
son,
known succeeded
by
the
name
of the
MUTASIVA,
the which
son
Suvannapali,
him
in
government,
laid the with
out
(then) in
its
peaceful state.
promises
l
The
rich and
king
in
the
beautiful
Mahameghavana-garden,
name
all
good
fruitwas
that qualities
trees
provided
that the
an
and
flowering-trees. At
garden,
forth
a
the
time
place
chosen
season,
for the
unwonted
the
poured
rain
therefore
they
in
called
garden
Mahameghavana.
Sixty
pura,
years
king
face
Mutasiva
of
reigned
of
the
fair
the
land
Lanka.
each
thoughtful by
the
of the
other's
of
welfare,
daughters
second
son,
6
their
family.
was
The
Devanampiyatissa,
and became
foremost
among
in virtue
intelligence.
king
after
his
DEVANAMPIYATISSA
Even
to pass. at
father's wonders
and
the
In
time the
of
his
consecration
Lanka
many
whole
isle of
treasures
of the in
Burmese the
MSS.
and
the
Tika
nama-
nugagunodito
name'.
qualities corresponding
'grove
as
to
the The
Mahameghavana
which trees it possesses with of
was
means
of
the
great
cloud'.
qualities
streams,
the
are
such
accompany coolness
on
rainfall: forth.
Cf. The
thick the
foliage, shade,
Tika,
Mah. south stands. of
explanation
the
ed., note
the
passage.
Mahameghavana
where wall See
2
situated
city
Anuradhapura,
the
or
now
Mahavihara another
Ancient
it and
southern
of 15. Tika:
the
city was
anukula
Jotivana.
1, 8; PARKER,
ti,
samanavanna;
surupa samanarupa
ayam
;
virupa
ti
vacanapacchinditum
The
annamanna-anukularupasampattiya dhippayo.
sense
samannagata
were
ti
a-
is
they
of
equal beauty.
78
Mahavamsa
had been
XI.
jewels that
9
buried
had
earth.
Jewels
which
deep rose up to the surface of the been in ships wrecked Lanka and near
there issued (inthe ocean)
those which
10
were
formed naturally
forth
upon
the
up
land.
At
Chata-mountain
11
bamboo-stems,in girtheven as a waggonshone like silver; on pole.1 One of them, the creeper-stem/ this might be seen delightful creepers gleaming with a golden
there grew
'
three
12
colour. be
seen
But
one
was
the
'
flower-stem
',on
'
this
againmight
might
be
flowers of many
And
one last, was
kinds, of manifold
the
'
colours,in full
13
bloom.
seen
bird-stem
whereon
14
15
16
17
18
19
and of (kinds) if living. Pearls of the eight as colours, kinds, namely many horse-pearl, elephant -pearl, waggon-pearl, my robalan -pearl, and kakudha common bracelet-pearl, ring-pearl, fruit-pearl, forth out of the ocean and lay upon the shore came (pearls) in heaps. All this was the effect of Devanampiyatissa's merit. phire, Sapberyl, ruby, these gems and many jewelsand those and those bamboo-stems all in the same pearls theybrought, week, to the king. the king saw them he was When glad at heart and thought: and nobody else is worthy to have My friend Dhammasoka treasures ; I will send them these priceless to him as a gift/ For the two monarchs, Devanampiyatissa and Dhammasoka had been friends a long time, though they had never already
'
numbers
of
birds
and
beasts of many
seen
20
king
sent
four
persons
as appointed
his envoys
his
21
22
then nephew Maharittha, who was the chief of his ministers, his chaplain, attended by a body his treasurer,2 a minister and of retainers, and he bade them take with them those priceless the three kinds of precious jewels, stones, and the three stems shell windingto the right, and and a spiral (like) waggon-poles,
1
This
must
be the
'
properlymeans
2
of
rathapatoda,
The
Tika
also tells
the
names
of Arittha's three
namely
names
Mah.
Tela Hali"),
from the
and
may
taken conjecture,
source original
Mah.,
the
old Atthakatha.
80
Mahavamsa
XI.
31
3 1
32
33
34
in the flower of her youth, utensils a maiden wise,1 auspicious a litter, as costly golden platters, yellow and emblic myrobalans and precious ambrosial healing1 herbs,sixtytimes one loads of mountain-rice hundred broughtthither by waggon needful for consecrating a king, parrots,nay, all that was and sending these (things) in due marvellous in splendour; time as a gift to his friend the lord of men sent envoys also with the gift of the true doctrine, saying : I have taken
'
refuge in
declared
35
the
Buddha,
his Doctrine
and
his
Order,
have
2
36
in the religion of the Sakya son; myselfa lay-disciple seek then even thou, O best of men converting thy mind with heart refuge in these best of gems ! and saying believing Consecrate friend yet again as king,' he moreover : my
'
many
marks
of honour.
When
they set
38
five months,highly honoured stayed envoys, on the first day of the bright
Vesakha.3
and landed
39
at
Jambukola
on
the twelfth
day.
of Lanka
; the
The
handed made
the them
great hospitality.
faithful to their
consecration (first)
40
king
had
consecrated
the
4 1
first shows Maggasira5 on the day when the moon of Dhammasoka, yet againas king, the charge itself, fulfilling him in the salvation of their king (consecrated) they rejoicing in the good fortune of Lanka. who rejoiced month
1 2
Winding
I.e. of
towards
the
cf.
v.
22.
Buddha,
to 1. 12.
sprung
tribe of
the
Sakyas.
See
2. 15 foil.
3
4
See note
Skt.
Tamralipti,
now
harbour At the
in the
region at
the
mouth
of the
Ganges,
embarked
Tamluk.
for Record
Ceylon in
to the
Tamralipti the Chinese pilgrim Fa-hien See beginning of the fifth century A. D.
Kingdoms,
14 and month the p. 100.
LEGGE,
8
of Buddhistic
second
According
held second
Dip. 11.
winter
on
38,
the
of D.
was
in the
under
Asalha,
of
iind the
the
coronation
Cf.
twelfth
day
of the
brighthalf
Vesakha
month.
Introduction, para. 7.
xi.
42
TJie
on
of Devanampiyatissa Consecrating
day of
was
81
42
the full-moon
name
the month
Vesakha
'
the ruler
friend his of
in whose
contained his
the words
held people,
secration con-
in every
placethey held
high festival.
Here ends the eleventh called chapter, the of the
f
The
of Consecrating the
in Devanampiyatissa'
serene
Mahavamsa,
compiled for
joy and
1
emotion
pious.
friend 'Tissa,
of the
Devanampiyatissa
means
gods'.
CHAPTER
XII
THE
CONVERTING
OF
DIFFERENT
COUNTRIES
WHEN
the
of the
thera
Moggaliputta,
had the
the
illuminator
the
of
the
to
ligion re-
Conqueror,
brought
(third)council
he had beheld
an
end
and
when,
of the
l
looking into
future,
the the
founding
3
month The
Kattika thera
forth he
to sent
theras, one
to
here and
and
one
Majjhantika
he named
sent
Kasmira
Gandhara,
To Vanavasa the
thera
sent
Mahadeva the
thera
Mahisamandala.
and
to
Rakkhita,
;
A.parantaka
named
Dharnmarakkhita
to
named
6
Mahadhammarakkhita,
into the
Maharakkhita
sent
to
the thera
he thera
Maj jhima
sent
the
Himalaya
Sona
Suvannabhumi The
the
two
theras
great
and
Mahinda,
his
:
the
8
theras
Itthiya,Uttiya,
five in the theras he
Sambala
sent
Bhaddasala the
disf
forth of
with
charge
Ye
found
lovely island
and
Lanka
the
lovely religion
the
Conqueror/
that
At of
time
in Kasmira
Gandhara
cause
did
naga-king
'
wondrous
down
power,
upon
Aravala,
the
rain
called
he
Hail
'
to
1 0
pour
the
a
ripe crops,
The
and
cruelly did
overwhelm thither
everything
1 1
with
flood.
thera the
Majjhantika
air,and
water
went
all
wrought
(miracles
lake
as) walking
so
the the
surface nagas
of the beheld
in Aravala's
forth.
about
When
this
it
they
told their
king
with
12
fury
thing.
the
Then
full of
fury
1. 12.
naga-king brought
time
the
divers
terrors
to
See
note
to
As
to
the
of
third
council,
and Rawal
cf. the
Introduction.
8
Gandhara
northern
comprises Punjab.
the
districts
of
Peshawar
modern
Pingli
in the
Kasmira
is the
Kashmir.
xii.
25
Tlie
83
blew,a cloud gave forth thunder and rain, thunder strokes crashed, and lightningflashed here and there, 13 trees and mountain-tops hurled down. were 14 Nagas in grisly
pass;
fierce winds
naught,he said to the eminent might: 'Even if the world came seekingto terrify me, theywould
these terrors to
brought all 15 showing his naga-king, with the gods 16 together to me not be equal (in
17
whatever fears and dread (they strength) arouse)in this may place.1 Nay, if thou shouldst raise the whole earth with the and the mountains, thou mighty naga, and shouldst ocean hurl them dread lord of Then in upon
me.
me,
thou
couldst in
no
wise
arouse
fear and
18
It
were
thou destruction,
serpents.' to him, humbled 19 by these words the thera preached the the doctrine, and thereupon the naga-king came unto refugesand the precepts of duty,2and this likewise 20 (three)
did
thousand eighty-four
kumbhandakas with Pandaka
sons
yakkhas and
kha named five hundred
(ofsanctification).4
'Henceforth harm
no more 22 anger arise as of old; work to the harvest, for living beings love their happiness ;
cherish
were
love for
men
live in
they taught by
and
they
did
teaching).Then the lord of serpentsmade the thera and he stood near, fanning him. a jewel-throne
dwellers in Kasmira
1
the 25
and
Gandhara
to be yam
who
had
come
to
worship
The
right readingappears
the Tlka
see
ettha
very
bhayabheravam.
difficult. For
the
The
construction
is,however,
explanation of
2
ed.,note
a
on
the passage.
See note
to 1. 32 and
62.
name
the
a
The
are are
of
class of
class of and
demigods
who
of Dhatarattha.
lhaka, Viruworld
Dhatarattha
(lokapala), the
4
north. to 1. 33.
I. e. the
sotapattiphala.
Cf. note 2
84
the
Mahavamsa
XII. 26
26
2 7
28
naga-kingacknowledged the thera as the mightierin workingwonders,1and when they had paidthe thera reverence him. thera The they seated themselves on one side near the Asivisupama.2 expounded to them the dhamma, (namely) The took place and conversion of eightythousand persons hundred thousand from the a persons received the pabbajja thera. and Gandhara Since then Kasmira shine with yellow robes and prize above all the three things.4
3
29
The
thera Mahadeva
who the
had
gone of the
to the Mahisamandala
30
3 1
32
peoplethe Devadutasuttanta.6 Forty thousand made pure (in themselves) (persons) the eye of the truth and yet fortythousand received from him the pabbajja-ordination. The thera Rakkhita, who had gone to Vanavasa,7 preached, in the air in the midst of the people, the Anamataggafloating samyutta.8 The conversion of sixty thousand persons took in number thousand received the pabbajja place, thirty-seven
midst
country preached in
33
from
1
him.
hundred
on
viharas
were
founded
in
note.
the
The
Cf. Mah.
this passage,
for the of S. A.
mahiddhika positive
2
stands
comparative.
172-175,
or
The
IV,
pp.
the
aslvisopama
'simile of the
3
4
II,pp.
110-111.
See note
Namely buddha,
his order.
dhamma,
to 1. 62.
samgha,
as
the
Buddha,
his doctrine
and
5
See note
Mahisamandala
J.R.A.S.
is generally taken
the modern
that
Mysore.
as
'
But
FLEET,
is
1910, p.
He
429
shown
hardly correct.
'
himself
the
Mahisamandala
Mahishmati. island of the
the Mahisha
PAROITER
now
of which
he
placesthis
Narbada
river,
mandala Mahisa-
called
I. e.
'
A.
as
7
I, pp.
The
of India, s. v. Vindhyan mountains. is,therefore,a Discourse on the Messengersof God.' See M. Ill, ; pp. 178-187 deals with old age, disease, and death The suttanta 138-142. Imperial
Gazetteer of the district south of Yama the
or
Mandhata.
See
messengers
god
of death.
are
Vanavasaka 6.
Vanavasin
mentioned
as
in the
Mahain
bharata,
southern
town old
"
366,
and
Harivamsa, B.R.,
Skt. Kanara
s.v.
5232,
s.vv.
people dwelling
is also
a
India.
See
Wtb.
There
modern
Banavasi
name.
in North
Gaz.
which
seems
to have
preservedthe
Imp.
of India,
S. II,pp. 178-193.
xii.
41
The
85
of religion
country. Thus
the
there the
Conqueror.
thera
l
The
Dhammarakkhita and
the
to 34
Aparantaka
the
having preachedin
people
of 35
Aggikkhandhopama-sutta,2 gave to drink of the nectar truth to thirty-seven thousand livingbeings who had come
there,he together
A
who
understood perfectly
untruth. noble
36
thousand
men
and
yet
more
women
went
from
who
had
gone
to Maha-
37
Eighty-fourthousand persons attained to the received thirteen thousand path (ofsalvation), pabbajja.
The Yona
5
reward from
wise
Maharakkhita
who
went
to
the
country of
the
39
of the
peoplethe
Kalakarama-
suttanta.6
hundred
and of the
seventy thousand
received the
The wise
Skr.
northern
of western ends', comprising the territory Aparanta'the FLEET, J.R.A.S. Gujarat,Kathiawar, Kachchh, and Sind. 427.
'
1910, p.
2
I. e.
The
discourse
on
the
parableof
the
flames
of fire.'
A.
IV,
pp. 128-135.
3
Skr. Maharastra,
FAUSBOLL,
The Yonas in
Jat.
vi,pp. 219-255.
are
Yavana) (Skt.
the
togetherwith
They
on
'
the
must
Kambojas,
mean
Rock
Edicts
of Asoka.
the clans of
foreign race
the northwestern
frontier,included
in the
'.
V. A.
SMITH,
Asoka,
the Eran.
6
p.
132, n.
2.
It is remarkable
just at
Greco-Bactrian
kingdom
was
founded
by Diodotos.
(246B.C.) SPIEGEL,
Alterthumsk.,Ill, p. 49 foil.
this title is meant The the suttanta is 24 of the Catukkanito be the
Probably by
Buddha
pata
where
7
in A. II,pp. 24-26.
Kalakaraina
supposed
place
delivered
this discourse.
companions of Majjhima, accordingto Dip. 8. 10, Snip.317", MBv. the theras Kassapagotta, Muladeva 115s,and Tlka 2225, were See the Introduction. Sahadeva, and Dundubhissara. (Alakadeva),
The
86 he had
with four
MaMvamsa
gone
xn.
42
42
43
the Dhammacakkappavattanatheras, suttanta.1 beingsattained to the reward Eighty kotis of living of the path (ofsalvation). The five theras separately converted five kingdoms ; from each of them a hundred thousand
persons the
received the
in pabbajja, believing
the
doctrine
of
Sammasarpbuddha.
the thera Uttara Suvannabhumi.2 the thera Now
at Sona
44 45
this
born
in the
a king'spalace, was
fearsome
demon
46
who
came
forth out
wont
to devour
a
and child)
was
vanish in the
again.
'
that very
moment
(the prince
47
the the peoplesaw king'spalace. When theras theythought: These are companions of the demons/ and armed to the And theras kill them. they came
born
asked
48
are
What
does
this
no
mean
'
and
'
We
in pious ascetics,
wise from
companions of
the
ocean
demon/
Then
49 50
the demon
when thera
came
forth
with
a
her follow-
ing,and
But the
the
peoplesaw
twice
them
as
theyraised
great outcry.
and demons terrifying therewith surrounded the demon and her followingon every side. into possession She thought : This (country) is come of these (people)/ she took to flight. and, panic-stricken, created many
'
51
When
made
bulwark
round
the
country he
52
the
assemblythe Brahmajala(suttanta).3 the people who the (three) unto came refuges converted to thousand were preceptsof duty ; sixty
discourse
M.V. of the of the the wheel settingin motion foil. (= Vin. Pit. i, p. 10 foil.);S.V, foil. until
I. e.
'
The See
;
I. 6. 17
S.B.E.
xi,p.
146
was,
The
'the
is very
Burma
a
this from
D.
it is
China
Mahayana-form
FLEET,
the
=
century A. might
be
'
country in Bengal called by Hiuen-tsang Ka-lo-na-su-fa-la-na Karnasuvarna, or else the country along the river Son, a river in Central India,and its rightbank, which of the Ganges on tributary
3
is also called
I. e.
'
The
CHAPTEE
XIII
THE
COMING
OF
MAHINDA
THE
great
had
thera twelve
Mahinda,
years
to
of
lofty wisdom,
the island of
:
who
his
at
that
time
2
been
the
(a monk),
convert
charged by
teacher
dered ponis the
and
by
on
brotherhood
Lanka,
(
the
fitting time
;
(for this)and
must
thought
king/
meantime
the took the
Old
king
3
Mutasiva he
had
his
son
become
in the and he
When he
resolved
to
to visit
his
kinsfolk,
and the four
bade
farewell asked
the
his of
teacher
the
brotherhood
with him
having
theras
1
leave
king
and
also
Samghamitta/s
son,
miraculously gifted
powers; and
samanera
Sumana,2
to
mighty
3
in the six
to
supernormal
on
he
went
Dakkhinagiri
While
confer
was
his kinsfolk
(the)grace passed
mother dear
son
he
so
doing
six months
When
he he
came
in
time
to
Vedisagiri 4
and
when
the Devi
city of
saw
his
Devi,
she foods
visited him
his
mother
and
her
made
welcome,
his
companions
led the
likewise,
up
to
with
she
thera
the
lovely vihara
8
When
the that
while bestowed
ruling
on
over
the halted
met
realm
in there
of
the
a
Avanti,
9
1 0
father
had he
him,
and
a
town
of
Vedisa, before
named wife
in
;
came
to
UjjenI,
of
lovely maiden
made her
and years
Devi, the
and
a
daughter
merchant,
child
and
he
his bore
had
she
was
by
At
1 1
him
two
UjjenI
beautiful
when
See
A
12. 7. vihara
in
See
5. 39.
5. 170.
UjjenI,
modern
Skr.
Uj jay
Bhilsa
in I. in
See
note
to
Vedisa
of
is the
Gwalior
State,
situated
;
26
miles
north-east
J.P.T.S.
Bhopal.
p. 87
See
Imp.
Gazetteer
of India,
s. v.
E.
MULLER,
1888,
; RHYS
DAVIDS,
Buddhist
India,
p.
288.
XIIL
20
The
1
Coming of Mahinda
89
12
that time
cityof Vedisa. The thera who then the time (was come), thought sojourned there, perceiving (that)
she lived in the
'
In
that
commanded
by
13
take part, great king Devanampiyatissa he when of the three things2 the splendour
the envoys. He shall climb the Missaka14
it from
on
mountain that
same
the
we
of uposatha-day
the month
Jettha.4
On
The
and
will go to the beauteous isle of Lanka.' great Indra5 sought out the excellent thera Mahinda
day
15
said to him
'
Lanka
by
we
the Samwill be 16
buddha
and (forthis)
daughter of
had heard had
Devi's
Bhanduka,
to return
no
the doctrine
preached by
of
one
17
Devi, and
more
obtained
the reward
unto
life6 remained
a
When
he had
stayedthere
month
month
thera,on
four
the upoand
18
satha-dayof
Sumana,7
and
the the
Jettha, with
the
theras
to the end that Bhanduka also, lay-disciple rose they might be known for human beings,8 up in the air of wonfrom that vihara ; and he, the (thera) drous (and departed) on alighted coming hither with his following powers,
19
20
Namely,
Cf. note Now
of Mahinda's
visit.
2
3
the mountain
Mihintale
8 miles to the
A.
4
GUNASEKARA),
See note
A
to
6
1. 12. the
name
play upon
Mahinda.
is the third and last Such
men,
The
stage of anagaml
of salvation in the
stage
an
but
one,
on
the
path
either re-born,
one
will not in
a
be
but
only
Brahma-
world,
7
where
seems
See
an
CHILDERS,
'
. . .
s. v.
It
if
18
were on
verse. interpolated
:
If
we
it 19
;
perfectly well
17 he
remained
up, "c.'
with
the
with
lay-disciple
...
rose
That, besides,
is
four
theras
and from
Sumana
were
Mahinda's
fellow-travellers
already known
8
12. 7 and
13. 4.
With
31,
also Mah.
ed.,note
to
13. 19 b and
Album
Kern
205-206.
90
Mahavamsa
xiii.
21
the and
pleasant
fair
Missaka-mountain,
on
the
Sila-peak
on
the
open
Ambatthala.1
foretold
to
21
He
who
was
by
the
Sage,
the merit
hour in
of
death,
as
bringing Lanka,
Master,3
salvation
Lafika,2
by
converting
like
to
he,
who
for
Lanka's
salvation
become
of
the
alighted
there,
extolled
by
gods
Lanka.
Here
ends
in
thirteenth
chapter,
called for
'
The the
Coming
serene
of
Mahinda',
and emotion
Mahavamsa,
compile;!
joy
pious.
Cf. of
TENNENT,
the
Ceylon,
ii,
p.
605
foil.
The
is it
the lies
peak
tableland
2
Mihintale-mountain.
which the the
Immediately Ambatthala-dagaba
of L.' to the Buddha's
on
Lit.
The
'
For allusion
blessing probably
is
legendary
visit
to
the
island.
CHAPTER
XIV
THE
ENTRY
INTO
THE
CAPITAL
THE
king Devanampiyatissa
dwellers
chase. in the the
on
who
had
arranged a
forth
to
water-
set capital,
enjoy the
of his 2 of 3
pleasuresof
men
Attended
by forty thousand
The
to
he went
deva
who form
desired to show of
an
the theras
him, appeared
the thicket.
elk-stagbrowsing
'
in
king saw him, he thought : an unheeding (creature)and he struck bowstring; the stag fled towards the
'
When
It is
out
a
unseemly to
sound from The
to
kill
his
mountain.
near
king
thera.
pursued, but
When
vanished.
the
the
the thera
into the
view prince's
the
himself (deva)
Thinking :
much the him
'
If he thera
sees
too
many
will be
too
let
alone. thera
When said to 7
beheld
him
he stood
by his name, Tissa, the king thought forthwith : (That is)a Samanas of the O great king, disciples are yakkha/ we, From King of Truth. compassiontoward thee are we come hither from Jambudlpa/ thus said the thera. When the king heard this fear left him. And remembering the message of
:
' (
Come
Tissa/ hither,
callinghim
his and
these
were
samanas,
he laid bow
10
aside and
the thera
came
approaching the
and
sat down
near
sage
he
exchanged greeting
the
his others
peopleand
who had
surrounded
come
and
great thera
visible.
come
1 1
the the
'
with
:
to become
too he said
'
When
did these
12
hither ?
thera answered
(They came)
with
me/
And
92 he
MaMvamsa
asked
'
XI V. 1 3
1 3
moreover
Are
there
'
in
other said
yellow robes;
learned skilled in the in
miraculous
15
the reading the thoughts of others,possessing l the of the Buddha/ ear: disciples heavenly ? By what way are you come (The king) then asked Neither since the answer And was : by land nor by water'
'
'
are
we
come,' he
test him
understood
that
they
had
come
through
the air.
16
To
that most
as
and
even
he
was
wise
questions severally.
17
'
What
name
'
'
'
'
18
'
And
are
yet other
and
the
other mangoes
'
There
are
many
are
trees that
are
not
mangoes.'
19
'And which
'
are are
and
those
trees
'
hast thou
are are
shrewd
wit, O ruler of
'
men
!'
20
"
They
And
'
'
king,who
are
not
kinsfolk
of
thine ?
'
There
are
21
'Is there
'
of those than
kin/ and
the others ?
'
There
Good
is
'
wit,O ruler of
was a
men
!'
man, of
22
When
1
known
that he
and
keen-witted
are
the
the
Iddhi, cetopariyanana
See note
on
dibbasota
three
six abhinna.
2
4. 12 the
(No. I,III,II).
abl.
The
positivebahu,
See 12. 25
with
natito,
Mah.
stands
instead
of the
comparative.
(withnote)also
ed.,Introd., p. liv.
xiv.
32
Tlie
Entry
into the
Capital
93
wise thera
preached to
At the
came
the
Culahatthipadupamahe, with
the
suttanta.1
thousand
end
unto
discourse
forty 23
him.
eat
'
refuges.2 (three) In the evening1they brought the king's meal would Although the king knew that these (bhikkhus)
men, to the
the
to not
24
meal, with
When
the
thought :
It
25
seemly at
do he
not
was
least to ask
them/
We
eat
concerningthe time.
said
'
when
told the
We
will go
into the
city/
1
Go
thou,great king, we
must
stay here/
man 3
'
'
who
come
with
us/
2 7
the
the
doctrine
near us.
abide
Then,
(
when
he had
taken
leave of the 29
a
To-morrow
into the
I will send
waggon,
he city,'
took Bhandu
aside And
he 30
asked
him
what
all.
the theras
intended
(todo).
told the
king
the
When
he
And
was
was now a
full of
fear had
were
left him
human
because Bhandu
31
layman,knew
us
beings.5 Saying:
thera bestowed
on
'Let young
bestow
the pabbajja/
32
Bhanduka,
that group
the boundaries
of that
the
within
both (ofbhikkhus),6
I.e. 'The
lesser
discourse
on
print.' footelephant's
M. I, pp. 175-184.
Namely Bhandu. is a synonym of anagamiphala. See 13. 17. Agataphala See the note to 13. 19. The king'sremaining fears that he was in the presence of supernaturalbeings,were only overcome by the details communicated by Bhandu. has its parish, the bounds of which Every monastery (sima) are fixed according to M.V. II. 11 foil., and within these the strictly ecclesiastical proceedings take place. Since there were as yet no monasteries in Ceylon the boundaries of the village situated on Missaka served as a parish. But the chapter(gana) which carried out the ordination was formed and his companions. by Mahinda
to 1. 32 and
4 8 6
See notes
62.
94
Mahavamsa
even
xiv.
33
33
in the
same
moment
he
state of arahant.
samanera
34
Then
Sumana: He asked I
announce
:
'Announce
f
ye
the time of
35
preachingthe dhamma/
the time
'
How
sir, far,
the
shall I make
to be heard
when
it?' When
Over
(preachingthe)dhamma, making
power,
over was
heard,by
at
his miraculous
36
of Lanka.
When
the
by
the
rock-basin
the loud
any
the 'Has
37
he
come
sent
message
'
asking:
'
misfortune
come
to pass ?
He
answered
No
misfortune has
word
to pass ; the
time
was
of the Sambuddha.'
38
When
the
earth-godsheard the
it and
so
summons
of the
to gradually
came
samanera
they
39
echoed
the call
summons
rose
up
Brahma's
heaven.
Because devas
of the
;
there
a great together
assembly of
40
and
the thera
preached before
converted
3
this
ing gatherdoctrine
without nagas
as
number and
were
to unto
the the
many
supannas the
came
(three)
this from
refuges.Even
discourse
so
when
devas
thera
Sariputtauttered
did the
Mahinda.
42
On and
the
said
:
morrow
'
the
king sent
into this
waggon.
we
The
driver
came
Mount
city/
will the
43
'We
will not
mount
the waggon;
thou,
we
follow thee.'
44
Saying
and
they,full
the
the
of
they rose
to
they
descended
of
By
Nagapokuna
to
distance
below
2
GEIGER, Ceylon,p.
we
By Samacitta-sutta
the
have
understand
Dukanipata
of A.
I,pp.
63-65.
is subject
See In
note
to 19. 20.
a
sumanoratha
play
on
the
words
ratha
'waggon'
is
sum
and
sarathi
4
'driver' is intended.
The
ratha
of the
theras
anas
'. piousfeeling
96 the Vimanavatthu
to the
l
Mahuvamsa
and the
xiv.
59
Sacca-samyutta.2 The
women
attained
59
first
stage of sanctification.3
And had
seen
many
people from
the
them
hearing-from persons who city, day before,of the virtues of the theras,
to
see
the
60
came
together desirous
made
great stir
been
their
men
welfare
let them
'
Here
cleanse
shall
62
63
64
the theras. When townspeople be able to look upon they had cleansed the elephant's hall, and had adorned it speedilywith canopiesand so forth, they prepared seats The there (for the theras), great according to their rank. he had theras and when thither with the (other) thera went his seat, he, the eminent taken preacher,preached the Devaduta-suttanta.4 When the townspeople, who were come filled with faith and a thousand together,heard it, they were the persons among thus
them
in the
attained
to the
65
When
unto true
isle of Lanka
peerlessthera, like
the
true
of Lanka, had preached the protection in the speechof the island,he, doctrine in two places, thus brought to pass the descent of the lightof the island, the Master in the
faith.
Here the
ends
the fourteenth
the
chapter, called
'
The the
Entry
serene
into
',in Capital
emotion
Mahavamsa,
compiled for
joy
and
of the
pious.
the
The
Petavatthu
and in the in
the
Vimanavatthu The
former
a
are
books contains
of
Khuddaka-nikaya
of
Sutta-pitaka.
the
stories
for sins
ghosts
that the
as
dwell
committed,
that
serve
latter contains
ghost-world,as of descriptions
1886.
punishment
the marvellous
texts
palaces
edited
have
been
by
2
EDM. See
HARDY,
S.
1889,
V,
pp.
I. e. the
sotapatti.
to 12. 29.
See note
CHAPTER
XV
THE
ACCEPTANCE
OF
THE
MAHAVIHABA
WHEN
the
they
saw
that
the
elephant's hall
was
also
too
small,
people who
for the
had theras
l
assembled
outside in the
seats
gate,
forth
women
in
the
pleasant 2
cool and
Nandana-garden
covered and who And with seated
came
verdure.
The
by
the south
gate
himself
thither the
there.
sat at
of
s
of noble
families
4 5
feet
to them
thera
women
preached
attained
Balapandita-suttanta.2 A
the first
thousand
of the in the
stage of salvation.
So, there
Then the with
grove,
set
evening
forth
fell.
'
the
theras
And
saying :
the the
We
and
will the
to
go
hence
came
'
to
mountain.' all
they
told
king,
he
king
him
:
speed.
Approaching
the is
a
thera
said
;
It is 7
evening-time, Nandana-garden
answered
'
and
mountain
is far away
to
but
here When
in the
pleasant place
rest/
too
near
they city/
nor
:
'
It is not The
the far
(he said) :
too may
near
Mahamegha-park
to rest
neither
shade
must
too
abound
there lord !
;
'
it
pleaseyou
the thera
there back.
Thou
turn
back,
Then The
turned
cetiya(afterwards)built
near
on
the
spot where
therefore
he
turned
10
back,
the
Kadamba-river,
is called
Nivatta-
cetiya.3
Southwards the thera
to
from
Nandana
the
lord
at
of chariots the
east
himself
led
1 1 12
the
Mahamegha-park,
gate.
When
See
I.
e.
note
'
to
11.2. of the
or
the S.
discourse
fool
and A. The to
the
wise
man.'
Probably
the
suttanta
3
II, pp.
23-25,
perhaps
See
I, 101-105.
I.e.
the
turning-back cetiya.
note
H
thupa
14. 45.
was
probably
not
far
from
the
Pathamacetiya.
98 the
Mahavamsa
XV.
13
king
had
bidden
them
prepare
fine beds
and
chairs in
13
wise,in the pleasant fitting royaldwelling,and had taken here in comfort/ he leave of the theras,saying: Dwell
'
returned theras
14
the
his ministers
but
the
As
soon
the
morning
he
came,
flowers and
15
visited the
theras,greetingthem
asked
offering
flowers in
? pleasant
'
homage, and
Is the
was
them
'
:
'
Was
(your)rest
the
Pleasant
garden is
to
for fitting
16
ascetics.' asked
'
And
he
Is
an
arama
allowed
the had
sir ? brotherhood,
'
It is
knowledge of
17
that
which
is not
allowed.
When the
And
other
were people
and pleased
of the Veluvanarama.1 accepting and (all) the it,he rejoicedgreatly joyful. had
come
18
But
to
the queen
Anula, who
Anula with
with fivehundred
women
to the second
stage of salvation.2
women
19
And the
said to
20
king : We would fain king your Majesty/ The ! But them the pabbajja
'
pabbajja-ordination,
thera,
'
Bestow
answer
ye
to
on
made
the the
nun,
king
21
bestow
a
pabbajjaon
my younger is who
But
lives
known sister,
22
in ripe
Samghamitta.
hither
She,
the southern
samanas,
23
branch
renowned
with her bringing great Bodhi-tree of the king of also bhikkhums and (bringing) this end then send
a
message
to
the
The
Veluvana
'Bamboo-grove'
Bimbisara
near
Rajagaha
M.V. Jat.
was
present
of the
Magadha-king
the
once
to the
Buddha.
(=
2
xiii, p. 143) ;
A world in the
i,p. 85,
before
sakadagamiphala.
sakadagami
of
men
who
will
only
attainingto
nibbana.
xv.
34
TJie
of the Acceptance
MaJiavihdra
99
he 24 and taking a splendid vase well/ said the king1, the hand of the thera over poured water (intoken) of giving1, Mahinda with the words : This Mahamegha-park do I give 25
1
It is
'
to the brotherhood.'
As And does
the water
fell on
the
Wherefore the
26
the
earth
doctrine is
The
'
to the thera, 27 (king)1offered jasmine-blossoms and the thera went to the royal dwelling and scattered eight 2 handfuls of blossoms about the picula-tree the 28 on standing3 and when south side of it. And then again the earth "quaked he gave this reason he was : questioned Alreadyin the life- 29
noble
time
of three Buddhas
there
has
been
here
malaka4
for
now
out carrying
O king,and brotherhood,
will it be
so
Northward
he went
the beautiful
as
30
and bathing-tank,
there
thera
earth
scattered
many
blossoms. asked
And
then
again did
this
the
reason
room
quake,
baths.' 5
and
being 31
for
to
warm
the wise
went (thera)
king'sdwellingand
of)as
many
flowers.
32 gateway of the same did homage to the spot with (the offering earth here the And quaked; and 33 again
the
the reason,
and
the thera
34
Here
the
south
branch
of the Bodhi-
play on
the words
the
2
great flowered
Tamarix I would
'of
high
birth'
Indica.
preferthe reading thite agreeingwith picule instead of thito. CertainlyB2 is the only one in the collated MSS. that has this reading, but it is supported by the Tlka. 4 is a space marked Malaka off and usually within which terraced,
sacred at The
6
functions
were
carried out.
were
In
the
Mahavihara
(Tissarama)
15. 192.
a
Anuradhapura
sacred
there
32 malakas.
was
Bodhi-tree
for instance
surrounded
malaka.
On
S.B.E.
the
sitting-baths',
M.V.
I. 25.
12-13;
VIII. 8. 1 foil.
H
100
tree
35
Mahdvamsa
of the
xv"
35
three Buddhas1
of
our
age
was
planted,when
branch
of its placeon
the south
36 37
Then
great thera
that spot
as
the
Mahamucalamalaka
And
and
scattered
earth
reason:
many
flowers.
then
again the
he told (theking) the quaked, and being questioned 'The of the brotherhood will be here, uposatha-hall
O
38
placeof the
Panham-
bamalaka.
A
39 40
ripe mangoof
41
did the gardener offer to the king, and the largesize, to the thera. The thera, king offered the splendid (fruit) bringerof good to mankind, let the king know that he would fain rest seated and forthwith the king had fine carpet a the thera was seated the king gave him the spread. When When the thera had eaten it he gave the kernel mango-fruit. it there and to the king to plant. The king himself planted
over
and
42 43
his hands.
In
that grew
44
moment
shoot
a
littleby littleto
When
those who
were
king
beheld
their thera,
end
(withamazement).
eighthandfuls
And of flowers and he gave
45
Now
then
46
reason
again the
'
earth
quaked.
be the shall be
This
will place
the
be distributed, which
given
47
O ruler of men/ beingassembled together, bhikkhus) the And he went (afterwards) up to the placewhere
Catusthen
sala 2 was,
1
and
there he scattered
who
as
many
and flowers,
in the preceded the historical Buddha millions of years), present age of the world (kappa, lastingmany and named are Kakusandha, Konagamana Kassapa. According to the legend they all, like Gotama, visited Ceylon and the events
The
three
Buddhas
always
p. 8
2
followed
the Hah.
same
course.
GEIGER, Dlpavamsa
served
as
a
and
Mahavamsa,
the monks.
and foil.,
I. e.
quadrangularhall
for refectory
xv.
60
The
did the
l:0'i
the 48
again
reason
earth
the
king
asked
'
the On : earthquake the thera made answer occasion of the receipt of a royal park by the three former 49 Buddhas,1 on this spot the giftsbrought from all parts by the dwellers in the island being laid down, the three Blessed And Ones and their communities now acceptedthem. again 50 of the Catussala will stand here and here will be the refectory the brotherhood, O lord of men/ From thence the great thera Mahinda, the friend 2 of the 5 1 and what unfitting, place, island, knowing what was a fitting stood. the Great thupa 3 (afterwards) to the spot where went of the
At
that
time
there
was
within
the
enclosure of the
; at
royal52
end,
the 53
park a
on
Kakudha-pond
was
a
its upper
the
water,
level spot
for fitting
thupa.
theybrought the king eight flowers.4 The king offered the campaka- 54 baskets of cam pakaflowers to the thera and the thera did homage to the spot with And then again the earth quaked, the 55 the campaka-flowers. of the earthquake and the thera gave king asked the reason
When
the thera went
thither
in due
(
order the
reasons
for the
earthquake.
has
a
56
Conqueror 57 Kakusandha, a teacher versed truth, compassionate all the world. At that time this Mahamegha-grove 58 toward known Mahatittha ; the capital called Abhaya layeastward was as the other side of the Kadamba-river,6there Abhaya 59 on was Ojadlpa. king. This island then bore the name
our
In
age
'
By (the power
See note
of)the
demons
arose pestilence
here among
60
1
2
to 15. 34.
lit. furtherer, increaser of the island. Dlpavaddhana, 15. 167. I. e. the Ruwanwseli-dagaba see paliHemamali, Michelia Champaka, Lin.,belongingto the Magnoliaceae.
=
125
prefer to
refer
Kadambanadiya
ed. the pare
comma
preceding
be
after ahu
(59a).
Maliavamsa
the
G 1
xv.
61
people.When
Kakusandha, who
was
giftedwith
the ten
62 63
it to an end and then,to bringmisery, the converting of beingsand progress of the docto achieve trine in this island, he, urged on by the might of his compassion, came through the air surrounded by forty thousand like to him,2 and stood on the Devakuta-mountain. (disciples) By the power of the Satnbuddha, O great king,the pestilence
knew powers,1
of this
over
the whole
island.
65
66
07
O king of men, the King of the Wise, the Standingthere, All men his will : in Ojadlpa shall Great Sage, proclaimed this day,and if they only desire to come me see (to me) all shall draw near without to me trouble and speedily/'' men When the king and the townsfolk the Prince of the saw to shine, Wise, shiningand making the mountain they came thither. swiftly who were The people, to the going thither to bringofferings
" f '
believed devatas,
68 to
the Guide
be
devatas. (such)
And
of the
had
09
Wise, had
repast
and
"
brought him
and stately
This
: thinking
of the Prince
70
of the
Wise,
with and
the
small/'made
'When with
the Sambuddha
a
the brotherhood
beautiful seats in
71
fine
the
peoplein
And
the Guide
of the world
the brotherhood
every side. the with
72
from
king served
with
as (foods)
the Guide
own
of the World
brotherhood such
his
were
food, both
hard
brought by sundry
74
after the meal,on this very was seated, Conqueror as a spot,3the king offered him the Mahatitthaka-garden with the Mahatitthaka-grove, preciousgift. When gay
While
the
See
note
to 3. 6.
Tadi,
a
him,
blessed
like (the
Cf.
of araha.
Idheva,
that
we
now
are.'
104
(
Mahavamsa
the
XV.
88
88
vessel for holydrinkingGivinghis own and leaving the bhikkhuni here with people
also his Sambuddha
89 90
Mahadeva disciple
went
with
from
thousand
eastward
thence,and
the
9 1
of the Ratanamala,he delivered exhortations to the people place ; in the air with the brotherhood then rising the Conqueror returned to Jambudlpa. the Lord Konagamana, Second l in our age of the world was
t
the
92
"
Mahamegha-grove
of the
was
known
Mahasouth. This
noma, 93
the
was
king of
94
95
Varadipa. of drought prevailed At that time the misery here in Varadipa. When the ConquerorKonagamana knew of this misery, then,to bringit to an end, and afterwards to achieve the converting
of
bore the
beings and
progress
island,
96
he, urged on
the
by
the
might
the
of his
through
to him-
surrounded air,
thousand by thirty
like (disciples)
97
self,and
power from in due
stood upon
Sumanakutaka-mountain.
the
By
an
the and
of the
Sambuddha
drought came
to
end,
the time
season
ceased rainfall
began.
"
98
99
O king of men, the King of the Wise, there, standing the Great Sage,proclaimed his will : All men in Varadipa shall see me this day, and if they only desire to come (tome) shall draw near to me without all men trouble and speedily/'
' (
And
100
When
the
king
and
saw
the
to
Prince of the
were
going
the
thither to
of
believed
to
Guide
the
World
with
the
102
brotherhood
103
And when the king, (such)devatas. had greetedthe King of the Wise, had greatlyrejoicing, invited him to a repast, and had broughthim to the city, the monarch then thinking This stately and pleasant : placeis
"
be
Cf. 15. 57
and foil.,
15. 125
foil.
xv.
117
Tlie
the
Acceptanceof the
Mahavihara
of the Wise
105
with and
104
for fitting
Prince
small,"made
the Sambuddha
a
sit here
beautiful seats in
fine
pavilion
105
(byhim).
the
peopleof
the island
saw
the Guide
of the World
the brotherhood
sittinghere,they brought giftshither the king served the Guide of the side. And every with the brotherhood with his own food,both together
soft, and
folk. after sitting, him the the the meal
on
106
and
with
such
as (foods)
were
brought by
this 107
as
sundry other
'While
Conquerorwas spot, the king offered very a precious gift. And when
blossoms the
at
an
the
Mahanoma-garden
unwonted
season,
108
even here,the Master sitting thousand preached the doctrine ; then thirty persons attained to the fruit of the path (ofsalvation). 'When the Conqueror had stayed the day through in the Mahanoma-grove, he went in the evening to that plot of
great
earth
quaked.
And
109
110
ground
where
the
former
Bodhi-tree in
111
from thence again,thought, mindful of the salvation of rising the island-people : Bringingthe south branch of my Bodhi"
112
with
her, the
his
bhikkhuni
Kantakananda
come
bhikkhums." (other)
When
knew
2
took
the
113 114
king
when
a
of that the
region
with
her and
the tree.
a
Then
then
of wondrous
had south
drawn
line with
of pencil
the
Bodhi-tree
set it in she
golden vase,
and
115
king, with
surrounded
vase,
brought hither,O great bhikkhums, (her company of) five hundred with its golden 116 by the devatas,and she placedit, righthand
gave of the Sambuddha. The
to
117
in the outstretched
Tathagata received
1
it and
it to the
king Samiddha
XXIV.
Ficus
glomerata.
Sobhana
(Buddhavamsa
16
106
Mahavamsa
of the earth
xv.
118
plantedit there
northward
in the Mahanoma
Then
the Sambuddha
went
from
the Sirisamala
and
119
doctrine to the
malaka.
they heard
of he had gone
the
king, the
120
conversion
twenty thousand
place.When
where had sunk into
yet further
had
the former
Buddha
sat,and
121
from the Sambuddha, rising meditation, preached the doctrine to those around him, and again, that
at
122 123
124
beingsattain to the fruit placedid ten thousand living of the path (ofsalvation). as a relic for the Giving his girdle homage of the people, and leaving here with her followingand also the bhikkhum Mahasumba his disciple with a thousand bhikkhus, the Samin the buddha, standing on this side of the Ratanamala Sudassanamala, delivered exhortations to the people;then
'
rising with
returned to
125
*
the
brotherhood
into
the
air, the
the
Conqueror
the
Jambudipa.
in
our
Third
age
of the world
was
Conqueror of
world.
128 129
Mahamegha-grove was called (atthat time)Mahasanamed Visala, laytoward the West. Jayanta gara; the capital, of the king of that region then,and this isle the name was bore then the name of Mandadipa. had broken At that time a hideous and life-destroying war brother. When out between kingJayanta and his younger royal
'The
'
Kassapa,giftedwith
knew
130
the ten
of
passion, com-
how
great
was
wretchedness
an
caused
to
beingsby
this war,
then,to bringit to
end and
afterwards
131
of beings and progress of the doctrine converting in this island, he, urged on by the might of his compassion, came throughthe air surrounded by twenty thousand (disciples)
to achieve the
like to
132
'
and himself,
he stood
on
the Subhakuta-mountain.
men,
Standingthere,O king of
1
the
King
men
3
of the in
Wise, the
Great
MandadTpa
to 3. 6.
See note
xv.
147
The
me
107
shall all
men
see
this
and
to
if
me
theyonlydesire to
without
come
shall draw
the
trouble and
and the townsfolk the Prince of the saw kingWise, shiningand making the mountain to shine,they came thither. The many people who were swiftly coming to the mountain to the devatas, that their own bringingofferings side might win the victory, believed the Guide of the World 'When with the the brotherhood
to be
135
136
(such)devatas King
and
the
king
the
and
battle.
When of
king, 137
had
the
Wise,
to the
the city,
138
then
and pleasant thinking: This stately place is of the King of the Wise the resting-place with the the Sambuddha and not too small," made and sit here
on
139
beautiful
seats
in
fine
pavilion
140
(by him). the people of the island saw When the Guide of the World with the brotherhood hither here, theybrought gifts sitting
from World every
king served the Guide of the both togetherwith the brotherhood with his own food,
side.
And the and with such (foods) as soft,
were
141
hard and
broughtby sundry
this
142
other folk.
'
While
very
a
the
as Mahasagara-garden
precious gift.
blossoms at
the
unwonted
season,
143
here,the Master
persons
144
preachedthe
'
then
twenty thousand
attained
path (ofsalvation).
had
went
When
he Mahasagara-grove,
145
former sunk
Bodhi-trees
into
thought,mindful of the salvation of again, the island-people Bringingthe south branch of my Bodhi; with her, the bhikkhum Sudhamma shall tree,the nigrodha,1 with (other) bhikkhums." now come
"
147
Ficus
Indica,the banyan-tree.
108
148 149
MaMvamsa
the then knew his
XV.
148
'When
thought
power
she forthwith
to
took
the
king1
when
a
of that the
regionwith
her and
went
the tree.
a
Then
had
drawn
line with
took the
of pencil
the south
branch,she
a
150
golden vase, and O great king, this, by her miraculous power, she broughthither, with (her five hundred bhikkhums, surrounded by of) company
the devatas
;
Bodhi-branch
separatedand
set it in
151
and
she
placedit with
of the it to the
its
golden
; the
vase,
in the
out-stretched
152
Sambuddha
Tathagata
received it and
lord of the earth
153
'
Then
the Buddha
northward
from
the
Nagamalaka
in the Asokathe
and
154
preached the
When ruler of men,
doctrine to the
peopleseated
malaka. O
they
even
heard
the
preachingof
doctrine,
of four thousand
155
yet further
had
sat,
156
he, sittingthere,had sunk into meditation, the from thence again,preached the doctrine Sambuddha, rising
him
; and
even
to those around
157 158
living beingsattain to the Givinghis rain-cloak as and leaving the bhikkhuni his disciple with Sabbananda
'
did ten thousand place fruit of the path (ofsalvation). a relicfor the homage of the people, here with her following, and also
a
in that
thousand
bhikkhus,he, stand-
159
ing on this side of the river (and) of the Sudassanamala in the Somanassamalaka, delivered exhortations to the people;
then
with rising the
brotherhood
into the
returned to
160
'
Jambudlpa.
in
our
Fourth
age
of
the
world
lived the
Conqueror
toward
world.
When
he
came
he drove
162
the
when yakkhas,
the nagas.
he
second
time
subdued
hither
163
Kalyam, he
the brotherhood
Accordingto
1727,"c.
the Tlka
SeeBuddhavamsaXXV.33
p.
xv.
173
l
Hie
in the
of the Acceptance
the former
Mahavihara
Bodhi-trees had
109
stood
his and
ease
placewhere
in placehere appointed for the thupa and (also) used the place (appointed for the guarding) of those (things) to this and when he had gone by him (and left as) relics,2 in the
164
had stood, the place where the former Buddhas then no great Sage, the Light of the World, since there were human beings in Lahkadipa, uttered exhortations to the host 165 of devatas, in the island, and to the nagas ; then rising dwelling
side of the
into the
air with
the
brotherhood
the
Conqueror returned
to
Jambudlpa.
'
Thus
was
this
spot,O
O king, visited by four Buddhas place, ; on with great king,will the thupa stand hereafter, for
a
this
166 167
the relic-chamber
dona
Buddha's
and
body; (itwill be) a hundred and twenty cubits4 high Hemamall.' (will be) known by the name
Then Tor thou build said the
'
myself will
to
other tasks
one
fulfil here.
Do
shall
169
out;
descended
from
thee
thy brother6 the vice-regent will hereafter be 170 Mahanama, one named Yatthalayakatissa, king, his son will be the king named Gothabhaya; his son 171 will be (the king) named Kakavannatissa ; this king'sson, O king, will be the great king named Abhaya, renowned under 172 wondrous the title Dutthagamani : he, great in glory, power (thupa). A
of and prowess, will build the
thupa
Thus
Lit.
'
when
he
had
place,"c.'
is a relic consisting of Paribhogadhatu something used by the dead Saint, in oppositionto sariradhatu of his body. body-relic ',i. e. remains A certain measure of capacity. See CHILDEKS, P.D., s. v. hattha is or According to the Abhidhanappadipika a ratana equal to 2 vidatthi DAVIDS, Ancient (=8|-9 inches). See RHYS Coins and Measures of Ceylon,p. 15. The total height of the thupa would accordinglybe nearly 180 feet. This is exactlythe height of the main body of the Ruwanwseli-dagabawithout the tee '. SMITHER, Cf.
2
157.
'
'
Architectural
6
Remains, Anuradhapura,
p. 27 and
Plate XXIV.
110 monarch
these
174
MaMvamsa
set up here
a
XV.
174
he inscribed
saying's.
as
And power,
the
great and
most
wise
Mahinda thera,
of wondrous
175
he, the
and
the pleasant Mahamegha-grove,the Tissarama, accepted unshakeable caused the earth to quake in eight places;1
when
he had
his
entered
the
city
176
like unto
and
meal
in the
king's
Nandana-grove, he
177
there in the and when, sitting palace, had preached to the people the sutta and the had
Aggikkhandhopama 2
in the fruit of in (again) the
made
thousand
persons
takers par-
path Mahamegha-grove.
had
eaten
on
he rested (ofsanctification)
178
When
the thera
the
third
day
in the
king's
house, and
179
in sitting
the
180
the
king,who
had
himself
of
the
'Does
the
doctrine
the
181
yet, O ruler of men, only, Conqueror stand, sir?' "Not O lord of nations, when the boundaries are established4 here for the uposatha-ceremonyand the other acts (of religion), of the Conqueror,shall the according to the command
doctrine stand.'
Thus
182
the
king answered
thou
thus: of
Buddha's
command,
boundaries
Giver
all
light!
answered
Therefore
the thus
establish the
Thus
with
speed,
taking in
184
city/
'
If it
spoke the great king and the thera lord of the be so, then do thou thyself,
of the
earth,mark
185
out the
course
it/
'
It is
well/ said
the lord of
king
186
(garden)he went gods leavingthe Nandana5 forth from the Mahameghavanarama into his palace. When the thera on the fourth day had eaten in the king's in the Nandana-grove, the Anahouse,he preached, sitting
of the
1
2 *
Of. note
to 12. 34.
3
B
Nandana
name
pleasure-garden
in Indra's
heaven.
112 had
MaMvamsa
x v. 1 9 7
given to drink of the ambrosial draught to a thousand he rested (again) in the Mahamegha-grove. persons there,
197
198
day the thera had eaten in the in the Nandana king'shouse he preached,sitting -grove, the and after the wise preacher had thus Gomayapindl-sutta,1 brought a thousand persons to conversion he rested (again)
on
When
also
the
sixth
in the
199
Mahamegha-grove.
on
200
day the thera had eaten in the house he preached, in the Nandana-garden, the king's sitting and Dhammacakkappavattana-suttanta,2 having brought a
the
seventh
When
thousand
201
persons
to
conversion
he
rested
(again) in
the
202
had in Mahamegha-grove, when he, the light-giver, wise brought eight thousand five hundred persons to in the space of only seven days. The Nandana-grovebeing the place where the holyone made the in the
true
this
version con-
had
203
And
be built for
204
is called the Jotivana.3 forth, that a pasada very first days the king commanded and he had the bricks the thera in the Tissarama,
doctrine to shine
of
fire. The
was dwelling-house
dark-coloured
therefore
they named
the
it the
Kalapasada-
parivena.4
205 206
Then
did
he set up
for building
and He a a salaka-house,6 Lohapasada,5 seemly refectory. built many and in an excellent manner, parivenas bathingtanks and buildings for repose, by night and by day,and so
1
2
I.e.
'
the discourse
to 12. 41. of
on
the clod of
cow-dung.'
Cf. note
I. e.
'
Grove
light.'
house.' On to 27. 14. to which the
pasada see note We have here apparently a tradition according built by Devanampiyatissa and not Lohapasada was by Dutthagamani. The Tika explainsthe passage in when the Dutthagamani built his House of Bronze
5
'
*
that had
been
6
removed.
Food, given
to the
as
present
to
the
tributed dis-
monks
distribution
salakagga
salaka-house.'
GUILDERS,
P.D.,
s. v.
XV.
214
The
Acceptance of
the brink
the Mahdviham
113
forth.
was
The
parivena on
the The
of the
bathing-tank (which
called
where down the the Sunhata-
207
to allotted)
blameless
on
(thera)is
the
up
parivena.1 Light
parivena
used the But
spot
and
excellent
208
of the Island
to walk
Dlghahe had
is called
210 209
cahkamana.2
sat sunk
parivena which
3
was
in the meditation
that
from where
Phalagga-parivena.4
had seated himself this the many
(parivenabuilt there)
a
thera
leaning against
The
out
support
1 1
is called
from
Therapassaya-parivena.5
of
(parivena 2
and
sat
built)where
at
hosts
gods
the
had
sought
him
his
feet
called
Marugana-parivena.6
The
a
212
commander
built
little
famed
pasada
the
the
213
parivena,
renowned
Dlghasandasenapati-parivena.
The the wise
king, whose
here
name
contains
the
words
'beloved
of
of
214
great thera
Mahinda,
spotless
mind,
Here
in Lanka
this Mahavihara.8
'
fifteenth
chapter, called
Mahavamsa,
The
Acceptance
for the
serene
of
the
', in the
of the
compiled
joy
1
pious.
is well-bathed away the evil
'
I.
e.
the
'
cell has
of
him washed
who
or
purified. Mahinda,
See trance
as
The
nahais the
tapapo
who
is
also
dipadipo
2
in 208. the
I.
e.
long
'
walk
or
the
long
KERN,
reward.
hall
for
walking.
states of p. 57.
note
to 5. 226.
On
the
eight samapatti,
meditation',
of the
see
i.e. the
reached
by
samadhi
4
Manual,
I. e. cell
I. I. On
e. e.
highest
thera's hosts to of the
support.
gods.
author of the
allusion
and
Mahavamsa,
41. is henceforth
Mahanama,
the
see
GEIGER,
8
Dip.
Mah. 'the
(English ed.),p.
great monastery,'
Mahavihara,
name
for
the
Mahameghavanarama.
CHAPTER
XVI
THE
ACCEPTANCE
B AT
OF
THE
CETIYAPAB-
A- VIHARA
GOING
into
the
city
for
alms
favour and
to
the
showing
favour
to
the
dwelt
on
twenty-six
thirteenth
days day
3 4
in the of the
Mahamegha-grove.
bright
eaten
But month
when,
the
half in
of the
the
(thera) had
had
preached
for
(to him)
he
would
the
fain
Mahappamada-suttanta,2
have the
a
thence,
vihara
founded
on
Cetiya-mountain,3 Cetiya-mountain.
gone with had
departing by
5
east
to
When
mounted
king
car,
thera
two
thither
him bathed
to
he
taking
thera.
4
he
in
go
followed the
after
When
stood
the in
theras
Nagacatukka-tank
to the
they
Then
their
due
order
up
car
mountain-top.
there
art
the
from
'
the
and O
stood
respectfully greeting
thou
'
fore, Where-
king,
the
come
wearied
by
they
I rain
said
and the
on
reply :
answered and
Troubled
'
by
are
your
to
departure spend
in the
am
come/
-season
theras
We
come
even
here,'
1
he
who
was
versed
the
rules5
(of
the
See
I.e.
note
to
1. 12.
'Great
the
discourse
title
name
on
vigilance.'
There
are
suttas
in
S., bearing
3
appamadasutta.
of the
See
note
to
on
The
later
Missaka-mountain,
See note to 13. 14.
given
of the
many
4
shrines
built
to
was
s.v.
there.
36
See
note
14.
Lit. who
versed
in the
khandhas,
The the
i.e. the
sections
of the
vinaya
is
(CHILDERS,
vinayo). (OLDENBERG,
the to
vassupanayika
Vin.
season
Mahavagga
p. 298 to Manual
,
III
Pit.
i, p.
xiii,
rainy
live
the in
bhikkhus
a
den forbid-
used the
together
vihara.
See
KERN,
on foil.,
vassavasa.
XVI.
18
The
expounded order),
vassa.
the
king
the
chapterconcerning the
Maharittha,
younger
10
the
near
king'snephew,
the
king with
this,after
attained to
that pabbajja
seeking the king's leave,they ll very day from the thera,and all in the shavingeven arahantship
same
beginning12 rock-cells about (the with the work of building sixty-eight he 13 place where) the Kantaka-cetiya(afterwards stood), returned to the city in that spot, ; but the theras remained the people) full of compassion time, goingat the appointed (for king,on
that
When
the
day, had
made
to the
cityto beg
the work
alms
on
there.
When
moon
the on finished,
and gave
full- 14 the
day of
the
the month
as a
thera,who
the
established
and
boundaries
the
upasampada on all those who were weary of the arahants, taking up their 17 pabbajja.3And these sixty-two abode during the rain-season all together on the Cetiyamountain, showed favour to the king (by their teaching).
with 18 drew near And, in that the hosts of gods and men to him, the leader of the host (ofhis disciples), and reverence
to his company
confer the
that had
attained to wide
renown
for
virtue,
sixteenth
called chapter,
'
The
Acceptance
of the
the
1
vihara Cetiyapabbata-
',in the
of the
serene
joy and
as
emotion
pious.
of
Where,
off.
is the
bhikkhus, their
hair
was
shaved
3
See
note for
to 15. 29.
pabbajja-upekkhanam. only received the pabbajja or first ordination few days before (see 11), but they alreadylong for the a the higher ordination, upasampada.
Maharittha
and his brothers have
'
Pabbajjapekkhanam
stands
CHAPTER
XVII
THE
ARRIVAL
OF
THE
RELICS
the
great thera
of held
lofty wisdom,
the
after
spending- the
on
(thus),had day
of the is the We for told
us
pavarana-ceremony,1
he
the the
seen
month
Kattika,2
lord of
men,
spoke
since
a we
thus
to
king
the
'
Long
here
not
time, O
lived
to
a
have
There
'
Sambuddha.
life without
And
to
master.
nothing
hast thou
worship.'
sir,that
'
the
question:
is
we
rne,
the
Sambuddha the
passed
behold
to
nibbana
4 5
'
he
'
answered
If
we
behold
a
relics
Conqueror.'
I will thera build
My
the
to
intention
and
'
to build
thupa
is known the
you. The
the
thupa,
the of
do Take
you
discover counsel
'
relics.'
replied to
king
with
Sumana
we
'; and
have
the
6
king
'
said
'
samanera
shall
the
the
relics ?
lord
men,
when road
commanded
adorning
vows
of the
cityand
the
and
hast
taken
the
go
uposathathou, in
the white
upon
thy
company,
the
evening, mounted
attended wilt
parasol and
8
by musicians,4
thou
the
Mahanaga-park.
who knew
samanera
There, O
to
king,
the the
receive
of
relics of him
so
how
destroy
to
elements
existence/5
of heart.
said
the
Sumana
1
(king),glad
On
Pavaretva.
see
the
IV.
pavarana-ceremony Vin.
at
the
conclusion
of foil. ;
vassa
Mahavagga
325 to 1. 12. is
a
Pit.,
ed.
OLDENBERG,
i, p.
157
S.B.E.
2
xiii,p.
note
foil.
See
Uposathi
*
synonym consist in
s.v.
of
'
uposathika.
and
The
uposatha-vows
from sensual
as
kept by laymen
4
fasting
abstinence
pleasures
The vacarehi rivarito.
6
uposatho). by
sabbehi talapa-
Tika
talavacarasamhito
bherimudingadituriyahatthapurisehi
the word
play
p.
on
dhatu,
dhatu
'
meaning
relic '.
'element'
(see KERN,
Manual,
51,
n.
2), and
xvii.
21
The
117
to the
And
now
king'shouse
when
and summoned the samanera Cetiya-mountain on holythoughts.1 Go, friend Sumana, and
(
Sumana, bent
thou
art
10
Pupphapura,2deliver to the mighty king,, thy this charge from us : O great king, 1 1 grandfather, Thy friend, the great king,the friend of the gods/ desires, beingconverted
come
"
to the fair
Buddha,
to build
thupa; do
are
thou
give
thee."
12
him
Sage
and
the alms-bowl
relics of the
(Buddha's) body
full
(ofrelics) go to of the gods and declare to Sakka, king of the the fair city The relic, the righteye-tooth of gods,this charge from us :
"
hast
13
14
the with
(Buddha), worthy of
thee, O
do
the adoration
worlds, is
king
Honour
gods, and
Grow
relic of the
right
15
collar-bone.
Master toward And
collar-bone of the of
thou
give
Lanka, O
thy duty
'
of wondrous
power,
sir,' went,
found him honoured
that very
even as
moment,
he stood
to the at
be
it,16
17
and
the
sala-tree and
offerings
of the Kattika-festival.
chargeand had accepted1 8 full of relicsreceived from the king he went the alms-bowl to the Himalaya. When, on the Himalaya,he had set down that 1 9 he went most to the king of sacred bowl with the relics, the gods and delivered the thera's charge. 4 20 Sakka^ the lord of the gods,took from the Culamani-cetiya the right collar-bone (of the Buddha) and gave it to the
samanera.
When
he had
Thereupon
with he handed
on
the
ascetic Sumana
took
21
to returning
Cetiya-
to the thera.
and mind '. For
Play
was
the
name
'
Sumana whose
the
to be
surname
confided
on
to him
su-manogati. Wijesinha t o was well-disposed the work the rendering in the Tlka see
ed.,note
See note
this passage.
to 4. 31.
a
Maruppiya,
A sacred
synonym
of
Devanampiya.
in the heaven of
gods.
118
In went
23
Mahavamsa
the
to
XVII.
22
22
evening the king, at the head of the royaltroops, told. the Mahanaga-park, in the manner (already)
put all the relics down
the there
was on
The
thera
the called
mountain, and
the
therefore
mountain.
24
Missaka-mountain
Cetiyathe with
When
the
thera
had
the
relicson
went
a- mountain, Cetiy
he took
relic and
his company
25
of
a
to disciples
place. appointed
shall my upon
'If
this is
relic of the
down, of itself, my
26
relic-urn, coming (toward me) So thought the king, and upon my head.'
it
came
the
thought
so
27
to
was on
monarch
he set it
28
with ambrosia the if sprinkled And as pass. full of joy,and taking (theurn) from his head the back the the
Then
did And
quaked.
29
elephant. and the earth elephant trumpet joyfully turned about and having entered elephant
east
of the
cityby
went
the
gate, togetherwith
the
theras
and
30
31
of the Great Sacrifice set up1 building the cetiya of the of the spot where to the west (afterwards) Thuparama 2 was ; and when he had turned around on the place his head turned toward of the Bodhi-tree he remained standing,
gate he
the east. covered with was placeof the thiipa and adari-creepers.3 flowering kadamba-plants had caused this holyplace, When the god among men protected forthto be cleared and adorned, he began by the gods, from the with, in seemly wise, to take the relic down But
at
32
33
in 10. 90. There, as mentioned Evidently the mahejjaghara here,the Sinhalese MSS. have pabheda instead of mahejja. is described The thupa of the Thuparama, the erection of which in our of the cityin the the southern wall passage, is situated near Nandana-garden. Cf. note to 1. 82. Mahavamsa in five places, This creeper in the is mentioned
1
2 3
besides
the
above
passage:
19.
35. 104:
;
phagumba;
25. 48:
kadambapupphavalli
For adari refer
to the
Skt.
of
adaribinibi.
120
it
Mahavamsa
that miracle of the
xvii.
45
wrought
caused
45
the hair
(ofthe
the
under
that appearances,1 to stand on end,even as (did) beholders) Gandamba-tree. By the rays of light therefrom
was
double
of water
pouring down
and flooded
the whole
land of Lanka
46
illumined
againand again.
upon
were
When
the
of the
great nibbana
who
47
was
great resolutions
by him,
endowed
south
eyes.2
great Bodhi-tree,grasped by
'The
branch
the
48
49
shall placeitself in a vase. Asoka, being detached of itself, of it is so placedthe branch,illuminingall the regions When the world,shall put forth lovely rays of six colours from its fruits and leaves. Then, risingup with the golden vase, this shall (tree) delightful abide invisible for
seven
days
in the
50
region of
the double
snow.
My
it be
laid in the
Thuparama,
51 measure, 52
are
If my
laid in the
of Hemamalika-cetiya,that ornament and the form of the Buddha, and rising take their
placeafter having
53 54
wrought the miracle of the double appearances.' Thus did the Tathagata form five resolutions and therefore the miracle then wrought by the relic. Coming down was from the air it rested on the head of the monarch, and full of joy the king
the relic was as cetiya. So soon laid in the cetiya to pass, a wondrous came great earthquake hensible, incomprecausinga thrill (ofawe). Thus are the Buddhas and incomprehensible is the nature of the Buddhas, is the reward of those who have faith in and incomprehensible the incomprehensible.
is mentioned patihariyam again 30. 82 The is to the reference (ambamule patihiram) and 31. 99. in Savatthi,to refute the heretical miracle performed by the Buddha teachers (cf.Samanta-pasadika, OLDENBERG, Vin. Pit. iii, p. 33216). It consisted in the appearance of phenomena of opposite character in pairs, as for example, streaming forth of fire and water. This miracle same was repeatedly. performed by the Buddha (FAUSBOLL, Jataka, i,p. 7722, 8820.)
1
55
laid it in the
56
This
yamakam
Cf. note
to 3. 1.
xvii.
65
The
Arrival
of
the
Eelics
121
When
the
people
But had
men
saw
the
miracle
they
had
faith
in
the
57
Conqueror.
brother,
the with And who of
prince Mattabhaya,
in the
the
king's
younger
King
the
of
Sages, begged
of
leave
of
58
king
a
pabbajja
the
doctrine
thousand from
Cetavigama
even
also
from
Dvaramandala1
and from the
and
also
59 60
from
Viharablja,
from
from
Gallakapltha
there received
Upatispabbajja
had
sagama,2
five hundred been
So out
each young
of
men
these
in
gladly
in the
whom
faith
Tathagata
who,
(coming)
received
from
the
within
the of
city
the
and
with-
61
pabbajja
Conqueror's
doctrine
When
numbered ruler of
thirty thousand
the earth he
had
bhikkhus.
the
in the with
completed
it to be
the
beautiful
62
thupa
Thuparama
caused
worshipped
The
women
petually per63
gifts
of
many the
jewels
and
so
forth.
of
the
royal household,
and
also
country-folk brought
the
their
offerings. thupa
was
And had
king
;
founded for
vihara, the
this
of
which known
64
been
the Thus
name
built
before
that
reason
vihara
by
Thuparama.
these relics
of
by
his
body
the
Master
of
the
World,
65
being
and
already passed
in
into
on
nibbana,
mankind.
truly
How
bestowed
can
salvation
there
bliss
abundance
it
be
?
course dis-
(of this, as
Here the and
was)
when
the
Conqueror
c
yet lived
The the
ends
the
the the
seventeenth
chapter, called
Arrival
serene
of
Relics emotion
', in
of
Mahavamsa,
compiled
for
joy
pious.
See
note
to
10.
1.
See
note
to
7. 44.
CHAPTER
XVIII
THE
RECEIVING
OF
THE
GREAT
BODHI-TREE
THE that he
monarch should
on
a
remembered send
for the
the
word
spoken by
and
the the
thera,
then,
was
great Bodhi-tree
the and
and
when,
certain
day during
the
rain-season, he
had taken his
in sitting3
his
own
city with
he with this
thera
his
own
counsel minister
with
his ministers
entrusted
nephew, matter)
and
named
When
4
Arittha,
he him my
business.
had
pondered (on
to
the
had thou
sum-
moned
he
spoke
him
in these
words
to
'
Canst hither
can
chance, per-
dear, go
and the
to Dhammasoka
bring
?
'
the great
them
Bodhi-tree
therl
Samghamitta
be
most
'
I I
bring
come
hither, your
to
6
majesty,
if I
allowed, when
exalted
and the
on
am
back,
receive
'
the
pabbajja, O
the command he month the leave the
'
So had
be
answered it,'
king
of forth
sent
him and
thence. the
When
he
7
received
his of
king
of
and
had
taken half
set
second
day
the
bright
8
Assayuja,1
the
he
having
embarked,
and
filled with
zeal
haven
came,
2
Jambukola
having passed
the thera's of his
9 10
the
great
ocean
by
even
the
on
power the
of
day
five
ten
departure.
queen
women
The
Anula, who,
of the
with
five hundred
harem
as
maidens
and
the
hundred
royal
had she
accepted
was,
precepts,3 did
1
(meanwhile) pious
1. 12. 4. 31. These
are
(wearing)
the
See See
note note
to
to
Dasasilam.
the
precepts:
the
(1)
not of
no
to
kill any
living
not to
being, (2) to
commit
refrain
from
taking
property
drink
others,
(3)
adultery, (4) to
to take food
to
avoid
lying, (5) to
prescribed unguents
not
intoxicating drink,
avoid
(6) only
at
use
certain neither
hours, (7)to
nor
worldly
not
to
amusements,
(8)
ornaments,
(9)
sleep
There
on
a are
high
also
or
decorated
bed, (10)
to
to five
accept
or
any
gold
or
silver. which
frequent
references
the
eight pledges
XVIIL
22
123
for in discipline, looking1 pabbajja, 11 the coming of the theii, take up her abode,leading a holylife, in the pleasant built by the king in a certain part of nunnery the city. Since the nunnery inhabited was by these lay- 12 sisters it became known in Lanka Upasikaby the name
yellowrobe, waitingfor
vihara.1 When
message
the
to the
{
nephew
Maharittha
had he gave
delivered the
him
king's 13
the thera's (also) The : message spouse of the brother of thy friend,of the 1 4 king (Devanampiya),O thou elephant among kings,lives, in stern discipline. for the pabbajja, To be- 15 constantly longing do thou send the bhikkhum stow on her the pabbajja Samgha-
king Dhammasoka
mitta And he
and the
with
same
branch
as
of the
great Bodhi-tree.'
matter,
;
even
charged him,
16
the then
went
her father
(Asoka)and
told him
The
king said
'
How
shall
I, when
I the
no
longerbehold thee,1 7
son
the
aroused by grief
with parting
and
grandson ?
She
answered:
'Weighty is the word of my brother,O are they that must receive the pabbajja ; depart thither.' 'The great Bodhi-trees
a
18
19
be
injured with
the
knife, how
Then when had
then
can
I have
branch !
counsel
mused
king.
shown
20
Mahadeva,
them
invited the
community
monarch
'
the hospitality
sent
'
Shall the
great Bodhi-tree be
to
Lanka, sirs?
21
thera
answered: Moggaliptttta
It shall be sent
thither,'
he related to the
king
with (Buddha)gifted
formed.3
one
may
take above
on
oneself. For
These
members
are
the
first five
or
eightrespectively
third
of the
more
series.
the
precept
is
since rigorous,
on
'
sexual
intercourse
avoided
altogether.
See note
1
1. 62. of the
I. e. That
Vihara
lay-sisters.'
and
is,from
Mahinda
Sumana,
the
son
of
Samghamitta
and
Aggibrahma
3
(5.170 ; 13.
4, "c.).
124
When when the
24
MaJiavamsa
the he had ruler of the earth
xvill.
23
23
heard
this he
was
and glad,
caused
the
to
road, seven
be
yojanaslong-, leadingto
great Bodhi-tree
ways, and
manifold
a
25
appeared
in
the
semblance the
of
Then
26
being
it/ he
he
answered took
a
make hand
the
vase
vase?'
made
in
that
very
moment
and
departed
measuring
thence.
27
When
the
2
king had
around
vase
nine cubits
28
29
depth and three cubits thick,having the upper across, being eight finger-breadths edge of the size of a young elephant's trunk,being in radiancy equal to the young (morning)sun; when, with his army of
and four divisions 3
a
to stretching
length of
with
a
seven
yojanasand
of
width
of
three had
yojanas,and
gone
to
great company
30
bhikkhus, he
manifold landed with his and
the
ornaments, gleamingwith
many coloured
31
flags;4 when
many
gar-
had
ranged
flowers
32
troops about
with
a
manifold had
with resounding
of music
covered
it round
tent; when
the of
a
seemlywise
with
a
he had
surrounded
himself and
at the
more
as
great Bodhi-tree
a
thousand
great theras
and
33
head
great company
(ofbhikkhus)
had
at the
with
than
thousand
princeswho
been
anointed
king,he gazed up
its south
great
Bodhi-tree.
34
a
Then
from
bough
the branches
vanished, leaving
The
God
of skill;Skt. VUvakarman.
to 15. 16.
sena,
batants of foot-soldiers, cavalry, comconsisting elephants. trees with gay of decking out sacred custom
See note
Caturangini
in On
and chariots,
the world-wide
stuff
see
of strips foil.
ANDREE,
'
Ethnogr. Paralhlen
'
und
Vergleiche, p.
181.
58
Concerningsuch
of the Ruwan-
xviii.
46
125
When
earth
saw
the
miracle
he cried out, 35
: rejoicing
Bodhi-tree
by bestowing
36
and the monarch consecrated the great kingship(thereon),' he had worWhen Bodhi-tree as king of his great realm. shipped with the great Bodhi-tree giftsof flowers and so forth, and had passed round it three times turning to the left1 and had done to it at eight points2with reverence folded inlaid
37
hands,
with
he
had
the
golden
with
vase
placed upon
and
seat to 38
gold, adorned
the
various gems
easy
mount, reaching to
order to receive the of grasping a pencil
a (withthis)
height of the bough ; and when, in sacred branch,he had mounted it, upon
red arsenic with the
a
golden handle
uttered the
he drew
39
line about
bough
and
solemn
3 :
trulyas
shall go
hence
to
the 40
Lanka, and
I shall stand
goldenvase/
the
Then where
great Bodhi-tree
the
of itself, at the place42 severed, above the vase filledwith fragrant floating line first (drawn) the ruler of
men
earth.
at
drew,
43
round about ten of) three finger-breadths, And ten strong roots springing from 44 (further) pencil-strokes. the first and ten slender from each of the other (lines) dropped
(a
down, forming a net. the king saw When gladdened,a cry greatly
all around
1
this of
miracle
he
uttered him
even
there,45
and
the
his followers
with raised,
it in
on
glad
such
a
46
round katva, i.e. had walked Tipadakkhinam that the thing or person manner worshipped is kept hand.
2
the
right
mediate inter-
cardinal
well
as
the
The
is truth,' it
:
hardly
includes
or come
so
rendered The
in
translation. is
case
wish.
saccakiriya
and such is the P. D.,
always given in
shall such and
if
truly as
to pass.
such
thing
See CHILDEKS,
s.v.
126
Mahavamsa
and round about
was a
xvill.
47
thousandfold
Thus there
with in the
hundred
the
48
faith.
Ten
cubits
long was
the
stem
; five
lovelybranches
with
each (werethereon),
49
four cubits
five Such
and on these branches were thousand a fruits, twigs. and auspicious the ravishing was great Bodhi-tree. the moment the earth that the
50
vase
At
great Bodhi-tree
set
itself in the
came
51
pass.
gave
quaked and wonders of many kinds By the resoundingof the instruments of music out sound) of .themselves among gods and men,
the shout the the of salutation from
to
(which
by
the
of ringing-out
52
and
crash
of
the
so
yakkhas and
by the
crash
2
53
quaking of
in
one
Beautiful
54
rays of six colours going forth from the fruits and leaves of made universe the whole to shine. the Bodhi-tree Then in rising for
seven
the
vase
the
great Bodhi-tree
the and
snow.
stayed
days invisible in
king
came
the
regionof
his seat
55
The
down
from
there sojourning
many gone
ways
for
56
seven
to
the
great Bodhi-tree.
and
When
rays
the
week
was
by
all
the
57
snow-clouds
likewise entered
into the
clear
great Bodhi-tree
58
was
to displayed
the
people, planted
kinds
came
in the
pass
goldenvase.
on
Whilst
wonders
of many
to
the
plungingmankind greatBodhi-tree,
the earth.
into amazement,
descended
59
60
Rejoiced by the many wonders the great king worshipped on it)his great again the great Bodhi-tree by (bestowing kingdom, and, when he had consecrated the great Bodhi-tree unto great kingshiphe abode, worshippingit with divers
offerings, yet another In the bright half
he uposatha-day
1 8
week of the
same
place.
on
61
Assayuja
the fifteenth
two
received
great Bodhi-tree;
weeks
I. e.
gods
on
of lower
Cf.
53-54
the
CHAPTER
XIX
THE
COMING
OF
THE
BODHI-TREE
WHEN
the
lord
of chariots
had
appointed royal
to
watch
over
the
Bodhi-tree
2
eighteen persons1
of
from
families
and
eight
from and
from
brahman
persons
families
ministers, and
and
moreover
eight
families and of from
families
from
eight
from
the
cowherds
likewise,
each
one
hyena
from
and the
sparrowhawk-clans,2 (from
weavers
man),
the
and
and and
potters and
the
from when
all
handicrafts, from
the
most
the
nagas
yakkhas;
them
then of
exalted
prince
had
given
had
eight
the
vessels
gold
to
and
a
eight ship
on
of the
and silver,3
5
brought
when
great Bodhi-tree
theri had
on
Ganges,
and
likewise
and
the
he
Samghamitta
caused those
with
among fared
eleven
whom forth
bhikkhums,
6
was
first to
embark
that
same
ship, he
city, and
also
passing
one
over
the
at
Vinjha- mountains
the
week,
nagas the
Tamalittl.4
men
The the
gods
and
and
most
who
were
worshipping
had of the caused
great Bodhi-tree
splendid offerings,arrived
the
on
in the
just
one
week.
Bodhi-tree
ruler
be
of
earth, who
the shore
great
placed
is
a
great
In
devakula
of
the and
word
deva
as
evidently
of
to
be
taken
in
the
sense means
'king',
as
merely
in 30
synonym the
khattiya. belonging
Kula to
a
here,
or
below
and
31,
individual
class
2
craft.
Taraccha the
(=
name
Skt.
of
a
taraksa)
bird clans of
or
'hyena',
prey, the
and
kulinga
(=Skt.
seem
kulinga),
here
a
'fork-tailed
shrike',
names
to
crafts.
p.
Perhaps
3 foil.
the
have
totemistic
3
FRAZER,
Totemism,
the
over
To The
water
during by
land
journey.
the the note
king
travels Here On
Vindhya
range
to
the
mouth
of
the and
Ganges.
its escort.
he
again
meets
see
ship carrying
to
the
Bodhi-tree
Tamalittl,
11.
38.
xix.
20
The
Coming of the
once more
Bodhi-tree
129
by (bestowing upon
it)the
9
When
tree
as a
the wish-fulfillerhad
the
first
day
of the
brighthalf
same
commanded that the Maggasira,1 10 eightof each (of the families) appointed
2
the
;
tree,should raise
be
set
up
the
great Bodhi-tree
his the
on
till it reached
seemly wise
then words I with
12
the
theris (other)
to
Maharittha
worshipped the great Bodhi-tree by 1 3 (bestowing) kingship(uponit). Even so shall the king my friend also worship it by (bestowing) kingship (uponit)/ stood the When with folded 14 great king had spoken thus he hands on the shore, and as he gazed after the vanishing great
times have
Three
Bodhi-tree
sunshine
ten powers
he shed
the
3
great
Sending forth
hence !'
net
alas departs,
sorrow
! from
at
returned
The the
sea.
laden with the great Bodhi-tree, fared forth into ship, A yojana around the waves of the great ocean were all around
18
By
nagas
many
were offerings
and provided,
to
the
The of
1
2
supernormalpowers,
See note
Uccaretum is related to 1. 12.
takingthe
is
mahabodhim to directly
dependent
on
passage datvana.
3
4
19. 1, Mahabodhirakkhanattham
to 3. 6.
supanna
(Skt. suparna)
who
are
or
as
mythicalcreatures
as
imagined
the
sworn
foes of the
nagas.
Buddhist.
Kunst
in
Indien,p. 47 foil,
K
130
21
Mahavamsa
the great snakes Terrified, with and when entreaties, betook
XIX.
2 1
them
to
great theii
had
they had
of the
escorted
serpents
22
and
worshipped
it for
23
kingshipof the nagas and it again and set it upon the ship.
the
week
that
same
day
great Bodhi-tree
arrived here
at Jambukola.
24
25
for the welfare of the King Devanampiyatissa, thoughtful of its Sumana world,having heard before from the samanera arrival, did,from the first day of the month Maggasira onthe whole of the highcause wards, being always full of zeal, road from
the
north
gate
even
to
Jambukola
to
be
made
26
ready, awaiting the arrival in abiding on the sea-shore, pannasala2 (afterwards) was,
the
of the
the
he, by
then, saw
coming.
known this
27
The
hall that
was
built upon
here
miracle
28
known
by
the
Samuddapannasala.
29
30
By the power of the great thera and together with the that same theras the king came, with his retinue, on (other) day to Jambukola.3 an Then, uttering4 by joyousagitation exulting cry moved at the coming of the great Bodhi-tree, he,the splendid (king), into the water; and when descended even together neck-deep
he persons5 (of noble families) great Bodhi-tree upon his head, had lifted it with
sixteen
1
2
had down
taken upon
the
the
I.e. in
Ceylon.
tadahe
Only
4
the
Editors reading of the text accepted by the Colombo from is the the verb sentence. va missing maharaja, MSS. tadahe text of the Burmese raja yieldsa vagama
correct
construction. is understood
a an
utterance, mostly in
described
was
according
to the
saramsijalavisajjanako
v.
agato bodhirukkho,
Tlka:
vata
an
re
exact
15.
Cf.
on
Kulehi.
this note
to 19. 1.
xix.
43
The
Coming of the
a
Bodhi-tree
131
caused it to be set in
worshipped
When he the sixteen
a
it
beautiful
had
then and
entrusted his
he himself
own
persons
had
duties of
lord
of
men
forthwith
of many
kinds
to be carried out
days. day
he
placedthe great Bodhi-tree upon 33 and he,the king of men, accompanyingthis, a beautiful car the king of trees, he who had knowledge of the (right) places34
the tenth
caused it to be
on placed
the
Monastery
35
and commanded a was morning meal for the (afterwards) Here the great thera with the brotherhood. peopletogether Mahinda to the king the subduing of the nagas1 related fully which had been achieved by the (Buddha) giftedwith the
ten powers.
When
monuments
the
monarch
heard
this from
the
thera
he
caused
had
36
there in such
as places
been ways.
tree
frequented by
And,
to
the Master
when
at
moreover,
he
37
be
set
down and
the
entrance
the
brahman
Tivakka
in this and
that
the road,sprinkled with white eand,bestrewn 38 on (escorting it) with various flowers, and with planted and adorned pennons festoons of blossoms, 39 unweariedly, bringingthereto offerings day and night, broughtthe greatBodhi-tree on the fourteenth
day
the
to
the
the
40
shadows
adorned cityworthily by the north gate amid offerings, and (when he then), the city again by the south gate, 41 leaving had entered the Mahameghavanarama consecrated by four to the spotworthily 42 Buddhas,2and here had brought (thetree) prepared by Sumana's place where command, to the lovely the former
1
Bodhi-trees had
stood, he,with
The
reference related
Ceylon,and
be struck
the
2
events The
comma
after after
pavesiya
K
41b should
out and
placed
catubuddhanisevitam.
2
132
who
Maliavamsa
were
xix.
44
persons,
the
great Bodhi-tree
44
Hardly
rays
had
up
eighty
glorious
Ten
air,and
thus floating
it sent the
forth
of six colours.
Spreading over
who
were
island,reachingto
till sunset. faith of by reason attainingto
persons,
received arahantship,
47
here the
pabbajja.
at sunset
was
When
the
great Bodhi-tree
the
come
down
from the
roots
placein (its
48
air)it
stood did
vase
firm the
on
the
earth under
The
constellation Rohim.
earth
quake.
growing over
49
the brim
vase.
struck
down
earth,
taken
closingin the
its
the
great Bodhi-tree
come
place all
so
the
people who
A
had
it with
flowers and
forth. dense
tremendous the
and
51
cool and
mists from
on
the
great Bodhi-tree
abide
every
side.
days
did
the
great Bodhi-tree
52
the
people
became
region of the
vanished
and
At
the
the
great
Bodhi-tree
visible and
53
The
went
Samghamitta
54
55
56
57
and the king also with his following following.The nobles of Kajaragama1 and the nobles of too Tivakka and the people Candanagama and the Brahman of the who dwelt in the island came thither also by the power festival of the great set upon a gods, (with minds)eagerly Amid this great assembly, Bodhi-tree. plunged into amazement there grew out of the east branch,even by this miracle, as they gazed,a faultless fruit. it This having fallen off the thera took it up and gave to the king to plant. In a golden vase filled with earth the the mingled with perfumes, placed on spot where
their
Now
Kataragama
in the 114 foil.
on
of Tissamaharama
the
about See
ten
miles
north
PARKER,
Ancient
Ceylon,p.
xix.
68
The
133
And while
58
Mahaasana
(afterwards) was,
yet gazed, there
plantedit.
Bodhi-trees
they
all
springingfrom
it, eight
four
shoots ; and
cubits
high.
When
the Bodhi-trees the
he, with
a
senses
l
59
worshipped them
by
giftof
them.
white
parasol
landing- 60
had the in
61
was
at planted
the
place Jambukola on the spot where stood, after leaving the ship, one
Brahman the
one
the
in
great Bodhi-tree
the
villageof
one
Tivakka,
one
moreover
one
in the
Thuparama,
of the First
Issarasamanarama,2
in the
arama
in the Court
in one Cetiya-mountain, and one in Candanagama. But the other thirty-two 63 gama which fruits (were Bodhi-saplings sprang4 from four (later) in a circle, at a distance of a yojana, here and there planted) in the viharas. in the 64 people dwelling island, by the majesty of the Sammasambuddha, the king of with her 65 trees,the great Bodhi-tree was planted,Anula having received the pabbajjafrom the then Samfollowing attained to arahantship.The prince Arittha 66 ghamitta, also, retinue of five hundred with a having received the men, from the thera, attained to arahantship.The eight 67 pabbajja who had brought the (personsfrom the) merchant-guilds When
of
the
thupa,3 Kajara- 62
thus,for
were
named
therefrom
the
'
Guild
of
the
nunnery,
as
the
Upasikavihara 68
Setacchatta,
symbol
the
royalrank.
(ed. Saranatissatthera, Colombo, 1901,
of the Issurumunow Tissavapi, in Anuradhapura.
According
a
to the Rasavahim
on
1899), ii.8832,situated
dam
nagala,about
3 4
mile
south
of the note
Pathamacetiya.
This tree the is to be the
same
See
as
taken
meaning
was
four
as
other
branches
of
the Thus
accomplished
already described.
ca
Tika
pacinasakhato
avasesasu
catusu
sakhasu uppanna
6
gahitehi
ti attho.
itarehi
pakkaphalehi
jata,
sambhuta
134
the
69
Mahavamsa
XIX
69
great
then
nuns).
which of these had
come
She
Samghamitta dwelt with her company (of to be erected there,of caused twelve buildings
important before
the
mast
three
buildingswere
others of the
in
one
70
ship that
one
to be set up,
in
the
rudder, and
71
the sects2
helm,1 from
arose
these
they
were
named.
Also
when
other
these
twelve
were buildings
72 73
always used by the Hatthalhaka-bhikkhums. that was used The king'sstate- elephant
will3 liked to
the border of Since
to wander
about
at
stay on one side of the cityin a cool grotto,on when he went to feed. a Kadamba-flower-thicket,
that this the
they knew
up
a
placewas
same
to pleasing
the
elephant
74
they put
would
post4in
thera
spot. One
converted
not
take the
fodder who
to (offered
the questioned
75 76
reason.
'
had
to the
elephantwould fain have a thupa built in the the great thera told the great king. Kadamba-flower-thicket/
The
77
Swiftlydid the king,who was ever intent on the welfare of in that very place and build a thupa, with a relic, his people, for the thupa.5 a house The Samghamitta, who longed for a quiet great then because of the too great crowding of the dwelling-place,
vihara where she
78
dwelt,she
the
who
was
mindful
of the doctrine
79
and
good
of the
who
desired another
abode
to (once)
the fair
there she
According to the Tika the three Culaganagara, Mahaganagara and Sirivaagarani bore the names afterwards designatedKupayatthithapitaghara ddhagara. They were House where the mast and Arittathapitaghara), (Piyathapitaghara, so forth is set up.'
1
Kupayatthi,
'
The
Tika
names
as
an
example the
sect of the
Dhammarucikas.
Cf. 5.
8
13.'
episodeis by the name
the to
The
explainhow
Hatthalhaka
v.
the dwellers
in the
Upasikavihara
came
by Alhaka,
poet
in
71. the
to tether
Thupassa
See
v.
79, 82.
as
in
CHAPTEE
XX
THE
NIBBANA
OF
THE
THERA
IN the
the
eighteenth
year
was
great Bodhi-tree
the twelfth
year
planted
faithful this the
in the
Mahameghavanarama.
the
In
died
dear
consort
of
the
king, Asamdhimitta,
3
in (believer)
the
In soka
the
fourth
the
year
ruler of the
to
earth
rank
raised
the
Tissarakkha this
c
the
In
third with
thereafter
fool, in
the
pride
beauty,
5
thought
to
own
Forsooth,
!
'
the
king
the
worships
power
the hate
great
and
Bodhi-tree
my
cost
drawn the
into
of
working
means
her
harm,
a
caused thorn.1
great
the
Bodhi-tree year of
to
perish by
did
of
mandu-
In fall
fourth
after
Dhammasoka
These
of
high
renown
into
the
power
mortality.
7
make
up
thirty-sevenyears.
whose
But
when
king Devanampiyatissa,
the
his
true
delight
to
was
in
the
8
blessing of seemly
wise
doctrine, had
in
brought
the
completion
on
in
undertakings
also who in had the
Mahavihara,
he
the
this
was
Cetiya-mountain question of
9
and
Thuparama,
the
asked
the
thera
converted
:
island, who
fain
in
(answering) questions
here;
?
'
'Sir, I would
I
found
viharas
whence
shall
get
me
the
relics to
place
which
thupas
are
1 0
'
There
the bowl
relics
of
brought
O
hither
by Sumana,
and Have which these
with
were
he
1 1
filled the
on
the
Sambuddha
placed
here
on
the back
Cetiya-mountain,
of
an
king.
the
relics
placed
the the
hither/
Thus
addressed
12
by
thera
a
he
relics
hither. he caused
Founding
the relics
viharas
yojana distant
from
another
In
the how
Dadhivahana-jataka
the kernel
of
a
(FAUSBOLL,
is
Jcitaka, ii,
of its
p.
1051)
is
related
power
mango-fruit
a
deprived
germinating
by being pierced
with
mandu-thorn.
MAP
OF
ANURADHAPURA
Kolambahalaka
O
Manisomarama
Abhayagiri-vihara
Jetavana-Dag.
iern
IVa//
nSilasqbbhakandaka
Lafikarama-Ddg.
^uthern
OThuparama
or
W*"
vana
Mahathur.
Rutvanwceli-Dag
^a0
Maricavattivihara
dLohapasada
hMahavihara Mirisw"ti-Dag.
vana ^
Sacred
Bodhi
Ancient Names=
Mahathupa
=
Issarasamana
vihara
Modern Names
Ruwan
woeli
XX.
22
The
Nibbana
of the
Them
But
to be
placedthere
the Sambuddha
in the had
due order.
that
king kept
in his beautiful
with manifold offerings. palaceand worshipped continually the five 14 The in the place where (vihara that was built) hundred nobles dwelt when they had received the pabbajja from the
was great thera,1 was
(named) Issarasamanaka.2
five hundred vessas3
That
15
(viharathat
when
where built)
dwelt,
pabbajja from the great thera, in like manner was Vessagiri. But as for the grotto 16 (called) inhabited by the great thera Mahinda, in the vihara built called the Mahinda-grotto'. upon the mountain,4it was they had
received the
'
First the
Cetiya-17
vihara,third
beautiful
fourth preceded, (itself) then fifth the (setting up) in seemly wise (ofthe)beautiful of the which stone pillar intended to pointto the place was thupa, on the placewhere the Great cetiya (afterwards) was, and also the enshrining collar-bone of the Sambuddha's the Tissasixth the Issarasamana seventh relic,7 (vihara), called tank, eighth the Pathamathupa,8ninth the (vihara) then that pleasant known which was Vessa(giri), (nunnery) the Upasika(vihara) and the (vihara) called the Hatthalas for the bhikas haka, those two convents goodlydwellings of food by the for the accepting khums; and (furthermore)
1
which
the
19
20
21
22
2 19. 66. See note to 19. 61. this, I.e. people of the third caste (Skt.vaisya). The Vessagiri-vihara is situated near vihara,Arch. Anuradhapura, south of IssarasamanakaSurv. of Ceylon, Annual Rep. 1906 (xx. 1910), pp. 8-10; E. MULLER, Ancient Inscriptions of Ceylon,pp. 32, 33 ; WICKREMASINGHE, Epi3
Cf. for
grapTiia Zeylanica,i,p.
4
10 foil.
I. e. in the
name
on Cetiyapabbata-vihara
Mihintale.
I would
now
to prefer
or
take the
words
sapabbate
was
vihare
with
to
('in the
the
monastery, which,
of which clause
connected
a
mountain
comma
')
as
belonging
instead
to the
relative
ya
"c., and
place the
here
of after
5
guha.
to
Cf. note
15. 214.
On
the
givadhatu
see
8
1. 37 See
foil., on
note
on
silayupa
14. 45.
138 brotherhood
23
Maliavamsa
of bhikkhus when
XX.
23
24
the dwellthey were visitingthe (called) Hatthalhaka(vihara),1 ing of the bhikkhums called Mahapali, stored refectory easy of approach,beautiful, and provided with service ; then lavish with all provisions utensils the for
a
thousand
pavarana-day, every
at
year;
in
Nagadipa
the
Jambukolavihara
this
landing
3 and the Pacmarama4: these the Tissamahavihara place,2 works, caring for the salvation of the people of Lanka, Devanampiyatissa, king of Lafika, rich in merit and insight,
27
as
friend
works
to
28
through he heaped up merit. Our island flourished under the lordship of fortyyears did he hold sway as king.
After
son, the
of
this
king;
no
29
his
death, his
30
as
known prince UTTIYA, held sway piously king. But the great thera,Mahinda, who had taught the of the
brother
since there
was
peerlessdoctrine
31
Master,
the
the
sacred
the writings,
The
instrumental
bhikkhusamghena
the
noun
gahanam.
and
Subordinate
osaritva
gantvana,
Tika remarks in order built
belongs to the verbal the parallel to this noun are gerunds last being almost a pleonasm. On
time the monks in order to
this
the subject
that at that of
receive food
The
new
went
was
hall
as
refectoryfor
2
On 35.
see
3 *
bhikkhus, separate from the nunnery. of a district of Ceylon Nagadipa (note to 1. 47) as the name 124; 36. 9. On Jambukola, 11. 23,38; 18. 7, "c.
the
In south I.e.
'
Ceylon,situated
Monastery
in
NE.
of Hambantota.
Anuradhapura.' Cf. 19. 34. ca. pativedham patipattim According to Pariyattim of tipitaka, while patipatti the Tika pariyatti is a synonym of the doctrines of the sacred scripture, represents the contents namely, the way leading to deliverance as pointed out by the silaprecepts of morality(Tika:pariyattisasanassa atthabhuto dikhandhattayasahito By pa^ivedha nibbanagamirnaggo). attainment ')are meant the nine transcendental conditions (literally of the which result from the observance (the lokuttaradhamma) patipatti (Tika: patipattisasanassa phalabhuto navavidhaThose nine conditions the of perfection are lokuttaradhammo).
8
'
East
XX.
42
The Nilbdna
the island of
of the
Them
1 39
in excellently
the he who, like unto disciples, did, in 32 Master, had wrought great blessingfor the people, the eighth year of king Uttiya, while he, being sixty years the Cetiyawas on mountain, old,1 spending the rain season his senses, into nibbana,on the eighth 33 pass, victorious over
of many
day
this
of the
brighthalf
name.
of the
month
Assayuja. Therefore
stricken by thither,
34
day
dart
received his
When
king Uttiyaheard
of
sorrow,
the
and
when
paid homage
in
a
to
the
35
had greatly
lamented
(over him) he
closed2 he
caused the
chest
to
dead
body of
a
golden
chest had
be
it
36
bier ; and
when
caused
then
to
be he
the
be
bier,commanding
escorted
solemn
monies, cere-
by
that had come from this together people,3 (he 38 by a great levy of troops; commanding due offerings the adorned street to the variously caused it to be escorted) on adorned capital and broughtthroughthe city in procession by the royal 39 highway to the Mahavihara. When for
a
37
the monarch
had
caused the
"
bier to be
with
week
pennons,
with
vases
filled with
vihara
the
manner
was
adorned
yojanasaround, by
was
in like monarch
42
devas
and
when
had commanded
four four
he built
magga
'paths' or
'
phalani
the holiness
corresponding
ninth. It
the
is,
that
proclaimed
the
Buddha's
doctrine
therefrom. resulting
Reckoned
words
from in
vassam
upasampada-ordination
satthivasso Cf. Jat.
vasam
onwards.
vasl.
:
Notice
the
play on
2
phussidwelling'. and in 38 c, I refer janoghena to anayitvana baloghena This should rather stand quite not to karento pujanavidhim. in 36 d. karento sadhukllanam as does independently, taggale
3
Sadhu
phussitam.
a
vi.
51 010
nivase
'in
safe-bolted
140
up,
43
a
Mahavamsa
turned toward
pyre
XX.
43
the east
sweet
funeral
of
the
44
Theranambandhamalaka, of wood, leaving the (place smelling the right, and when he had brought
caused it to
in the
the pyre
be set upon
the
And
45
build
when cetiya
he the the
had
caused
the relics
gatheredtogether. Taking
caused
half of the
thupasto
The
be built
on
Cetiya-mountain
do him
46
and
place where
sage'sbody
47
honour,
the this
Isibhumahgana.2
From that time onwards from them.
bring
to
dead
bodies of
and
48
holy men
the
three
yojanas around
spot
great
the
there to burn
When
great then
and
Samghamitta, giftedwith
with had
the
supernormalpowers
49
great wisdom
had
fulfilled the
brought much
to blessing
she, being fifty-nine people, years old,in the ninth year of this same king Uttiya, while she dwelt in the peaceful
And Hatthalhaka-convent, passed into nibbana. for the thera,the king commanded as supreme
a
50
also,
of
5 1 burial
as
week
through,and
the whole
of Lanka
adorned
52
53
city;and to the east of the Thuparama, near the Cittasala3 (of later in sight of the great Bodhi-tree,on the spot pointed times) out by the then he caused the burning to take (herself), place. And the most wise Uttiya also had a thupa built
was
laid upon
gone
cause
to be
by, out
there.
54
The Arittha
the
those
theras
too
of whom who
thousand
bhikkhus
55
were
freed from
whom
1
Samghamitta
Sakkaram
antimam
and highest,
'the
thousand
last honours'.
8 I.e. 'Courtyard of the sage.' I.e. ' Many-colouredhall.' Those who had come For the following to Ceylon with Mahinda.
19. 5.
CHAPTER
XXI
THE
FIVE
KINGS
1 2
UTTIYA'S
death
ten
younger years,
brother, MAHASIVA,
the the
reigned
devoted
after
to
his the in
protecting
he huilt
pious.
noble
Being
thera
the
3 4
Bhaddasala,
vihara, Nagarahgana,
eastern
Mahasiva's
brother, SURATISSA,
of
reigned
after
his In
death
the
ten
works.
the
southern
quarter
in and the the
city) he
quarter
Nagarah-
gana-vihara,
5
(called)Hatthe
thikkhandha
tara
the
Gonnagirika(vihara)
Kolambahalaka the
2
Vangutand foot
east
near
-mountain
(vihara) named
Pacinapabbata
;
Raheraka
the the
the
(vihara)
at
the
the
of
3
Arittha(mountain)
the
north in of
Makulaka(vihara), to
but the these did the of and the and lord other of
Acchagallaka(vihara),
number
and island of five the of
Girinelavahanaka(vihara)
to
Kandanagara;
hundred,
further
pleasing
the
earth
viharas,
build
8
on
this
bank
river,4here
he
and
there
in
the
Lanka,
before
while
reigned,
during
9
the
three
period
sixty years,
named
piously and
was
to
the
gems.6
he
was
Suvannapindatissa
Suratissa
before
his of
10
reign,
the
Two
but
after
the
beginning
reign.
Damilas,
SENA
and
GUTTAKA,
sons
of
freighter who
The See
verb note
on
which
25. to 80. the
the
accusatives
in
v.
4 foil, depend
is kare
si in 8.
to
According
I. the
Tika
to
the
east
of
Anuradhapura
near
Dahegallaka.
4
e.
Mahawseliganga.
i.e.
Sadhukam,
the
according
to
pious aims,
dhammena
without
oppressing
"
people.
to
See
notes
1. 62;
12.28.
xxi.
20
The
horses
Five
Kings
143
the
11
brought
head years
son
of
great army
and when
justly. But
of
his
of the 12 time
same
onward
in
Anuradhapura.
A Damila the of noble named descent,
ELARA, who
came
hither
13
4 the kingdom, ruled when to seize on Cola-country 14 he had overpowered king Asela,forty-four years, with even friend and foe, on occasions of disputes justice toward
from
at
law.
At
the head
so
had
a a one
bell
hung
and
up at
one
with law
rope
that The
desired
judgement
son was
long 15 mig-ht
ring it.
When
once
king
son
only
daughter. 16
17
going in a car to the calf lying on a Tissa-tank, he killed unintentionally young the wheel over the road with the mother its cow, by driving
the of the ruler
neck.
of heart
The
5
cow
came
and
dragged
same
at
the
bell in bitterness
to
18
and
the
king caused
that the
be severed
wheel.
young of the the of
a
snake The
had
devoured
bird
upon
one,
a came
palm- 19
and
to 20
hen-bird, mother
The its of
young
king
caused had
snake open
to be
brought
the upon
him, and
bird taken
tree.
body
it he
been
cut
and up
young
caused
it to
be
hung
the
This Sinh.
is
The
Lak-diva-ta Lak-diva-ta
2
(lit. 'horse-seafarer*). perhaps the meaning of assanavika has : as-nceviyakuge putvu; the Pujavaliya Thupavamsa the asun asvacari-de-bae-kenek; Rajavaliya: gena
asun
gena
asuru-de-bie-kenek.
dvavisavassani. See the Introduction, Following the reading duve " 8. in the Asela's Tika. eight brothers are enumerated They are named Abhaya, Devanampiyatissa, Uttiya, Mahasiva, Mahanaga,
3
Kira.
India. embittered
heart.' Tika
Note
the
words last
in
word:
144
Mahavamsa
the
xxi.
2 1
21
22
23
of tradition, albeit a king, who was protector he knew virtues of the most not the peerless of the precious three gems,1 was going (once) to the Cetiya-mountain to invite the brotherhood of bhikkhus,he caused,as he arrived the point of the yoke on the waggon, a an car, with upon injuryto the thupa of the Conquerorat a (certain) spot. The When
'
King,
come
the
thupa
car
'
has been
thee/
Though
the the road
this had
to pass
without
it, yet
upon
25
his
:
and
flunghimself
my
Sever
head
him
;
'
"
the
trunk)with
does
our
They
in
no
answered
allow
(from Injury to
another
26
Master
wise
make and
thy peace
in order to off he
the thupa (with the bhikkhus) by restoring place (anew) the fifteen stones that had been
broken
27
spent justfifteen thousand kahapanas.2 rice to dry An old woman had spread out some The heavens,pouring down rain at an unwonted sun.
made her rice
it in the
season,
28
damp.
went
and
an
dragged
unwonted her
at the bell.
29
season cause
When
he
rain at
he dismissed he underwent
the
a
woman,
and
in order
'
to
decide
: fast, thinking
king who
The
observes
30
justice surelyobtains
genius who
heat fiery of
rain
in
due
received
from offerings
(thepenances
of
31
four
great kings3
and
went
this
them
32
and
told Sakka.
Pajjunna 4
The From
and
chargedhim (tosend)rain
the heavens rained
no more
guardian
forth thence-
geniuswho
33
king.
the
during
day throughout
once
his realm ;
onlyby nightdid
to 21. 8.
the heavens
give rain
every
note
By ratanaggassa
of the
is meant
the
Buddha,
with
2
ratanattaya
the
near
four
guardians of
in the and
usually appear
Indra
brahmanic
Virulhaka, Virupakkha,
the east, south, west, and
4
in Vessavana, rulers,
order, of
north.
Skt.
Parjanya,
the
god
of rain.
xxi.
34
Tlie,
Five
Kings
145
week,
cisterns
in
the
middle
watch
of full
the
night
and
;
even
the
little
everywhere
because
he of false then
were
(of water).
from the
Only
in the aside
freed did
himself this
guilt
of he
walking
had
not
34
path
evil
(monarch),
such
though
put
should
beliefs,
an
gain
miraculous established in
power; in the
how
not
understanding
the
man,
pure
belief,
evil
?
renounce
here
guilt
of
walking
path
of
ends
the
twenty-first compiled
chapter,
for the
called
'
The
Five and
Kings',
emotion
Mahavamsa,
serene
joy
pious.
CHAPTEE
XXII
THE
BIRTH
OF
PRINCE
GAMANI
WHEN
To show
he
had
slain
Elara, DUTTHAGAMANI
came
became
king.
order
clearlyhow
is this
l :
this
to
pass
the
story in due
(of events)
2
3
King
named that
Devanampiyatissa's
Mahanaga,
was
second
brother,
The for
the
vice-regent
king's consort,
own son
foolish nursed
woman,
kingship
she
her
and he
ever
to
slay the
vice-regent,
sent
and him
while
a
was
making
which
called
Taraccha
and
son
mangoamong
fruit
5
poisoned
Her
laid
who when
uppermost
had the
gone
little
with
was
the
un-
mango-fruit, Upon
to
dish
covered,
his
and
men
died
and
therefrom.
this the
save
with vice-regent,
to life,
was
wives,
In the
a
horses, went,
his
his who
Rohana.2
Yatthalaya-vihara 3
He Rohana gave and him
as
wife,
with
child,
bore he
came
son.
his
brother's
over
name.4
Afterwards
of Rohana the the
to
ruler
in
the
whole
He
wealthy
1
prince reigned
insertion
of In the the
Mahagama.5
epic (Jat.
the Buddha
founded
On 20
the
Dutthagamani
Nidanakatha birth of See
p.
see
Dip.
and
Mah.,
p.
(English ed.).
of
same
von
i.
503)
the
story
of
the
dream
Maya
before
the
is inserted Buddha's
with Geburt
almost
und
2
the
introducing
der and
words.
WINDISCH,
156. island. for the form
die
Lehre south
Seelemcanderung, part
of
The
south-east better
the
There
Y
is
certainly
ay
a
authority
an
Y at thai to p. the
ay
name:
a.
However
at thai
or
gives
appropriate meaning
(Skt. yastar,
'dwelling
Skt. P.
temple
of the
sacrificer'.
seems
yatthar
with
and the
alaya.)
Tradition
to
to Point
identify the
de
monastery
The
Yatagala-vihara
Review, iii, p.
4
the
NE.
of
Galle.
Ceylon
National
110.
He
was
named
(afterhis birthplace
the
and
Devanampiyatissa)
where
the ruins
Yattha-
layakatissa.
6
NE.
of
Hambantota
near
place
of
the
xxir.
22
The Birth
of Prince Gamani
147
also many Nagamahaviharal that bore his name ; he founded and so forth. the Uddhakandaraka as vih"raSj (other) (vihara) His son reigned after his death in that 10 Yatthalayakatissa of this and in like manner also Abhaya, son same place, (last). 11 Kakavannatissa, Gothabhaya's by the name son, known
12 prince, reigned there after his death. Viharadevi was the consort of this believing king,firm in the faith (wasshe), the daughter of the king of Kalyam.2 Now the king named in Kalyam the ruler was Tissa. His 13
the
younger wrath
brother
named that
Ayya-Uttika,who had roused the he was the guilty lover of the queen,
took
up
fear and
his abode
sent
a
elsewhere.
man
The
14 15
after him.
He
wearing the
This and
to
of disguise
man
went
entered the
stand
an
at
the who
king's door
16
arahant
always used
When
unnoticed palace,
by
that thera.
17
going
queen
in company with the thera, as the king was he let the letter fall to the ground when the forth,3
was
The looked
the
sound, (rustling)
the written in his
and
when
he
he
18
down
discovered
message
raged,
19
sea.
furyhe
caused the
to
be
slain and
thrown
into the
sea-godsmade the sea overflow the land; 20 but the king with all speed caused his pious and beautiful whereon 2 1 daughter named Devi to be placedin a goldenvessel,
was
at this the
written
same
'a
sea.
to
be launched
to
upon
22
that
she had
landed
near
Lanka (the)
Tissamaharama
ut the
1
lie
on
the leftbank
of the the
mouth
The
village
The
Mahanaga-dagaba
Ancient to i. 63. note 'as
in
Mahagama.
See
*
PARKER,
See
Ceylon,p.
.* Or
she
accoidingto the
MSS.
;
was
saha
with
the
king\
of the Burmese
the Tika
also to agree L2
with this.
148
the (vihara) Therefore
23
Maliavamsa
XXII.
23
king
Kakavanna the
consecrated
her
as
queen.
Vihara. epithet
vihara
l
When
the Tissamaha
and
the CittaKutali
gems,
24
2 also the Gamitthavali and lapabbata (vihara) and so forth, believingin the (vihara) devoutly
and
three
he
providedthe brotherhood
In
with continually
things.3
25
the
a
monastery named
Kotapabbata there
his way of who life,
was
lived
ever
at
that
time
with
26 27
samanera,
piousin
more
busied
various
mount
works
of merit.
to easily
To
the
the
of courtyard
the Akasa-
he fixed three slabs of stone as steps. He gave cetiya4 to drink and did services to the brotherhood. bhikkhus) his body was wearied a grievous sickness continually
upon
a
(the
Since
came
28
him.
The
grateful bhikkhus,
him
at
who
brought
him
in
the
Tissarama, in the
Silapassayahad
Always
lavish
when
the
the
self-controlled Viharadevi
in the
given
gifts to
brotherhood
the
beautifully prepared
she
was
30
before royalpalace,
after the and
go
mid-day meal,
used to
and
meal,sweet
arama
medicines perfumes,flowers,
and offer these
take, clothing
to the
to their
31
dignity.
doing thus, at
of the that
Now
seat
near
the
ex'
chief thera
32
when
:
poundingthe
to her
Thy
1 2
the
note
to
v.
8. in the later
near
of the miles
Cittalapabbata, or,
NE. in of The
form, Situlpaw-
vihara
lie 15
the Tissamaharama
Katagamuwa.
23 ; ED. is
See A. JAYAWARDANA
Ceylon
National
Review,ii, p.
29.
MULLER,
mentioned
Ancient
once
The
monastery
45. 59
A.D.
Culavamsa
under
king DathopatissaII,the
8
4
seventh
century
not far
See note
I.e. the
to 3. 14.
'
is still shown,
so
from
the
on
named National
because
it is situated 24.
rock.
Cf.
Ceylon
Review, ii;p.
See
also note
to 33. 68.
150
head
45
Mahavamsa
of the first warrior
among
XXII.
45
king
Elara's
warriors
had this
been very
struck
head, and
46
47
heard soothsayers
when
he has
vanquishedthe
make the
Damilas
united
kingdom, will
shall
a
doctrine
brightly.'
48
'Whosoever
point out
grace
such
honeycomb,on
him
the
49
50
(with this service)/ thus did the king proclaim. A countryman who found,1on 2 which was the shore of the Gotha-sea turned upside a boat, down, filled with honey,showed this to the king. The king prepared brought the queen thither and, in a beautifully
in accordance caused pavilion, her to eat the other his
to
king will
bestow
51
And
that
her
honey as longingsmight
named
king
52
entrusted He
warrior
Velusumana and
matter.
went
Anuradhapura
he
saw
became
and
friend
of the
53
keeper of
the
king'sstate-horse
that this
him
services.
When
man
he,
the and had
shore
when
of
the
early in
and had
morning;3
it and
he had
mounted
The
Tlka
here
contains boat
taken narrative,
from
p. 37.
the
Atthakatha.
author
of
of the the
2
findingof the
Mah. has
; cf.
Dip.
and
Mah.,
The
In far
8
adopted it in his text. of the sea near Gothasamudda (cf.22. 85) is a designation Ceylon. is golumuhudu 'the sea not Sinhalese the correspondingword from the land, the shallow sea Diet.,s. v.). (CLOUQH, Sirih.-Engl.
Kamb.
versified and
'
The
Tika
explains the
passage
thus
Anuradhapurassa
uppa-
lakkhettato
ratanam
kassaci flowers
own
attano ca khaggagahitam uppalamalam netvil tiram ca gahetva pato va Kadambanadiya lotustattha taken asankito he had thapesi 'When from the lotus-marshes it of
gathered
Anuradhapura,
and
his
precioussword, he brought
Kadamba-river '. and
early in
of the
laid it there
anybody
XXII.
63
The
Birth
of Prince
and the
Gamani
151
himself
grasped the
known
l
sword, he made
the horse could forth
as swiftly
(go).2
55
When
to catch
king-heard
This
man
that
he sent
mounted
second
the
He in
drew
was
and
stretched
came
head, as he
on,
(from the trunk). The other took both beasts and the in the evenand reached Mahagama ing. head (ofElara's warrior)
severed And
But
the queen
satisfied her
on
even longings
as
she
would.
as were
58
the
king
conferred
his warrior
such
honours
in accordance In time
(withthis service).
the bore
a
noble
son,
endowed
with
all 59
the
that with his
great monarch.
very
day, from
gems.
in the house of the rejoicing great was By the effect of his merit there arrived this place and that, seven ships laden And in like manner, the
60
manifold
by
race6
the
power
of
6 1
merit,an
one a
elephant of
thither and named
six-tusked here
saw
brought his
62
young When
left him
Kandula
and
jungle on
told
he straightway oppositethe watering-place, to 63 the king. The king sent his (elephant)-trainers
bringthe
Kandula
He
was
named
Attanam
as
namam
savayitvana
(10.26; 33.65;.
2
Lit.
'
with
horse.'
man-at-arnis horse
was
According
horse Vaha.
'
Elara's
named
Nandasa-
rathi,his
is called
*
called
the Sirigutta,
stolen by Velusumana
Lit. The
To
him
who
was
coming
at his back
or
after him.'
mahaby paripake gabbhe explains dhannam ti va attho. punnatejussadam punnasampannam noble breed of The chaddanta are supposed to be a particularly is also a sacred lake in the Himalaya named elephants. Chaddanta after these elephants.Mah. 5. 27, 29. SUBHUTI, Abhidhdnappadipikdnagaraja, tassa nivasatthanasamlSuci, p. 130: Chaddanto,
6
Tika
patta
Chaddanto
saro.
152
64
'
Mahavamsa
A
xxil.
64
shipfilledwith
vessels of
This
so
he
bring
65
66
king had invited the brotherhood of the bhikkhus, festival of his numberingtwelve thousand,for the name-giving If my son, when he has won the kingship son, he thoughtthus :
As the
'
over
the whole
realm of
Lanka,
shall make
67
the Sambuddha
to shine forth
justone
shall
68
wear
thousand the
and robe
eightbhikkhus
in such shall wise the
they
shall
that
the
be
uppermost.1 They
and
put
rightfoot
threshold2
69
togetherwith
named Gotama
confession of
out
they shall lay aside the prescribed waterpot the umbrella (made of) one A thera (piece).3 shall receive my son and impart to him the 4 faith and the precepts of morality/ All fell
in this
manner.
I.e.
the
alms-bowl twice
shall
not
ca
be is
garment.
Kamb.
2
The
repeated
be
covered
folds author
of
the
of the
Mahavamsa
to
sa.
The
contrary
14.
unlucky omen.
This
still superstition
prevails among
Ceylon,p.
3
the modern
Sinhalese.
PARKER,
VillageFolk-tales of
ca.
Ekacchattayutam
is based
on
dhammakarakam SUBHUTI'S
dhammakaraka
niharantu
My
the
translation Colombo
water
savana.
interpretation (letterdated
is strainer
a
2. 1.
1911).
C.V.
The
pot
into which
is strained
before
V.
drinking; the
1; VI.
21.
being
called paris-
See
13.
3). 'The
when
(chatta) are two principalarticles is 'an umbrella or going out.' Ekacchatta singleumbrella' handle '. According to SILANANDA made of leaf,having its own H. T. de Silva, Colombo 21. I. 1911) ekacreceived from (letter be taken must as chattayutam 'providedwith one handle' as an The waterpots are made adjective belonging to dhammakarakam.
'
umbrella
without
or
with
handle
or
neck. toachattaon
In
this
case
the of
a
neck
of
the
be
compared
He the
the top
Mah., p. 87, n.
with the
assembly present.
customary
says
It must
here
that
it is
of faith before
(sarana) and
the
the confession
THE ASSEMBLY
commencement is
of
any
ceremony.'
no
But
Mah.
24.
24
Gotama
(cf.v. 28)
expresslydesignated ran
of (i.e.
Duttha-
xxii.
84
TJie Birth
he
saw
of Prince Gamani
omens
153
at
When
all these
on
the
king, glad
;
heart, 70
son, 71
bestowed
rice-milk
the
brotherhood
the
and
to
his
bringingtogetherin
and the
name
one
both
over lordship
Mahagama
Gamani-
of
his
father, he
gave
the
name
Abhaya. When,
g-ama,
on
day
son
he this, the
had
entered MahaShe
72
he
intercourse The
therebywith
name
child.
And
became
did the of
a
king
great
73
Tissa.
both
boys grew
up
in the midst
body of
When,
retainers.
at the
festival time
of the
the half bhikkhus, he, when had been eaten by them, did,togetherwith the queen, take with little in a golden spoon and give it to them the a words buddha
:
five hundred
76
If you, my sons, abandon the doctrine of the Samthen shall this not be digested in your belly/ Both
(
77
understood
the
meaning
of these
old the
would
same was
fain
put them
to
the
test, offered
78
he had way to the bhikkhus, and when left by them taken and placed in a dish and divided it into three
we
79
boyshe
turn
:
away with
bhikkhus,the
these
two
house And
such
thoughtsas
'We toward the
eat
portionhere/
ever
furthermore:
one
brothers
be
without
as
enmity
eat
other; with
And
as
thoughts
were
these
ye
this
ate
portionhere/
two
we
ambrosia
was
they
:
both
(
the will
portions.But
it
Never ye
with the
thoughts
away
eat
this
83
with
his the
hand, but
morsel of
who
had
manner) flungaway
gamani) sikkhaya
take it then the to
mean
to his
84
dayako,
that
with
distinct reference
from the his very
Gotama,
boy (patiganhati),
expresses
to willingness
become
in the future.
154
Maliavamsa
XXII.
85
drawing
85
in
his and
hands
and
he
lay
upon
bed.
The dost
queen
came, not
caiessing
upon
spoke
with limbs
l
'
Why
out,
easily
there side
?
thy
my
beyond
the he
Gariga
how When
are
the I lie
Damilas,
with
stretched out-
86
on
is
'
Gotha-ocean,2
answered. silent.
can
limbs
the
king
heard
his
thoughts
87
he
remained
Growing
renowned,
duly
Gamani
and
came
to
sixteen
years,
vigorous,
intelligent
this of
hero
in do
majesty
and
might. (only)
;
88
In works thus of
changing
merit wise
come
existence such be
beings
as
indeed
desire zeal in the
by
to
rebirth filled
they
with
pondering
the
man
will works.
ever
heaping
up
meritorious
ends
the
twenty-second
in of the the
chapter,
called
The the
Birth
of
Gamani',
emotion
MahEvamsa,
compiled
for
serene
joy
pious.
See
note
to
10.
44.
See
note
to
22.
49.
CHAPTER
XXIII
THE
LEVYING
OF
THE
WARRIORS
FOREMOST
courage
in and
and size
the of
qualitiesof
was
swiftness
mighty
body
also
the
2
elephant
Kandula.
Nandhimitta,
Suranimila,
Bharana,
and and
Mahasona, Vejusu:
Gothaimbara,
mana, ten
were
Theraputtabhaya,
Phussadeva and
a
Khanjadeva,
his
Labhiyavasabha
Mitta the and he
these
mighty
had he that
great warriors.1
named in
;
King
the the his
Ejara
general
had,
near
in
village
governed,2
a
eastern son,
district3 named
Citta-mountain, uncle,
years
after In
4
whose of
to
secret
(in
to rope
his
body).
about about
f"
the
were
his
childhood,
the
creep
far, they
used
to
a
bind
boy
the rope the
slung
and in
his
on
body,
the
over
great
he
mill-stone.
since, creeping
after him
ground,
the
dragged
the had he
went
crossing
him When uncle. other
9 8
threshold He
up
broke
asunder,
of ten
they
called
Nandhimitta.
he
was
strength
into
at
elephants.
served
his and
grown who
the that
man
city and
time
used
Damilas,
desecrated this
thupas
to tear
strong
with
then his
asunder,
the
10
leg
down and
foot
while
cast
he
grasped
out
his hand,
(he would)
them
(over
The
story
of
the
ten 78
paladins
foil.
of
Dutthagamani
is
treated
also
in
the
1901
2
Rasavahini and
II, p.
(Ed. by SARANATISSATHERA,
Colombo,
1899.)
i.e.
Kammantagama,
the
a
'Village
to the
of
labour'
or
'activity'.
the
'I
think It is
word
is equivalent
tenants
nindagamaof
are
present day.
to the
village the
of which
liable
no.
to render
services
landlords.'
8
WIJESINHA,
the this
name
Mah.,
of the
p.
88,
4.
Possibly
to bear That
village
is
Khandaraji.
Rasav.
II. 8028
seems
4
out.
is the
boy's
parents.
156
the
cast
1 1
Mahavamsa
xxm.
walls). But
out
the devas
caused
those
dead
bodies that
he
to vanish.
When
told the
12
the
diminution
'
of the him
Damilas
they
command
Take
they could not carry out.2 Nandhimitta I do thus,it is but the destruction of men
and
13
glory to
who
the
doctrine.
In
Rohana3
there There
have
faith in the
when the I have
three gems.
overcome
14
king, and
conferred
and
on overlordship
doctrine of the
15
Buddha
to
shine
went
and
prince Gamani.
he the warrior
taken and
counsel
his mother
received
honour,
to
with
high honours
Nandhimitta
continued
dwell
16
King Kakavannatissa
in check
to be
guard
to hold
17
gahga.
ford
4
Now
named
Dighabhaya;
18
and
he
gave And
the
guard
near
the
Kacchaka-
into his
charge.
noble
to form
the
a
commanded
19
each
family within
yojanasround (tosend)one son thither. Within the district in the village of Kotthivala, of Khandakavitthika,lived the
chief of
a
clan
named
Samgha
a
5
who
had
seven
20
sons.
a
To His
him, too,
seventh
princesent
named
messenger
demanding
son.
Nimila who
had
were
the
21
ten
elephants.His
The
six brothers
reading
The
should
doubt,
J.P.T.S.
sahodham
thenam,
sahodha. sabhandakam. alteration
cf. J.R.A.S.
Tika The to sahasa in
860;
the
1910,
with the the
hit
meaning
a
the
paraphrase
Rasavah.
II,p.
8015 makes
characteristic
longerunderstood
use.
2
proof that
but had
phrase
into
a
was
no
fallen
typed stereo-
Since
they did
not
findingout
4
of the deed.
See note
Rasavahim:
name
See
to 10. 58.
Suranimmala.
sura
first
part
of the
must
latter
from
to the
hero.
158
34
Mahavamsa
many
xxin.
34
and him
gifts (totake
shadows
grow
with
him
to (back)
his friend.
to the
princeat
35
that the
son
longerand
gifts.
with
a
the
'
the
man
king's prince)
said
36
37
The
other
to
prince grew
he
when
And youth with ten thousand (pieces). to his charge)they had cut his hair and (according him in the
honour
bathed
river,and
a
had
put
his
on
him
pair of
Punnavaddhana-garmentsand
38
beautiful
and him
had
wound
silken turban
about
to the
own
39
his
latter commanded
givehis
40
bed
a
worth He and
warrior them
to
as
couch.
Moreover,the princebade them ten thousand of money) to the (pieces gathered all these togetherand took
father and
gave
his mother
the ten
thousand
41
42
of money) to his mother and the bed to his father. (pieces The same and appeared at the place of the night he came the prince heard this in the morning he was guard. When he had given him glad at heart. When provisionfor the
journeyand
43
an
escort
and
had
bestowed
on
him
to
thousand warrior
gave
of money) he sent him (pieces brought the ten thousand to his them
and The and
went
The
mother
presence
father,
of
it to
into
the
44
Kakavannatissa.
princeGamani,
took up
45 46
the service king gave him (into with high honours the warrior Suranimila him.
2
king of)the
his abode
with
In
the
Kulumbari-district
in
the
villageHundarivapi
At the time
at
lived Tissa's
was
eighth son
old he years
ten
named
tore up
Sona. young
when the
he
seven
years
was
palms;
time
when
he
old the
Vethayitva,
must
verb
common
accusative,
2
be
supplied
to
governing punnavaddhanayugam
to
both
and
the and
gandhamalam. cf. Kulumbarikannikaya Nakulanagakannikayain, ; Mah. 23. 77; Kalayanakannikamhi, Mah. 34. 89; and Huvacakannike, Mah. 34. 90. Rasav. II. 8619 reads Kadalumbarikannikaya.
xxin.
61
Tlie
Levyingof the
Mahasona heard king-
Warriors
as was
159
palm-trees.In
elephants. When
took him
the from
time the
strong1
such
a
as man
ten
47
he
48
gave
service o"
Gamani prince
honourable
with
guerdon from
maintain warrior
Receiving
his abode
him.
In the there
reason
Nitthulavitthika,49 region named Giri,in the village of Mahanaga strong as ten elephants. By 50 lived a son
of his dwarfish brothers made
a were
stature
he
was
named him.
Gothaka Once
his six
elder had
merry
gone
forth and
when
a
they
beanThen
51
layout
up
and
back he
told him.
torn
52
when
called imbara
levelled the
went
(them).
amazing
Because
brothers
and
to
name
came
told his 53
had
they
manner,
returned
praisinghis
to
work.1 him
54
this he
bore
the
the
Gothaimbara, and
commanded
too, in
Gamani.
A
king
stay with
in the
son
householder Kitti
named
near
Rohana,
of the
who
was
headman
to the
55
of village
was
the
name
Kota-mountain,
gave
who the 56
born to him
the
age
of ten to twelve
At
in his 57
not
playingstones
When he
was
that
could
be
five
him
men. a
sixteen
made
club
sixteen cubits
of he
long. When,
warrior.
to
this,he
smote
59
palmyra
known
as
or a
he coco-palms,
And
felled them.
Therefore the
king
in like 60
was
manner a
command
his father
when
this house-
61
holder
in the Kotahearinga discourse of Mahasumma he attained to the fruition of (thefirst stage of pabbata-vihara
The
II. 88
a
that he monks.
source
2
yakkha
of
Gothaimbara,
among
as
went
the the
'dwellers
in the
Uttaravihara
are
mentioned
story.
k
are
Samananamam
of him
of like
name
with
. . .
160
62
Mahavamsa
XXIIL
62
salvation
called) sotapatti.With
king,and when
to up
heart
he had received
of) his
63
house
his
to
an
son
he
thera.
to
Given
state
the
of practice
meditation his
son
he attained
was
the
of
arahant.
Therefore
called
Theraputtabhaya.2
64
In the named
of Kappakandara village
In the
at
son was
of Kumara4
ten to twelve
lived
years many
Bharana.
went
time,when
he
65
old,he
with struck
boys
them
chased dashed
hares; he
66
with
them,
age
in (smitten)
twain, to the
ground.
the
he, at the
67
forest
boars in like
Therefore
him did
Bharana
known
manner
as
great warrior.
to
And
the
king in
68
In gana
stay with Gamani. the district called Giri,in the village of Kutumbiyanthere dwelt,held in honour (by the people) a housethere,
named
like
command
69
holder
Vasabha.
His
Vela fellow-countrymen
was
and
70
when a son Sumana, governor of Giri,came and both gave their friend, bringinggifts,
When he
was
born to their
to the
name
boy.
man
grown
up the governor
a
of Giri had
5
him let
to dwell
no
'
71
in his house.
mount
He When
had
Sindhu-horse
saw
that would he
him.
he
Velusumana he
thought :
Here the
72
*
is a rider
governor
and he
When neighedjoyfully.
'
said to him
Mount
the horse/
73
Then and
made
one
appeared even
he sat
on
as
74
whole
1
and circle,
the back
him
is the negativeside Jatasamvego, the conception of samvega to the positive pasada. See note to 1. 4. I.e. Abhaya, the son thera. The of the Rasav. II. 947 foil, states that the son then relates a story was already a samanera, from which it appears that in strength he was even superiorto
2
Gothaimbara.
3
river of this
a
name
in Rohana II.
is also
mentioned, Mah.
kutumbiko.
24.
22,
besides
4
monastery,
Rasav.
Rasav.
:
9412. 8811,
nameko
Thus
II. 9628
Kumaro from
Skt. saindhava
'horse
Indian
the
Indus
countryman
excellent
breed much
prizedin
literature.
xxin.
87
The
161
to be
chain
of men1
girt it
about
saw
him this
75 bystanders
they
broke
ten
of Giri gave
'
thinking: into the king's76 he is fit for the king/ he gave him joyfully dwell near service. The king made Velusumana him, giving 77 him greatly. him honourable guerdonand favouring of MahisaIn the district of Nakulanaga in the village
him donika with there lived
governor
Abhaya's last
he went
son,
named
Deva, endowed
78
Khanjadeva. When
he chased
and
by
the
dashed
them
to
the
king
heard him
this 81
to
matter, having
Near Gavita he
went
sent
for
Khanjadeva,he
commanded
the
he took
one
blew it
84
mightily.Powerful
of
were a
the
roar
at the
asunder bursting
thunderbolt
as
was
his
if stunned.
Therefore
His
known him
was
by
the
name
85
Ummadaphussadeva.
art handed
father made he
down
in the
and family,
of those who
86
hit A
by (the lightof
laden with
87
hair.
one
waggon
hundred
skins bound
3
upon
another,a slab of
udumbara-wood
eightor
sixteen inches
thick,or
The
Tika
va
(seeMah.
by 'like
a a an
on
this
row
haram Vassa
presupposes
Skt.
related
The
neuter
gender in bar
of Alexander's
2
of 'string
',is pearls
legend
horse 22. 23
Bukephalos.
(with note) ; Rasav.
Terminalia
tomentosa
See Mah.
Skt.
asana,
udumbara,
Ficus
glomerata.
M
162
of iron
Mahavamsa
or
xxm.
88
88
one
through with
89
or arrow
four
inches shot
thick
he
him
forth usabha
by
eight usabhas
water.
the
land
but
one
through
had
to
the from
great king
his father
heard
this
thing he
him
taken with
90
91
and
commanded
stay
Near lived
his
a
the Tuladhara-mountain
son
in the
of Viharavapi village
of the householder
Matta, named
Vasabha.
Since
92
93
94
they called him Labhiyavasabha. At the age of twenty years he was with great bodily gifted with him he began, since he men strength. Taking some would fain have some fields, (tomake) a tank. Making it he, of earth flungaway masses beingendowed with great strength, had moved such as only ten or twelve men else,and thus in And short time he finished the tank. a therebyhe gained and him too did the king summon him and, allotting renown, honourable guerdon, he appointed him to (the service of) body was
Gamani. That
noblyformed
95
field
was
known
as
Vasabha's
Dam.2
So
abode Labhiyavasabha
96 97
near
Gamani.
did the
On
these ten
great warriors
king henceforth
on
confer Then
honours
conferred
his
own
son.
summoning
98
great warriors
'Each
one
the
99
They
thousand
too
brought
did
manner.
these
warriors
in levy (others)
like
thither.
And
one
they, reckoned
hundred
and
ten
eleven thousand
warriors.
!01
They
Thus
1
2
all
ruler of the
102
received honourable guerdon from continually the princeGamani. land and abode surrounding
a
the
when
wise
man,
mindful
of his
hears salvation,
of
See note
TheRasav.
to 22. 42. 11. 103 mahantam 135 tarn Kakavannatissamaharaja sakkaratn katva udakavaragamaip ti patthaya so Vasabhodakavaro says:
anapetva
tass'
eva
dapesi;
ahosi.
tato
pakato
xxill.
102
The
Levyingof the
the
Warriors
should
find
163
the
marvels
wrought by
the
he piouslife,
evil
path, evermore
surely, in pleasure
called The Levying chapter, twenty-third of the Warriors', in the Mahavamsa, compiled for the serene joy and emotion of the pious.
'
CHAPTEE
XXIV
THE
WAR
OF
THE
TWO
BROTHERS
in and
horses, and
the
in Gamani
(bearing)
dwell with in
archery
The the
did
prince
thenceforth
in
Mahagama.
did
to
troops and
3
chariots
2
king
the
to
be
stationed Afterwards
to
Dlghavapi
in order
guard
his make
open
country.
to
announce
prince Gamani,
4
reviewing
f
host,
war
sent upon
his The
on
father
the
to
king
I will
the
Damilas.' 'The
king,
this
5
protect him,
of the
forbade
3
him,
saying:
Even
e
region
times
a man
side
to
river
the
is
enough/ (reply).
:
to
three
were
he
sent
announce
same
If
my
father he
he
6
would
not
speak
Gamani the
thus
therefore him
'
shall
woman's
a
put
this
on/ And
And
therewith
at
sent
ornament.
enraged
that
7
him
king
for
said
Make
cannot
golden
chain
! with
will
him,
else he
and he
be
protected.'
at
Then
other
fled
went,
was
angered
with
his
father,
to
Malaya,4
named
8
because
wroth
his
father
they
Then When
to
build
the
the
Mahanuggala-cetiya.
summoned the
finished thousand
monarch from
the
brotherhood.
Twelve
bhikkhus
Cittalapab-
I believe of
that
upasana
in
katupasana
out in
a
must
be
taken The
in
the it
sense
'archery', which
is borne
by
Abhidh. way,
390.
Tika,
is true,
explains katupasano,
1. 78. to
general
by katasikkho,
dassitasippo.
2
See Cf.
to note
10. 44.
The
Mahaganga
the Damilas
is considered
and
the
border
ruled
between
over
4
the
provinces
by
Cf.
dynasty.
I.e. the
angry
Dip.
and
Mah.t
p.
21,
n.
1.
166 kandara
23
Mahavamsa
the
XXIV.
23
king
Tissa that
'
: was
food
spent1 placed in a
am
had
food
for the
:
24
brotherhood
'
and
had
by
25
the
had taught the king he who heavenlyear,2 the thera (Gotama),dwellingin Piyanholy precepts,3 of his
sent went
26
son
of
house-
throughthe
air. Tissa
(the
27
from his hand and offered it to the took his almsbowl minister) the portionfor the brotherhood king. The king commanded And Tissa to be poured into the bowl. and his own portion in likewise, and the mare also would not poured his portion have her portion.Therefore did Tissa pour her share too into
the bowl.
28
'
The
and
29
king handed to the thera the bowl filledwith food; hastening away throughthe air he broughtit to the thera
When
Gotama.
to
the thera
had
in the
sels5 mor-
five hundred
bhikkhus,
bowl
partook of
the
food,
he
30
and
had
with
fragments
that
received from
them,
he caused it to
air to the
received it
he fed
and the
served the
mare
king.
then
When
he himself then
also
own
the
a
king sent
the almsbowl
making
of his
field-cloak
cushion to bear it
upon.6
halaka
Dighavapi. The site of Culanganiyapitthi be near Muppana, about ten miles to the north-east may, therefore, On his flight the king had to cross the Kumbukfrom Guttahalaka. kan-oya. This may be the Kappukandara-nadi. Then the Javamala Kurnbukkan. the village ford was near 1 Chatajjhatto, in this sense also Jdt. i. 34529.
in the direction of
2
3
4
below, v.
28.
The
Panicum,
Saffron
Island.'
monks
living there
Cf. Mah. 25. 104 foil. holiness. enjoyed a reputationfor particular translated it would On alopa see CHILDERS, P.D., s. v. ; literally be : when he had given (ofit)in morsel-portions.' 6 into a circular shape rolled cloth bat a is meant a By cum
8
'
which
serves
as
the
support
for
vessel when
carried
upon
the
head.
xxiv.
45
The
in
men
War
of the Two
Brothers
1 67
Arrived
thousand
Mahagama he assembled again a host of sixty 32 with and marching into the field began the war
The
his brother.
king ridingon
thus did each the
his
two
mare
and Tissa
now
on
the
at
33
elephantKandula,
once
come
together,opposing
the middle When
other made
Taking the
circle round
34
in elephant
the
king
him.
he
unguarded place
the
mare over
resolved to
leap over
shot skin
on
Leaping
over
with
35
the
his
brother, so
that
he
wounded
the back
(ofthe elephant).2
36 37
'
in fell there,fighting men Many thousands of the prince's of the scattered. and his great host was battle, By reason weakness of my
3
rider
so
one
sex
has used
me
temptuously'; con-
thought
elephant,and
him
to
in wrath
he
rushed climbed
upon
upon
the
tree; the
elephantwent
and him he mounted pursued the (Dutthagamani). And to the 39 to a vihara and fleeing fleeing prince. The princecame cell of the chief thera,he lay down, in fear of his brother, The chief thera spread the bed, 40 under the bed. over a cloak is followed immediately, asked : Where and the king, who
'
'
'
He
is not the
in the
'
answered
the
4 1
Then
when
he had
;
under the bed, that he was king perceived gone forth he placed sentinels round about 42 the
but
a
theylaid
him
prince upon
four if young
covered
with
garment and
out
as
ascetics, grasping43
dead a carrying) (theywere that he was the king, who bhikkhu. But being 44 perceived said : carried forth, genii Tissa, upon the head of the guardian of our house art thou carried forth ; to tear away anything 45 with violence from the guardian geniiof our house is not my bore bed-posts,
'
perhaps attack him from above. 2 This was early period. The Tika, too, corrupt at an passage to me The sense to be that Dutthagamani mentions varying readings. appears without wounding either only wishes to show his superiority his brother or the elephant seriously.Cf. Mah. ed.,Introd., p. xxii. But the word dently Lit. 'Has 'langhayi' is evileaped over me.' taken also here. to be metaphorically
1
To
see
whether
he
could
168
custom.
46
Mahdvamsa
the the
xxiv.
46
remember Mayst thou evermore guardian geniiof our house !' Hereupon Mahagama, and thither did he bring his
reverenced. greatly
virtue
of the
went to
king
mother,
whom
he
47
Sixty-eight years
did the
But thence
the
bhikkhus, went
said to
50
and came to Dlghavapi. The unrecognized1 prince 2 the thera Godhagatta Tissa : I have done ill, sir ; I
'
will make
my
peace
a
with
my
thera took
Tissa,
him the
on
in the habit of
51
bhikkhus
with
and
Leaving
and
the
invited them
seated
rice-milk his
brought(tothem). (food)
on
almsbowl, and
'
the
question :
'
Wherefore
with
We Where
have is The
son. are
53
come
bringingTissa
traitor ? he hurried
us.'
question:
the
pointed out
thither and
:
(
the
Viharadevi
54
The
now
king said
also
3
to the thera
servants.
It is known had
you
a
that
samanera
we
your
our
If you
not
but sent
of
55
seven
years
strife had
'
taken
without the
56
'
this king, brotherhood will do penance/ have You will (first) (to do) what the
loss of men/
(guests)
these he
his when
arriving.Take
words
57
rice-milk
to (food)
and
the
rest.' With
;
he offered the
the he
and
had
called his
brother
hither
seat
with
the
anatako.
Cf. Mah.
ed.,
spotted TURNOUR evamnamikassa. cerning contranslates, complexion, Tika: the explanationof the name given in the Tika, thus : Who afflicted with a cutaneous was complaint which made his skin scaly like that of the godha.' : of an iguana.) ( WIJESINHA
a surname
'
We
have
here
of his
Nato
no
vo
dasabhavo
idani
no,
i.e.
even
after
I have
become
king;
4
is honorific
Hessat'
plur. agatakiccam
vo
vo
stands these
cam
hessati
kiccam.
With
kicto
the
shown hospitality
to the bhikkhus.
xxiv.
59
The
War
of
the
Two
Brothers
160
brother he
to
even
there
in
the with
of he
the
brotherhood
the his brotherhood
to
and
;
when leave
had
eaten
tog-ether
And thither and
gave
depart.
of of Thus
sent
brother made
direct known
the
58
work
harvest
;
he the
too,
work
wont
when of
he
had
it
by
beat
drum,
are
directed
harvest.
pious
from many
men
to
appease
an
enmity,
great;
2
though
what wise toward
59
heaped
man,
up
causes,
even
if of
it
be
pondering
?
this,
shall
not
be
peace-loving
mind
others
Here the
two
ends
the
twenty-fourth
',
in of the the
chapter,
Mahavamsa,
called
The
War for
of the
Brothers
compiled
serene
joy
and
emotion
pious.
That
is, there,
where
he
had
sent
the
bhikkhus,
for the
i.e.
to
Dighavapi. against
the
The Damilas.
2
sassakamraani
are
preparations
campaign
The
Tika
explains
anekavikappacitam
raslkatam
by
anekadha
ti attho.
upa-
citam,
punappunanusaranavasena
CHAPTER
XXV
THE
VICTORY
OF
DUTTHAGAMANI
WHEN and
had
the
had
king Dutthagamani
a
had his
provided for
he
his
people
with and
'
relic put
and beasts favour
on
into for
to
spear1
marched,
chariots, troops
when
go
on
to Tissamaharama, riders,2
he
to to
shown land
the
he the
said
3
I will
the
further
us,
of
river
treat
to
bring
with
glory
doctrine.
who
Give
shall
may us,
them the
a
honour, bhikkhus
4
go
on
with for
since
As
sight of
4
bhikkhus the
is
blessing and
allowed bhikkhus caused he mounted with the
protection
him
us/
penance this
brotherhood of he had
five hundred
him in the
ascetics marched
taking
king
forth, and
hither
5
Malaya
leading
to
be
ready
his
one
elephant Kandula
field with
6 a
and, surrounded
host. army With reached
by
the
to
warriors, he took
end
mighty
of the
yet
in
Mahagama
the
train
Guttahalaka. Arrived
at
Mahiyangana
he
to
he the
overpowered
Damilas which the foe had in
a
the
Damila
Chatta. he
8
came
had
slain
that
very
place
Ambatitthaka,8
and
trench
leading
;
from
river,
the
(conquered)
and
Titthamba
fighting
crafty9
powerful
months
he
The
the
spear
serves
as
royal standard,
'
which
is
always
carried
before
2
prince.
to
See
Cf. That 10.
note
15. 189-190.
See
note
to
24.
4.
24. 55.
is to the On
north
of
see
the note
island,
to
towards
Anuradhapura.
with
See
Note
to
6
77.
Malaya
7. 68.
Mahagamena Mahiyangana
A ford of the
=
sambaddha,
Bintenne
lit. 'connected
Mahagama.'
C.
(Alut-nuwara).
not far and from
must
Appendix
in
Mahawaeliganga,
=
Bintenne.
Katahattha
Skt.
krtahasta,
be
taken
the
same
sense.
xxv.
22
The
of Dutthagamani Victory
him since by cunning,1 he
171
mother
9
overcame (finally)
his placed
in his view.
marching thence down (theriver) mighty man had conquered seven in one mighty Damila princes day and 10 had established the booty to his troops. over peace, he gave Therefore is (theplace) called Khemarama.
In Antarasobbha in Halakola he subdued
When
the
Mahakottha,
Nalika.
in Dona In
Gavara,
11
in Issariya,
Nalisobbha
Dlghabhaya- 1 2
in Kaccha13
he subdued, in gallaka
like manner,
Dlghabhaya ;
Kota, then
and in Gamani
Gamani, in Kum(hesubdued) bagama Kumba, in Nandigama Nandika, Khanu in Khanugama the two, uncle and nephew, named and Unnama but in Tamba Tamba Jambu also did he subdue, and each and Unnama.
was village
14
15
named
after
(its commander.)
it was (that
own
heard
16
people', he
made
this toil 1 7
declaration
Not
for the
mine, my
the
came
(hasbeen)ever striving
And
even as
doctrine
armour
of the Sambuddha.
on
the
18
body of
to pass
my
even
And
now
it
had
escaped 1 9
20
death
threw
themselves
a
protectioninto
open
In Vijitanagara.3
camp,
favourable
known
and
this became
by
the
Khandhavara-
pitthi.
Since the
king, in order
to
saw
to take
would Vijitanagara,
upon
fain 21 him
put Nandhimitta
the him
(once)when
1
he
coming
towards
him.
When
the
22
the
conjectureas to According (vivahakaranalecunning is the Gamani's reference to sena) promising to his adversary of government. marriage with his mother, and with it the expectation On saccakiriya see note to 18. 39. bank Near the northern of the Kalavapi (Kaluwsewa), about 24 miles SSE. from Anuradhapura.
The is too
us
allusion
terse for
to make
any
safe
mentioned.
to the
Tika
172
Mahavamsa
to two overpower
xxv.
23
elephant came
his
23
him,
and with
Nandhimitta him
on
seized with
his haunches.
hands
his
tusks
forced the to
Since built
on
Nandhimitta the
fought
elephant the
village
named
spot where
came (it
pass)is therefore
both south But
near
Hatthipora.
24
When
the
to
them
the
to
the test he
befell
a
marched
25
gate
fearful did
battle between
the warriors.
the east in
gate great
on Velusumana, sitting
horse,slay Damilas
the
numbers.
26
men.
The
Damilas Kandula
27 28
south
at
gate,and
king sent thither his and Nandhimitta and Suranimila,at the the three,Mahasona, Gotha and Theraputta,
their
29
deeds. The city (great) had three trenches, was guarded by a high wall, furnished with gates of wrought iron, difficultfor enemies to destroy. mortar Placing himself upon his knees and batteringstones, and bricks with his tusks did the elephantattack the gate of iron. down But the Damilas stood upon the gatetower kind, balls of red-hot iron and who hurled molten
the
30
31
poured on pitch
him
to
a
his back
Kandula,
water
tormented
with
betook pains,
pool of
and
dived there.
32
33
34
for thee, ing sura-draught1 go forth to the destroyof the iron gate,destroy the gate ! thus said Gothaimbara Then to him. did the best of elephants take again proudly and trumpeting he reared himself out of the water and heart, stood defiantly firm land. on The and put washed the pitchaway elephants' physician the on balm; the king mounted elephant and, stroking
'
Here
is
no
'
35
his
temples
'To
with thee I
his
him the
on
with
the
words:
give, dear
over lordship
the whole
36
island
to
of Lanka/
he had
a
had
choice
had
seven
fodder
given
armour
him, had
on
covered had
with upon
cloth
and
a
put his
him
and
bound
his skin
Sura
is
an
The
meaning
is: it is not
for
sake pleasure's
here.
Mahavamsa
is to be
XXV.
52
found
the
named village
52
Elara
heard
that
to do
battle he called
a
togetherhis
the
53
This
warrior and
in truth
warriors
think
what ministers,
should
f
we
54 55
do ?
morrow
'
King
will
Elara's
we
To-
give battle/
and In
took
by
bodies
of
troops.
a
these
and
of figures
in the innermost
57
When
Elara
mounted
his
elephant
and
Mahapabbata
58
he
came
thither
with
chariots,soldiers and
beasts
for
riders.
When
the battle
began
the
mighty
terrible
59
60
61
62
63
Dlghajantu seized his sword and shield for battle, and leaping the cubits up into the air and cleaving eighteen of the king with his sword, he scattered the first body effigy the mighty (warrior) had in this manner of troops. When scattered also the other bodies of troops,he charged at the stood. But when body of troops with which king Gamani he began to attack the king,the mighty warrior Suranimila his own name.2 insulted him, proclaiming Dlghajantu thought : into the air full of rage. I will slay But him/ and leaped Suranimila held the. shield toward him as he alighted (in leaping).But Dlghajantu thought: fl will cleave him in with the shield,and struck the shield with twain,together
' '
64
Then
the (only)
as
he
there,
his
the
(man) with
of
65
spear. Damilas
blew
shell,the army
turned
to
scattered ; nay,
flee and
they
katthamayarupakam ti, i.e. wooden figuresto represent the king. The usual form of challengeto singlecombat. 8 In the original text of vv. 62, 63 there are only the pronouns itaro, itaro, so, itaro, instead of the names Suranimila, Dlghajantu, Dlghajantu,Siiraniraila.
ranno
Tika:
patirupakam
xxv.
79
The
Damilas.
of Dutthagamani Victory
The
water
175
slew many
red with
name
in the tank it
was
there known
was
therefore slain,
dyed 66 by the
'
Kulantavapi.1 King Dutthagamani proclaimedwith beat of drum : None but myself shall slayElara/ When he himself, armed, had
mounted
came
67
68
the
to the
Near Elara
the hurled
gate of the citythe two kings fought;69 his dart, Gamani evaded it ; he made his own 70
his tusks and
he
his
this
elephant.
When
Lanka beasts drum from
a
he had
thus
had
united
71
marched, with chariots, troops and for riders, into the capital. In the cityhe caused the 72 when to be beaten,and he had summoned the people
one
under
rule
he
yojana around
On the
king
it 73
Elara.
with ordain the
spot where
And
body had
fallen he
a
burned
and catafalque,
even
there did he
to this
build
monument
and
of Lanka, 74 day the princes when to this place, wont to silence their are they draw near music because of this worship. When Damila he had thus overpowered thirty-two kings 75 DUTTHAGAMANI ruled over Lanka in single sovereignty. When the hero Dighajantuka76 was Vijitanagara destroyed had told Elara of the valour of his nephew, and to this 77 Bhalluka he had to come sent a nephew named message Bhalluka had received (the hither. When message)3 from him 78 he landed here, the seventh day after the day of the burning on of Elara, with sixty thousand men. death after he had landed 79 Although he heard of the king's
worship.
I would
as given in the adopt the form of this name MSS., as it givesgood sense : End of the tribe.' The Tika ing This, however, is no guarantee for the readKulatthavapi. now
'
like to
of the
2
MSS. lit.
v.
Ekatapattaka,
in adds The
'Being
under
one
parasol (atapatta).'
Cf. ekachattena
3
75.
Tika
to tassa
176
MaMvamsa
xxv.
80
yet, from
80
shame, with
the
'
purpose
will
He hither.1 pressedon from Mahatittha Kolambahalaka.2 the village near heard of his coming he the kingWhen battle in full
do
marched
on
81
panoply
warriors
of
war,
mounted
on
the
elephant
and
Kandula, with
and chariots,
82
mounted
horses elephants,
with
foot-soldiers in who
was
great numbers.
the five best archer in all the the rest
with
him in
the
weapons,3 and
the
came
83
followed
Bhalluka
raging battle
at
forward
;
the
king
his with
84
there
but
the army
'
him in
drew
also back
said
Aforetime
may this
battles he twenty-eight
And
what retreated,
'
86
be, Phussadeva?'
87
Victorylies behind the elephantdraws to the field of victory us, O king ; looking And when he will halt/ back, and at the place of victory the elephanthad retreated he stood firm beside (theshrine of) of the the precincts the guardian god of the city within
he answered: Mahavihara.
had halted here the Damila king of elephants the king in that place and mocked toward Bhalluka came at the ruler of the land. Coveringhis mouth with his sword the into king returned insult for insult. I will send (an arrow4) the king's mouth/ thought the other,and he let flyan arrow. When the
'
88
89
90
The
And
91
arrow
struck
on
the
sword-blade
'
and
fell to the
Bhalluka, who
uttered
behind
92
the
arrow
thought: He is struck in the shout for joy. But the mighty Phussadeva a sitting his mouth wherewith let into the king, (as flyan arrow touched the king'sear-ring.And he lightly passed)
him thus
to fall with
arrow
ground. mouth/
the and
king,
struck
flyyet
another
at
the
To
Anuradhapura.
Cf. note
to 7. 58.
It is called
in 33.
that
8
passage)not
See
note
the north
situated
to
to 7. 16.
'
After pa te mi
I let
understand fly1,
'k
an
dam',
as
in the Tika.
xxv.
105
The
of Dutthagdmam Victory
him
177
turn
him head
(now)
to
with
his 93
swift hand
he
broughthim
up.
cut
94
down.1 To
went victory
make
and
showed
king the
:
blood
down. streaming
this
mean
When I have
the
kingsaw
'What
does
self/ my-
95
'
'
carried out
(inanswer)to the ruler of the land. And to the is thy guilt ? he answered : Striking : 'What question thy ear-ring.' Why hast thou done this, brother, taking as my that which and the great king, was no guilt guilt?'replied in gratitude he said moreover Great shall be thy honourable : guerdon,even as thy arrow.' When the king, after winning the victory, had slain all
' ' '
he said
9G
97
98
the Damilas
he
went
up
on
the
terrace
of the
and palace,
99
chamber there in the midst of the dancers when, in the royal he had sent for Phussadeva's and ministers, and had arrow set it in the ground with the feathered end uppermost, he covered the dart
upon
over
100
and these he it, Sitting then on with fragrantlamps and filled with many a perfume, 102 lighted with nymphs in the guise of dancing-girls, while he magnificent
103 draperies, costly back upon his glorious he, looking victory, great though it knew no joy,remembering that therebywas wrought was, the destruction of millions (ofbeings). When his thought 104 the arahants in Piyahgudipa3knew they sent eightarahants to comfort the king. And they, 105
2 pouredforth kahapanas to Phussadeva. forthwith caused to be given the terrace of the royalpalace, adorned, 101
and
over
with
rested
on
coming
1
in the
middle
and
'.
watch
sisato
of the
night,alightedat the
'
Padato
'
katva headwise
wise
or
'
Rajanam
padato
he would this
(sisato). On
have lain with then
Duttbagamani.
arrow
second he he
at he
him,
now
which
knee, even
that of moment
a
so fell,
that
fell forward
one
lay in the
the
8
posture of
to 24
conquered
overthrown, or
slave before
king.
25.
See note
178
MaJiavamsa
known
that
to
xxv.
106
Making palace-gate.
through
106 to be
107
they
were
come
thither
the terrace
when he had
of the
palace.
he the
and
invited them
ways
done
their
them
reverence
in many
are
asked
reason
coming.
'We
sent
by
108
109
110
to comfort thee,O lord of men/ Piyafigudipa And 'How shall there thereon the king said again to them: be any comfort for me, O venerable sirs, since by me was caused the slaughter of a great host numbering millions ? 'From this deed arises no hindrance in thy way to heaven. beingshave been slain here by Only one and a half human had come unto The the (three) one thee, O lord of men. himself the five precepts.1 the other had taken on refuges, at
'
brotherhood
Unbelievers
111
and
men
the rest,not
more
to be
esteemed
than
beasts.
for
in manifold ruler of
men
therefore cast
from
O thy heart,
'
Thus
exhorted bidden
by
them
them
he had
113
great king took comfort. When farewell and had given them leave to
*
the
againand thought:
take
us a
Without mother
meal,'thus
our
our
father Have
114
have
caused to
eaten
in
boyhood at
without he
saw
the meal.
ever
anything
of bhikkhus
whatsoever
?
'
brotherhood
115
Then
in the pod, at eaten pepper unthinkingly, for the brotherhood ; and he none leaving I must do penance.'
giving to the that he had, all the morning meal, thought: For this
'
116
Should
for
man
think
on
and should myriads, in mind from that), and should he also very the evil (arising as beingthe murderer carefully keep in mind the mortality win freedom from of all,then will he, in this way, shortly and a happy condition. suffering
greed in
countless
called The Victory of twenty-fifth chapter, DutthagHmani \ in the Mahavamsa, compiledfor the serene joy and emotion of the pious. Here ends the
(
See notes
to 1. 32 and
62.
CHAPTEE
XXVI
THE
CONSECRATING
OF VIHARA
THE
MARICAVATTI-
WHEN
that he
to
king
their
of
high
The
renown
had of
united
to
Lanka
in
one
kingdom
according
not
'
distributed rank.
was
places
honour
his
warriors
warrior
to
Theraputtabhaya
him,
and And
would
asked
:
have
that
which he
{
allotted
'It
being
what those win.'
Wherefore?'
:
answered:
a
is war.'
questioned 3
war
(yet again)
there the said When with in ?
'
When
single realm
e
is created battle
is
he
answered
will
do
with
to
rebels,
Thus
4
victory is
the and
hard
he, and
he the time had
again
and
again again
After
to
restrain
the
him.
entreated
took
pabbajja
attained of five
5
king'sconsent.
to
arahantship, and
had the week of
in
the of
the
asavas.
midst
hundred When
(bhikkhus) who
the fearless
festival
who
to
kingship
carried
out
was
gone
cration consewas
by
the
king Abhaya,1
great
pomp, to went
had the
the
with
adorned
Tissa-tank,
to
that
according
and
to
the
festival
the
custom,
hold
festival
plays there
All of
observe
tradition for
of crowned
kings.
hundreds
8
that
had
been
made
ready
the There the
the
king
the very
and
spot where
in
Maricavatti-
the
place
who
where carried
thupa
spear
king's people
with
the
splendid spear
in
the
relic.3 the
When
10
king
A
disported himself
the words in the
water
whole
day
play
upon
abhayo
and
gatabhayo.
part
of
Now
Miriswseti
south-west
Anuradhapura, Anurddhapura,
north p. 19
of Tissawaewa.
SMITHER,
Ancient note.
Architectural
Remains,
foil.
foil. ; PARKER,
3
Ceylon,
p.
294
Cf. 25.
1, with
180
with together through,
the
11
Mahdvamsa
the
women
xxvi.
11
of the
harem,
he
said,in
evening :
And the
will go hence ; carry the spear before us.' with (this the peopleentrusted duty)could not move
'
We
its place the king'ssoldiers came to; and spear from of perfumes and flowers. When 1 2 gether and broughtofferings the
king
saw
this
great miracle,glad
after
at
heart
he
appointed
into
sentinels
13
there,and
built
a
he
had such
returned
wise that
forthwith
the
cityhe
in cetiya
it enclosed the
14
spear and founded a vihara that enclosed the thupa. In three years the vihara was finished and the ruler of
men
to together
hold
the festival
(on
1 5 the
16
17
18
of the monastery. A hundred thousand bhikconsecration) thoiisand bhikkhtinls were khus and ninety together gathered in this assembly the kittg there. Then spoke thus to the brotherhood : Without a thought of the brotherhood, venerI ate pepper in the pod-. Thinking: This shall be able sirs, I have built the pleasant Maricavattimy act of expiation, vihara, together with the eetiya. May the brotherhood accept it ! With these words he poured forth the (ceremonial) and piously water of a gift gave the monastery to the brother'
'
19
hood.
vihara
When
and
he had
set up
great and
round
about
it,he commanded
to the brotherhood. set
even
gifts
so
20
should
be
given there
stakes
were
plannedthat
tank,1 what
21
in the water
to
of the the
speak of
Abhayaremaining
so
men
as
had
a
given food,drink
and
forth, costly
a
for
22
week, he offered
hundred thousand All
was
the with
a
cost
with
cost of
23
thousand.
that
this
brotherhood
The
money
1
spent there
by gratitude
king,
See note
The most
to 10. 84.
(seenote to 4. 26) was allotted to monks the most (TL samghattheranam) distinguished ; the value then was graduated according to the rank of the recipient.The literal translation thus: had the parikkhara at first (at the runs at the end the value of beginning) the value of
costlyparikkhara
. .
.,
..
CHAPTER
XXVII
THE
CONSECRATING
OF
THE
LOHAPASADA
HEREUPON
the
king
called
down
:
to
(
mind The
the thera
formed
known
to
ever
all, and
intent
2
on
duly
handed
merit,
resolves
works,
the
ancestor
who
in
wisdom,
thus
to
island
"
did,
as
known,
the the
speak
king
Great cubits with the
the
king,
the
my
Thy
descendant,
found
and
Dutthagamani,
Thupa,
the
wise,
Sonnamali
will
*
hereafter
a
splendid
and
an
hundred
moreover,
twenty
adorned
in
height,
manifold
gems,
making
nine
stories
high, namely
Lohapasada.""
5
Thus made
thought search,
a
the
ruler
of
the
in
land,
a
and and he
one
finding, when
laid commanded
chest
by
in
palace with
the
such
written read
run
record
thereon,
'
inscription
years
be
have
aloud their
of
When
in
hundred time
thirty-six
Kakavanna's
course,
men,
future
will
build had
son,
the such
ruler
and
a
Dutthagamani,
When
and
to
this heard
and
that
in
wise/
of
the
king
his
this read
he
the
uttered
joy
clapped
the
a
hands.2 Maha-
Then
9
early
in
morning
when of
went
beautiful
megha-park,
of the
and
he
the
arranged
he
gathering
to
together
'
brotherhood for
you
a
bhikkhus
to
a
said
them
I will Send
10
build
pasada3
like
palace
of
the
gods.
I.e.
'provided
in
sense
with
is
now
Ruwanwaeli.
The
usual
designation
2
Mah.
For
the
of
apphoteti
Skt.
a-sphotayati)
cf. Thupa-
vamsa,
339-10:
vamahattham
abhujitva
dakkhinahatthena
apphotesi.
3
See
note
to
v.
14.
The
building
was
destined
to
contain
the
cells
of the
bhikkhus.
xxvii.
20
The
183
to
brotherhood
had
overcome
sent
In the time of the sage Kassapa 2 a brahman who had set out eight ticket-meals3 (to be the
f
Asoka,
11
to apportioned)
Give
and was her whole life long she left this (world) faithfully maiden in a gleaming palace, reborn as a lovely in floating the air, (and she was) continually served by a thousand twelve nymphs. Her gem-palacewas yojanas high4 and measured with
a
14 15
adorned yojanas round about; it was forty-eight thousand window-chambers, nine-storied and jutting
a a
providedwith
with four-sided,
as
thousand
light,
16
thousand
windows
beautiful
with heaven made and
to sent
a
with a network (adorned) the (building) the 17 was visible from every side, Ambalatthika-pasada, bright
18
pennons
When the theras,going to the hung out. that (palace) of the thirty-three saw (gods), they
drawing of it with red arsenic upon a linen cloth, and being arrived they showed the linen 19 they returned,
brotherhood. The
the
brotherhood the
took of
the
linen and
it he went
20
it to the
king.
Wrhen
king full
joy saw
By
The
vimana
are
meant
the
palacesservingas
note
; see
gods
and
2
happy
spirits.Cf. the
See have the
a
Vimanavatthu,
note
to
to 14. 58.
last Buddha
before Gotama
1. 10 ; 15. 125.
Salakabhatta.
Here then
we
construction
stories, diminishing
the
after
style of
India,
p.
the 70
Buddhist
et
CHIPIEZ,
Histoire
buildingis the
a
de VArt
although belonging to
BURROWS,
later time.
TENNENT,
Ceylon,ii, p.
588 ;
of
Indian
ArchaeologicalReport,x, 1886, p. 8 ; FERGUSSON, History Eastern and Architecture, 1910, i,p. 245; Arch. Survey of
Ceylon,Annual
serves
now
14 foil.
The word
form
pa
sad
to
as.
the
base
of t hup
SMITHER,
Anurddhapura,
p.
20, "c.
184
to
MaMvamsa
the
arama splendid
xxvil.
21
and
caused
the noble
Lohapasadato
be
drawing.
that the work
was
At
the time
begun
thousand
moreover,
the generous
(king)
be
manded com-
commanded
22
that
eighthundred
gates ;
should goldpieces
at each
placedat
gate he
23
24 25
laya thousand bundles of garments and many and honey, and filledwith ball-sugar, oil, sugar-dust, pitchers No work is to be done here without reward/ he proclaiming, had the work and their wage done (by the people), appraised, givento them. The each side a on four-sided, pasada was (measuring) in height. In this most and even much hundred so cubits,
them
'
beautiful
26
a
of
there palaces
were
nine
and stories,
in each
were
story
manilotusrounded sur-
hundred
window-chambers.
overlaid
with
27
silver and
adorned
gems
were
with the
fold
preciousstones, gay
on
various
flowers2
the
rows
and (vedikas)
with
28 29
thousand
in
the
pasada,
And
as a car
overlaid with
since he heard
adorned
with
windows. served
of Vessavana's
chariot which
up
he had
gem-pavilionset
in the
middle
31
It was adorned fashioned in like manner. (of the palace) with of precious were pillars consisting stones, on which and so forth, and shapes of devatas; figuresof lions, tigers, the edge of the round a ran borderingof pearl network and thereon was coral vedika of the kind that has a pavilion
33
pavilion, gailyadorned with the seven gems, stood a shining beauteous of ivorywith a seat of throne and in the ivoryback (was fashioned) a sun mountain-crystal,
1
Within
the
On in
the
balustrades
VArt
of the
FOUCHER,
GRUNWEDEL,
2
Buddhist.
projectingwindows, cf. the descriptions 100 ; du Gandhdra, fig. Grfco-Bouddhique 27. See Appendix D, no. 30. Kunst, fig.
a
in the frequent ornament: FOUCHER, with 3 ; balustrade leafsame work, fig. 97, 98 ; GRUNWEDEL, fig. ornaments cornices 99. on : FOUCHER, fig.
as
3
For
lotus-blossoms
See note
to 10. 89.
xxvii.
45
The
moon
185
34
in
a gold,
stars in
and pearls,
lotus-blossoms
placed here and there and fitly 1 Jataka-tales in the same within a festoon of gold. place On the exceedingly beautiful throne covered with costly 35 cushions was placed a beautiful fan of ivory,gleaming with a coral foot,resting36 and a white parasol (magnificently), shone forth and having a silver staff, on mountain-crystal
made of various gems
over
the throne.
On
it,depictedin the
2
seven
gems,
were
37
the with
eightauspicious figures
and
rows
of
of figures
beasts
of littlesilver 38 jewelsand pearlsin between ; and rows bells were hung upon the edge of the parasol. Palace, and pavilion were parasol, beyond price. throne, accordingto rank, and carpets and 39 Costlybeds and chairs, them did he command to spread coverlets of great price about. The rinsingvessel and the ladle (belonging 40 were even thereto) of the with
gold;
four
what
need
then
to
speak of
the
other utensils in
41 provided
by a
the
pasada gleamed
of the
with
magnificence
42
heaven
over
pasada
came
was
platesof
thence
its name
the
When
assembled
at
the
the
43
and brotherhood,
the brotherhood
of the
came
together as
on
Maricavatti
stood
(vihara). Those
the first
44
story,
learned in the
entered
on
the
the second, but those who on tipitaka 45 path of salvation and the others (stood)
On
events
in the
see
former
existences
of the
Buddha 1. L, p.
see
as
motive
for
decorative
scenes
FOUCHER, particularly
manner
270
foil. For
described
here,
CUNNINGHAM,
lion, bull, mangalikani: fan, standard, conch-shell, elephant, lamp. The Thuwater-pitcher, 30. 65). mentions the first (cf. sirivaccha as 6425, pavamsa, 8 Acamakumbhi acamanakumbhi" thus the or Thupavamsa 542" is a vessel to hold water for washing the feet and hands, and is placed at the entrance of the temple (WIJESINHA). See M.V. I. 25.
enumerates
WIJESINHA
the
attha
19 ; C.V. V. 35. 4.
186
Mahavamsa
XXVII.
46
each
stood When
on
one
of
the four
and that
higher
were
stories,1
but
of
arahants
on
those the
highest
the
46
king pouring
bestowed
the
pasada
water
on
hood, brother-
after he week.
forth
(ceremonial)
a
tion, presentaalms
for for is
commanded,
That
as
before, spent
all
that
lavish
gift
generous
was
47
was
by
which
the
king price,
the
pasada,
at
leaving
beyond
reckoned
48
thirty
who
The
wise of
is
how
marvellously together
with
precious
of
treasures
is
the
giving oneself)
from the
alms,
the
gathering
alms
(for
freed
worthless,
give
lavishly,
of the
mind
fetters
(of lust),
mindful
good
of
beings.
Here
ends of
the
the
twenty-seventh Lohapasada
and emotion
chapter,
',
in of the the
called
'
the
secrating Con-
Mahavamsa,
compiled
for
the
serene
joy
pious.
That
is,
to
on
the
first and
3rd,
three the
4th,
and of
5th
stories the
those
who
attained
the
stages
path:
See 44 is
so
tap
to 1.
anna,
sakadagamino,
and 13. 17. those
anagamino.
in
verse
33,
the
'Simple
who had
folk' not
puthujjana,
the
converted, un-
even
entered
on
path.
CHAPTER
XXVIII
THE
OBTAINING BUILD
OF THE
THE GREAT
WHEREWITHAL
THUPA
TO
SPENDING
hundred
a
thousand
(pieces of
money)
ceremony
the of
king gifts
the
hereupon
for the
commanded
great
As
and he
splendid
then,
the
great
the and
(
Bodhi-tree.
stone
when
entering
the
city,saw thupa
of pillar
raised
upon
place of
he Then he
(
(future)
glad,
mounted
3
remembered
:
the
old
Great
tradition,
became
he had
thinking
the
I will
build
the
Thupa/
when thus
:
high
terrace
(of
lain
palace),and
he
taken
his
4
repast and
had
thought
was
At
the
me.
conquerIt is the ?
'
ing
not
of
the
Damilas
people
;
oppressed by
a
possible to levy
Thupa
he
thus and how
tax
yet if without
able
to
tax
I build made
Great As
shall
I be the
have
bricks
duly
reflected
devata
arose
a
of the
tumult
parasol observed
among
to
his
;
l :
thought,
when
'
thereupon
was aware
the
gods
Sakka
of
this
he
said
over
Vissakamma
King
Gamani
Go thou prepare commanded the
has
a
been
pondering
from the
2
the
bricks the
for
the
cetiya :
river and
yojana
bricks
city near
Gambhlra8
the
there/
Thus
by Sakka, Vissakamma
in that
a
came
hither
and
prepared
In
bricks
very
place.
there
went
the
;
morning
the
huntsman of the
into
to
the
the
forest with
huntsman
his
in when the
dogs
the he
devata of
an
place appeared
The
and hunter
saw
form
came
iguana.
the
pursued bricks,
and
it,
and
10
(to
place)
he
the
'
when
to
1 1
iguana
the
vanished
there,
4
thought
is
an
Our
king
!
'
intends
build he
Great and
Thupa
here
aid
thereto the
Thereupon
to
went
told
(thisthing).
When
king,
to
'
whom
his
12
See
note Lanka
to
or
18. 24.
to
See
4
note Or
7. 44. '.
To
Anuradhapura.
great thupa
188
Mahavamsa
was on
xxvill.
13
his welcome
words
he, glad at
rich
guerdon.
In
of three
14
sixteen different
direction from at a distance the city, north-easterly on a plain covering yojanasand near Acaravitthigama, there appearednuggets of gold of kaiisas (of land)
15
of the
a sizes;the greatestmeasured span, the least were When the dwellers in the village saw measure. finger's of it into a gold vessel earth full of gold,they put some
and went
16
on
and
told the
king
of this matter.
a
On
at city,
distance
near
of
seven
yojanas,
the further
17
appeared. And
the
the
dwellers
a
in
the
nuggets of copper
into him
and vessel,
Tambapittha, copper there put the village when they had sought
this matter.
18
19
four yojanas direction from the city, south-easterly of Sumanavapi many stones the village near distant, precious appeared. The dwellers in the village put them, mingled and showed with sapphires into a vessel and went and rubies,
In them
to the
a
king.
20
21
22
the city, at a distance of direction from southerly silver appeared in the Ambatthakola-cave.1 eight yojanas, with him, A merchant from the city, taking many waggons in order to bring ginger and so forth from Malaya, had set he brought the for Malaya. Not out far from the cave to a halt and since he had need of wood for whips waggons In he
a
23
went
up
that
mountain.
As
he
saw as
here
branch
of
fruit single
24
and dragged down pitcher, by the the from the (fruit) which was lying on a stone away I will give the first stalk with his knife, and : thinking the (meal) (produce as alms)/ with faith he announced who free And thither four (theras) time. there came were
'
Where the
now
built, afterwards Rajatalena-vihara (Mah. 35. 4) was Ridi-vihara Monastery),to the north-east of Kurunsegala, (Silver
the
in Ceylon,p. 39 Inscriptions Ambatthakola DAVIDS, Ancient ; RHYS
cf. E.
MULLER,
s.v.
Ancient
TURNOUR,
is 55
Mah.
Index, The
=
distance
as
between
Anuradhapura
flies.
and
Ridi-vihara
95 km.
the
crow
190
MaMvamsa
xxvm.
40
seven
yojanas,
above like
to
on
in the
cave
opening
four
on
the
Pelivapikagama-1
had formed in
40
tank,
size
sand,
splendid
in hunter told
gems
small
mill-stone,
When the
a
colour
with
like
his
*
flax-flowers, dogs
have
saw
41
(radiantly)
these he
came
beautiful.
to
king
and rich such
and
him
seen
precious
42
stones
of of that the
such
kind/
The
lord
land,
the
Great
in and
merit,
the Glad
heard,
other
at
on
one
and
the
had
same
day,
for
bricks
(treasures)
he them
to
43
appeared
due reward
the
Thupa.
people,
treasures
heart
bestowed forthwith
upon he that
those had
the
and
appointing
all
as
watchers
brought
up
him.
44
Merit,
careless hundreds
must
man
has
thus ills
heaped
of the mine
with
believing brings
;
heart,
to
of
of
insupportable
results works
body,
of
pass
which of merit
are
happiness
heart.
therefore
one
do
with
believing
Here
ends
the
twenty-eighth
to
chapter,
the Great
called
'
the
Obtaining
the
of
the
wherewithal
build the
Thupa
and
', in
emotion
Mahaof
the
vamsa,
compiled
for
serene
joy
pious.
The of
Pelivapi
is
the
present
The
Vavunik-kulam, river,
Pali-am. of which
little
over
50
miles has
north
Anuradhapura.
the
the
damming-up
Ancient
formed
tank,
is
called
PARKER,
Ceylon,
pp.
256,
365-366.
CHAPTEE
XXIX
THE
BEGINNING
OF
THE
GREAT
THUPA
WHEN he of
the the
wherewithal
work of the
to
build
was
thus
on
brought
the
together day
had
began
the
Great when
Thupa
the
to
full-moon
Vesakha,1
he land had had
Visakha-constellation
take for away the it the
stone
appeared.
the
a
ordered
the
to
pillar 2
out to
lord
of of
place
make
thupa
in
to
dug
every
depth
seven
cubits2 he
firm
way.
Round did he
stones
cause
that
to
commanded with
his
soldiers
bring
then
hither
be
broken
hammers,
the
wrong
and
did command
he,
4
having knowledge
that the crushed
of the
to
right and
make whose
to
ways,
stone,
the feet
ground
were
firmer, be stamped
bound with
down
The
by great elephants
fine
leather.
ever
clay
the
that
is
be
found
on
the
spot, for
moist, where
heavenly Ganga
(upon the
because
earth
3)
6
(on
ness,
a
(
of its finethe
asavas,
butter-clay/
the be
Samaneras from
over
overcome
brought
that then this the be
clay hither
spread
the
over
place.
The
stones
king
and
cement
commanded
that
clay
laid
layer of
these
a
bricks
over
over
clay,over
this
5 a
rough
of
and
over
cinnabar,4 and
network
was
iron, and
this
9
sweet-scented
marumba
that
brought
by
the
samaneras
See The
note
to
1. 12. sattahatthe to is
reading (note
is not
undoubtedly
says: the Tika
the has
correct sata.
ont.
WIJESINHA.
this
passage)
It also
That,
however,
3
the
is that
case.
reads flows
satta.
The and
idea
the
Ganga
'
through
'.
the
atmosphere,
the
earth
4
underworld. is
'
Kuruvinda
Marumba
ruby
'
or
cinnabar
is used
(C.V.V.14.5; (living-cell). At
kathala,
35.4;
VI.
3.
8) for besprinkling
2
damp
33)
parivena
Pacittiya marumba,
X.
(Vin.
Pit.
iv,
one
p.
pasana, another.
sakkhara,
valika
follow
upon
192 from
10
Mahdvamsa
the
xxix.
10
mand
1 1 work
Himalaya. Over this did the lord of the land comOver the layer of mounto laymountain-crystal. them tain-crystal he had stones spread; everywhere throughout the did the claycalled butter-clay serve (ascement). With
the dissolved kapittha-tree,1
over
over
resin of
12
in
sweetened
a
water,2
of copper in
the
the
stones
sheet
eightinches
13
thick,and
this,with
arsenic
dissolved
seven
the
thus
preparation
to be
upon
the
Thupa
the
built,
of the the
day of
the
brighthalf
assembly of
*
brotherhood
of
15
lay the
16
foundation-stone
brotherhood
of the Great
Cetiya.
Then
a
let
our
assemble
festival
people ;
peoplein
to-morrow
festal array,
to
17
so
forth, come
will be built/
He
18
entrusted ministers
with
the with
cetiya. Commanded
deep
reverence
by
for the The
Sage (Buddha),adorned
whole
also city and
the
19
in place
manifold
ways.
the streets
in the
leading thither
20
did On
manifold
four
ways.
the
gates
and and
of
the
citymany
foods
barbers
and
servants
for the
21
bath
for
likewise
and
fragrant
22
23 24
the king (place there)for his (did) in the people's welfare. Taking, he v\ ho rejoiced good, people's accordingto their wish, the things thus put before them, to the placeof the thupa. went townsfolk and country-people The king supported, in order of their rank, by many flowers
as
Feronia
Elephantum.
is translated
Rasodaka
cocoanut
3
The
of the 'water by TURNOUR '. The Tika givesno explanation. Tika, followingthe Atthakatha, gives their names,
small
red
Visakha
and
Sirideva.
xxix.
36
The
Beginningof the
Great
Thitpa
193
clothed like to celestial nymphs, dancers richly by many attended being-clad in his state-raiment, (he himself) by 25 while around him crashed the music forty thousand men, the king of the gods; in the evening 26 as (he being)glorious had knowledge of fit and unfit placeswent he who to the the people (with the place of the Great Thupa,1 delighting sight). A thousand and eightwaggon-loadsof clothes rolled 27 in bundles did the king place in the midst, and on the four sides he had clothes heaped up in abundance; and moreover 28 he had honey,clarified butter, sugar and so forth set (there) for the festival. From
come
various
bhikkhus of the
29
hither; what
from
speak
coming
2
brotherhood
sand bhikkhus
upon
the island ?
With
came
thoueighty
the thera
30
regionof Rajagaha
a
Indagutta,the head
came
great school.
with
From twelve
31 Isipatana3
the
great thera
to the
Dhammasena the
thousand
bhikkhus
With
placeof
cetiya.
hither the great thera
From the Mahavana
6
32 33
came
the
thera From
bhikkhus.
thera
in 34
thirty From the Dakkhinagiri in UjjenI8 came bhikkhus. 35 Urusamgharakkhita with fortythousand ascetics.
a
the
Urudhammarakkhita
hundred
and
sixtythousand
bhikkhus
came
the
36
We
should
rather
expect Mahathupapatitthanatthanam
'he went
to the
thanavicakkhano: should
2
be
of
Great
Thupa
Cf. note
A
park
and
afterwards had
monastery
BarSnasi M.V.
(Benares)
I. 6. 6 foil.
where
*
the Buddha
preached
Also M.V.
other
6
places.
note note
to 4. 17 ; M.V.
to
5. 39 ; 13. 5.
Notice
that
theras
in 33, 34,
35, contain
the words
o
buddha,
dhamma,
samgha.
194
thera
37 38
Mahdvamsa
named Mittinna from
"/
xxix.
37
the Asokarama
came
in
Pupphapura.1
brin^m""
O O
" "
From with
country
and from
the
thera
Uttinna
hundred
came
eightythousand
bhikkhus.
The
wise Mahadeva
39
and
sixtythousand
came
hundred the
city
with
of the Yonas
40
thousand thirty
bhikkhus.
dwellingby
came
the
road
thousand sixty
The
Bodhi-
manda-vihara thera
with
came
great
Candagutta
from the As
country
43
with
came
eightythousand
for the
met
44
bhikkhus.
dwelling in
strict account all these had
togetherfrom
down
met
as
side, no
has
been
handed who
were
by
the
ancients.
Among
bhikkhus
overcome
in that
46
These
placeof
47
the
space
for the
king.
and (space)
saw7
I.e.
Pataliputta ;
is the is
name
see
For
Asokarama, cf.
or
5. 80.
Pallava
Skt. Pallava in
Bhoggam
often
3
perhaps 'fief;
in the land of the
rajabhoggam
i.e. the in
D.I.
elsewhere.
Alexandria founded
Yonas, ARRIAN,
note.
town
by
the Kabul.
Macedonian See
king
Paropanisadaenear
4
Anabasis
of 22.
the
I. e.
A
Vindhya.
Gotama
monastery
note Tika
the
bodhimanda
at
Bodhgaya,
the
placewhere
6
attained to
Buddhaship.
See The
to 12. 31.
peculiar giveshere (from the Atthakatha) the following middle the the circle he into of 'As the king steps explanation: is to come wish : if his work to a happy issue the following expresses
7
then, as
west
theras
who
bear
the
name
of the
Buddha,
his doctrine
order,take
the north
their
places on
thera with bhikkhu
the
sides ; but
side
the
of
Ananda,
thd Buddha's
beloved
disciple.Each
shall be surrounded
by
xxix.
58
Uie
195
the
brotherhood
standing thus
he
them greeted
with believing heart; when he had joyfully, them fragrant flowers and had passedround
then
dulyoffered
48
he went into the midst,to the consecrated turningto the left,1 placeof the filledpitcher'. Then forthwith uplifted by the 49 of pure gladness he, devoted to the welfare of the power that the pure turning staff (fortracing beings,commanded
'
the circular of
a
made boundary),
a
of silver and
secured
a
(by means
of
50
rope) to
minister
noble
resolved to allot
to walk
(withthe turning staff in his hands)alongthe ground already prepared.3 But the great thera of wondrous 52 named the far-seeing, Siddhattha, preventedthe king power
as so
he did this.
great a
;
our
build 53
upon
thupa be
finished
moreover,
great
great dimension.
from
reverence
In
toward made
and agreement with the brotherhood the thera,the king, though he would
55
moderate
(thethupa) great, hearkened to the thera's allot a did, accordingto the thera's instruction, for the cetiya, stones that the (foundation) space
of silver and of golddid he,with eight(vases) and in a circle around these he midst,
vases,
56
might
be laid.
57 58
new eight
and
likewise
(around
troop of companions of
theras in and above
v.
the
same
name.
The
is fulfilled.'
The
questionand
33
pp. 383-384
their
(cf.Tika,
Mahadhainma-
rakkhita,Mahasamgharakkhita, and
1 2
Katvana
Tika:
to 18. 36.
ti, janehi
was
mangalasammatehi
ditatta
was
ca
liked that
the
people
because
he
adorned
with
ments orna-
as festival,
new
garments (notwashed
and before)
3
so
And
to
draw,
in this way,
the circular
o
196
each of bricks
60
MaMvamsa
xxix.
59
59
and eightgarments.1 Eight splendid a hundred these) each one apart by itself.2 When did he lay, he then had
an
commanded
to take
one
officialchosen
adorned
of
them, he laid
many
the
east
61
prepared with
62
63
64
solemnly, upon the had been offered on When that spot an jasmine-flowers4 And he caused the other seven to pass. earthquakecame ministers and ceremonies to be laid by seven (of (stones) (other) Thus to be carried out. he caused the stones consecration) the day appointed, the fifteenth uposatha day to be laid on half of the month in the bright Asalha. When he had reverentially greetedthe four great theras
who four
were
stone,3
free from
the
asavas,
who he
stood had
there
at
the them
65
with
when
course,
honoured
north-east thera
66
side,and
when
he
free who was Piyadassi, place near him. Exalting the thera preached the true doctrine thera
was
from
the
asavas,
he
took there
festival ceremony
to him
;
the
preachingof
67
68
people. The conversion of and (yet) thousand to the true doctrine took place, forty forty thousand (more)became partakersin the fruit of entering became into the path of salvation.5 A thousand lay-folk even
the
1
rich in
for blessing
According to
is to be the
a
the Tika
as
from
atthuttare
so
to visum pan
a
visum 58
read
ONE
sentence,
be deleted.
with
stop after
case we
(in
in
d) in
edition should
In this
must
add
58c,d
second the
parivariya
translation and
the
meaning:
in
a
Maying
around these he
(them),'and
would
be 'and
vases,
circle around
eightsplendidbricks did (layingin a circle around) each of apart by itself, and eightgarments '. them a hundred Namely East, NE., N., and so forth. The stones are called of gold. as they were pavara 8 had mixed the clay According to the Tika the thera Mittasena eight new
and
(gandhapinda),
4
the
thera
Jayasena
both
had
names
poured
for
the
water
on
it.
Jati
and
sumana
are
Jasminum
grandiSee
notes
florum.
5
They
attained 33.
to
the
first
stage
of
sanctification.
to 1. 32 and
CHAPTER
XXX
THE
MAKING
OF
THE
RELIC-CHAMBER
WHEN
the
greeted reverentially
'
the
whole
brotherhood
2
them, saying
from then me/
Even
till the
cetiya is
would
finished
not
accept
;
a
The
brotherhood
consent
when week
by degrees l prayed
acceptance, for
he
set
one
(them by
to
accept)
half
for
week,
this from
the
of the
bhikkhus.
When
had in
obtained
them
pavilions thupa
and
up
the
place of
to
the the
commanded Then
week,
lavish leave
5
gifts to
brotherhood.
the brotherhood
depart.
that the drums all them
Thereupon commanding
the master-builders
five hundred.
'
be beaten
he
called
together
And wilt I
one
with of make
speed ;
answered
in number the
' (
they
on
were
king, Taking
sand
his
7
asking day/
The
How
thou
use
(the thupa) ?
waggon
hundred
one
workmen
will
one
-load
of
in
Thereon
one
they
less
four
offered
and
(to
with)
8
half
ammanas
less and
3
yet
half
again,
(at
with) two
did the
of sand. Then
an
'
These
master-builders
shrewd
king reject.
said and
to
experienced and
I shall
master-
builder
the
king
when
pound
(the sand)
it crushed sand/ in
in
mortar,
mill and
then,
will
it is
ammana
sifted, have
the
(thus
limiting
use
use) one
invitation
sand Tika do
so
(only)of
and tell
more.
I.e.
The
his
more
of too
against king
would
the
say
durability
to
a
of the
thupa.
builder
sand
3
Therefore
*
the
the
master-
Shouldst be
cetiya
and
be like
heap
of pure
and As
a
would
measure
as
covered of 11
with
grass The
capacity.
dona.
Abhidhanappadipika
dona is 64
the
ammana
The Coins
pasata, of Ceylon,
i.e. handfuls.
pp.
Cf. RHYS
DAVIDS,
Ancient
and
Measures
17-18.
xxx.
23
The
on
Making of the
the lord
Relic-Chamber
of the
199
And
was
these words
land, whose
'
10
with the thought : There Indra's, consented, be no such nor thing on our cetiya/and grass any questionedhim saying: fln what form wilt thou make ?' At that moment cetiya When the him. possessed) bowl filled with
on
like to
11
into
a
(and
12
golden
and
rose
water, he
in his hand
let
up
13
it fall
the surface
a
of the water.
great bubble
like unto
will crystal. He said: 'Thus I make it.' And the king bestowed him 14 on well-pleased of money) and a pair of garments worth a thousand (pieces ornamented shoes and twelve thousand kahapanas. bricks without shall I have the How laying 1 5 transported
'
half -globe of
burdens
the
in
the
16
of this
they brought
and cetiya
one
night
When the
after
night
bricks
to the
down
there,always as many
heard he made At it known every
(
sufficed for
day.
on
king
And
work
17
thupa.
Work
here without
wage/
gate he commanded
many
place 18
sixteen hundred
different
thousand
kahapanas, very
garments,
foods and drink withal,19 ornaments, solid and liquid and so forth, as well as the five fragrant flowers, sugar
perfumesfor
'
Let
them
as
they
will
when
they
the
have
20
laboured
they
who
a
will/
allotted work-people
A
Observing (thewages).
to take
this command
king's
the 2 1
bhikkhu took
to
wished
of
part in
the
of building had
thupa
went
lump
himself
prepared,2
he received
23 design.
deceivingthe king's22
So
soon as
workman.
note
to 18. 24.
Thus
it is the
god
who
acts
and
speaks
through
2
medium kneaded
a
I.e. had
mixed.
As
he received work of
no
wage
for this he
hoped
3
to have
share
in the brick
meritorious
He
recognizedthe
by
200
A
Mahavamsa
afterwards
xxx.
24
he
24 25
there. the king When arose dispute the workman. and questioned came
'
heard this
with flowers in the one Sire, to give me a piece of claywith know so (just much) whether he land
or
hand the be
a
the bhikkhus
are
can
used
other; but I
bhikkhu
from
only
another
26 to
When show
ascetic who
him
to the
had
he
overseer
of
The
2 7 The
other showed
three
overseer
and
he told the
clay. king.
28
with jasmine-blossoms pitchers placedin the the sacred Bodhi-tree and bade the overseer give bhikkhu.2 When the bhikkhu, observing nothing,
overseer
offered Then
them, the
told him
this while
he
yet stood
there.
29
thera
in livingin Piyahgalla
to
a
also wished
30
take
and when
who
was
kinsman
a
he had
made
hither and
used
there)
31
after
the having learned (the exact measure) he, deceiving This man laid it on work-people, gave it to the workman. and a quarrel its place arose (inthe thupa), (on this matter). When the
32
king
knew
'
this
he
asked
Is
it
recognizethe
33
brick ?
answered
'
the
king :
made the
'
the
Dost
thou
know bs
he
answered
Yes/
overseer
So
that
near
he
34
might
When
the had
king placedan
thereby come
him.
to know
him
he
35
king'sconsent, and visited the thera in the and spoke with him ; and when he had Katthahala-parivena whither learned the day of the thera's departureand the place
went, with
the
1
The
workman
was
personage Colombo
more
The
edition has ti
ti
instead
of
devati
pana Mah.
Thupavamsa
nevasiko passage.
2
also
: (p. 6135;
ayam See
agantuko
ed., note
ayam to this
ettakam
janami. might
be
So
that
the
bhikkhu
rewarded
in this way
on
the
thupa.
xxx.
45
The
201
thee to
he
was
and going,
am
going with
that 36 he told the king all. The king commanded thy village/ of money), and a a pairof garments, worth a thousand (pieces he had (also) red coverlet he given to him, and when 3 7 costly and commanded to give him thingsused by samanas, many l he laid his command sugar and a nail of fragrantoil withal,
upon
him.
went
He
with
the
thera, and
sit down he had
s:ghthe
there had
was
made
the thera
in was Piyafigallaka where in a cool shady place givenhim sugar- water and when and
38
39
rubbed he
fragrantoil
necessaries I
put sandals
'
upon
them,
who
two
him house
the
2
: (saying)
For
the
thera the
40
visits my
have
son.
brought these
with
me,
but
give to thee now/ with these words to 41 When he had given those (necessaries)3 the thera who, after receiving them, set out again upon his told him, in the king's he, taking leave of (thethera}, journey,
garments for my words, the king'scommand.
While who the Great
All this do I
Thupa
who
42
heaven. in the
inner
faith 43
women,
who
since
hire,44
when
thupa was
of 'about
finished, upon
they
had
formerly 45
measure
to CLOUGH
2
who
capacity(Abhidh. 1057),Sinh. nseliya, according three pintswine-measure '. given in a family to a bhikkhu -aga is the name
house the to receive
alms, and
enters
thus
into confidential
3
relations with
be understood in
family.
Tika the there of
After It is
te must
parikkhare.
the look
verses
42-50.
have
indeed
verse
any
explanation of monastic a legend (cf. 43),which may have the interpolation case
no
is
be old.
It is found
in and
all the
groups
of MSS.
and in
also in the
the
Kambodian
vamsa.
Mahavamsa,
again
Thupa-
202
Mahavamsa
when
xxx.
46
done, and
their
46
reverence
of the reward they both became aware to deeds, they took fragrant flowers and came the thupa with to offerings. When they
of do had
offered the At
47
did
homage
will pay
to
the
cetiya.
in
this
moment
the
thera
Mahasiva
who
dwelt
Bhativanka
(with
the Great
the
thought): 'I
As
women
homage
by
night to
48
Thupa/
those there
saw sattapanna-tree,1
and
at
was
without
self himletting
be
seen
gazing
their
marvellous asked
dour, splenthem
:
he,
49
'
their
adoration
ended the
Here
the
bodies ; what
50
done
that
'
gods ?
The
by
them
in the
The
three
terraces
to sink down
so
soon
they
were
bricks,making
times Then did
them
equal to
the
52
they were
assembled
laid.
53
assemblyof
bhikkhus
of bhikkhus.
The
Eighty thousand
hood, the brotherand gifts had with
and when
54
he had
paid homage
he asked The
not
reverentially greetedthem
down that of the the bricks.
may
the
reason
of the
sinking
order
answered:
'In this
thupa
the
of itself was
power,
55
done
by
bhikkhus
of miraculous
56
they will do it no more, make no alteration and finish the Great Thupa/ When the king heard this, glad at heart he caused the work
on
the
thupa
to
be continued.
For
the ten
flower-terraces 3
Skt. saptaparna,
Itseems
Alstonia
scholaris.
means
thatpupphadhana
pasada)
286. which Architectural
concentric
galleries
proper.
(the
so-called
form
of the p.
thupa
27 ;
SMITHER,
Ancient
3
Remains,
Anurddhapura,
PARKER,
Ceylon,p.
pupphadhanattayani
on
which
had
sunk
a,nd
the
that remained
the surface.
xxx.
71
TJie
of
Making of the
Relic-Cliamler
The brotherhood
203
of 57
ten
kotis
bricks
(were used).
bhikkhus
and Sumana, Uttara charged the two samaneras, saying1: Bring-hither,to (make) the relic-chamber in the fat-coloured stones/1 And cetiya, they set out for (the land
'
58
of)the
Northern
Kurus
and
broughtfrom
thence
six massive
59
measuring eighty cubits in length and breadth,bright as the sun, eight inches thick and like to When ganthi blossoms.3 they had laid one on the flowerin the middle and had disposedfour (others) terrace the on in the fashion of a chest, the (theras) four sides, of wondrous to serve the sixth, the as a lid, might placed (afterwards) upon east side, making it invisible.
stones
fat-coloured
60
61
In the midst
tree
of the relic-chamber
the
a king placed
bodhia
62 63
made
of
way.
;
It had
stem
the of
root, made
had made and
of
64
sapphire.The
with leaves
stem
made
perfectly pure
withered of coral. festoons
rows
adorned
made
and
fruits of
stem
65
of fourfooted of
a
beasts and
of
66
Over of
it, on
there. of
the
border and
network here
bells pearl
chains the
beautiful
bands
and
From
four
of the canopy
67
hung
stars
bundles
thousand and
pearl strings each worth nine hundred of money). The and figuresof sun, moon (pieces made different lotus-flowers, of jewels, were
the canopy.
A
68
fastened
to
thousand
and
eight pieces of
hung
to the
69
of varied
ran was
were colours,
the bodhi-tree
vedika made
made of
of all manner
70
pavement within
great myrobalanflowers
71
pearls.5
Rows of
vases
(some)empty
2
and
1
3
to
1. 39.
See note
Tika Cf.
puppha.
nicea
4
5
bandhujlvakaPentapetesphoe-
.).
204
made of all kinds
were
Mahavamsa
of
xxx.
72
fragrant water
72
four the
kinds
of
bodhi-tree.
On
east
throne, the
of the
cost
bodhi-tree,he placed a
73
of this image were image seated. The body and members duly1 of different colours, made of jewels shining. Mahabeautifully brahma stood there
74 75
holding a
silver
parasoland
Sakka
carry-
ing out
with and
the consecration
with the
hand,2and
Paricasikha shell, Vijayuttara Kalanaga with the dancing-girls, with his and train elephants thrones east (other) other the
Mara
76
of followers.
were
to the
of each
77
seven
the heavens.
the with
thus,
so
that
bodhi-tree
one
at
head, a couch
also placed,
worth
jewelsof
seven
78
duringthe
and
them
to
79
dulyhere depict
of
prayer
1
and the whites of the eyes According to the Tika the finger-nails made of mountain-crystal, the palms of the hands, soles of the were and the lipsof red coral, the eyebrows and pupilsof sapphire, feet, the teeth
2
of diamonds, "c.
Pancasikho
is the Sakka
poet
and
691)
on
in Jat. III.
often.
Thegandhabba
inib ban
a-
(Skt.gandharva)
8
the
heavenly musicians.
of the
To
death-bed
as
Buddha,
the
the
par
In the
vv.
78-87 and
scenes
the Buddha's
d h i
obsequies,are
77
enumerated.
especially MahapariBuddhism,
414 foil. ;
(OLDENBERG,
Jatakas, i, p.
Vin. Pit.
i,p.
Jatakanidana
(FAUSBOLL,
nibbanasutta
and
p. 21
and foil.);
foil. ; RHYS
DAVIDS,
Manual
xi, p. 44 foil.,
S.B.B. foil.
71
foil.).KERN,
as
of
Indian
such
scenes
the Art
subjectof
Greco-
bas-reliefs in buddhistic
monuments
FOUCHER,
Buddk
Bouddkique, i, p.
which
GRUNWEDEL,
5
The
near
time
immediately after
and the other
sambodhi
the Buddha
spent
6
the bodhi-tree.
Brahma
gods
entreat
the
Buddha
to
preach
the
discovered
truth
to the world.
206
mala
85
Mahdvamsa
and the
xxx.
85
(naga-king)Apalala,1the meeting
with
the
the dish
of
86
pork,4and
of the two
of the pure of
the of the feet by the thera,7 gods and men, the revering the funeral the quenchingof the fire,9 burning (ofthe body 8), of the relics by 87-rites in that very place and the distributing
Dona.10
88
Jatakas
also which
are
noble
in abundance.
12 Vessantarajataka
SPENCE
HARDY,
Introduction 507
rhistoiredu
Bouddhisme
Indien, p. 377
brahman the
FOUCHER,
tribe
I. L, pp.
foil.,
544
2
3
foil.
TURNOUR Three
:
'
the
Parayana
end
of
(at Rajagaha).'
resolves time. An
to
months
at
before the
Buddha
enter
into
the
nibbana
appointed
by the
to him the his
earthquake
the sukahis death. the Malla
The
add
dish
ava"
set before
the
Buddha
smith
Cunda"
ram
5
brought on
were
The
garments
As Ananda
presented
put
them
on
by
Pukkusa.
body
radiated
unearthly
a
sign of
from
approaching death.
become clear
of the Kakuttha-river it
a
by
miracle
when
7
Ananda None
can
takes
draught
in
the
on
8
body
his way
of the from
which is still
thera
Mahakassapa
pyre three to
to pay
last honours
to the dead
Master.
After Mahakassapa
has then
has
passedround
master's of itself. heaven
times, them,
and
uncovered
into flame
the
feet and
homage
the pyre
9
breaks
Streams
In order
of water
fall from
and
the extinguish
to burn
fire.
over fiercely
10
to settle the
disputethat
the
threatens Dona
the
remains
of
the
Buddha
brahman
divides
them
into
Buddha's
former
existences
foil. foil.
The He has
a
The
Jataka,
is the the
ed.
FAUSBOLL,
last
vi, p. 479
Hence this
existence
passes
as
Vessantara this
Buddha's
earthly existence.
from
into
Tusita- heaven.
jataka
On
L I., pp.
283-285.
jataka
in in
series of detached
singlescenes,
Open Ceylon
monastery Chiefs, p.
Ceylon,see COOMARASWAMY,
(reprintedfrom
Kandyan
6 foil,
Observer,Feb.
17, 1905).
xxx.
97
TJie
207
like
he
commanded
in
manner
(that which
heaven
At
even
befell
beginning at
from descent)
the Tusita-
to the Bodhi-throne.1
the four
four Great
stood
the
of) 89 (figures
and the of 90
the
gods thirty-three
the
and
chiefs twenty-eight
the
yakkhas; but above these3 devas raisingtheir folded filled with flowers likewise, hands, vases dancing devatas and 91 of music, devas with mirrors in devatas playinginstruments devas also bearing flowers and their hands, and branches,
devas with lotus-blossoms of many and
so
forth
and
and and
92
other devas
kinds,rows
4
of arches of
(rows)of
also devas five cubits dukula
was
dhammacakkas
rows
93
pitchers
made of 94
fibres
wicks of
in each
in the four
stones
and of
pearlsand
great gem glimmering heaps of gold, precious diamonds were placed. On the wall 96 zig-zag sparkling
for the relic-chamber. all the
made
fat-coloured stones
adornment
to
lines5
The in the
were
traced, servingas
commanded them
king
97
make
figureshere
chanting en-
relic-chamber
of massive
wrought gold.6
FOUCHER,
The four
foil.
The
tusita
are
class
of
gods,
2
Skt. tusita.
guardiansof the world (lokapala) : Dhatarattha in the in the E. N., Virulha in the S.,Virupakkha in the W., and Vessavana this tatopari belongs to According to the Tika's interpretation The in Mah. ed. should then be comma arijalipaggaha deva. moved accordingly.
a 4
The
'
whet
1 of the
symbol
Tika and the
of the
Buddhists.
Originally perhaps a sun-symbol. See SEWELL, Vijjulata, literally'lightnings'. The lata vijjukumariyo, by meghalata nama
5
J.R.A.S.
1886, p.
from
392.
explainsvijjuquotes
the
Porana
(cf.GEIGER,
meghalata
caturo
6
and
passe
Mah.,
45)
The
Tika
goes
may
perhaps
doubt
the truth
of the
description. GEIGER,
I. L, p. 35.
208
Mahavamsa
XXX.
98
98
The
great
thera
Indagutta,
the
most
who
was
gifted
directed
with here
the all
six
supernormal
99
faculties,
over
wise,
this
was
this,
being
hindrance wondrous the
set
the
work. of
the
All wondrous
completed
of wondrous the
without
by
power
reason
power
king,
power
the of
of
the
devatas,
and
the
holy
If the has
(theras).
wise done the he abroad and if will he he
man
100
who
is the the
adorned blessed
with
the
good
the
gifts supremely
of
faith,
homage highest
was
to
(Buddha)
who is his the herein
:
venerable,
while
of
world,
and had then in
freed
from that of
ness, dark-
yet
living,
who
to
relics,
salvation is
were
dispersed
;
by
him
view
kind man-
then
understands
the in his
equal
even
merit
;
then
indeed
reverence
relics lifetime.
of
the
Sage
as
the
blessed
(Buddha
himself)
Here
ends
the
thirtieth
chapter,
Mahavamsa,
called
'
The
Making
for the
of
the
Relic-Chamber
', in
emotion
the the
compiled
serene
joy
and
of
pious.
CHAPTEK
XXXI
THE
ENSHRINING
OF
THE
RELICS
WHEX
the
subduer he
:
of
foes about
on
had
an
completed the
work
on
the
relic-chamber
and
brought
*
assembly
enshrine
of the
brotherhood
been
com-
spoke
thus
me;
The
work
the
relic-chamber
has
pleted by
venerable
to-morrow
I will
the
relics; do
When the
you,
take sirs,
thought
he
went
relics/
into
great
the
king
had
spoken
thus
the
who
city;
but
assembly
gifted
of bhikkhus
;
sought
bhikkhu
should
bring
4
relics hither
with
and
they charged
six
the
ascetic
named
Sonuttara,
dwelt
in the
the
Puja-parivena,with
Now
once,
bringing
was
the
when the
wandering world^
on
(on
of
the the
earth) Ganges
buddha
for
a
the
the
Nanduttara
invited
the
with
Samthe
and
brotherhood.
with thera the
the
landing-place Payaga1
embarked
on a
the
Master,
then the
brotherhood,
of
the
six
Bhaddaji
in
wondrous
might,
there
to
a
endowed
supernormal
whirled
faculties, saw
place where
bhikkhus
'
the The
water
eddies, he
said
the
golden
palace measuring
I
was
twenty-five yojanas
is
to not
'
wherein
sunk
I dwelt, when
When the
9
here.
water
Ganges
who Master
to
comes
it here believe
it whirls
The Master.
bhikkhus,
The
did
him,
the
to
the the in
11 10
said:
show
rose,
Banish
power
doubts
of
even
bhikkhus/ the
Brahma-
Then
his
command
world
he
by
his
wondrous
might,
and Yamuna of M.'s
into the
Skt.
Prayaga,
2. 4 ; 62
the
holy place
3. 7. 37. There
where
Ganga
unite.
Dip.
is also
mention p. 7 ;
palace,
Mah.,
Mah.
p.
(=
Culavamsa
12, ed.
Col.,
TUKNOUK,
239).
P
210
air and had
12
Maliavamsci
when the
at he, floating
xxxi.
12
height
even
of
seven
talas,
upon
Dussa-thupa l in the Brahma-world outstretched hand, and had brought it hither and
taken he put people, he it
his it to
shown it
the
13
again in
the
placeto
power,
2
which
belonged.
Ganges,
raised it it
Thereon and
into the
he
14
the palaceby its spire with seizing high up, and when he had shown it to fall again there (to its place). When
uttara
some saw
people he let
brahman NandI
this have
wonder
the
he
power
uttered
to
the
wish:
'May
(at
time)
in
this but asked
procure
others
15
hold
their
brotherhood
lay
16
was
charge
the
Sonuttara3 shall I
although he
bring a relic?'
brotherhood
sixteen years
old.
he
and brotherhood,
:
thereupon
of the
the
Lying
on
his deathbed
the Master
his relics he
18
19
might bring to pass salvation for the world, the king of the gods : O king of the spoke thus to (Sakka) adored relics one dona., gods, of the eightdonas 4 of my bodily (first) by the Koliyasin Ramagama,5 shall be borne thence
kingdom
of the nagas it and when it will be adored
to
even
into the
there
by
the nagas
20
enshrined
in the Great
be The
and most wise thera Mahakassapa6 then, mindful far-seeing division of the relics by king Dhammasoka, of the (coming)
1884, p. 113). (J.P.T.S. of thupika see Attanagaluvamsa,ed. ALWIS, IX. meaning 7 (p.3224):cetiyasise kiritam thupikam viya kanakamayam the summit of the on ca y ojetva 'having fastened a golden thupika cetiyalike a diadem '.
2
Dathavamsa
35
For the
Who
had
in
fact
been
that
same
Nanduttara
in
former
existence.
4
certain
measure
of
capacity.
See
17.
51.
For
the
passage
Sakyas. The Rohini was In the Sumangala-Vilasini(ed. them. the boundary river between of the Koliyas RHYS and DAVIDS CARPENTER, i,p. 262) the capital is called Vyagghapajja. of the First death and head The samghathera after the Buddha's
to the
6
Council.
xxxi.
32
The
of the Enshrining
Eelics
of relics
211
near 21 placed1 of king-Ajatasattu as he brought22 Rajagaha (the capital) thither the seven donas of relics ; but the dona in Ramagama a
had
he did not
intention.
When
the 23
king
Dhammasoka the
the
great treasure
of relics he
thought
brought thither. But, bethinking 24 them that it was be the destined by enshrined Conqueror to in the Great Thupa, the ascetics2 of that time who had the asavas from overcome prevented Dhammasoka (doing) this. The thupa in Rajagama, that was built on the shore 25 of the Ganges, was of the destroyedby the overflowing and 26 Ganges, but the urn with the relics reached the ocean
there stayed of the in the twofold divided waters
3
to have
eighthdona
also
on
throne
made
27
many-colouredgems
nagas
saw
surrounded
urn
by
rays
to
of the
light. When
the
Manjerika of the
thither had with
ten
went
and
kotis
brought the
thupa made 29 of all kinds of jewels and a temple above the (thupa)also, he, filled with zeal,brought offerings together continually, with the (other) nagas. There a strong guard is set; go thou 30
a
meanwhile, offerings
had
built
them
and
bringthe
he
t
of the
brotherhood
he, 31
the 32
answering
over
Yes
(Ishall
when
withdrew so)',
must set
to his cell
*
pondering
the
time
forth.
To-morrow
in the
to be
city, by
which
all that
The employed pleonastically. of the sentence be explained, I have indicated construction as may thus : Mahakassapathero by the punctuationin the edition, mahadhatunidhanam karayi, Rajagahassa ran no Ajatasattuno samante (tarn nidhanam) karapento.
Karapento
at21c
Tika
tattha
khinasava bhikkhu.
sea
yati
to
ti
tasmim
Dhammaso-
kakale
3
khinasava waters
:
*
The
of the Where
divide
receive
the
urn.
TURNOUR'S
translation
the stream
of the
givethe
P
Ganges rightsense.
in two spreads
opposite
212
must
Mahavamsa
be done the is set road forth. He
xxxi.
33
33
commanded
l
that
cityand
34
leading hither
in festal
be
adorned carefully
Vissakamma
the whole
35
to be adorned
ways.
At
the
gates
so
of the
citythe
ruler of
use
had
ments, gar-
food and
36
forth
placedfor the
On
the
fifteenth
uposatha-day in
on
the
versed
of the
his
women
ornaments, surrounded
and his warriors in
side
by
complete armour,
car 3
38
adorned by variously
his of state and
2
all his
that
drawn
by
pace
39
Sindhu-horses and
stood
there,making the
the white the
beautiful
4
elephantKandula
under from
parasol.
car
40
thousand
eightbeautiful
women
women
with city,
the adornment
41 4 2
even
as
the
and,
sand thou-
many
as
many
various
A
43
eightboys
asunder
him, bearing
seemed
as
it
44
of sounds from various by all manner noise of elephants, of music, by the (thundering) instruments the renowned horses and chariots, king shone forth,as he in glory like to the king of went to the Mahameghavana,
were
rent5
the
45
gods
of
he
When
ascetic Sonuttara,
music
Mahavihara.
noise
1
in
the
city7 as
the
king began
I.e. to the
Suratha,
See note
To The
accordingto
to 23. 71.
the
Tika, is
used
here
as
mangalaratha
elsewhere.
whole
See
Pure
is not
(TURKOUR)
but
nagaramhi
(Tika).
214
When thence
58
Mahavamsa
the uncle
xxxi.
57
57
perceivedthat
he The the
the
relics had
thera
f
been
taken
are no
by
his
nephew,
said to the
There
relics with
me/
the
said then
the
naga-
king :
59
'
Give
thou
And took
to content
by
him
some
other
went
'
means
the
serpent-king
the
thera
with
and
:
to
the
60
and cetiya
described it to him
many gems in
See, O
ways
adorned
61
with
many but
nobly built
the whole
temple for
the
cetiya.Nay,
are
all the
jewelsin
as
not of
so
great worth
the stone-slab 1 at
63
64
Truly it beseems thee not, O bhikkhu, to bear away the relics of high honour to a placeof lesser honour/ from a place there is no of the truth2 among Verily, understanding It were indeed to bear away the relics to fitting you nagas. of the truth. The a place where there is understanding Tathagatasare born for deliverance from the samsara, and
'
thereon
65
therefore intent,
will
the
relics. This
the relics;
about
enshrining
delay/
him
66
The
naga
said
and
If thou
Three the
arm,
shalt
times thera and
the
take them
67
go/
did
the thera
repeat
this
68
down
the
throat
of the
'
nephew
took
the
urn
with
the
69
Stay, naga ! he plunged into the earth and rose up (outof it) in his cell. The naga-king thought: The bhikkhu is gone hence,
'
'Moonstones'.
in Ceylon lie semicircular stairwayof buildings with gracefullyexecuted ornaments, the so-called SMITHER, Anurddhapura, p. 58, with. Plate LV1I,
end
of the
in
the
concrete form
sense
of
the of of
four
holy
the
which
the
foundation the
cause
Buddhist
the
Truths
cessation of sorrow,
sorrow,
the cessation of
sorrow.
Samyutta,
v.
420.
xxxi.
83
The
Enshriningof the
he sent to his the
Belies
to
215
deceived
by us/
and
nephew
not
bring the
urn
relics in his 70
71
(again). But
uncle.
the nagawho
We
are
and betrayed/
But
in crowds
lamented
likewise.
of the
togetherwith
to the
over
the
(thera).
and
brotherhood
made
of the
73
the
carrying away
a
left them the brotherhood compassion and brought at this they went rejoicing
few
of 74
treasures
offerings.
Sakka
came
gods bringinga throne 75 set with jewelsand a casket of gold. In a beautiful pavilion 76 the spot, of jewels that was built by Vissakamma made on he set up the where the thera had emerged (fromthe earth),
to
the
spot with
the
throne
and
when of the
he had
received the
had
urn
77
the hand
thera,and
the
put
them
placedit on
Brahma
Samtusita the yak-tail whisk, 78 parasol, fan, Sakka the shell with water. Suyama 2 held the jewelled The four great kings3 stood with swords in their gripand the 79 with baskets in their thirty-three gods of wondrous power 80 hands. When paricchattakathey had gone thither offering stood there bearing flowers 4 the thirty-two celestialmaidens lamps on staves. Moreover, to ward off the evil yakkhas the 81 tains stood holdingguard. Panca82 twenty-eightyakkha-chief who had set sikha stood there playingthe lute, and Timbaru 83 up a stage,making music to sound forth.5 Manydevas (stood there)singing sweet songs and the naga-king Mahakala
1
2
Lit.
'
among
See note
as
to
v.
56. A. IV.
Samtusita
Suyama
2431,and
3
S. IV. 28023.
note to 30. 89. of
a
24226,
IV. 266s.
See
Blossoms
tree
growing in
note to
the Tavatimsa-heaven.
M.V.
1. 20.
10 ; Jat. I.
5
IV. 20214,
265'8.
see
On
Pancasikha
30. 75
Timbaru
is called Sinh.
in D. II.
rangabim
216
in chanting praises music
85
Mahavamsa
manifold
ways.
xxxi.
84
84
Celestial instruments
of
rain
of
heavenlyperfumes and
ward off
as
so a
forth.
But
the
to Indagutta created,
Mara,
On
of parasol
copper
86
that he made
great
and
the universe.
in the five
relics and
here
there
l regions
in chorus. the
golden
88
brought
stood
upon
head, and
folded
placed it
throne, he
the relics and the
there
hands, offering
to gifts
89
adoring them.
the celestial heard the the celestial parasol, sound he of celestial indid the
not
see
When
princesaw
the and
perfumes,and
90
rest,and
so
struments
of music
forth,albeit
a
the
and amazed Brahma-gods he, rejoicing of with the offering the relics, them
91
'
at
with To
the
over kingship
Lanka. who
the Master
of the
bears the
92
93
94
the heavenlyparasoland the earthly and parasol, of deliverance I consecrate three times my the parasol kingly these words rank.' With heart,thrice conhe, with joyful ferred of Lanka. the relics the kingship on with gods and men, Thus, together worshippingthe relics the princeplaced with offerings, them, with the caskets, upon surrounded the his head, and when brotherhood of the he, by bhikkhus, had passed three times, going toward the left,
threefold
around
95
the
thupa,
with the
he
ascended
it
on
the
east
side
and
descended
hants
into the
stood
96
thupa. While
97
king, filled with joy,when he had mounted the into the relic-chamber,thought: fl will lay them on and beautiful couch/ the relic-casket, together with costly
the
rose relics,
up
from
his
at head,and, floating
height of
98
seven
1
talas in the
the air,
casket
forthwith
opened of itself;
and
By
north,
north-east,
also
is called
aparajita
xxxi.
no
The
up
Enshriningof the
of it and
Relics
217
the relicsrose
out
gleaming
even
as
with
the
taking the form of the Buddha, 99 they performed, greater and lesser signs,1
at (himself)
the Buddha
gandambabrought As they
100
appearances,
was
by
this of
the
during
attained fruits
his
lifetime.2
devas
to
101
attained
3 were (ofsalvation)
reckoning.
Quitting the form of the their place in the casket;
and the the
returned to (relics) but the casket sank down again 102 round 4 rested on the head of the king. Then passing relic-chamber in procession with the thera Indagutta and 103
Buddha those
dancing-women,
couch
the
gloriousking coming
on
even
to
the And in
104
beautiful when
water
the washed
throne. jewelled
zeal,had
again
his hands
fragrantwith perfumes,and had rubbed them with the five kinds of perfumes, he opened the casket,and taking out 105 the relics the ruler of the land, who intent on the was welfare of his people, thought thus:5 'If these relics shall 106 abide undisturbed and if the relics, by any man soever,
shall endure continually, refuge for the people, he lay upon then may they rest, in the form of the Master as 107 his deathbed, this well-ordered and precious couch/ upon couch; 108 Thinking thus he laid the relics upon the splendid
serving as
the
a
relics
lay there
On the
upon
the
shape.
the
fifteenth
109
of
were
month
Asalha, under
constellation
At
many
Uttarasalha,
of enshrining
came
in this way.
the
110
the relicsthe
wonders
to
44, also
state
the note of
a
to 30. 81. of
a
I.e. the
sotapanno,
to
sakadagami
or
of
an
anagami.
4
See notes
Pariharam
means
a
(part. pres.).The
solemn
parihara=Sinh.
psera-
hsera
5
procession.
cf. note to 18. 39.
saccakiriya,
218
With
Mahavamsa
xxxi.
ill
111
believingheart did the king worship the relics by and conferred on them the entire a white parasol, (offering)
of overlordship Lanka for
on
seven
days.
112
All
the
adornments and
so
his
chamber,
113
likewise
the
king
so
had
garments,
the whole drum
sugar,
forth
the
and brotherhood,
the bhikkhus it
was
to recite
114
night,then,when
in
'
again day, he
mindful adore the of the relics of
beaten
the
welfare
115
of the
people:
week/
throughout
wondrous
this
Indagutta,
of the
might,
who
same
Those
men
island
116
of Lanka
at
would
the
moment,
each commanded. the
when
they have
adored This
came
the
to
relics
pass
to his house/
he had When
117
renown
had
commanded of
'
of great offerings
118
the
great brotherhood
has the been
the All
bhikkhus
that
was
he proclaimed uninterruptedly,
:
in the relic-chamber
carried out
of
by
119
me
let the
brotherhood
take
charge
with
closing
brotherhood
chargedthe
two
samaneras
this task.
They
that
120
*
with
the
fat-coloured stone
The
not
121
dry up
lamps
shall the
shall
perish;
asavas
shall
who (theras)
the
command of
as
at that time.
122
The
the
welfare
So far
they are
And
as
peopleshall
treasure
enshrine
relics/
far of
The
above
great relic-
did the
so people,
124
of enshrining
1
thousands
30. 61.
Cf. with
this
two
Uttara
and
Suinana,
mentioned
in 30. 57.
xxxi.
126
The
Enshrining
of the
Eelks
219
the the
king
completed
the
1
thupa
on
and,
moreover,
he
completed
four-sided Thus
building
the
the of the Buddhas
nature
the
cetiya.
and
are
incomprehensible,
of the have
incompre-
125
is reward do
to
Buddhas,
faith
in
and the
incomprehensible incomprehensible.2
deeds of
those
who
pious
obtain
themselves the
most
perform glorious
also others of
pure
merit,
;
126
all
to
blessings
them
and in
they,
order
pure
heart,
make of
perform
many
win
following
eminent
people
of
kinds.3
ends Relics
the
thirty-first
the
chapter,
called
The the
Enshrining
serene
',
of
in the
Mahavamsa,
compiled
for
joy
emotion
pious.
dagaba
consists and In
essentially ordinarily
the
upper block This the the muddhavedi
'
of raised
three
elements.
a
The
dome,
usually
forms the The
hemispherical, principal
second
on
cylindrical
is the relic
base,
chamber. known of
our
part. part
term the that is
a
part
of is
of
this
square 'tee'.
brickwork
now
mostly
by
passage.
the
Burmese
the
caturassacaya
for the conical Ancient
or
Finally parasol)
In
a
'tee'
forms
base
spire
(chatta
p.
or
crowns
whole.
PARKER,
'
Ceylon,
263.
32.
is
evidently
of 56. the
top
upper-terrace'
s.v.
'rail',
designation
2
tee
'.
Cf.
Appendix
D,
vedi.
Cf. Tika
17.
khattiyabrahmanadivividhavisesajanaparivarapunnani
to
hetubhutani
also others
pi
pare
ca
attho
'they
the
cause
make of
perform
meritorious
of eminent forth.'
are
(obtaining)
following
and
people
various
kinds
as
khattiyas,
brahuianas
so
CHAPTEK
XXXII
THE
ENTRANCE
INTO
THE
TUSITA-HEAVEN
ERE
on
yet
the
making
of
the the
chatta
and fell
the sick
plaster-work
with
a
the
was
cetiya was
Tissa from
finished
king
He and
sickness younger
that brother
(fated) to
work of the
be
mortal.
sent
for him
his
'
Dighavapi thupa
that he
said
to
Complete
Because made of
thou of
the his
is not had
yet finished/
a
brother's
cloths
weakness
seamsters
covering
was
white
4
by
thereon and
and
command
vases
therewith
cetiya
on
covered, and
vedika
did
he
painters to
likewise he had and And
on a
it with
duly
rows
of filled
and
the
ornament.2 five-finger
And
reeds
made
of
bamboo-reeds
6
a sun
by plaitersof
moon
and
of
kharapatta.3
with
when and
he
lacquer
was
kahkutthaka
to
he
the
king
'
That
which
yet
do
to
the
thupa
completed/ Lying
1
on
palanquin
see
the
31.
king
124. of
went
thither, and
sudhakamma which
was
when
on
On
chatta with
note the
to
By
the
is
meant of
covering
brick.
2
stucco
dome
cetiya
made
The been
as
vedika
(rail) seems,
an
as
it
'
was
counterfeited
in
'
painting,
in
to
have
merely
ornament
ornament.
on
Buddhist of the
railings
first
p.
occur
low-
relief
the
cornice
pasada
as
of
the
wseli-dagaba (SMITHER,
be taken into account
Anurddhapura,
here,
on
26)
the
also, which
the 47
tee and
'
of
Abhayagiri
We also what
Jetavana-dagaba
meet with
'urns
'
(SMITHER,
as
pp.
52).
frequently
ornament
ornaments.
But
it is not
clear
is meant
3
by pancangulikapantika.
=
Muddhavedi
on
'tee\
of
see
to is
a
31.
an name or
124. emblem
The
picture
of
the
sun
the
four
sides
the
constantly
found.
Kharapatta=Skt.
4
kharapatra
kind
see
plants.
or
On
' =
kankutthaka'a
soil
golden
silver
colour
Skt.
karikustha,
ed.,
222
thus
Mahavamsa
did the Master teach.
xxxil.
20
20
Mortalityovercomes
or
even
the think
Buddhas,
thou
21
:
untouched
by
shame
fear; therefore
of sorrow, and for the true
all that
exists is
full perishable,
unreal. doctrine
In
was
thy
last mortal
existence1
thy love
of
indeed
gods
was
within
thy
to
22
sight,yet
this world
of merit
ways.
serve
Moreover,
23
setting up
the
sovereignty by
Oh
thou
to
bring glory to
on
doctrine.
who
rich in
think merit,
even
of merit will
accomplished by thee
well with thee
to
this
all be
! straightway
24
the said
king
:
'
heard
the
thera's words
also thou
he
was
glad
at
In
art my
help/
book of
25
And
he rejoicing
commanded
that
the
meritorious deeds be
brought,and
:
he bade the
scribe read it
27
viharas have been built by the great king, 'Ninety-nine the Maricavattiand, with (thespendingof)nineteen kotis,2 kotis.3 vihara; the splendid Lohapasada was built for thirty But these precious things4 that have been made for the Great
28
Thupa
the
were
Great
twenty kotis; the rest that was made for Thupa by the wise (king was worth)a thousand
worth Thus did he read. As he read further:
5
29
30
called Kotta, at the time of the famine mountain-region called the Akkhakhayika famine,two precious were ear-rings milletgiven (by the king), and thus a goodlydish of sour
6
decay ; having been produced they are dissolved again ; blissful is is by no The meaning of samkhara their subjection.5 means fully rendered DAVIDS, S.B. E. xi, p. 117; S.B.B. by existence '. RHYS each being's parts and powers'. iii, pp. 175-176, translates it with
* '
This
refers to the
story told
8
According to
here. Translation Lit. famine
the Tika
the
adorning of
of the words
ti vutte the
at other
in 32. nuts
during
which
called akkha
are
(Terminalia
as
Bellerica)were
chataka.
eaten, which
times the
used
dice.
In the
famine
is called
Pasana-
xxxii.
39
The
Entrance
223
the
31
gruel was
asavas,
and
them
vanquished in
the proclaimed
with
to the
ascetic
32 (Tissa),
the
thither
through the
air
he,
'
"
did
thought for himself, gave the the king take up the tale :
week
as
food from
his bowl
In
the
of
the
of
the
(Mari-33
at the
(Great)Thupa was the relics 3 were enshrined,a general, giving 34 great and costly of alms was arranged by me to the great community of both from the four quarters.4 I held twenty-four (sexes) great 35
Vesak ha- festivals;
5
the
three
times
did
bestow
the
three
of the island.
seven
days,have
with
I bestowed
(glad 36
wicks
37
rank
a
upon
thousand
lamps
oil and
in twelve burning perpetually places,adoring the Blessed (Buddha) with this offering.Constantly in eighteenplaces38 have I bestowed ordered
on
the
sick
the
foods
for
the
sick
and
as remedies,
by
the
physicians.
the and in
In of
1
perpetual giving39
as
many
places
kangutandulam
santikam
attano
pancannam
2
Cf. with
Cf. 26.
21; 27.46;
We meet
30.4;
is with the
31. 117.
Ubhato-samgha
samgha.
E.
and bhikkhunibhikkhusamgha 'of the the epithet catuddisa of Ceylon. oldest cave-inscriptions 73 ;
four Cf.
WICKREMASINGHE,
on
makes
the
Buddha's
nibbana time
fall
the full-nioon
day
2 ;
of
(at that
March-April), Sum.
1909, p.
I,
p.
Smp., p.
6 7
6 foil.
madhupayasam,
madhupayasam.
sakkharamadhusap-
pitelehi samyojitam
224
40
Mahavamsa
of rice with
xxxn.
40
lumps
oil,1 and
in
in
even
as
places
the oil for
butter
and
also
I have ordinary rice. For the uposatha-festivals the lamps distributed one day in every month viharas
a on
eight
that
42
the
island
of
Lanka.
And
since I heard
43
of the doctrine is more than a gift gift (by preaching) of worldly wealth I said : At the foot of the Lohapasada, in the (preacher's) chair in the midst of the brotherhood,I will
preach
I
44
was
the
Mahgalasutta
I could Since
to not
the
brotherhood
but
when for
reverence
the
45
preaching of the doctrine everywhere, in the viharas of Lanka, giving rewards to the preachers. To each preacher of the
doctrine did I order
to
then
commanded
the
give a
on
nail4 them
of
a
butter, molasses
handful
moreover,
and
46
sugar four
; moreover,
I bestowed I
of
liquorice,5
a
inches
long, and
gave
them,
47
garments. But all this giving while that I not my heart; only the two giftsthat I gave, without
for my heart.' the while life, I
was
in
my
48
When
the thera
Abhaya
those the
heard
When
(theone) of
received hundred of
five theras
the thera
Malayama7
hadeva, who
50
sour on
given thereof
who
to
nine
ate
bhikkhus But
Sumanakuta-mountain
he
51
it himself.
the earth to
thera
Dhammagutta
it with the hundred in
could in the
cause
quake
shared
bhikkhus
num-
52
ber, and
1
of it himself.
The
thera
Dhammadinna,
eva telullopakam cati, telaussadakhirasappica adapayim. alopadanam 2 What is does the Tika I do know. Nor not give any jalapuva explanation. See note to 30. 83. ed. FAUSBOLL, Sutta-nipata, p. 45.
Tika:
mandasamkhatam
See note
to 30. 37.
Yatthimadhuka
(=
Skt.
yastimadhuka)
s. v.
the
same
as
ma-
dhulatthika
6
in CHILDERS, narration
P.D.,
8
detailed note
of the
story alluded
See note
See
to 1. 33.
xxxii.
63
The
Entrance
225
twelve
thousand
thera
Piyahgudipa
wondrous
and
then who
ate of it.
The
of 53
power,
dwelt
in
Mangana,
Kelasa
divided
sixtythousand
ate
to
in (bhikkhus) The
the
and (vihara)
of
seven
it himself. hundred
thera
in (bhikkhus)
ate of it himself.2
thera3 twelve
who
it 55
thousand
Piyahgudipaand
then
mood, king's
to
the
the thera
56
the thera
'Twenty-fouryears
hood, and
In
a
patron
may
of the brother-
57
my
body
place whence
Thupa
the
in of
the 58 the of
malaka4
(bounded about)
ye burn
ceremonial
of
me
acts
brotherhood,do
the brotherhood/ To Great dear thou his younger
body
said
:
the
servant
brother
he
'
All
work
of the 59
do Thupa which is still unfinished, Tissa,caring duly for it. Evening flowers at the
a
60
Great
Thupa
at
me
and the
(inthe day)
All the 61 of the
command ceremonies
Blessed Never hood.' silence. At
solemn
oblation
Thupa.
introduced
by
my
in honour my
of the doctrine
(Buddha)do
grow
thou
carry on,
weary, he
dear, in duty
thus exhorted
When
had
this moment
the
brotherhood
the devatas
began the
cars
63
with
See
note
to 24. 25.
We
cannot
TURNOUR
not
2
identified.' The
Kelasa
3
in
a
53
and
54
cannot
be
identified.
The
is to the
monastery story in
32. 31-32.
See note
226
six
Mahavamsa
XXXII.
64
64
gods, and
stood in their 0
65
a
'
Enter
into
our
king/
When the
king
heard
'
he
stayed them
as
'
with
long
I listen to the He
66
dhamma/
bhikkhus
thinking:
would
fain
their recitations;
'
the
reason
of the
was
be still"
the But
the what
68
1
king
had
said
'
It is not
so, venerable
passed.
When
they
by
How
cars
heard
this, certain
the thera
of
Seized
death, he wanders
69
to
banish
*
king :
70
it be have
The wise brought hither?' that garlands of flowers be flung into the king commanded wound themselves around the poles of air, these severally
of) the
the
71
cars
and the
hung loose
them. free in the air, floating they the king said to the thera : is the most
f
When
peoplesaw
doubts ;
conquered their
72
"
Which
'
venerable beautiful,
sir ?
73
answered
The the
king, is
when
fairest; so
shall become
think
a
time
Buddha,
compassionate
of the
Bodhisatta
74
Metteyya2 dwells
the most wise
Tusita-city.'
these words
When
king
the
thera,
as
Thupa, closed
had
his eyes
lay.
And
when
he,
even
at
that
moment,
passed away,
in the
to
he
car
seen,
reborn
come
and
standingin
Tusita-heaven.
of merit
celestial form
And make
76
that
had
from
manifest
the reward
77
of the works
showing
on
himself
same
in
all his
the
1
2
three
times
Thupa,
Buddha,
See note
Metteyya
Skt.
Maitreya
is the Gotama.
name
of the
future
successor
xxxii.
84
The
Entrance
into
the
Tusita-Heaven
227
goingthupa
Even
off
to
the
the
left, and
then,
when he
women
he
had into
done
homage
Tusita-heaven.
to
the
and
brotherhood
the
passed
the
had
where head
dancing-
who
was a
come
thither
laid
78
their
-ornaments
there
hall when
called
Maku-
tamuttasala.
Even laid
on
where
the
the
people,
pyre,
body wailing
of
the
79
king
was
was
funeral
broke
there
the
so-called
malaka
Ravivattisala
built.
The
which
outside burned
the
the
precincts
of
(of
the here
monastery),
bears the
name
in
80
they
body
the
king
Rajamalaka.
The
name
great
of
king
Dutthagamani,
will be the first
he
who
is
worthy
of the
of
the
81
king,
the
disciple
his
sublime
and the will
son,
83
Metteyya,
mother be will He does is his be his
king's
father
The
(will be)
82
mother.1
younger
brother
second the
son
disciple, but
of the
Salirajakumara, Metteyya.
life
to
king's
sublime
the
who,
works
holding
of
good
be
over
the much
own
greatest
that
(good),
84
merit,
into
passes,
covering
as
perchance
therefore
evil-doing,2
the
heaven
into take
his
house;
in
will
wise
man
continually
delight
works
of merit.
Here into
serene
ends
the
thirty-second chapter,
', in
of the
called
'
The
Entrance
for the
the
Tusita-heaven
and emotion
Mahavamsa,
compiled
joy
the
pious.
That
is, Metteyya's.
is that that which which is is
Niyatapapakam
certainly
or
without Here
doubt there
evil; aniyatapapakam
an
possibly
which
25. 103
evil.
the
is felt
to
the
scruples
warlike
of
career.
conscience
See
king
himself
at
of his
foil.
CHAPTER
XXXIII
THE
TEN
KINGS
UNDER in
the
the
rule
of
the
king Dutthagamani
;
the
subjects
was
kingdom
son.
lived
happily
Salirajakumara
his
famous
2
Greatly gifted
merit
;
was
he loved
he
and
a
ever
took
woman
delight
of
in
works
of
he
tenderly
Since
candala
exceedingly
of the been
Asohis for
was
greatly
in
a
already
of
former
because
her
loveliness, he Dutthaga
his mani's
nothing
kingly
TISSA,
rule. anointed
Therefore
brother,
SADDHA-
king
years.
for and
eighteen
the he
finished
the
the of the
parasol,
Great
work plasterwho
won
elephant-wall
his faith.3
;
Thupa,
by
a
The the
magnificent
Lohapasada
7
caught
stories times
4
fire from
lamp
now
he
was
built
Lohapasada
worth
Dak-
anew,
seven
high.
a
And
the
He
pasada
built the
the
(only) ninety
8
hundred
the
thousand.
and the
(vihara) Kallakalena,
Kalam-
The
story
is
told
at
length
in
the
Tika.
Cf.
GEIGER,
Dtp.
and
Mah.,
2
p. 37.
Hatthipakara:
bases of his the The
according
on
to
PARKER
(Ancient
of the
are
Ceylon,
p.
284),
who wall
conjecture
upper
the
dimensions
on
tiles,the
of
on
sustainingin the of
'pasada'
which the
figures
terrace with
elephants
which
relief.
sustaining-wall
stands
of
great
Ruwanwseli-dagaba
elephants
wall
seems
*
is also
ornamented of
p.
similar out
figures
from
in
relief, the
forepart
the
body
But
jutting
this
the
(SMITHER,
to A A be
Anurddhapura,
40).
hatthipakara
of later
on
origin.
name
play
the
Saddhatissa
name
from also in
saddha the
monastery
of this
appears
Culavamsa,
Mahavamsa
xxxill.
22
22
23
24
25
in atonement, the king built, brotherhood, thousand of money), three (pieces spendingthree hundred of flowers J to the Great Cetiya, stone terraces for offerings and then did the lord of the land, with (theexpense of) hundred a thousand,have the earth heaped up between the Great Thupa and the Thuparama 2 so that it was over, level. Morehe made stone a splendid mantlingto the thupa in the Thuparama, and to the east of the Thuparama a little thupa built of stones,3 and the Lanjakasana hall for the brotherhood of bhikkhus. Moreover, he had a mantling made of stone he had Khandhakathupa. When spent a hundred thousand for the Cetiyathat at the vihara 4 he commanded the festival of the vihara called Girikumbhila (consecration) six for the
26
garments
and
be distributed
to
6
sixtythousand
and the
bhikkhus.
27
He
naka,
28
the the
bhikkhus
in
medicines.
much
as
To
bhikkhunls
29
30
Nine years and one they wanted. here. he reign dead his younger When was Lafijakatissa KHALLATANAGA reignedsix years. Round
1
named Loha-
Thuparama
Ancient
yards
north
of
the
Ruwanwseli-
PARKER,
called
Digha-
thupa in the Dip., with the so-called Khujjatissarama or Seladagaba. But this is not situated to the east (theMah. has purato justas the Dip. 20. 11 describes the positionof the Dighathupa by but to the south-east of the Thuparama, Thuparama-puratthato) and it is twice as far from this latter as from the Ruwanwseli-dagaba, that orientation by the last-named, would be much to the so more SMITHER (Anurddhapum, p. 55) is probably right in the purpose. that there is a reference in silathupaka to a little stone conjecture dagaba, a sort of model, similar to one that stands on the platformof the Ruwanwseli-dagaba. Cf. The monastery on the Cetiyapabbataor Missaka-mountain.
4
note
6
is, to
'
each
one
pair
'
of
the
three
articles
of
clothing
utta-
(ticlvara),the
rasanga
8
antaravasaka
robe
On
the
',and
the
to 10. 63.
xxxni.
42
TJie Ten
built
Kings
231
pasada
the
he
x pasadas
to make
Great
a
Lohapasada yet more splendid. Round Thupa, the beautiful Hemamali,2 he made as
with sand and a wall. Moreover, he (strewn) built the Kurundavasoka-vihara, and yet other works of merit did the kingcarry out.
A
border
court3
32
commander
of
troops named
Kammaharattaka,
the VATTAGAMANI himself the
over-
33
king's younger
The little
was son
brother named
and of his took
on
villainous commander
whose
name
Mahaculika, he took
made
a
his his
son
and
the 36
father
Pitiraja.4
In the fifth month brahman named after he
was
king,a
young the
3 7
Tissa,in
Rohana,
city(thatwas
hearkened, fool that he was, to the pro- 33 seat)of his clan,5 and his following and became a rebel, phesying of a brahman
waxed with and
great.
their
seven
Seven
Damilas
(at the
Tissa
a
same
time)39
brahman
message
49
troops
the
the
Damilas
king
written
of
king
sent
written
now
message
to
the the
brahman:
Damilas/ the
'The He
41
kingdom is
answered but
'
So
be
battle with
Damilas,
him. theyconquered
the
war
Thereupon
1
upon
the
king;
in. 42
Perhaps dwellingsof
See
'
smaller
dimensions, for
the bhikkhus.
27. 3.
a Literally, sandcourt-boundary '. The allusion is to the so-called the terrace of the Ruwanwseliall round elephant-paththat runs On the east, south, the outside by a wall. on dagaba and is bounded
and
north
it is 97 feet
I. L, p. 41.
wide, on
the west,
i.e. at the
SMITHER.
4
I.e.
'King
I read from
kulanagare
which the to 7. 58.
by
this
Mahagama
of
the
town
8
dynasty
See note
kingly rank.
Mahavamsa
l
xxxm.
43
near
the he
was king-
vanquished. (Near
into his
car
the But
43
mounted
and
fled.
built
had
a
inhabited constantly
44
Giri saw nigantha 3 named 4 loudly: 'The great black lion is fleeing/ king heard that he thought thus : If my
'
by king Pandukabhaya and it 2 under twenty-one kings.) As him take flight he cried out
When the be
great
wish
fulfilled
I will build
45
He
took
'
him,
who
was
with
child,
46
and Mahacula also and protected/ (his Mahanaga, also thinking They must be son) the prince the car the king gave to SomaBut, to lighten protected.' devl 5 his splendid and let her, with her own diadem-jewel
: thinking
She
must
'
consent, descend
47
from forth
the
to
car.
When
going
battle he
had
set
48
Being taking his little son and his two queens with him. and, unable to take with him the vanquishedhe took flight he hid in the Vessagirialmsbowl used by the Conqueror,6
forest.7
saw
49
When
him
an
there,he
50
of
untouched
Kupikkala (vihara) the giving thereby gave him food,avoiding alms.8 Thereon the king, glad at heart,
with the
from
Evidently
The passage
identical
Kolambahalaka,
occurs
mentioned
in
25. 80.
2
thereon.
in brackets in all the groups omitted the three of MSS. lines of
enclosed
and
verse
to in the
Tika.
I have
of form for reasons edition, chiefly (seeIntroduction, the p. xxi) as being a later gloss. The battle took place not far from north gate of the city. See also 25. 80 foil, and the note to 33. 81.
3
See note
to
was
10. 97.
The
name
Tittharama non-Buddhist
on
indicates that
the
4
monastery
sihala His second
inhabited
is 7.
a
by
(tittha=sect).
'lion' and the
Mahakalasihala
play
the word
name
6
(Mah.
wife.
42).
to
in
According to Mah. 17. 12 foil, it had come the time of king Devanampiyatissa. South of Anuradhapura. See note to 20. 15 on
The bhikkhu has eaten is not of allowed the food food in
a
Ceylon as
relic
the
a
to
share he then
with has
himself
Mahatissa
that and
received
some
alms.
So
first ate
of the
offered
to the
king.
SUBHUTI,
communication
xxxili.
64
The
a
Ten
Kings
to
233
his vihara
went went to to
51
of
the
2
thence, he
then he the thera
Silasobbhakandaka
Matuvelahga
near
(Kupik- 52
thera
was
before.
The
53 his subject, Tanasiva, the king lived 3 fourteen years, maintained by him. Of the seven Damilas for the lovely one, fired with passion 54 and forthwith returned Somadevi, made her his own again
in the house
to
the
further
coast.4
took
the
almsbowl
powers,
of that
the
was
55
miraculous
But
PULAHATTHA
reigned three
of his years
;
years,
making
56 57
Bahiya commander
and
troops. BAHIYA
Pulahattha
was
reigned two
PANAYAMARAKA
his commander-in-
Panayamara.
seven
slew
Bahiya
was
and
was
58
king for
months;
Damila
PILAYAMARAKA
his DATHIKA
Panayamara
and
was
was
commander-in-chief
Dathika.
slew
Thus
Anuradhapura.
was
months.
day,
her foot. When
in
Malaya,
And she
was
Anuladevi
went
to
seek
62
her
of Tanasiva wroth
struck and
came
her against
basket with
to
weeping
forth had took
63
king.
the the
Tanasiva
heard bow.
hastened the
(from
house) graspinghis
queen
king
came,
64
heard what
said,he, ere
yet
other
Pandanus copper
odoratissimus.
As be
a on
rule
on
plates or
und
might
der
recorded royaldonations were silver and gold plates. GEIGER, 24-25. Tika
we
Litteratur
8
Sprache
to
Singhalesen, pp.
from the than
Cf. note
33. 87 ;
judging
should
probably
read
3
rather
in
Malaya, according to
oversea
is,he returned
Cf. note
to India.
Gahetva.
to 33. 19.
234
65
Malavamsa
xxxill.
65
boys and
The
his consort
l
and
hastened
out
also.
Patting1
2 as
to his bow
the
he
66
followers around
He
obtained the
as
ministers the
warriors,and
The famous and
great
of following
and
equipment (forwar).
67
(king)sought
commanded
out
a
the
thera
Kupikkala
68
that
festival in honour
of the
At the very time Acchagalla-vihara.3 when the minister Kapisisa, having gone up to the courtyard of the Akasa-cetiya down the building, had come to sweep
Buddha
be held in the
69
from
saw
he
70
going up with the queen, him sitting by the road, and being wroth with him that had not flung himself down (before him) he slew Kapisisa. thence, the king, who
was
Then
in
anger
againstthe king
from
were
the
other
seven
ministers
withdrew
71
themselves
him, and
good
to
them, they
on
robbers
the
way,
and
going whither it seemed of their possessions by stripped they took refuge in the vihara
the learned thera Tissa.
The
as
was
received
When 'Whither
he
are
had
refreshed
74
to
him, and
They made themselves you going ?' told him this matter. But when they were
'With whom
afterwards:
will it be
With
'
to possible
further
or
doctrine of the
75
Buddha?
the
Damilas
with
king?' they answered: By the king will And when they had thus convinced them
1
this be the
two
possible.'
theras,
Cf. the
dha A
Skt. dhanuh
sam.
samdha
in the
same
sense
s.
v. 2
3
with
on
play
Sivam
If the east of
and Tika
mahasivo. is
See
note
galla-vihara Accha-
the 68
Anuradhapura,
be identical latter
akasacetiya
mentioned
Rohana. in
mentioned 22. 26
4
in
verse
cannot The
(seethe note).
the four
doubt, in
I.e. in
oldest
of the
XXXIIT.
86
The
Ten
Kings
forth from
one
Mahatissa,took them
the the and kingministers
brought 76
The If
our
'
reconciled them
another.
king
and
besought the
must
theras ye
saying:
to
7 7
come
us,
when
theras
agreed and
to
returned
to his
place. king
Dathika the
a
When had
the renowned
had
come
Anuradhapura
arama
and
78
forthwith
and niganthas
two
twelve
months
cells. When
and
ten
hundred
the foundingof the Mahavihara filledwith piouszeal,built the Abhayagirivihara.1 He for the (two) theras, and to the thera Mahatissa, who
had
passed since
the
days king,81
sent
82
had
of the
two, he gave
the
on
vihara,to do him
the of place the 83
king Abhaya built it2 of (the nigantha)Giri, the vihara arama Abhayagiri.
honour.
Since the
received the
name
When
rank
name.
he had
sent
he raised her
again
to
her 84
and
in built,
the
car
85
at this
thicket of who
was
Kadambas,
in that very
a place
samanera
flowering 86 relieving
According
place
the of
to
33.
42-44
the
Tittharama
its
stood
outside
the north
of
the
with
called
Abhayagiri-dagaba,
On the
be that
as we
of the
see
now
Jetavana-dagaba.
to
other
hand,
will must
below looked
37. of
Jetavana-vihara
the so-called confounded
p. 299
2
be
south
Abhayagiri-dagaba stands.
one name
Tradition
with
the
other.
PARKER,
Ceylon,
foil.
The
king'sfull
Somarama
name or
was
Vattagamani Abhaya.
as
The
Manisomarama,
the be
the
monastery
is called
36.
story in sought
33.
near
placeof
is
dhapura,
61, which
236
his the
87
Mahdvamsa
his need,using (decently) heard kingthe north her hand
a
XXXIII.
87
When
story he built
88 89
founded Mahathupa this same kingcalled Silasobbhakandaka.1 spot the cetiya upon a lofty of the seven One warriors (of the king),Uttiya, built,to the south of the city, In the the so-called Dakkhina-vihara.2 To Mula built the place the minister named which called after him. vihara, was, therefore,
same
of the
90
named
91
built Saliya
the
and Saliyarama,
the
minister
Pabbata
built the
Pabbatarama;
When the thera
the Uttaratissarama.
the
beautiful viharas
Tissa and gave
were
pleted com-
them
we
to him
with
these
words
'
In
gratitudefor thy
kindness
give
The
thera
built
everywhere (inthese
ministers
a
viharas), accordingto
upon
94
rank, and
the
bestowed
samana.
the brotherhood
The
the
his vihara
with
95
96
97
(needful) lacking: thingsfor use, so that nothing was therefore were they many in number. A thera known who had frequented Mahatissa, by the name the families of laymen,was expelled by the brotherhood from of lay-families. the frequenting our monastery 3 for this fault, His disciple, the thera who was known as Bahalamassutissa, in anger and abode there, went to the Abhayagiri(vihara) these faction. And thenceforward forming a (separate)
bhikkhus
came
no
more
to
the
Mahavihara
thus
did
the
bhikkhus
1
of the
secede Abhayagiri(vihara)
as
from
the Thera-
The
PARKER,
verse,
points,as
LankaramaRuwanwaeli-
the the
is situated about mile north a dagaba, in remembrance dagaba. It received this name Vattagamani had found refuge,according to 33.
a
of the 51.
place where
the
I.e. 'South
of the of the
Monastery.'
PARKER,
this is
1. ?., p.
312, identifies
'
remains
south
thupa belonging to
Mahavihara,
also note which to 35. 5. the
sepulchre.' See
3
Ito
'
from
here' is from
standpoint of
author,
'
out
of
the Mahavihara.'
CHAPTER
XXXIV
THE
ELEVEN
KINGS
AFTER years
his
death
MAHACULI
MAHATISSA
reigned
fourteen
with
he
own
piety and
heard
hand
justice.
a
2
a
Since man's
that
gift brought
of in
about
by
in
the the
work very
is full
merit,
the and
king,
year
disguise
that he
laboured
for
harvest, and
4
with
to
the
wage
received
When years in for
a
food
as
alms also
the
thera
Mahasumma.
l
king
took the
laboured
5
in
Sonnagiri
of
three
as
sugar-mill,
he
had
received
of sugar,
lumps
and
sugar
wage
to
this,
the
ruler of
lumps
of the
6
being returned
the
capitalhe,
to the
brotherhood
bhikkhus
bestowed twelve
clothing
thousand of the
on
thirtythousand
had
to
bhikkhunis.
earth
2
the
protector
the six
built
well-planned
bhikkhus
The
vihara, he
8
gave
garments
sixty thousand
and
same
to
bhikkhunis
likewise, in
the
number
thirty thousand.
the
king
built
Mandavapi-
vihara,
Abhayagallaka
and
(viharas) Vahkavattakagalla
the
Dlghabahu-
Jalagama-vihara.
had done
at
10
When
in
the
works the
of merit of the
many
ways years.
passed
into
heaven,
end
fourteen
I.e.
'Gold
mountain,'
On this
see
according
note to 28.
to 20.
the The
Tika
situated
mountain
near
Ambatthakola.
rises
on
rocky
the
that
the
on
east the
of west
Ambatthakola is called
bounding
Rangala.
p. 36.
valley
of Nalandap.
Dambul ED.
also
GEIGER,
The
Ceylon,
155;
are
MULLER,
called
Ancient
Inscriptions,
in
Dambulla-caves Malla's
Suvannagiri-guha
LI., pp.
to 33. 26.
king
Nissanka
inscription,
ED.
2
MULLER,
See note
92,
126.
xxxiv.
27
The
Eleven
Kings
CORANAGA Mahacula
239 lived
had
Vattagamanr's son
under he
no came
known
as
as
rebel
11
When
12 departed
did And
where he had found reigned. Those places, 13 eighteenviharas, refuge duringthe time of his rebellion, this fool destroy. Twelve years did Coranaga reign.
his consort
gave
him
the 14
reborn
in the Lokantarika-hell.
son
king
Mahacula's
as
15
But TISSA. Coranaga's spouse, 16 king,being known by name to death, the infamous Anula, had done her infamous (consort) enamoured of one of the because she was giving him poison, Anula 1 7 palace-guards.And for love of this same palace-guard
now
by poison and
name
gave
the
government
who
18
SIVA, and
made in the
(had been)the
his queen
gate-watchmen, had
two
Anula
he
a reigned was
year and
months
city ;
did
but
him
19
Anula, who
to
enamoured
of the Damila
gave
Vatuka,
death
with
poison and
had his queen
Damila
VATUKA, who
Anula in the when
made
months But
to
The 20 reign to Vatuka. in the capital, been a city-carpenter and then reigneda year and two 21
the who wood-carrier, with him, and when
a
city.
(oneday)saw
love had she
come
Anula
the
had
22
poisonshe
year
gave
the
Anula
haste But
23 24
and
one
month the
a
in the
city.In
Mahameghavana.
Damila named
eager to to
a Niliya,
the
be
united
25
him, poisonand
the brahman
did
gave
Tissa the
the
death
giving him
And and
NILIYA
26 reigned,
upheld constantly by her,six months here When the princess Anula (who desired to
even as
Anuradhapura.
her
of thirty-two
in brackets
the
take
The
enclosed
as
occurs
MSS.,
but
seems,
it interferes with
the
division of
the
slokas,
240
Mahavavnsa
xxxiv.
28
ANULA
herself,
reignedfour months.
28 29
But
king-Mahaculika's
had
second
son,
named
and
TISSA, who
fear of Anula
returned pabbajja
30
when,
he had
in
time, he had
slain the
gathered an
Anula
army
and together,
wicked
he,
3 1
reignedtwenty-two years. He built upon the Cetiya-mountain a great buildingfor the uposathafestival and to the east of this building he raised a thupa of he stone, and in that same placeon the Cetiya-mountain a bodhi-tree. planted
In the
32
region between
in the and the
moreover
same
the
Pelagama-
vihara and
33
Vannaka
34
place(he made) a great canal called great Ambadugga-tank and the Bhayo(hemade) around the citya wall seven
trench. When he had
and
burned
the
tious licen-
drawing palace (upon the funeral pyre),he, withlittle (distance) from thence, built a new palace.
in the
35
In
the
cityitself he
entered the
laid out
mother
36
order
when
she had
justcleansed
his
Padumassara-park. His of the doctrine of the Conqueror her teeth. On a plotfor building2
a
the
to belonging
familyhe
founded
nunnery
and this
37 38
was
therefore
known
by
name
Dantageha.3
BHATIKABHAYA, pious ruler of the
he
4 was
After
his death
princenamed
39
Since he, the reignedtwenty-eight years. the brother of king Mahadathika was earth, the island by the name on Bhatikaraja.Here
out
known
did he carry
the
work
of
repairingthe Lohapasada
and
built two
to be in
1
later addition. is
a
kattukama We fail to
(See Mah.
establish
here
because
we
do
not
know
what the
ganga
2
The expression by antaragangaya. hardly denotes but Ambanrather the between river, region perhaps
renders
3
kulasante.
The
Tika, too,
Lit.
Tooth
-house/
I.e. in
Anuradhapura.
xxxiv.
50
The
Eleven
Kings
241
called the Uposatha Mahathupa,and the (hall) in the (vihara) after the thupa.1 named (-hall) And with the tax appointedfor himself he doingaway and ujjuka-flowers planted sumana a over yojana of land round the city. And when the king had commanded that the Great Cetiya, from the vedika at the foot to the parasol at
2
vedikas
for the
40
41
the four
42
fingersthick
and
that
flowers the
be
embedded carefully
as a
therein
globe of time he commanded the flowers. Another them to plaster minium with (a paste of) and thus thick, eight fingers cetiya he changed it into a heap of flowers. Yet another time
by
their
he made stalks,
thupa even
43
44
he the
over
commanded
that the
mass
steps
with
to
a means
the
with
thus he he
blossoms.
from the
Then the
when
water
by
of machines
Abhaya-tank he, by
a
he, 46 waggon-loads of pearls, of plaster that the mass kneaded together be carefully bidding with oil, made a plaster-covering the Great Thupa). He 47 (for and had a net of coral prepared and the cetiya, cast over
when he had commanded of them
to fasten in the meshes
thupa,carried out
water-
thereof
43
lotus-flowers
clusters of
and to hang gold large as waggon-wheels, pearlson these that reached to the lotus-flower Great
Thupa with
he made
this
offering.
sound
'
of 49
in chanting
chorus
I will
at 50
seen
the
of the door
created
the east side.5 The on stone-pillar for him and brought him into the
theras
relic-
Thuparama.
ca
mahasumanani
ujjakasumanani
from which the the
ca,
namely
two
kinds
3
The
the
ascent
on
33.
4
31) to
Tadi
great terrace,
synonym
to
of araha.
The
paraphrases pacinaddikamulamhi
R
with pacinaad-
dikassasamipe, pacinadisayasilatthambhaussapitatthane.
242
chamber. adornment When the
Mahavamsa
ruler of the he earth
went
xxxiv.
51
51
had forth
beheld and
of the relic-chamber
with
clay in
close likeness to
vases
with (filled
and flowers),
53
with
as auri-pigment(prepared)
lotus-flowers the
arrayedin
that
were
minium
the
of courtyard
where cetiya,
they
54
poured
whole
it
molten; with
lotus-flowers
fastened
in the holes of
55, the
mattings,spreadon
fragrantearth,wherewith
filled;with
of
many
butter,which
the ways like
manner
had
likewise
been
56
had
with
many
57
madhuka-oil1
and
sesamum-oil
they were
seven
58
50
Thupa. And urged by faith,he ordered year by year moreover, of the plastera perpetually great festival (forthe renewing) work ; and festivalsalso of the great Bodhi-tree (inhonour) and furthermore twentyof the watering of the Bodhi-tree,
times
and
lesser
and festivals,
also divers
mimic
dances
concerts,with the
playingof
61
all kinds
of instruments times
a
of music
went
(inhonour) of
to do
Thupa.
and
Three
day he
'
homage
to
he commanded
And
he
continually gave
alms
such ascetic,
as
oil, molasses,
MSS. all
Oil
pressedfrom
and
Latifolia. The
have form
2 8
raadhuka,
madhuka See note Tika
:
reading.
In Skt.
also the
divasassa
niyatam
the
pupphapujam
ca
MSS.
a
support
of
synonym
readingchandadanam. sajjhaya.
xxxiv.
73
Hie Eleven
and
so
Kings
the brotherhood.
243
garments
the
forth
among
Moreover,
G3
bestowed everywhereland for the cetiyas, to the end prince that the cetiyas the 04 might be kept in repair.And constantly king bestowed food (asalms allotted) by tickets l to a thousand in the vihara (ofthe) bhikkhus At five spots,65 Cetiya-pabbata. called Citta,Mani, and namely, the three receiving-places,2 and the beautiful ChattaMucala,as also in the Paduma-house who were harnessed 66 to the bhikkhus offering pfisada, hospitality to the yoke of the sacred word he providedthem alwayswith all that was for the needful,being filled with reverence religion.Moreover, all those works of merit which had been 67 the doctrine, ordered by the kings of old regarding all these did king Bhatika carry out. After the death of his Bhatikaraja younger
brother named
intent
on
68 69
MAHADATHIKAMAHANAGA works
as
reigned twelve
kinds. He
years,
of merit
of many
had kincikkha-stones3
laid
(the square of) the Great Thupa and he turned 70 round the sand-pathway (thethupa)4 into a wide court ; in chairs put up for the preachers. all the viharas he had (raised) The king built the great Ambatthala-thupa;5 since the 71 not firm he laydown in that place, was building bethinking of him the merit of the Sage (Buddha), life.672 riskinghis own When he had thus made firm and had completed the building the cetiya he set up at the four entrances four bejewelled 73 arches that had been well planned by artists and shone with
on plaster
1
Salakavattabhatta,
see
note
to 15. 205.
Thus to
the
allusion is to
Tika
offer
gifts. The
places which are said to have been in the interior of royal palace, Cittupatthanapasada, Maniupatthanapasada, and
'
of the appears
lotus-blossom
to be some
;
'.
sort
CHILDERS,
of marble
or
other ornamental
4
stone
'.
see
On On
the the
valikamariyada
Cf. 13. 20.
a
note
to 33. 31.
Ancient
Ceylon,
his
pp. 320-322.
6
He
ran
being
killed
by fallingstones
,
. ..
during
meditation.
R
244
74
Mahavamsa
of every kind. To be fastened to the stuff and
xxxiv.
74
gems
a cover
cetiyahe spent
thereto and
festoons
75
golden balls
the
When
of land (tract
76
a Cetiya-mountain
had made
four
gateways
when
and he and
beautiful road
then
set
had had
shops on (traders')
and
adorned
(theroad) here
there with
arches, flags,
77 78
79
triumphalgates,and had illuminated all with chains of That mimic dances, songs, and music. lamps,he commanded the people might go with clean feet on the road from the he had it laid with to the Cetiya-rnountain Kadamba-river * carpets the gods themselves might hold a festival assembly
and
"
there with
80
dance the
and
music
"
and
four
gates of
within
capital.Over
a
chains of
81
ocean
lamps without
a
break,nay
a
the waters
of the
distance
of
At the festival yojana around. these beautiful offerings were cetiya feast is called here (inthe splendid
the great Giribhanda-offering. country) When the lord of the earth had the bhikkhus the who
commanded
were come
in almsgiving
to eightplaces
83
festal
that
assembly,he, with
set up
even
beatingof
were
84
thousand
(bhikkhus).He
the
to
remission of the
the
85
barbers
gates.
decreed
his
works
of
merit
that
had
been
by
kings of
did
old and
carry and
that had
out
by
those brother,
he
without
queen,
86
himself
the
his two
to the
brotherhood
their
forbade him.
bhikkhus
to
87
To
brotherhood
of the
six hundred
88
thousand, but
a
the
gave of company in
he
giftsworth
bhikkhunls
worth (suchgifts)
1 8
hundred
thousand, and
in Album and Tissa.
giving them,
On
Kern,
p. 61 foil.
CHAPTEE
XXXV
THE
TWELVE
KINGS
AFTER son,
Mahadathika's
nine he
even
manner
death
and
to be
a
AMANDAGAMANI
ABHAYA,
On the
his
reigned Thupa
he built in like
2
years caused
eight
made vedi
an a
months.
splendid
parasol,1
the
an
Great
and
parasol above
the
the
at
there he
at
base
and
top.
inner the he and he
And
made
inner
to
courtyard
the
and
verandah
4
to
the
Lohapasada
the
and
(building)called
for
Uposatha
built
a
(house) of
of also
Thuparama.
with
Moreover,
both
beautiful
men
pavilion adorned
built the
precious stones;
When
the had
ruler made
Rajatalena-vihara.3
on
the
Mahagamendi-tank
who
was
the
south of
side
(of Anurait of he
dhapura), he,
6
on
clever
On kill. and
merit, bestowed
island the ruler did
the
Dakkhina-vihara.4
not to
men
commanded
in divers
All
the
'
kinds
of
vine-fruits
plant
places,
the fruit
king Amandiya,
flesh-melons
he
filling the
almsbowls
8
with
as a
called
',5and
o"
bestowing
these,
he with had
garments
support
to
gave
;
believing heart,
1
the
brotherhood
because
I.
e.
he
heightened
cf.
the
cone
crowning
218
the
thupa
at
the
top.
yard'). 'court-
For
ajira
Alinda
Abhidhanappadipika
is the See terrace also ed. the before passages
(ajira=Skt.
house-door,
VI. 36.
ajira
as
the
is
evident
C.V. VI.
from
D.
I.
89SO, 34.
M.V. i.
4, and
3. 5 and
3
14. 1.
(Fin. Pit.,
see
OLDENBERG,
to
Now
Ridi-vibara,
to 33.
28.
20. will
88.
Mahagamendi-vapi
immediate
probably be
of the
the
smaller
of and
5
which
is in
neighbourhood
the words
ruins
the
monastery.
Note
play
on
punnadakkhino
dakkhinassa Kumbhandaka
viharassa.
is, according
to
to
now
Abhidh. called
a
1030,
in
creeping-plant puhul
kin 'pumpSince
means our
which
(according
gourd
'.
SUBHUTI)
mamsak0
name
is
Sinh.
Evidently
the
is with
particular variety.
man
text
connects
king's
seems
it,a
da, which
of the
elsewhere
the
ricinus
plant,
to
be
synonym
above-mentioned.
xxxv.
21
The
almsbowls
Twelve
Kings
he
247 received
the
filled the
(with them)
name
Amandagamani.
His three younger years the
9 the princeKANIRAJANUTISSA, reigned brother,
in the
when city,
he had
He
10
decided
lawsuit after
in the crime
concerning the uposatha-house in the the cetiya,1 bhikkhns who were but sixty of high treason did the king order to be 1 1 all that was the Cetiyatheirs,2 upon
these
evildoers to be
flunginto
called Kanira.
Kanirajanu'sdeath Amanrjagamani's son, the prince12 The king built the Culagallaka13 CULABHAYA, reigneda year.
After vihara
on
the bank
of the
Gonaka-river
to
the
south
of the
capital.
After the the death of
Culabhaya his
reignedfour
younger months.
SIVAL!,
the the
14
15
daughterof Amanda,
Amanda's raised
ILANAGA dethroned Sivali nephew named in the capital. When, parasol (ofsovereignty) first year the king went (ofhis reign),
4
day, in
16
to the
Tissa-tank, many
deserted him
not he
even was
the ordered
king saw
that the
them
they,
they themselves,
to
road
to
Mahathupa, commanding
it
ran
stamp
he
set
where firmly,
to be their
beside And
the
tank, and
overseers.
came
full of anger
because
of this the
19
Lambakannas
king captiveand
administered festal
gave to the
and when together, they had taken the imprisonedhim in his palacethey themselves but
the government;
on
garments
the
king's consort
20
him
serving-womenand
him
21
message.
Judging
See This
now
from
must
2
be meant. note
the
to 23. 11.
river
reading. The Gona-nadi called Kalu-oya. By banking it up king Dhatusena 38. 42. the Kala-vapi(Kaluwaewa),Culavamsa
is, no
doubt,
the
correct
is the
structed con-
An
important
clan
in Lanka.
248
The
22
Mahavamsa
XXXV.
22
serving-women conveyed him thither and gave the stateelephantthe queen'swhole message : This is thy lord's son; his ; better is it for this (boy) to meet thy lord is in prison
'
23
death is the
by
thee than
by
the
that
24
25
With these words queen'scommand/ they laid him feet. for grief the elephant And at the down elephant's began to shed tears,and breaking to pieces the posts (to into the palaceand he pressedforward which he was chained) and when he had broken dashed againstthe gate with fury, him where the king sat,he made the door 1 in the room down
mount
26
upon
and
went
towards
on a
Mahatittha.
There
the
elephantmade
to the western
2 7 28
king embark
When
the
an
raised
at
three years on king had stayed and went by ship to Rohana. army
Having
landed in
the
haven
a
Sakkharasobbha
Then
the
came
king assembled
the
to
there
29
Rohana forthwith
mighty force.
out
king'sstate-elephant
Rohana
to do
of the he had
southern heard
Malaya
the
him the
30
service.
As
there
from Kapi-jataka2
Mahapaduma, who called Tuladhara,he, being won to faith dwelt in the (vihara) restored the Nagamahavihara and gave it in the Bodhisatta,
the extension
32
of
hundred
even
unbent
to
bows
it has
in
enlargedthe thupa
moreover, 33
what
4
he made the
and
king had
Near
army this
battle;
the
Lambakannas
34
the gate of
the
Kapallakkhandaon
of
a
While
are
dvara
means
principalgate
in the
building,kavaSee S.B.E.
tani
xx. a
the doors
3.
of the
separate rooms
interior.
p.
160, n.
Two
jatakasbear
355-358.
measure
268-270
and
3
iii, pp.
Dhanuisa
of
length equal
to
PARKER,
Ancient
4
Ceylon,p.
274.
In the
neighbourhood of Mahagama, PARKER, I. L, p. 388 foil. to which Saddhatissa,according to Probably the Duratissa-vapi,
33. 8, built
'
Mah.
monastery.
Karesi
here means,
I presume,
'to
restore
not
to build '.
xxxv.
48
The
Twelve Kings
249
the two
field of
was Harikarapitthi waged the battle between that brought destruction to both. (armies)
Since
their bodies
were
exhausted
by
the
sea-
king's men
his the and the
come
yieldedtheir ground,
name
therefore
and threw
pressed forward.
themselves
and down
Terrified thereat
upon
Lambakannas
their
up
they hewed
nave
heaped
them when
:
belly, high as
37
of the
(king's) waggonthe
wheel, and
this had
'
Slay them
in 38
to
39
king
raised the
into the
he, fullyarrayedin
from the
water-
his ornaments
withdrawn
sportsand reflected on
and he
two
thoughtof the
was
wroth
one
and
that he had attained, good-fortune Lambakannas his progress, 40 who had opposed and commanded that they be yoked two
to
the
behind
in city
another of them.
his
car, and
on
thus
did
he
enter
the
front
Halting
'
the threshold
on
of the 41
palacethe king gave the command strike off their heads/ soldiers, O lord of chariots thy chariot,
and hoofs be struck
to king recalled (theorder)
Here
are
this
oxen
threshold,
"
These
;
but
yoked to
horns
42
therefore
let their
his mother
by
and
the 43 that
commanded
their had
nose
and
toes be cut
district where
the
44 elephant
stayedthe prince allotted to the elephant ; and therefore the tract is called Hatthibhoga.2 ruler of the earth, full six years as king 45 So Ilanaga, reigned
in
Anuradhapura.
After the death of and
Ilanaga
seven
his
son
as
CANDAMUKHA
SIVA
46
reignedeight years
When the
months had
king.
a
lord of the
earth
constructed
tank
near
47
the
was
vihara
known from that
called Issara-
revenues
48
vihara.
1
250
49
Maliavamsa,
slain Candamukha his younger Siva in the
xxxv.
49
Having
the
Tissa-tank
50
as YASALALAKATISSA, reigned
51
52
53
54
eightmonths. Now of Datta the gate-watchman, named son a Subha, who himself a gate-watchman, bore a close likeness to was the king. And this palace-guard Subha did the king Yasalaand placeupon bedeck with the royal ornaments laka,in jest, the throne and binding turban about his own the guard's head, and taking himself his place,staff in hand, at the gate, he made the ministers as they paid homage to over merry
seven on (Subha) sitting
Lanka,
and
the
throne.
Thus
was
he
wont
to
do,
from
55
time
one
to time.
Now
: laughing
'
day Why
the
the
guard
this
cried out
to
the in
king, who
my
was
does
guard laugh
to
presence
'
56
And
SUBHA
guard
ordered
he himself
here reigned
57 58
six years
under
Subharaja.
noble
row
In both
the
great viharas1
Subharajabuilt
him.
Near
of
cells called
Uruvela
(he built)
and
at the
of the sprung
One whose
the
Lambakanna northern
Vasabha,
under
3 :
*
home
in the of
served province,
his One
60
a uncle,
commander Vasabha
declared
at
named
shall be
king/
the
king
that
time
manded com-
island who
bore the
name
of Vasabha
should
62
must commander, thinking: 'We Vasabha deliver up our to the king/ and having taken counsel with his wife (upon the matter) set out earlyin the morning to go to the king's residence. And the wife, to
be
slain.
The
guard Vasabha
his hand
1
2
but
betel into
According to the Tika Abhayagiri and Mahavihara. Gangante, by Ganga we should probablyunderstand the MahaKacchaka is the name wseliganga. The Tika has KacchakanadUire. of a ford in the Mahawaeliganga (seenote to 10. 58). s said to have uttered a similar was According to the Tika Yasalalaka prophecy publicly. with powdered chalk (cunna, Sinh. hunu). Betel is chewed
4
xxxv.
75
The Twelve
the
Kings
251
63 64
Now
when
commander, chalk, he
at the
sent
him
back
When
the commander's
spoke with
65
of money) and aided secretly, gave him a thousand (pieces to take flight. Vasabha and by went to the Mahavihara
was
he had
that he would
and 6G providedwith milk,food and clothes, again heard from a leper the certain prophecy be king, rejoicing he resolved : I will be a
'
rebel/
he
And
when
he
had his
found further
men
suited
went,
in seizing the
course
according to
Rohana, and
towards
instruction
cake,1 to
he 68 and had
himself
advanced,after
the
the needful
capital.When
mighty
army VASABHA
train,
con-
69
queredSubharaja in
in the
parasol (ofsovereignty)
70
capital. His uncle had fallen in battle. But his uncle's wife,named Pottha, who had first helped him, did king Vasabha raise to be queen.
Once his he
the lengthof 71 a questioned soothsayerconcerning and he told him life, secretly (thathe should live) just
years.
twelve
And
to
when
he
had
secret
given
the
him
thousand
72
keep the
greeted them Is there perchance, venerable sirs, a There is/ so did the brotherhood
with the hindrances
and
to
lengthenlife ?
'
'
73
teach
him,
way
to do
2
74 (to long life) ; giftsof strainers be given and giftsof dwellings and gifts for maintenance must the 75 of the sick, and in like manner O ruler of men, should of ruined buildings be carried out ; one must restoring
away
take
the
five precepts on
himself
and
keep them
carefully,
in is to be found story of Candagutta and the kapallapuva Mah. Tika, p. 1234 foil. : cf. GEIGER, Dip. andMah., pp. 39-40 ; RHYS ParisistaDAVIDS, Buddhist India, p. 269 ; JACOBI, Hemacandras
1
The
parvan,
2
viii.290- 296 ;
preface, p.
is among
58.
the
The
parissavana
strainingwater
who
use
is for
some
creature living
of the bhikkhu : its requisites is drinking shall not swallow that he who so perhaps be in it. may
252
Mahavamsa
one
xxxv.
76
76
and
should The
also
keep
:
'
the is
solemn
fast and
on
the
uposathaand
day/
77 78
king
said
It
well/
went
thence
carried out
all these
years
on
(duties).
that
went
Every
three
to
three
by
the
king
bestowed
the
garments
the whole
brotherhood he sent
in the
island; and
In
those
them.
to be
thirty-
two
79
honey
distributed,
but in
80
placesa lavish giftof mixed alms. sixty-four He had a thousand is, lamps lightedin four places ; that the Cetiya-pabbata, about the cetiya in the Thuparama, on about the Great Thupa and in the temple of the great
Bodhi-tree.
In the Cittalakuta and
over l he (vihara)
81 82
built ten
the whole
thupas buildings.From
beautiful
83
84
he built the vihara trust in a thera in the Valliyera-vihara pious called Mahavalligotta.And (moreover)he built the Anurarama near Mahagama and bestowed on it a thousand (vihara) and eight karisa2 (ofland) of (thevillage) Heligama. "When
he had
built the
Mucela- vihara
a
in T issavaddhamanaka of the
a
he
Alisara. (canal)
To and
the he
thupa in
built
an
Galambatittha
86
87
88
too, and uposatha-house the lamps he constructed a pond (yielding water to)a thousand 5 and karisa (ofland) In the Kumbhigave it to the (vihara). In like manner he built an gallaka-vihara uposatha-house. Issarasamanaka in the the king built an uposatha-house (vihara) here and in the Thuparama a thupa-temple.In
6
the Mahavihara
89
he
built
row
of cells
Catussala
beautiful
In (hall).
the
king made
images
The
four
Buddha-images
the
and
temple
same
for the
90
in the fair
of courtyard
great Bodhi-tree.
that
king'sconsort,
same as
named
Pottha, built in
note to 22. 23.
The
Tika:
see Cittalapabbata,
karisasahassakam.
situated
According to
Cf. 37. 48. In TURNOUR'S
puratthimadisabhage.
is the
name
view
sahassakarisa
of the
pond.
Cf. note
to 19. 61.
254
at the
Mahavamsa
same
XXXV.
103
time
given into
he
was
his
care
and
the
royal
insignia. When
103
killed
by
the brick-worker
a
took
her with
and daughter,
at work
house.
When
he
was
the
his food.
105
(one day) in a thicket of flowering kadambas, she in the seventh day of the state of who was saw an (ascetic) nirodha,1she the wise (maiden)gave him the food. When food afresh she carried the food to her she had then prepared asked the cause she was of the delayshe father, and when
When told her
106
And
full of
offer food
107
When to the thera. the thera had repeatedly he said to the maiden, looking out (of his trance) into come the future: 'When royal rank has fallen to thy lot then bethink thee,O maiden, of this place/ And forthwith the thera died.
108 109
110
king Vasabha when his son Vahkanasikatissa had to (full) wife for him. those When come age seek a fitting the (auspicious) who understood saw people signsin women the maiden in the brick-worker's village they told the king
Now the
did
"
king
thereon told
was
about
that
to
send
was
for her.
a
And
now
the
111
112 113
but king'sdaughter, that she was the daughter of Subharaja he showed by the the king gave her (in mantle and so forth. Rejoiced marriage) when to his son all had been duly provided.2 After Vasabha's death his son VANKANASIKATISSAKA reigned
she three river years the in
brick- worker
him
Anuradhapura.
But his consort
On
the
bank
of
the
Gona-
king
Vahkanasikatissaka
built the
Mahamatta
vihara
called
114
Mahamangala.
to build
a
collected money
115
After
Vahkanasikatissa's
death his
GAJABAHUKAGAMANI
Nirodha
or
samnavedayitanirodha
KERN,
is pp.
state
of
trance,
state
cessation
lasts
2
of consciousness.
seven
Manual,
55, 57.
If the
days it ends in death. whom Skt. krtamangala a over (f.a) means prayers person have been pronounced or who is arrayed with the auspicious things The for some pali undertaking. B.R., Skt. Wtb., s. v. mangala. k ataman in the same sense. gala must be taken
over
xxxv.
127
The
Twelve
Kings
255
reignedtwenty-two years. Hearkening to his mother's word 116 the Matuvihara the place of the thicket the king founded on His wise 117 of his mother. of floweringkadambas, in honour thousand mother to the great vihara a hundred (pieces gave
of
money)
of the
for the
a
plot of
land
and
vihara
he the
118
himself built
use
thupa
of stone
there he had
brotherhood,when
bought
various
owners.
He and
erected the
to the four
king had made the Gamanitissa-tank he bestowed it on the in food. He made vihara for maintenance a mantAbhayagirithereto for ling to the Maricavatti-thupaand gave (land) of the brotherhood, the use having bought it for a hundred
thousand vihara sala of money). (pieces and In the last year he founded
121
the
122
called Ramuka
built in the
citythe MahejasanaMAHAL123
the
years.
king's father-in-law
LAKA
reigned six
in 124
Nagadlpa
Salipabbata,in Bfjagama
in Tobbalanagapabbata,
seven
125
countryof
Girihalika:
ruler of
Rohana these
viharas
did
the
the
was.
time
though
it
In this way do the wise,doing many is riches that which with worthless their for blindness, ends the the the sake of
works
of
merit, gain
in
127
Here
The
Twelve
Kings',in
emotion
1
Mahavamsa.
serene
joy
and
of the
pious.
that the mother and
son
founded jointly in a generalway, that the king together In 116 it is said, the vihara. his mother, founded How with the Matuvihara. the undertaking The shared is explained in 117 and 118. mother was buys the plot of land and the monastery buildings constructs builds the son ; the
The
is meaning plainly
thupa
inmates
and
presents
the
necessary
lands
for the
maintenance
of the
of the
monastery.
CHAPTEE
XXXVI
THE
THIRTEEN
KINGS
1 2
AFTER
the
death
of
Mahallanaga
in Lanka. the
son
reigned twenty-four
the
years
wall
around
Mahavihara.
he
When
the built
king-
built gave
3 4
vihara
made
he
Mahamani-tank
the in vihara the called
it to
Moreover,
an
Bhatikatissa.
uposatha-house
made the
beautiful
Thuparama;
Filled with the
king
also
tenderness brotherhood
to
towards
beings
in
reverencing
lavish
the
the
6
protector of
commanded
almsgiving
community
After
the
of both death
l
of
Bhatikatissa
(his
years the with in
younger in the
brother)
island of
KANITTHATISSAKA
7
reigned eighteen
well
built
Lanka. in the
Since Bhutarama
he
was
pleased
for him
thera
Mahanaga
the the
he in the and
splendid fashion
he
a
Ratanapasada Abhayagiri
a
Abhayagiri.
a
Moreover,
built
in
wall
great parivena
that
besides
built
a
in
the
(vihara)called
for
;
In
place
for
he
temple
in
the
cetiya
like
the
manner
the
the the
Ambatthala-thupa
10
and
(he ordered)
away with
restoration
of
of
temple
Nagadipa.
the with
men
Doing
built all
the
row
boundary
of the cells
Mahavihara,
11
king
there
the
(called)
pasadas,
to
Kukkutagiri
the ruler
things provided.
twelve
In
Mahavihara
of
to
built and
great
he and
four-sided added
a a
12
admirable
the
see
beautiful, and
mantling
thupa
away the
of
the
Dakkhinavihara,
the
refectory besides,
And made Bhuta-
1 3
doing
moving
road
with wall
to
boundary
of the
to
Mahameghavana.
the He
of the the
Mahavihara
side, he
built
also the
14
leading
1
Dakkhinavihara.
The Cf.
'
name
means
the
younger
brother
Tissa
'.
note
to
33.
84.
xxxvi.
26
The
and the
Thirteen
Kings
and the
arama
257
of Nan-
ramavihara
Ramagonaka,
Gahgaraji,the well as the Kajamahavihara. In like manner he built in 16 as in the three following three places an viharas, uposatha-house, 17
the the Mandalagirika, also Kalyanikavihara,1 the
(vihara)
as
called
Dubbalavapitissa.
Kanitthatissa's death his
son,
After
who
was
known
18
KHUJJANAGA,
reigned one
year.
The
Khujjanaga KUNCANAGA, when he brother, reigned two During the great 20 years in Lanka. Ekanalika2 famine the king maintained without interruption 3 for five hundred bhikkhus. a great almsgiving appointed But the brother of Kuncanaga's consort,the commander of 21 and when 22 SIRINAGA, became a rebel againstthe king, troops,
with troopsand horses he moved to the on equipped and when he, in battle with the king'sarmy, had put 23 capital victorious he reignedover Lanka king Kuncanaga to flight, nineteen years in splendid Anuradhapura. When the king had 24 the stately Great Thupa, he had it gilded on placeda parasol fashion. He built the Lohapasada, 25 in admirable and splendid and he restored the steps it within five stories (height), keeping he
was
to the four
entrances
he had
When leadingto the great Bodhi-tree. and the pasada4 he commanded parasol sion, compasisland.
26
the throughout
note
to 1. 63.
certain
and
measure
Ancient
Coins
were
Measures
pasata of Ceylon, p.
=
'handfuls'.
17. that To
so
RHYS small
a
DAVIDS,
quantity
the
of
food
the
people
reduced
in
famine.
Thence
designation.
3
Mahapela,
The
to ekanalika.
may
Still Chattapasada think,chattapasadam. readingis,! the name of a building. Thus also be understood as TURNOUB, and ban
a
WIJESINHA.
5
my
edition. is obscure.
Ku
lam
in kind which
(ambana
was
is
levied from
certain
a
tribute
as
corn-measure),
258
27 two 28
Mahavamsa
the death with of
XXXVI.
27
After
Sirinagahis
son
TISSA and
a
years,
Because
he
first in this
country made
received the
law
aside
name
king Voharika-
tissa.
When
he had
heard the
dwelt in
the thera
30
Deva, who
of the)doctrine by (preaching Kappukagama, he restored five with the thera Mahatissa, who in almsgiving
set up
a
he commanded
Mucelathe
31
pattana.2 When
two
king Tissa3
and in the
had
in 'pavilion the
great viharas
eastern
temple of
great
Satta-
32
Bodhi-tree two
bronze
images,and
had
33
34
35 36
pannakapasada,goodlyto dwell in,he appointedevery month of money)5 for the Mahavihara. In the a thousand (pieces and in the (vihara) called Dakkhinamula, Abhayagiri-vihara called Kulalitissa, in the Maricavatti-vihara and the (vihara) in the Mahiyarigana-vihara, in the (vihara) called Mahagain the (viharas) and Kalyanika called Mahanagatissa, managa, he put parasols to their eight thupas. In the Mulanagasenavihara pativihara and and in the in the in the MaricavattiDakkhina(vihara), called Puttabhaga,in the (vihara) (vihara) and the named (vihara) he Tissa in
called Issarasamana
37
Naga-
dipaka;
built
an
in these
six viharas
put up
in uposatha-house
when
a
the
(vihara)called
38
For
over
the occasions
the whole
island
39
doctrine.
to 35. 83
near
Ariyavamsa6 was read he decreed regulargivingof alms,from reverence With the spendingof three hundred
the
Mahagama in the provinceof Rohana. of a is the name According to the Tika mucelapattana were placed. Such 'canoes' ship'made of bronze in which offerings served the same but of stone, which evidently are, in fact, purpose,
According
'
found
in the
ruins
of
Anuradhapura.
(BURROWS,
Buried
Cities
of
Ceylon,pp.
5
38, 43-44.)
If we read Following the reading Tissaraja mandapam. translate must 'a we pavilion (called) Tissarajamandapam
Tissaraja
4 6
him)'. (after
and
Abhayagiri-vihara. clothing. Lit. 'book of the holy ones,' probably the life-histories of men for read aloud publicly eminent in the Buddhist were Church, which the edification of the people.
I.e. the Mahavihara
According to the
Tika, articles of
xxxvi.
so
The
Thirteen
Kings
259
of money) this king, who was a friend to the (pieces freed from their indebtedness such bhikkhus were as doctrine, When in debt. he had decreed a great Vesakha-festival,1 40 he bestowed the three garments on all the bhikkhus dwelling 2 and keeping 41 the Vetulya-doctrine in the island. Suppressing thousand heretics in check
by
his minister
he Kapila,
made
the true
glory.
known as ABHAYANAGA, who 42 king'syounger brother, the queen'slover,being discovered (in his guilt) took was for fear of his brother and went with his serving-men43 flight
to
Bhallatittha and
and feet cut
as
if wroth off.
with that
hands
And
might bring
here and the
about
44
division in the
most
kingdom,he
he
left him
behind
took his
example of the dog,3and himself took shipat the same placeand But the uncle, to the other shore. went Subhadeva, went to his friend he wrought the king and making as if he were division in the kingdom. And that he might have knowledge of this, Subhadeva Abhaya sent a messenger thither. When
saw
45
46
47
him
he loosened
round (theearth)
as
about
with when he
he walked
(to hold)but
then The
struck
it down
did he threaten
the 48
forth.
And and
Abhaya.
with him
when
Damilas
marched On
there
against
king
50
the
1 2
of this the
sometimes Vaipulya-sutras,
also
called
Vaitulya-sutras,
KERN, Manual, part of the Northern Mahayanist Canon. de K. Ak. Wetenvan Mededeel'mgen van p. 5 ; idem, Verslagen en Afd. 312 D. 4e VIII, p. Letterk., R., Amsterdam, 1907 schapen, foil., POUSSIN, J.E.A.S. 1907, p. 432 foil. ; WINDISCH, (seeL. DE LA VALLEE Abh. d. k. Sachs. Gesellsch. d. W., xxvii,p. 472 ; OLDENBERG, Archiv xiii, 1910,p. 614). fur Eeligionswissenschaft, 3 the to when he was about to embark the on Tika, According ship, he had chided and punished a dog that he had with him. followed Nevertheless the animal him, wagging his tail. Then he
which form said to his 'Even followers, unchangeablefidelity.1
as
this
clog, you
must
stand
by
me
with
260
took
Mahavamsa
xxxvi.
51
51
and, with his consort, mounting-a horse he came flight, brother pursued him, and when Malaya. The younger had slain the king in Malaya,he returned with the queen as reignedeightyears in the capital king. king set and Bodhi-tree,
The
up
a a
to
he and
52
vedi
o"
stone
round
about
the great
53
54 55
in the courtyard of the Lohapapavilion And sada. obtaininggarments of every kind for twice a hundred thousand of money), he distributed gifts of (pieces the island. on clothing amon'g tne brotherhood of bhikkhus After Abh'aya's of his brother death, SIRINAGA, the son
Tissa, reignedtwo
wall round about build in the
When he had restored the years in Lanka. the great Bodhi-tree, then did this king also
1
56
sand-court
of the
temple of
the
great BodhiHam-
of the
and
son Sirinaga's
reignedfor
one
year
58
59
lived in friendship at time) three Lambakannas Mahiyangana : Samghatissa and Samghabodhi, the third they were being Gothakabhaya. When coming (to Anurawho had dhapura)to do service to the king, a blind man the gift of prophecy, being by the edge of the Tissa-tank,
(At
60
cried out
at the sound
of their
'
: footsteps
'
The
61
Abhaya,who heard this he asked (themeaning of the saying). The last, will other uttered yet again (the prophecy). 'Whose race asked then endure?' again the other, and he answered:
"
As
That
last.' When
he had
heard
that
he went
(on)
62
63
64
into the capital When come they were (others). of the the three, being the close and trusted (counsellors) service about the king. king,remained in the royal When had slain king Vijaya in his royal they together consecrated SAMGHATISSA, the compalace the two (others) of the troops, mander as king. Thus crowned did Samghawith
1
Valikatala
is
employed
in
here
in
the
same
way
as
vali-
kangana
*
in 33. 31. is
Parato
paraphrased
the
Tika
by dakkhinadisabhage,
cf. Mah.
25. 50.
262
Mahavamsa
XXX
VI.
77
up
77
by
that the
even
god
I will
As
nevermore
rise up
hence,
though I
the ruler of
the earth
78
laythere
did
not
thus the
island of
god poured down rain forthwith on Lanka, revivingthe wide earth. And even
up
yet rise
Then
because
he
was
not
in the water.
79
closed
as
up
now
the
swam
swimming pipes by
in the in
which
water
flowed away.
rose
a
he
piousking
avert
news
'
up.
By
his
compassion did he
this way
80
the fear of
:
famine
in the island.
At had
the
Rebels
are
the rebels
81
broughtbefore him, but he did he send secretly for bodies of dead men, the people by the burningl of these he vo
rebels.
had
come as
82 83
yakkha
eyes
one see
Ratakkhi,2who
and did but
made hither,
people here
and
there.
If the
peopledid
of the them
they
forthwith,and
heard
without
84
fear. the
When
king
of their distress he of
'
in the chamber
86
87
88
the Till I have seen : eight uposatha vows,3 (and said) yakkha I will not rise up/ By the (magic)power of his to him. To the king's (question) : piety the yakkha came Who It is I, (theyakkha)/ art thou ? he answered : Why 'Give them not! dost thou devour my subjects? Swallow said the other. then only the peopleof one region/ up to me he came And gradually beinganswered : That is impossible/ to one (man) only. The (king) (demandingever less and less)
' ' ' '
'
'
spoke :
devour
'
No
other
With
can
give
:
up
'
to thee ; take
thou
me
and other
me/
the words
That
is
the impossible/
He
had
the
corpses
burnt
in
and fire.
thus
inspired
condemned
by
to
impale '.
I.e.
which
of
a
3
'Red-eye.' Perhaps this episodein chap. VI fever (jararoga) beginning with inflammation
relates
scarlatina?
Cf. with
this SPENCE
HARDY,
Eastern
Monachism,
p. 237.
xxxvi.
103
The
Thirteen
an
Kings
in offering the the every
263
village.
he the
90 89
It
is
well/
that
said
decreed
the
whole
entrance
island of
and these he gave up to him. villages, compassionateto all beings, by the man/ the fear pestilence was brought to an end. The
Thus
by
the
great
king's treasurer, the minister Gothakabhaya,who had 91 marched from the north against the capital. become a rebel,
Taking
the south
A
man
his water-strainer
with
him
not
the
king
fled alone
by
92
bring harm
to others.
93
road When
eaten
entreated
he, rich
he
bearinghis food in a basket,along that the king again and again to eat of his food. had strained the water in compassion, and had
these
94
spoke
words,
to
show
kindness
to
the
other
'I
am
it to would
king Samghabodhi; take thou my head and show Gothabhaya,he will give thee much gold.' This he
the
not
even
95 96
do, and
as
the
king
And
to
render the
him
up
the and
97
ghost
showed gave with
he
sat.
other
the
head of
it to him
and
out
he, in
the
amazement
spirit, king
98
due
care.
Thus
GOTHABHAYA,
over
also known
as
Meghavannabhaya, ruled
built
a
Lanka.
when he had had
at pavilion
the 99 did
100
palace and
thousand and
adorned
it,even
with
there
he
invite a daily
to
eight bhikkhus
kinds,both
alms
hood with
be
seated,and
excellent and
them rejoicing
of
foods
many
soft,
101
lavishly upon them. thus. Twenty-one days did he continue (togive) of stone; In the Mahavihara he built a splendidpavilion he renewed3 of the Lohapasada. He set up a vedl the pillars
bestowed
102 103
the offerings particularly brought to the subordinate local sprites, "c. divinities, devatas,tutelary genii, Mahasatta is used elsewhere of a Bodhisatta. as designation 3 Lit. 'He he had set them In Skt. changed them.' up when has the same parivartayati (B.E. s. v. vart with pari) meaning.
By
ball
are
understood
264
of
stone
MaMvamsa
for the
xxxvi.
104
great Bodhi-tree
and
an
arched four
gateway
corners
at the
northern
at the
(of
at
the
104 105
At the
he made
set up
a
three throne
a
statues
of stone
and
gate he
of
tract
stone.
To
the
west
of the of
Mahavihara
he
laid out
of land
106
and the over meditation,2 buildings. In the Thuparama be restored and also in the
island
he
restored the
he ordered
107
108
called Manisoma, and in the (Mahinda); 3 and in the arama and in the Maricavatti Thuparama, in the Manisomarama in the vihara called Dakkhina and moreover (he (vihara), the uposatha-houses. And he founded also a new restored) vihara called Meghavannabhaya and at the (timeof) festal
at the consecration offering's
O
109
of the vihara
he distributed the
six
garments
to
thirtythousand
assembled.
he
bhikkhus
dwellingon
the
whom island,
he had
In like
110 111
manner
then appointed
great Vesakha-festival,4
yearlydid he distribute the six garments to the brotherof heresyhe hood. Purifyingthe doctrine by suppression in the Abhayagiri in seized bhikkhus dwelling sixty (vihara), trine 5 and were number, who had turned to the Vetulya-doc
and
112
like
thorn
in the
doctrine of the
Buddha, and
them
to
when the
he had further
excommunicated
coast.
113
them,6 he banished
from the Cola
A
was
bhikkhu
who
versed in the
so
and spirits,
had forth,
himself
to
thera banished
See
note
CHILDEBS,
in
a
padhanam,
for monks
says: in
cloister
monastery
to walk
attain
3
arhatship.'
Therambatthalaka
of Mahinda is without
on
The
built
in memory
the
doubt
the
34. 71.
*
to 32. 35.
Cf. note
to 36. 41.
See
7
110. to
an
Nissito,
who
stands
older
monk
in the
relation of
pupil to
teacher
(nissaya).
xxxvi.
123
The
he
came
Thirteen
Kings
againstthe
thrust
265
bhikkhus
and thither,
hither
embittered
(bhikkhu)had
himself
into
an
114
Thuparama and had refuted there the words of the thera living in the parivenaof Samghapala,namely the 115 thera Gothabhaya, uncle of the king on the mother's side, 1 16 who had addressed the king with his (old) he became a name, well The king who was house.1 constant guest in the king's pleasedwith him entrusted his eldest son Jetthatissa and his
assemblyin
younger second
to the
son
Mahasena,
to
the
bhikkhu.
And
he made bore
the
117
his
ill-will
bhikkhu.
his father's death JETTHATISSA would the became
not go
After
king'sfuneral
brother his younger king himself proceededforth,and placing at the head and then the body following close behind, and 120 then the ministers whilst he himself was at the end (of the he, when his younger brother and the body were procession), had the gate closed immediately behind them, and 121 forth, gone he commanded that the treasonous ministers be slain and (their impaled on stakes round about his father's pyre. bodies) Because of this deed he came the Cruel'. 122 by the surname But the bhikkhu Samghamitta, for fear of the king, went hence 123
'
rama ThupaI believe that we must brieflydescribed. supply the and that we have to object rajanam to ranno namenalapato, understand the passage in the following A solemn assembly of way. the brotherhood held in the Thuparama to settle the dissensions was between the various parties. The king himself was present. In this assembly Samghamitta exposed his heretical doctrine, speaking the monks in convincing of the Mahavihara, and he succeeded against the king. The thera Gothabhaya, the king'suncle, after whom the tried to bring the king round was to the king himself named, orthodox But he spoke urgently to him, even party. although him with his not addressing tenderly, royal title Meghavannabhaya, but with his familiar name Gothabhaya (Tika : tata Gothabhaya ti .),he did not succeed, and Samghamitta even Gothabhaya the king'skulupaka. became On this see note to 30. 40.
passage
as course
The
is very
obscure
the
of events
in the
is too
266
Mahavamsa
the time of his
to
XXXVI.
124
at
coronation, when
the further
coast
he
had
taken the
counsel time of
with
Mahasena,
awaiting
stories
1
(Mahasena's)consecrating.
124
He
up
to
seven
the his
splendid father,so
When he
Lohapasada,
125
had worth
a
been
a
left unfinished
by
it
was
koti
worth
of (pieces)
money.
offered
it the
there
jewel
sixty thousand,
to
Jetthatissa
Manipasada.
two
126
He
built
offered
three he
preciousgems
to
the of
Great the
Thupa,
and
he
gateways
had built
the
temple
great Bodhi-tree.
ruler
127
When
gave
the
vihara
it to the brotherhood
128
129
The
great and
from
beautiful
placed of
in the
old
by Devanampiyatissa in
take
away
the
Thuparama
king
up
Jetthatissa
arama
the
Thuparama,
bestowed
130
Pacinatissapabbata.He
the
festival of
on
the
and
secrating con-
the
vihara
pasada
the six
(held)
131
great Vesakha-ceremony he
the
distributed
garments
among
132
brotherhood, in
the of
number
merit, beginning
years.
building of
the
the
source
of manifold of many
an
of
man
merit,is at
of with
the
same
time
never
the
source
pious heart
will
enjoy
it
as
if it
were
sweet
food
mixed
poison.
'
Here
ends
the the
The
Thirteen
Kings ', in
emotion
Mahavamsa, pious.
is used
compiled for
the
serene
joy
and
of the
Vippakata
we
an
interrupted discourse.
102
Here Tika
have
the the
interrupting
word
cd.).
The
renders
correctly nitthanam
agatam
aparinit-
thapitam.
CHAPTER
XXXVII
KING
MAHASENA1
AFTER
SENA
king
Jetthatissa's
death, his
as
younger And
brother
to consecrate
MAHAhim
1 2
ruled
twenty-seven
thera he had of
years
king.
came
as
king,
the
Samghamitta
heard
thither
from
the further
coast,
When
when
the
out
time
the
(of
Jetthatissa's and
death).2
the other
would
won
he
carried
various the
ceremonies fain
kind, the
destruction the the O
(bhikkhu) who
Mahavihara The dwellers
we are
bring
to
about
king
himself
do
not
with
words
"
teach
(true)vinaya,
and
to
a
those
a
(true) vinaya,
Whosoever
king',
food
a
he
established
royal
in
penalty
the
gives
to
bhikkhu
a
dwelling
Mahavihara
is liable
fine
of
hundred
(pieces of
money)/
The
bhikkhus into
dwelling
abandoned Thus
in
the the
was
Mahavihara, Mahavihara,
our
who and
thereby
went to
fell
want,
and
Malaya
nine
in the
Rohana. and
for
years
empty
of those
bhikkhus unwise
dwelt
Mahavihara.
And
the
persuaded
breaks off.
the
After
later 198
verse
50
in who
chapter
continued
to
37
old
Mahavamsa carried
on
But and
the added
=
author,
verses,
work,
the
are
this
chapter
giving
\
the
subscription Sattarajako
in
'the
Seven
Kings
(However,
Jetthatissa
there
reality six
"
Mahasena,
Kittisiri-Meghavanna, Mahanama.)
the usual Our memorial
to
was
II, Buddhadasa,
has thus
no
Upatissa
II,
and
section
verse,
(verses 1-50)
nor a
conclusion, neither
substance of
verses
subscription.
to
The of the
former the
ought
but the work On
have clothed
corresponded
in the
a
that
closing
The
Dip.,
more
artistic
verses
form.
put
thus whole
last
two
of
the
of
Dip.
the
at
own one.
the
new
part Dip.
poem
GEIGEE,
and
Mah.,
18-19.
Tika:
kalam
natva,
Jetthatissassa
matakalam
janitva.
268 unwise
when
Mahavamsa
XXXVII.
king
he had
'
"
Ownerless
leave
land from
belongsto
the
the
to
king/ l
and
gained
king
destroythe
set heart,
on
his
do
so.
11
12
Samghamitta, the ruthless of the king, and (with minister Sona, a favourite servant the splendid Lohapasada him) shameless bhikkhus, destroyed of the) the (material stories high, and carried away seven and various buildings from hence to the Abhayagiri(vihara),
An
adherent
of
the
thera
by
13
means
2 buildings
that
were
borne
away
from
the Mahavihara
became Abhayagiri-vihara
rich in build-
the thera Samghamitta, ings. Holding fast to his evil friend, and to his servant Sona,the kingwrought many a deed of wrong.
14
15
king sent for the great stone image from the Paclnaand set it up in the Abhayagiri(vihara). tissapabbata (vihara) He set up a buildingfor the image,a temple for the BodhiThe
tree,
16
beautiful
relic-hall and
four-sided
and hall,3
he
restored the
thera
to
see.
Then by the ruthless called Kukkuta.4 (parivena) made stately the Abhayagiri-vihara Samghamitta was
17
The
minister named
Meghavannabhaya, the
friend of the
18
19
wroth with him was king,who was busied with all his affairs, and when for destroying the Mahavihara a rebel, ; he became he had gone to Malaya and had raised a great force,he a pitched by the Duratissaka-tauk.5 camp he When the king heard that his friend was thither, come
assamiko
and
pathavisami
'owner
Pasada
bhikkhus
means
habitations
here
of and
the
in the of which A
Mahavihara,
was
which
were
demolished
the material
3
Catu(s)sala.
Mah.
is is
mentioned,
4
15.
and
35. 88.
In
our
passage
the
word
the
erected by Kukkutagiri-parivena
Kanitthatissa. See
B
36. 10.
See
note
the
central
from Meghavannabhaya evidently marches the province of of Malaya to secure mountain-district to 33. 9.
Rohana.
270
of monks
to
Mahavamsa
do
away not
xxxvii.
35
bhikkhus
35
would
to
But
now,
make
the seek
and since the boundaries, do this,they abandoned the vihara. of the boundary void of effect, shifting1 with their
to
do
certain this,
bhikkhus
hid themselves
places.1
Mahavihara the other
Thus the
was
the
abandoned
bhikkhus
for nine
months
f
by
will
bhikkhus,
to
and
thought:
when
We
37
begin
to
came
shift the
this
attempt
bhikkhus
But
given
up,2 the
38
dwelt
again in
a
the Mahavihara.
within
of bhikkhus
offence of the
39
gravest kind3
received
to be
Tissa, who
had
the
complaint touching an raised against the thera was (Jetavana)vihara. The high
known minister,
who decided (thematter)excluded just, right and law, from the order, albeit
king built also the Manihira- vihara 4 and founded three viharas, destroyingtemples of the (brahmanical) gods: the Gokanna (vihara), (and (and another vihara)in Erakavilla,
The
"
in third)
the
of village
the Brahman
Kalanda
(moreover
the
the Abhayagiri Dagaba. mistakenly (called) the present Jetavana On the other hand Dagaba to the north of the citybelonged to the Abhayagiri. Cf. note 33. 81. 1 of the Mahavihara, possession Namely, within the old boundaries of which thus formally maintained. Tika: was eva antosimaya hutva tasmim thane annatthaagantvatasmim paticchanna niliyimsu. 2 remaining behind raised a protest. Evidently since the bhikkhus Antimavatthu is a matter that involves expulsion from the
thupa
of
which
was
order.
4
Cf. M.V.
1.
Now
Minneriya, the
to the Tika
of
tank
(see below,
v.
47)
on
not
far
from
5
Polonnaruwa.
According
the
is situated in Rohana.
the The
coast Tika
of
'Eastern
:
Sea',
the
then
adds
alayam
sasanam
sabbattha
he
established the
so
temples of
of Siva and
Buddha,
forth '.
xxxvil.
50
King
Mahasena
and built the
271
he
built)the Migagama-vihara
To the
Gahgasenakapabbata
Dhatusenapabbata
in Kokavata.
42
(vihara). (vihara) ;
He and built
west, he
founded
the
the the
king
great vihara
the and
a
Thuparama-vihara
Kalavela ruined
1
the two
called nunneries, he
Uttara built
of the he
yakkha
thupa, and
To
one
the island
satn-
restored
many
buildings.
alms and for
thousand
at
a
45
a
ghattheras2
thousand
he distributed
theras,
cost
of
of money), (pieces
to all
(thebhikkhus
no
he
tributed) dis-
yearly a garment.
of food and To make drink.
There
is
record
of his
gifts46
47
(theland) more
made
sixteen the
tanks, the
Dhammabesides that and
are
Challura, and
Kokavata6 and the
(tank)named
the
48
and
Vahana,
Rattamalakandaka,7
tank
Tissavaddhamanaka,8
the
Velangavitthi,9that
Mahagallaka,
the
Clra-tank These
Mahadaragallaka
sixteen tanks. On Pabbatanta. Thus did he
and the
Kalapasana-tank.
he built the
Gafiga
great canal
much
named
gather to himself
The Mahavamsa
much
merit and
guilt.
is ended.
communities
of bhikkhus.
Cf. 3. 4 ; 4. 56.
Khanugama
36. 3 the
Mahamani-tank
is ascribed
to
Bhatikatissa.
6
Cf. the
in 37. 42.
name
Maharatmala Central
of the of
great Padaviya-lake in
Arch. also Ratmala-tank
the
North of
Province,
of
north
Anuradhapura.
a
Survey
2i
is,however, MULLER,
miles
Anuradhapura.
district of this
same
ED.
Ancient
Inscriptionsof
Ceylon,
8
A A
village or
vihara
name see
is mentioned 33. 8.
in 35. 84.
of the
name,
APPENDIX
THE
DYNASTY
OF
MAHASAMMATA
ON
Mah.
p. 258 I should
=
Rajav. p.
like to Buddhist
4 foil.
give a
ture, litera-
reference to two
parallel passages
l
in northern
which
and
to the
these
sources
comparedwith
"
1
2
Ed. See In
SENART, i,p.
the Mahavastu
son
348. Buddha
(1907), p.
Ulkamukha
11 foil. but
tradition not
Dulva
T
Opura
is
so.
is said to
be the eldest
but in the
again the
former
274
In the Mahavastu p. 11
Appendix
1. 3488-3528 follows
a
A
in the Dulva
and
(ROCKHILL,
there foil.)
story about
Sakya
mate legiti-
and
the
sons
his
country as he wishes
of
a
the throne
to
Jenta
concubine. mother
He
is thus has
promise into
Iksvaku's
to wife
sons
which
the
of Jenta
withdraw
there take
Afterwards
are
Kapilavastu is built by
them.
descendants
the
Sakyas.
This in Sum.
p. 84.1
storywas
T. p. 258 In
also known
foil, and
to
the Theravadins.
to
It
occurs
in the Tlka
the
Mahavamsa,
the M.
T. mentions
only
four
sons
who
were
banished
from
to
the
country ;
to whom
give way.
relates the
therefore
Further
on
(I.p.
35215
Mahavastu is
a
story of
banished
a
leperand
Here Kola
she had
is cured and
is found
by
of
too
hermit
formerly been
the
king
he
Benares
withdrawn
suffered from
from these two
leprosy. He
sprang
was
the
This Sum.
too legend
T. p. 260
and foil,
of Iksvaku.2
Dip. Mah.) as
and
(=
Slhahanu
sons :
has four
(1)Suddhodana
klodana
the Buddha's
(4) Amrtodana.
Sukkodana and
Suddhodana,
Dhotodana,
which
of the
Dip.and Mah.,
3
Accordingto
is this
1
Dip. Mah.
the Buddha's
tree genealogical
"
Mahavamsa-Tika, ed.
BATUWANTUDAWE
and
NANISSARA
BHIK-
SHU,
9
GEIGER, Dip. and Mah., p. 38. The Rdjdvaliya, ed. (in English) by B. GUNASEKARA, 1900, pp. 11-13. GEIGER, l.l., p. 95. 3 See also RHYS DAVIDS, Buddhism (1910), p. 52.
1895.
Colombo,
Colombo,
The
Devadahasakka
Dynastyof Mahasammata
Jayasena
I
275
Anjana
Kaccana,
married
to Sihahanu
Yasodhara.
married to
Anjana
Suddhodana,
married
to
Maya
I
!__
Bodhisatta
Maya's father and lived in married to a Koliyaprincess Subhuti who was this is the Anjana of the Mah., and the Devadaha. Plainly while the Mah. (2. 18-19) Suprabuddhaof the Dulva (p.14), of Anjana and brother of takes Suppabuddha to be the son borne by the Maya. Perhaps Suprabuddha was a surname
The
Mahavastu
I. 35515
foil,
names
as
For
the
whole
subject cf.
also
SPENCE
HARDY,
Manual
of
Buddhism,
p. 125 foil.
APPENDIX
THE
BUDDHIST
SECTS
(On
RHYS DAVIDS.
p. 409
Mali. Sects
5. of
"
1-13)
the
'The
Buddhists/ J.R.A.S.,
of Buddhist
sur
1891,
foil.;the
p. 1
same,
Schools
Belief/
le Boud-
J.R.A.S.
1892,
foil.; MINAYEFF,
Recherche*
(SB.)occur
besides Mah.
5 in the
Dip.
P.T.S.
5.
39
(ed. STRONG,
M. (ed.
1891),pp. 96-97,
BODE,
P.T.S.
the
6-9.
Sinhalese
Nikayamention Special
5 and
mentioned
in the
Kathavatthu
but
was
are
in the
commentary
Buddha-
thereon, mentioned
above,
which
composed by
ghosa.2
All the Southern with
1
Buddhist
lists are
in
complete agreement
one
another.
to this assertion
I adhere the
(Mah.
error
5.
278)
as
statement
That of the
objection raised by
is based upon
an
MINAYEFF has
(Recherches, p. 200) to
been and
work
already
RHYS
demonstrated
by
OLDENBERQ,
Z.D.M.G.,
Kvu.
52,
Co.
p.
633,
DAVIDS,
Dialogues,
i,p.
2
xviii.
Quoted by
me
as
278
We
Appendix
may
B
: designation
"
consider
HEMAVATA
as
synonymous NB.
la. SB.
HAIMAVATA distinctions In
in
are
W. made
253, VB.
between
300, R. 184.
the Sthaviras
are were
considered
a
separate sects.
Probably the
MAHASAMGHiKA.1
2. SB.
NB. 258
their
doctrine particular
W.
foil.
They
the
second
GOKULIKA
NB.
GOKULIKA
341
Tar.
301 ; St. J.
is
missingin
:
"
Ch.
also in W.
its
place
here appears
(W. 252, 258) or KTJKKULIKA in St. J. 344 (list 300). Similarly V), the
and the two
(W. 249;
Kaukkutikas
are
expressly
said 341
(list IV)
who
do not
appear
in
the tradition
Buddhists.
They are
=
mentioned
immediately
In R. 182
St. J.
V.)
they are
to be found
justin
in the
the
placewhere
=
should Tar.
expect
list I and
on list, whilst,
the other
the L.
missing. Lastly,Tar. says, 273, that and Ch. 2 Kaukkutapadas are the same. in Bamian (BEAL, i. 50).
=
SB.
EKAVYOHARIKA
NB.
EKAVYAVAHARIKA
(W. 249,
252; VB.
300, 301; R.
344
=
Accordingto Tar. 273 the is employed as of the Mahaname a generaldesignation samghikas. Their doctrines accordingto W. 258 are the
334, 337, 341,
same
as
listsI-V).
those of
2, 3a and 3b.
and
In
St. J. 340
Aisvarikas, are
(list II) the Karmikas, besides the Yogacaras reckoned as belonging to the Mahasamghikas.
The
5.
Buddhist
NB.
Sects
PRAJNAPTIVADIN
279
(W. 251; list IV ; missing in VB. R. 182 ; Tar. 271 ; St. J. 341 the 300 ; St. J. lists I-III, V, also in R. 185). They are doctrines see W. 268, Si-chi in VB. 301. For their particular
SB. PANNATTIVADIN
=
=
R. 189.
6.
SB. R.
=
BAHULIKA
NB.
BAHUSRUTIYA St. J.
see
(W. 250;
W.
268
VB.
300,
189.
301;
345
7.
182;
Tar.
250, 252;
For
=
their doctrines
NB. CAITIKA
R.
or
CAITYIKA
are
(W. 251,
a
252; VB.
branch
are
300, 301
; R.
said to be
of the
R. Gokulikas,
252.
In Tar. 273
they
are
the
=
Purvasailas.
St. J.
Corresponding
to them
the Jetikas
8.
Jetasailas.
NB.
SB.
MAHIMSASAKA R.
MAHIS"ASAKA.
to
accordingto
to
186;
Tar.
271,
254;
For
be reckoned
are
as a
the
said to be
the
Sarvastivadins
VB.
300,
them
301
; St.
see
335, 185,
their doctrines
280
foil.
2 mentions
in Swat
(BEAL,i,
(BEAL,i,p. 226) authority 121). According to the same himself to be of the school the Bodhisattva Asahga professed
M.,
but went
over
of the
to the
Mahayana.
or
9. SB.
NB.
301
VATS!PUTRIYA
; R.
VASAPUTRIYA
300,
J.
lists
I-IV).
253,
They
VB.
are
said to be
St. J. 335
branch
of the Sarvastivadins
in W.
301,
Buddhist R.
tradition
a
(list II),while accordingto the southern the relation is reversed;and theyare said,
of the Sthaviras beside the them very
as
186, to be
Sarvastivadins.
slightly.The
an
Pali form
to
must
be understood
assimilation
the
name
of the
NB.
DHARMOTTARIYA
the
Dharmakarikas
S.,are
also as said,
in the southern
280
to tradition,
Appendix B
be R.
a
branch
of the
300, 301;
342,
11. 345
=
331, 335,339,
SB.
BHADRAYANIYA
are
also
branch
Vatsiputrlyas (W. 253; VB. 300, 301; R. 186; Tar. lists II-V), and stand 271,273; St. J. 335, 339, 342, 345 close relation (R. 194) to the Dharmottariyas in especially from whom, according to St. J. 331 (list I), they had taken
of the
=
their rise.1
For
10
and
11, R. givesthe
common
designation
'
Mahagiriya.
12. SB. CHANDAGARIKA
a
=
NB.
SANNAGARIKA
those from
254
=
branch of the
Tar.
(W. Vatslputriyas
11
VB. lists
300;
In
R.
271;
but
(W. 279).
appear,
I, III,V
the
there
them,
Abhayagirivasins.
=
SAMMITIYA 9
NB.
SAMMATIYA,
R.
taking their
rise
like
10-12, from
(W. 254;
345
=
they are
and
Tar. 272
I-V). Accordingto R. 182 or KURUKULLAKA, (13a)AVANTAKA (13b) that according to the view of the Sarvaand the Vatsiputrlyas of the
lists
Sammatlyas. They are the Mi-li in VB. 301. They must have been a widely spread them school of the as a sect; Ch. 2 mentions repeatedly Hlnayana (seeBEAL, ii. 14, 44, 45, 186, "c.); accordingto Ch. 3 (TAKAKUSU, p. xxiv) they fall into four subdivisions India and in Campa (Cochinand are spread over Western Co. in a whole series of passages The Kvu. China) especially. with their doctrines. On those see R. 194. is occupied
14. to
SB. W.
SABBATTHAVADIN
NB.
SARVASTIVADIN.
339
ing Accord-
(list III) and 342 or (list IV), they are also called (14a)HETUVADA HETUVIDYA, and according said to R. 182, also Muruntaka, and they are (W. 253, R. 182, Tar. 271) to be, beside the Vatsiputriyas,
1
253, VB.
301, St. J.
It should is made
be
observed,however,
its rise from
that
one
in the
list
I,in
school
to take
the
mentioned
before it.
The
one
Buddhist
Sects
The
281
statements
of the
schools principal
of the Sthaviras.
of the Chinese
Ch. held
to
pilgrimsagree with this. (BEAL,i,p. Ixx)states that the Vinaya of the S. is be particularly and agrees in essentials with correct
is observed in China. Ch. 2
that which
branch
of
the
Hlnayana;
the
Bodhisattva
of this school. S.
were
(TAKAKUSU, p. xxiv)the
and
Mahasamghikas
Buddhist
Sammatiyas) one
themselves
principal
groups Kaand
and
Eastern
TAKAKUSU,
1904-1905, pp.
foil.
I will mention
I4b. SB.
are
VlBHAJJAVADIN
NB.
VlBHAJYAVADIN.
These
mentioned
Mah.
5. 271.
this
as
from
the
relation
of
45
the
list in Tar.
5.
271, 272
the
l
Ceyloneselist
has
(Dip. 5.
that
foil. ; Mah.
name
6-9),OLDENBEIIG
concluded
Maha-
V. is another
In the
this is said in plain terms.2 bodhivamsa, besides, However, to the accordingto Tar. 272, the V. are reckoned as belonging in R. 182 beside which Sarvastivadins, as a they appear Sthavira embrace school. the and
sects
Accordingto
of the
R.
guptakas
Tar.
272, 274
identified with If
we resume
in TAMRASATIYAS. The last named are (14C) counted as belonging and to the Sarvastivadins the Samkrantikas and (14d) the UTTAIIIYAS. these data it appears that Vibhajjavadin much
a
denotes
not
so
sect particular
but
rather
phical philosoup
tendency,which,
1
for the
Theravadins,was
bound
therdnam
sambandhavacanattd
ti vuccati. vibhajjavddo
iheravado The
same
ti,vibhajjavddind
conclusion
may
munindena
desitattd
be drawn
from
Mah.
Tlka, 948,992.
282
with
Appendix
their
B
and
to
conception of
l orthodoxy
which
their
laid claim.2
=
SB.
we
DHAMMAGUTTIKA
have
NB.
DHARMAGUPTAKA.
as
They
the ViSt. J. of the
just seen,
are
reckoned
belonging to
VB.
and bhajyavadins
said
=
345
300, 301;
a
to
be
branch
192.
their doctrines
=
W.
283, R.
KASSAPIYA
NB.
KASYAPIYA, belongingalso
to
Vibhajyavadins.They took their rise in the Sarvastivadins (W. 255 ; VB. 300, 301 ; St. J. 335, 340, 342, 346 lists II-V) and are also called (16a)SUVARSAKA (W. and
=
the
St. J.
Tar.
271).
For
their
doctrines
see
17. SB. of
SAMKANTIKA
NB.
branch
the
Sarvastivadins
Tar.
271,
Their
272; R.
other
name
lists 183
;
II-IV).
Tar.
Uttariya (R.
273), also
342
=
(seeunder 14b). In W. 256, St. J. 336, Tamras'atlya lists II-IV they are identified with the Sautrantika.
18. SB. this school
SUTTAVADA
are
NB. clear.
The
sources
accounts
no
of
far from of
further also to
are
mention
is made
with identity
17
seems
be evident from
R. 186
introduced
as
a are
branch
of the
Sam-
krantivadins
missing.
332
a
BEAL, i, (see p. 302) pp. 139, 226; ii, in list I, St. J. mentioned, but not the latter. Besides, the Sautrantika in the placeof 17, being evidently appear
of the
branch
to St.
J. 340, 346
be
not
identical with
to
Kasyapiya. On the other hand, according III,V) the Sautrantika would seem to (lists thus would the Prajnaptivadins (5), belong
at
the
Sthaviras
all
but
to
the
Mahasamghikas.
be
called
2
himself can how the Buddha Only thus can we understand be called a Theravadl. could never a Vibhajjavadi. He Cf. Kathavatthu (ed. TAYLOR), ii, p. 578, with the Co.,
pp.
177-178.
The Buddhist
It that this last conclusion Tar. 271. schools eighteen
:
"
Sects
also be drawn
283
from
seems
may
R. 186
(n.1) and
Besides these
the SB.
sources
mention
the
branches following
19. SB. HEMAVATA
NB.
=
HAIMAVATA.
See above
are
la.
20. SB.
RAJAGIRIYA
to are missing (R. 186) as belonging R. 182. In Tar. 271, too,theyonly from the other list, entirely In the appear in the list belonging to the Mahasamghikas. Chinese lists in St. J. theyappear justas littleas in Ch. 1, 2, 3. 21.
RAJAGIRIYA.
counted
SIDDHATTHIKA.
They
are
not
mentioned
in the
NB. 22.
PUBBASELIYA
NB.
PtJRVASAiLA.
It is clear and
beyond doubt,from all the data,that these are most closely beside them mentioned related to the Caityika. They are in place of them (R. 182, 186; Tar. 271) or positively (W. 251, 252). In Ch. 2 they are mentioned onlyonce as the
Avarasaila them.
and
do
not
mention
In St. J.
(lists I-V)
;
the
(22a)
UTTARA"AILA
list VB.
23.
mentioned, alwaysbeside
I, VB.
301
beside the
Aparasailas.
=
SB. APARASELIYA
as a
NB.
APARA^AILA
or
AVARASAILA,
;
introduced
R.
school of the
not
mentioned of
in the northern
sources,
may
be
are
said
and
24.
SAGALIYA
which
Lastly,we
41, 111,
mentioned refer to the 25. VETULYA Mah. 36. may also KERN'S combination by which theyare ingenious into relation with the
brought
Mahay
ana.
On
their
origin see
the
p. 115, 1. 31
translated foil.,
in
the
Mah.
TiTca,
p. liii.
Appendix B
as opinions
to the
one
another of
and
a
their rise of
another may
be
given
in the form
tree. genealogical
1. VASUMITRA
(W.
1 and
249 ; VB.
"
301) divides
them
after the
of separation
2 thus
I (a) (b)
(c)
4 6 5 1 23 22
I 3b
3a
(d)
views
of which
is based second
the
an
same
division
as
in Vasumitra's
list,
the
the
on
division original
into
where three,
form Vibhajyavadins
I.
2
I
I
I 1
=
2, 3b, 4, 6, 7,
22, 23
16, 14^
II.
14b
I
14
I
9
|
14
|
18
F
13, 10, 11, 12
four different lists: ^accordgives (270-271) ing to the Sthaviras; II, according to the Mahasamghikas ; to the Sammatiyas ; and IV, accordingto the III, according Sarvastivadins.
The first is based
on a on a
3. TARANATHA
division division
into into
two
principal groups,
the third and lists coincide with
the second
on a
similar
three,
fourth
The
first two
those of
Bhavya.
286
6.
Appendix
B
relation of the schools
takes
According to Dip. and Mah. the this shape (cf. list I of Tar.) :
"
5,6,7
As
regardsthe time
the
at
which
the
separate schools
took
must
arose,
sources Ceylonese
place
have
The
remainingsects
and
arisen
in the time
100
between
and
the Second
247
Third of them
Council,
in the
i.e. between
A.B.
second
century after the Nirvana, but the last six (19,20, 21, the Dhammarucis, according 22, 23, 24) in the third century,
to the
Mah.
Tlka
at
the time
of
at that of Mahasena.1
Among
traditions.
the
Northern
Buddhists
we
find
quite similar
Accordingto
second end
VASUMITRA
6 and
(W.
249
VB. foil.,
301) the
sects
century A.B.,
second
that
of 5, were formed in the course is,after the first schism. By 22a had
the the In
of the
arisen.
the third
century arose 11, 13, 12, also 8, and ( 18) is placedin the
=
and la,later 9, and then 10, (14a), from this last 15. Only the rise of 17 fourth
century. These
I-TSING the At the
dates
are
ferred trans-
Vasumitra
information
at his
given by
spreadof
seventh
the
the
tury cen-
time,i.e. towards
the
end that
of the
time
Sarvasti-
Sammitiyas in
North-west
the four
mentioned
See p. 283,
n.
the
Mahasamghikas,were
2
TAKAKUSU,
I-tsing, pp.
The
Buddhist
Sects
287
In
the
polemics
according
the and the in
of
the the
Kathavatthu
commentator
the
most
prominent
are
schools,
to
Buddhaghosa,
the
the Sab-
Theravadins,
batthavadins,
than
Sammitlyas,
the
Mahimsasakas,
But and
more
the
Mahasamghikas.
ANDHAKA
frequently
are
these
names
UTTARAPATHAKA
employed,
South Indian
which and
Buddhaghosa
North Indian
evidently
sects.
comprises
the
See
RHYS
DAVIDS,
J.R.A.S.
1891,
p.
413.
APPENDIX
CAMPAIGNS
AND
OF
PANDUKABHAYA
(Mah. (Mah.
25.
1
10.
27
foil.)
DUTTHAGAMANI
foil.)
of
his
takes
refuge
from
the
persecution
in
Pandulagamaka.
is unknown.
place
In
our
inquiry, therefore, we
he with
must
starting-point Pana,
engage
near
where battle
gathers together
his This uncles.
name
his
followers, to
is situated
in
Pana
I
Kasapabbata.
modern
ten
has the of
been,
name
believe, preserved
a
in the
Kahagala-gama,1
miles
to
of
wsewa
village
and
situated
miles
about
to not
the
of
north
Kalu-
fifteen
he
the
Anuradhapura.
northward He is not the
on
From then
Pana
does
direct
the
capital of
for
the
country
Rather
he
Upatissagama.2
is
strong
of
enough
all into
this.
obliged
to
follow
tactics
rebels,to bring
his
more
first the
power.3
or
Therefore
first towards
the
east, south-
less
along
the
Dutthagamani
followed,
in
the
opposite direction
the
the old
against Anuradhapura.
So
name
Probably
first
may
military road
of
along here.
This of
he
comes
into
district
Girikandasiva. with
with for that reference this district
is, we
which is
conjecture,
Mah. We the
connected 25.
must
Girilaka,
to
mentioned
47 look
Dutthagamani's
the Kalu-
campaign.
waewa
between
and
Ritigala.
On
the
map
of
Ceylon,
is situated
four
on
miles
the
to
an
inch.
Upatissagama
of
Gambhiranadi to the
(Mah.
7.
44)
to
the
north is
a
Anuradhapura.
of
a
Prom
=
here
miles.
Gambhiranadi this
we
(Mah.
at
a
28.
7)
distance
of the
yojana
of
7-8
By
arrive
general
notion
3
position
Dip.
and
Upatisaagama.
pp.
GEIGER,
Mah..
39-40.
289
marches
on
southward and
the
Ambanganga
Mineri-tank The him.
of
of the
the
people of Girikandasiva
the
come
with
Kalaha-nagara.
here
we
This
is the
Kalahagala1of
scene
battle of Lohitavaha-
khanda
battles is attributed to
P.,he
does the
yet venture
to
attack
On Upatissagamadirectly.
in the direction followed contrary, he continues his march and crosses the Mahawaeliganga hitherto, (pdragahgam,
10.
Mah. The
44).
he crossed
over
place where
the
must
have
been
the
I take
to be the
Mahagantota2 below
ganga. Mahawaeli-
spot where
the base
Ambanganga
As the
of further
bank right
3
of the
name
mountain.
This
P. chooses a region on operations the DolaMahaganga (Mahawseliganga), survives in that of the village Dola-
galawela in
of the
the Bintenne
to the north
called Alutnuwara.
During the
This
spendsnear the Dola-mounfor the really been making preparations is made for him by the fact possible
that P.
the whole
all its
resources,
behind him.
or important
By
the
P/s
meantime
have
also
completed their
and
preparations. They
themselves
shown
on
march
againstthe rebels
53, 57, 58.
We
entrench
is position
the
Dhumarakkha-mountain. 10.
Its must
clearly by
Census
Mah.
look for it
of Ceylon,1901,iv,p. 468. 2 68. Itinerary of Roads in Ceylon,i (1909), p. 39,no. 3 The Dolukanda which PARKER Census, 1901, iv, p. 262. (AncientCeylon,p. 192)mentions cannot be the Dola-pabbataof the Mah., since
about it is situated ten miles to the
See
dated
July 17,1910)
290
Appendix
the left bank
of the
Mahawseliganga, not far from the of the uncles was The chief object Kacchaka-ford. evidently the river. to preventP. from crossingHowever, to be beforehand with them, P. risks the crossing. and takes possession of their in flight, He defeats the enemy the direct road to the capital. He then proceeds on camp.
on
On
camp
he pitches entrenched an Arittha-pabbata (Ritigala) The which is to serve as a base for his final operations. the
once
more
uncles The
march
him
with
fresh
troops.
1 of the 72),the Labunoruwa slopeof the Ritigala.P. carries off the victory. lies open to him. road to the capital The now
of possession
it and
afterwards,having assumed
the residence royal
to
he
removes
Anuradhapura.
on given by the Mahavamsa understood,is quite Pandukabhaya'scampaigns,if rightly taken seem measures adequate. The military thoroughly aim be u nderstood. methodical ; their can clearly On quite similar lines is the advance of Dutthagamani on Anuradhapura, a proofthat we have to do in both cases with of the left and right roads between the regions old connecting to secure these in order to Mahawaliganga. P. was obliged his operations against Upatissagama. carry out successfully D. used them for bringing up his troops. in Dutthagamani starts (Mah. 25. 5) from Mahagama
We
see
Rohana, the
Maharama
is indicated
by
of Hambantota.
Taking
the
he direction, northerly
marches
through Guttahalaka,2now
This,accordingto
or
1 8
Mah. chiefly
24. 17.
in G.
the
Tissa,whose
Campaigns ofPanduMbhaya
D. is here
on
and
Dutthagamani
291
the bank of
a
of the
Now Mahawseliganga.
were
follows
the enumeration
whole
occupied
by
Damilas
and
taken
by
D.
(now MahaganAmong these, too,appears Kaccha-tittha to take which requireda four months' siege(Mah. tota), that the placesmentioned 25. 12). I think, therefore, are forts which had been placedalong or mere frontier-outposts the bend of the river above the Mahawseligangal from vidual The indiBintenne to the neighbourhood of the mouth.
names
cannot
now
be settled.
retreat vanquished Damila-divisions It stillseems most probable that towards Vijita-nagara. to me in the neighbourhoodof Kalushould look for this city we is now and ruins where the Vijitapura-vihara situated, wsewa, existence of a larger in the jungletestify to the former
The
remains
of the
settlement.2
D. will have In all probability crossed the
Kacchaka-tittha. followed
marched
must
On
the
advance
near
first
the from
run
same
road
the
have
somewhere
between
Sigiriand
the
Mineri-
tank. described with great and storming of Vijita are siege clearness and vivacity. The further stations, MaheGirilaka, and Kasa-pabbata la-nagara, lay far along the road which
The
Anuradhapura. On the Kasa-pabbata D. entrenched himself, able in order to await in a favourevidently his adversary Elara. Here again in fact it comes position to a decisive battle, the fortunate issue of which opens to .D. foe was the road to the capital. The conquered pursued up In of to the immediate last a vicinity Anuradhapura. attempt to bring the fleeing troops to a halt beneath the walls of the combat. cityElara falls by the hand of D. in heroic single
to
1 2
leads from
Dambul
Cf. Mah.
25.
19, where
this
seems
to be
said. plainly
PARKER Buried Cities of Ceylon, p. 75. BURROWS, certainly of for in the looks 237 (AncientCeylon, region the later Vijita foil.) p.
Polonnaruwa.
APPENDIX
LIST
OF
PALI
TERMS
OCCURRING
IN
THE
TRANSLATION
1.
ACARIYA,
AKAHANT.
the
"
teacher, master.'
(
See
p.
31,
n.
4.
2.
person
who
has
reached
of
In
an
Arahant
to
an
the
;
dsavd, the
is
no
deadly drugs
delusion,
but
brought
lives
in
end
he
longer subject to
liberation.
RHYS
re-birth, DAVIDS,
3.
convent
Nirvana,
the
final
Buddhism,
110;
Early Buddhism,
72-74. of
s.v.
ARAMA,
=
'park,
garden.'
Pali
Designation Dictionary,
translatable.
Buddhist
vihdra, CHILDERS,
The
term
4.
ASAVA.
is
hardly
It
has
been
28
first
explained by
SBB.
RHYS
DAVIDS,
to
(=
read idea
that
ii,iii). According
Buddhaghosa,
dsavd.
4815, well22219
we
matured
:
spirituousliquorsare
dsavo tdta
called
ndma
lokasmim that
surd
pavuccati.
underlying
not
is, therefore,
of
a
of
'overwhelming
are
intoxication',
:
deadly
bhava
flood.
'
There
a
four
dsavd
(1)
kdma
'
lust,
desire
'
', (2)
(desireof
four
future)
existence
ignorance (of
D. I.
the
(4) ditthi
'
84;
the
II. 81
asavas
M.
I.
7, "c., khmdsava
'
one
',and
the
andsava
one
who
is free
asavas
',are
epithetsof
BHIKKHUNI,
order.
arahant.
BHIKKHU,
Buddhist
mendicant
monk,
nun.
Member
of
the
6.
BUDDHA in
a
(Sambuddha,
Sammd-Sambuddha
convey
a
the
same
notion
own
heightened degree)
attained
man nor
denotes
of the is able
being
who
by
his
force
has
to
possession
highest knowledge.
to
He
is neither
god.
the
He
perform
In
an
certain endless
wonders
in
accord
with
laws
of
nature.
294
12.
Appendix
hymns.
Cf. Mah.
5. 109.
NAGA,
in the
designationof
neck, sometimes
are
as
demons, sometimes
hood
in represented
with
a man
mixed
forms,half
reverence
snake.
They
distinguished by devout
sworn
the Buddha.
Their
enemies
are
the
n.
Kunstj p.
42
foil.
of the terms for Arahant-
14. NIBBA.NA
tion ship. At Samyutta IV. 251, 261 it is defined as the destrucand illwill, (in the heart) of rdga, dosa, and moha (lusty and is stated to be attainable by the eightfold stupidity);
Path.
See also
DE
LA
VALL^E
'
POUSSIN, Bouddhisme,p.
57 ff.
15. PABBAJJA.
givingup
an
the
going forth ';the technical term for Literally household lifeand becoming a religieux, entering
rules for the
of candidates reception The H. Buddhist for
bership mem-
order.
The
rules
are
translated
by
When
RHYS
a
DAVIDS
and
OLDENBERG, Vinaya
he is called
Texts,vol. i.
a
candidate
is firstadmitted
Sdmanera,novice.
16. 17. PACCEKABUDDHA. See under
BUDDHA.
a
PARIVENA,
monk's
cell,the privatedwelling of
bhikkhu
18.
within the
f
PAVARANA, monastery.
SAMANA,
'
festival held
by
the
bhikkhus
in the 19.
as
i.e.the
rainyseason, spent
335-353.
VinayaTexts,i,pp.
priests
opposedto
20.
SAMANERA.
PABBAJJA.
THERA. of the
21. SAMGHATTHERA.
22.
caste.
See under
man
SIJDDA
a (Skt.Sudra)j
fourth,non-Aryan
List
23. TALA. Lit.
of Pali
a
Terms
of
295
'palm/
measure
length.
RHYS
18. of veneration
to applied
TATHAGATA,
The
a
one
of the terms
the Buddhas.
The
Buddha
matter
speaks of usually
of
thus.
mentators com-
meaning- is
controversy. The
in
explain
the
a
word
quite different
Bouddhisme
See
BURNOUF, Introduction
25.
thistoire du
indien, p. 75.
of
THERA,
THERI
respect
of venerable in priest
any
denotion in the
of the senior
assembly of bhikkhus,
J.P.T.S. 26.
serve
or
whole
community.
See
1908,
p. 19.
THUPA
as
of edifices which name (Skt. 8/upa, tope), monument. for a relic or as receptacle They are and bell-shaped, stories which
a
or hemispherical
rest
upon
base round
of
three concentric
form
ambulatories
the
tope
which
they sustain
rises the
cubical
tee from
which spire(chatta)
the whole.
'
The
relic-chamber
in
whence the name Dagaba ', used (dkcttvgabbka, below is in the interior, Ceylon for the whole edifice)
the tee.
the most originally expression cetiya(Skt. caitya), for sanctuary term a tree,too, can be a cetiya is general for thupa. Cf., used in the Mah. mostly as a synonym
The
'
'
"
"
for
as
the
name
of
the
There
or
is
frequentmention
'
in the
Mah.
of
thupaghara
house of the thupa or cetiya/ cetiyaghara, 31. 29, that sometimes be no doubt, from Mah. There can
sort of roof
or
temple was
built
over
the
Thuparama-Dagaba is surrounded by four concentric of pillars. It appears if the two inner rows, where as rows intended to bear of the pillars have tenons, were the capitals the roof of a thupaghara. PARKER Ceylon,p. 270) (Ancient in this from SMITHER considers it altogether differing possible, such templescould only be (Anurddhapura, p. 7). Of course
the
296
constructed
are
Appendix
over
D
as
the
smaller in this
a
can
see,
only mentioned
of
If mention
is made
of
i.e. bodhighara,
temple
for the
it is the
Lit. lective three baskets/ col(Skt.tripitaka). for the canonical scriptures of the Buddhists. name They fall into three main divisions, Sutta-p. Vinaya-pitaka, (orDhamma), and Abhidhamma-p. See CHILDERS, s.v.; KERN,
'
27.
TIPITAKA
p. 1 foil.
UPASAMPADA, the solemn ordination of the monk is a novice until that time,by a chapterof the order of the priesthood. See CHILDERS, higher consecration
28.
who
;
the
;
s. v.
KERN,
29.
p. 77
foil. ; SP.
HARDY,
Eastern
Monac/iism, p. 44
foil.
UPOSATHA
is
which
It
occurs
(Skt. upavasatha). The Buddhist and considered a holyday both for priests
:
sabbath
laymen.
on
new-moon
full- and new-moon. On eighthday following of these four days the recitation of the Patimokkha-pretwo takes place, i.e.the priestly cepts(pdtimokkhuddesa) ceremony
day,and
the
of
in which confession,
every member
CHILDERS,
s.v.;
KERN,
is or Uposathdgdrctj uposathaghara,
to
the
monastery
used
for the
ceremonies.
30.
VEDI
or
VEDIKA
in Mah.
altar'.
tree
When
around a,pd$dnavedl
stone
is
mentioned, it
terrace,on
same
such
usuallystand.
word has the
Cf. in the
sense
sildvedl,
36. 103.
sense
this Further,
of
'
It is to be understood
tion descripmanner,
'
181-182, by sopdna
in both passages
is
meant, and
an
follows, description
List
of
the
Pali
Terms
297
not
of
the
terrace
or
of
staircase,
but
especially
of
the
rail. When
a
mnddhavedl
and former
pddavedl
is the
of
thupa
are
mentioned
latter the
(Mah.
storied added
1
35.
2) the
so-called
tee, the
are
base
to
(see
no.
26).
Railings
p.
in. relief
frequently
the
both.
SMITHER,
'
52,
27. others.
Finally
Thus
'
meaning
the coralLoha-
balustrade, railing
to
supersedes the
(
by
of is
vedikas
the
kiitagdra, the
window-chambers
to
the
pasada,
meant.
same
the Cf.
parapet-balustrade vedikd-vdtapdna,
C.V.
n.
the VI.
means
windows
2. 2.
a
evidently
in
C.V.
14.
Plainly
balustrade.
the
See
way xx,
vedikd,
p.
V.
p.
2,
n.
104,
3;
162,
man
4.
VESSA
(Skt. vaifya),a
of
the
for
third
social
also
grade.
monks,
and latter
VIHARA, temple
dwelling,
or
habitation
gods
as
for
therefore
Eastern
convent
(FERGUSSON,
History of
In the
Indian
i, p. 170).
Mah.
the
meaning
33.
YAKKHA
(f. yakkhini-,
supernatural
Skt.
of
certain
beings
name
under
the
rule
of In
Vessavana the
(Skt. Vaisravana,
the
of
of
the
god
Kubera).
are
Mah.
aboriginal
inhabitants
Ceylon
frequently
called
34.
Yakkha.
YOJANA,
measure
of
length.
196,
1
According
is
=
to 4
the
system
=
of
the
Abhidhanappadipika
=
yojana
hattha RHYS of
gdvuta
=
80
usabha
20
yatthi
ratana
(or
to
fell')
DAVIDS,
measures
vidatthi Ancient
(span)
Coins the
=12
angula.
15
According
native and
as
"c., p.
the foil., 12
tables
linear
but in
make
yojana
have
between been
12^ miles,
7-8
actual
practice
it must
reckoned
miles.
INDEXES
(The numbers
A. LIST OF
refer to pages
and
notes)
GEOGRAPHICAL
NAMES
AND
GRAPHICAL TOPO-
Acchagallaka-vihara,
Anurarama, Anotatta-lake,
258. 1 8. 5 85. 1
142.
Gambhira-nadi,
58. 75. 1
Aparantaka,
Gamani-vapi,
235. 1 ; 269. 1
Giri-dipa,
4. 4
Giribbaja, 36.
1 8 5 ; 264. 3
2 165. 3 2
Guttahalaka,
Ambatitthaka, Ambatthala,
Alasanda,
Gotha-samudda,
150. 64. 3 1
Gona-gamaka,
Gona-nadi,
247.
Avanti,
Cittala-pabbata,
148.
2 5
165. 3
114. Cetiya-pabbata,'
193^3
133. 2 ; 137. 3 1 3. 4 58. 4 2. 2 189. 2
Cola,
143.
Issarasamanarama,
Ujjeni,
Uttara
29.
Jambukola, Jambudlpa,
Jetavana Jetavanarama 269. 1 77. in
79. 15.
1 5 165. 5
Kuru,
in in
Javamala-tittha,
Upatissa-gama,
Uruvela Uruvela
India,
India, 6. 1 in Ceylon;
1 4
235.
Ceylon,
Tamalitti,
165. 5
80.
Tissamahavihara,
138. 3
4 4
Kalaha-nagara, 71.
9. 2 ;
230,
2
Dakkhinavihara,
246,
88. 3 3
Dakkhinagiri,
3
Dighathupa,
230. 8. 1
Dighavapi,
Kusavati, Kusinara,
p.
(see J.R.A.S.
p. 367
1902,
foil.
248.
1903, Kolambahalaka, "balaka, 176, 2 21.2 1903, Kosambi, (see J.R.A.S. 1904, p. 249) p. 583;
139
Dhumarakkha-pabbata,
Nandana-vana,
77. 1 94. 1
72.
Naga-catukka,
Indexes
Nagadipa,
6. 2 3 2
299
3
146. Yatthalaya-vihara,
85. Yon'a, 5
97. Nivatta-cetiya,
Rajagaha, 10.
Rohana,
146. 2
7 Lanka,_3.
Labugamaka, Vanga,
194. 5 51. 1
73. 2
Pulinda, 60. 5
190. Peli-vapi, 1 1
108. Baranasi,
Bodhimanda-vihara, Manisomarama,
Manihira, 270. 4
235. 3
Vanavasin, "vasaka,84. 7 58. 5 (-nagara), Vijita-pura, 194.4 128. 4 Vinjha, ; Vedisa, 88. 4
Veluvana, 98. 1
2
; 171.3
Madda,
62. 1 59.
Vesali, 19.
(see J.R.A.S.
3
1903,
Madhura,
1_
Supparaka, 54.
Sumanakuta,
3 86. 2 1
Mahamegka-vana,
5. 1
Mahiyangana,
235. 3 5 1
Soreyya,21.
Huvaca-kannika,245.
EXPLAINED IN THE
39. 3
B.
LIST
OF
TERMS
NOTES
anagamin, 89.
kammatthana,
kammavaca,
44. 1
agataphala,93.
acariya,31. 4 acariyavada,26. 246. 2 ajira, alinda,246, 2
17. iriyapatha,
4 1
kasina,45. 1 kahapana, 20. 3 25. kamabhava, "loka, kulumbana, 257. 5 kulupaga, "ka, 201. 2 khinasava, 35.
3
garula,129.
4 udana,_130.
upajjhaya, 31.
upasana, 164.
4 3
29. upanissaya, 1
tadin, 102.
ubbahika,
23. 3 4
thupika,210.
ubhato-samgha,223.
300
Indexes
dasasila, dhanu,
dhamma,
122.
yatthimadhuka,
yamaka
224.
5 120. 1
patihariya,
33. 2
248. 17.
3 4 16. 16. 1 4. 6 1
ratanattaya, rupabhava,
vatamsa,
79.
dhammasamgaha,
dhammasamgiti, dhammabhisamaya,
naji, 201.
1 75. 2 1 7
"loka, 25.
6
nigantha,
nirodha,
254.
264.
49. 2
220.
nissita,
paccaya,
15.
7 48. 3 2
samvega,
paticcakamma,
sakadagamin,
samkhara,
98.
2 25. 3
paribhogadhatu,
parissavana, pasada,
pamanga, 1. 1 79. 7 3 251.
109. 2
samkhata,
125. 37. 1 2 2 112. 3
saccakiriya,
samapatti,
sarana,
4.
6 ; 7. 109.
puthujjana,
pupphadhana, bala, bhava, marumba, malaka,
99. dasa 25.
35.
sariradhatu,
2 saraanaka
202.
salaka, salakagga,
4
6 22. 1
parikkhara,
6 ;
7.
balani,
2
14.
sila, 4.
supanna,
122. 129.
3 4
94. 16. 3
3 ;
sekha,
191. 4 219. 1 ; 220. 3 5
sotapatti,
sotapanna,
228. 2
5. 2
muddhavedi,
hatthipakara,
ADDENDA
132. of The
v.
meaning
a
is
as
follows
The
words
on
gacchdti
are
polite
form Therefore
a
refusing Siggava
friar:
that he
a
'go
had
(to
the
next
house).' (i.e.
received
something
he had S.B.E. had been xxxv,
polite answer),
at
without
telling
nor even
lie.
Formerly
but
received
nothing
all,
See
no
alms,
an
answer,
entirely
p.
disregarded.
and note. xxix. 40. in the
Milinda-panha
; RHYS
DAVIDS,
15,
Translate
From
his hills
came
dwelling-place,
the them Uttara
the "c.
Vattaniya
(arama)
Vinjha
forest
'
baffling
ourselves and
not
sense
of
the
comes
futility
into
of
much mind
to
that in haunt
we
so
desperately
these
an
busy
A
the
seems
reading
them"
a
pages.
strange
does
a
influence
influence
echoes be in
that
many
change.
It
speaks
We
with
voice
seem
that to
volume
modern
way
poetry.
to
our
read,
and
and to be
striving
after the
in
some
inexplicable
vicissitudes
remember,
own
groping
"
forgotten
Gazette.
of
countless
lives.'
The
Westminster
Rhys
to
Davids's be very
rendering
fine
is
"
masterly"
and
"
in
places
and York
it
reflects
poetry
as
a
her The
notes New
introduction
Nation.
her
high reputation
Ubersetzerin
zur
scholar.'
'
Dass
der
die
Hilfsmittel
Leser der
der
an
Palileximehr als
kographie
einer
hinaus seltenes Deutsche Stelle wird
Hand
sind,
wird
fachkundige
uber
bemerken.
dieses Buch
Weit
den
Kreis werden
Fachgenossen
konnen als ein
geschatzt
genossen
Specimen
philologischer
asthetischer
Durchbildung.'"
Literaturzeitung.
'The
English
hand,
reading
to
public
these
a
is in
position,
thanks
to to
her the
plished accom-
study
in
ancient and
testimonies
power It
...
of
has it to
Buddhist
doctrine been
to
complete
in the
satisfactory
of the Sanskrit
form.
long
is vain
recognized,
attempt
texts may be
must to
study
with of
literature,
native and
that and No
dispense by
means
help
of
light,
interpret
much the
solely
lexicon.
doubt and
explained always
reserves
without
commentators,
student
exercise
faculty
in do
using
stand many half and
them,
closer
but,
to
with
all texts
made,
occidentals
these
can
commentators and
their
than
their
stand,
be
"
point
or
out
things
that,
without
"
help,
a
us sa
would
pensee go all has
to
overlooked
says the French
only
poet,
understood.
the
Chaque
pays bids
greater
German
the
poet
the this
poet's country
Mrs.
if
we
understand
poet's
and her
word.
Of
Rhys
much and
Davids in
has of
duly
mindful,
on
version
gained
the flow
point
this
no
account.
means
But
spontaneity
accuracy
moves
verse
has
by
to
suffered
The
through
metrical
is
a
this form to
and
rigid
the
tradition.
of movement
lightly withal,
sympathy
The of the
freedom
witness ancient
the
translator Review.
with
the
thoughts
of
the
Therls."
Buddhist
2. Compendium the
of
Philosophy,
being
Shwe
translation
of
Abhidhammatt/ia-sahyaha. By
edited
Zan
Aung, B.A.,
revised and
by
now
Mrs.
Rhys
us
Davids.
'The
of The the
translation
before of
is, in
and
the
best
and
fullest
sense
words,
the
result
Eastern
Western of the
effort
combined.
most
intrinsicallyinterestingpart
which contains Mr.
book,
the notes
Appendix
on
(pp. 220-85),
of the be most found
Aung's
terms
some
important
extremely
I
on
technical
of
philosophy,will
Buddhism.
More
useful
by
all
students lucid
especially
discussions true the the of
would the of
point
vexed the term
out
the
very
question
of the
instructive
on
the
to
meaning
usefulness Burmese which the
Samkhara.
for which best
indexes
add
volume,
deserve
English
on
editor
and
our
thanks,
be
the
publication
"
Text
Asiatic
Society
is to
heartily congratulated.'
Journal
of
the
Royal
Society.
fur wohl
'Ein
entscheidender
die
darin
Unzulanglichkeit
zu
unserer
bezuglichen Kenntnisse
kenkreise, in wenig
dass mit denen
suchen,
dass
die Gedan-
eine
vielleicht
Weltanschauung sich bewegt, so okzidentalischen Begriffen in Einklang zu bringen sind, wesentliche Forderung in der angedeuteten Richtung erhoffen dann nur zu ist, wenn es gelingen sollte,die
Vertreter der Landern und
die buddhistische
berufenen
buddhistischen
"
Gelehrsamkeit
in
den
"
in fur
Frage
die
kommenden
vor
allem
Japan, Birma,
Ceylon
Ubersetzung
Dass
interessieren. lichen
soweit
nur von
dessen dem
vorteilhaftesten
hier schen Sinnes
Einfluss
sein
konnte,
eines
wird der
vor
allem
auch
durch
die
vorliegende Ubersetzung
Texte des der
"siidlichen"
Schule,
durch den
der
wichtigsten "Zusammenfassung
Shwe Mrs. Zan
neu-buddhistides
Abhidhamma",
Der Name des die
Birmesen
Aung
bietet
Rhys Davids, wie fur die Zuverlassigkeitder Ubersetzung sowohl und in Anhangen gebotene Bearbeitung der verschieBemerkungen auch allem philosophiegeschichtlichen denartigen Probleme, vor nahegelegt.
fur
Mitherausgebers,
Inhalts, die
'
beste
Gewahr.'
"
Deutsche
Literaturzeitung.
Here,
for
the
first time
in
history of
a
modern
research
into
the
ancient
Buddhist in
a
lore,we
Buddhist
work
produced
by
Buddhist
scholar, working
which
a
with
all the
immense
advantage
access
living
student
tradition
of the
of
the
western
actual
to
a
the
also
his
deep
is
work
rendered,
collaboration
if
possible,
of
one
of who
still
greater
value,
be admitted
by
the be
and
may
on
justly
the
to The
living
occidental
authority
acumen
subject.
. .
.
editor
has, value,
us
with
characteristic
and the
appreciation
usefulness of of 60 of the
of
their
high
before number
siderably con-
augmented
inclusion,
written the work born in
an
work of
by
of
the notes
appendix
author in
some
pp.,
by
the involved.
the
course
the have
correspondence
Buddhist
which
Here,
instructed
student
once
more,
we
psychology
and
many
an
as
the
and Buddhist
Buddhist
sees
it,
occidental
matter Gazette. for
will well
important
notes
The
"
much
deep
study
as
as
great
enlightenment.'
Rangoon